Home

Roland XV-88 Electronic Keyboard User Manual

1. 00 17 0000 aaaa 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Part Coarse Tune RPN 2 16 112 I 0000 bbbb I I I 48 48 I 0000 cccc I 00 OA Oaaa aaaa Part Fine Tune RPN 1 14 114 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 6 12768 52768 I I I 50 50 I I I 20000 20000 00 OB 0000 00aa Part Mono Poly MONO ON POLY ON 0 2 E 00 1B 0000 aaaa I I I I MONO POLY PATCH I 0000 bbbb I I 00 OC 0000 00aa Part Legato Switch CC 68 0 2 I 0000 cccc I I I OFF ON PATCH I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 7 12768 52768 00 OD 000a aaaa Part Pitch Bend Range RPN 0 0 25 I I I 20000 20000 I I 0 24 PATCH 00 1F 0000 aaaa 00 OE 0000 00aa Part Portamento Switch CC 65 0 2 I 0000 bbbb I I OFF ON PATCH I 0000 cccc I E 00 OF 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 8 12768 52768 0000 bbbb Part Portamento Time CC 5 0 128 I I I 20000 20000 I I 0 127 PATCH IE 00 23 0000 aaaa I 00 11 Oaaa aaaa Part Cutoff Offset CC 74 0 127 I 0000 bbbb I I I I 64 63 I 0000 cccc I 00 12 Oaaa aaaa Part Resonance Offset CC 71 0 127 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 9 12768 52768 I I 64 63 I I I 20000 20000 00 13 Oaaa aaaa Part Attack Time Offset CC 73 0 127 00 27 0000 aaaa I I I 64 63 I 0000 bbbb I 00 14
2. Offset I Address Description 00 00 0000 aaaa Chorus Type 0 2 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Chorus Level 0 127 00 02 0000 00aa Chorus Output Assign 0 3 I I A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D XV 5080 00 03 0000 00aa Chorus Output Select 0 2 MAIN REV MAIN REV P 00 04 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 1 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 08 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 2 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 OC 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 3 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 10 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 4 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 14 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 5 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 18 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 6 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 1C 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 7 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 20 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 8 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 24 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 9 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 28 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb
3. USER User Group PR A Preset A Group 001 002 003 004 001 002 Note No XV Pop Kit XV Rock Kit XV Jazz Kit XV Rust Kit PopDrumSet 1 PopDrumSet 2 28 Dance Kick Dance Kick JazzDry Kick 70s Kick2 we ne 29 Dry Kick Round Kick Pillow Kick Old Kick rrr nee EN Rock Roll Rock Roll Jazz Swish Rock Roll wee 31 Hybrid Kick Jazz Kick Hybrid Kick2 909 Kick2 0 EE Rock PdHH Rock PdHH Jazz PdHH RockPdHH nee 33 Round Kick Verb Kick MplLmtr Kick 909Kickl J l EE Hand Claps Hand Claps Hand Claps 808 Claps wenn asss Hybrid Kick Maple Kick JazzDry Kick l 808 Kick er KIEK a Hybrid Kick C236 Old Kick Rock Kick Jazz Kick Dance Kick Hybrid Kick Round Kick iia Side Stick RockStick Dry Stick 2 RockStick Side Stick Dry Stick 2 38 Wet SN Rock SN Jazz SN Old Fill SN Natural SN2 Piccolo SN EE Snare Ghost Rock Gst Snare Ghost Rock Gst 808 Claps Hand Claps 40 AmbientSN Rock Rim Jazz Rim Rock SN SN Roll Piccolo SN 41 Maple Tom 3 Rock TomL2 Jazz Tom L Elec Tom L2 Verb Tom Lo Verb Tom Lo EE Rock CIHH2 Rock CIHH2 Jazz CIHH1 Rock CIHH1 CI HiHat 4 CI HiHat 4 43 Rock Flm L2 Rock Flm L2 Jazz Flm L Elec Tom L1 Verb Tom Lo Verb Tom Lo E Rock CIHH1 Rock CIHH1 Jazz CIHH2 Rock CIHH2 CI HiHat 5 CI HiHat 5 45 Maple Tom 2 Rock Tom M Jazz Tom M Elec Tom M Verb Tom Hi Verb Tom Hi E Rock OpHH Rock OpHH Jazz OpHH Rock OpHH Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 ar Rock Fim M Rock F
4. Time 1 of the TVF envelope If you want T1 time to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value 89 Chapter 5 Creating Patches V T4 TVF Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control the T4 Time 4 value of the TVF envelope If you want T4 time to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value LO TVF Envelope Level 0 Sets the TVF envelope level L0 TVF Envelope Level 0 determines the degree to which the Cutoff frequency for the sound at the instant the key is pressed is altered relative to the reference Cutoff frequency the Cutoff frequency value set in the TVF FILTER page T1 T4 TVF Envelope Time 1 4 x Specify the TVF envelope times T1 T4 Larger values result in longer times until the next cutoff frequency is reached for instance T2 controls the time from L1 until L2 is reached L1 L4 TVF Envelope Level 1 4 Specify the TVF envelope levels L1 L4 These settings specify how the cutoff frequency will change at each point relative to the standard cutoff frequency the cutoff frequency value specified in the TVF FILTER page 4 T1 T2 TS T4 Cutoff i Fre i i T quency io y Y Time L1 L2 L
5. a 81 Nu utmb r Of VOICES a uta ka crecen tte ater eerte certet 23 56 197 O Oct Octave range System Octave range Zone iirinn R RR Octave Octave shift Part ennie a ve ets 54 Octave shift Patch x Octave Range System Zone Octave shift Part Patch Ofset ON is One shot waveform 68 95 Out Chorus output assign GM a 195 Reverb output assign GM sse 195 OUTPUT GM Part aasan ahua rdiet eie 194 Output D Beam output System aa 46 176 D Beam output Zone 46 63 Multi effects output assign Pedal 1 2 output Pedal output 172 OUTPUT A MIX jacks ennaa Eis 18 Output Assign Chorus output assign 158 GM Part we 194 Reverb output assign aa 160 Rhythm m 96 108 Rhythm Tone thee tee ee e cei regen teh 109 Tone OUTPUT j cks rere tm eerte ntes 18 Output level GM Patt aaa tete io fais ee er lods Darts s SN CE en Rhythm Tone DE TOT usa a vase e Tu eMe AA t VT P P C External program change number sss 60 Transmit program change number sss 178 PALETTE EDIT oet ette enne 15 50 58 67 94 Palette edit Patu mas ua aaae A E ete 50 Rhythm Wave iseen aeien ereen inasa 94 poner E ES 67 ZOneco reset ndis re tpm n dien 5
6. O1 3 2 3 Rhythm Common Chorus 1 00 2B 0000 aaaa l 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I Offset I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 11 12768 52768 I Address Description I I I 20000 20000 I I ES 00 2F 0000 aaaa I 00 00 0000 aaaa Chorus Type 0 2 I 0000 bbbb I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Chorus Level 0 127 0000 cccc I l 00 02 0000 00aa Chorus Output Assign 0 3 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 12 12768 52768 I I I A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt I I 20000 20000 l 00 03 0000 00aa Chorus Output Select 0 2 E 00 33 0000 aaaa I I I MAIN REV MAIN REV I 0000 bbbb si i I 0000 cccc IE 00 04 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 13 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 37 0000 aaaa i I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 1 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I IE 00 08 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 14 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 3B 0000 aaaa i I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 2 12768 52768 0000 bbbb I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I E 00 OC 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 15 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 3F 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd Chorus
7. DI transmit channel 2 III I H Strings w Part 1 MIDI receive channel Part 2 MIDI receive channel DI transmit channel 1 OT However in this arrangement the data for the performance in the right hand ends up being recorded after overlapping on MIDI Channels 1 and 2 Although normally there is no particular problem with recording overlapped data because of the limit on the number of notes that can be recorded using an external sequencer along with other certain issues the external sequencer s memory may overflow and you may then be unable to record all the way to the end of your performance Therefore change the settings to those shown below changes indicated in underline Sequencer Zone 1 not transmitted WWW z lt Zone 2 MIDI transmit channel 2 Part 3 MIDI receive channel 2 Part 2 MIDI receive channel 1 HHUH T W Zone 1 MIDI transmit channel 1 Wt R Part 1 MIDI receive channe With the above settings the data for the performance in the right hand is sent only on MIDI Channel 1 so there is no overlapping of the performance data when recording to the sequencer Accordingly even performances that cause overflow when factory settings are used can still be recorded all the way to the end In this manner by t
8. a s 7 ATTACK eese entente tntntntntntntntntntntntntntnen inni 34 39 Attack Attack time offset GM Part sse 196 300 Attack time offset GM Part X 196 PATE as Red EEE EN 54 BP ra n EAREN SSE REN E EE OETA Ge EOT AAE 71 Audio signal flow Patch Rhythm Set mode Performance mode B Batik Sell E 171 Bank Select Receive bank select switch Part esses 52 Receive bank select switch System sss 170 Bank Select MSB LSB External bank select MSB LSB eere 60 Transmit bank select MSB LSB ect 178 BATTERY CHPEGRK eet leere etre eene 178 Beat Pattern Bend Range Rhythm Tone ite e RR ei oer 97 TOTIQ istinc cn E E eee Red 78 Bend range EMP Ant I erre aset tee e sin Pere S gu cete 197 ici 55 Bender 77 BendRng Bend range GM Part er e cette 197 Bend range Part seno neca nee tedio 55 BIAS s ilista aqa a aa a rec e iHe R sa awpa u 91 Bias point BIOK a eA iae oen tite AL aa Bnd Pitch bend information Part sss 56 Receive pitch bend switch Part sss 52 rM E 75 Booster Bali uae toe tre enge ee p DE IRE IURI s 75 Breath Breath information GM Part si Breath information Part a s C CT CA ASSIGN u unaq aaah Ha RP
9. sss 31 Using Phrase Preview to Play Patches u aa 32 Making a Patch Sound Thick or Thin Turning a Tone On Off sss 32 Playing Single Notes Solo nenii gise gssai o penae enee eesi nennen nennen nens 33 Creating Smooth Pitch Changes Portamento sss 33 Using the Sliders to Modify the Sound in Realtime sse 34 Playing in Performance Mode sisenedes eii n EE eie a RSie inie Se Eeu NEE e ESKE erento 34 Selecting a Performance uen ete hei RR RUE eTO ee ete massa SERES ERRESA 35 Playing Fatter and Richer Sounds by Combining Patches Layer 36 Splitting the Keyboard to Play Separate Patches in Different Sections Split 36 Playing Along with Song Playback XV 88 Used as a Multi timbral Sound Generator 37 Assigning a Different Patch to a Part nennen 38 Using the Sliders to Modify the Sound in Realtime u 38 Playing in Rhythm Set Mode lu a n span ass nene u ette tenen tenentes 39 Selecting a Rhythm Set eee e d ee bebe dete ied eost en eed anno se edebersestessaetsterss 39 Selecting Favorite Rhythm Sets from the Favorite List a 40 Playing Percussion Instruments nisoe eiieeii nsa eene nennen nnne tenens 41 Playing Arpeegiosi Arpbeegiator u u unus asa umanuan trennen usa nter nennen 41 Playing an Arpeggio Over a Preset Keyboard Area
10. 51 Chapter 3 Creating Performances Setting Effects for a Performance EFFECTS u For details regarding effect settings refer to the pages shown below Applying Effects in Performance Mode p 111 e Making Multi Effects Settings p 114 Making Chorus Settings p 156 Making Reverb Settings p 158 Making Settings for Receiving MIDI MIDI These parameters determine how each Part will transmit and receive MIDI messages MIDI FART 1 Channel Fx Su Mute Su MIDI 1 1 OH OFF Channel MIDI Receive Channel Sets the MIDI receive channel for each Part o i this is set to the same channel as the Control Channel parameter SYSTEM MIDI PERFORM MIDI attempting to use MIDI messages Program Change and Bank Select from an external device to select Patches will select Performances instead If you want to select Patches change the Control Channel parameter to a different setting p 169 Rx Sw Receive Switch Specifies whether each Part will receive MIDI messages ON or not OFF from external MIDI devices When set to OFF the Part will respond to the keyboard but not to the external MIDI devices Normally you should leave this ON but you can turn it OFF when you do not want a specific Part to be playing during song playback HINT You can also set the Rx Sw parameter on the PERFORM PLAY page Hold down SHIFT and press ZONE PART SELECT 1 9 8 16 Rx Sw is on when the indicat
11. I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 O1 2 1 Performance Common l I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 l 00 06 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 1 Sens 1 127 l l 63 63 Offset I I l 00 07 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 2 Source 0 101 I Address Description l I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 l 00 00 Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 1 32 127 00 08 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 2 Sens 1 127 I I I 32 127 ASCII I 63 63 I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 2 32 127 00 09 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 3 Source 0 101 I I I 32 127 ASCII I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 J 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 3 32 127 I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I I I 32 127 ASCII I 00 OA Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 3 Sens 1 127 00 03 Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 4 32 127 I I 63 63 I I I 32 127 ASCII I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 4 Source 0 101 I 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 5 32 127 I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I I 32 127 ASCII I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 6 32 127 00 OC Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 4 Sens 1 127 I I I 32 127 ASCII I I 63 63 I 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 7 32 127 i I I I 32 127 ASCII I 00 OD 000a aa
12. No Wave Name No Wave Name No Wave Name No Wave Name No Wave Name 0251 UprightBs 2C 0301 Oboe mf A 0351 OrcUnisonA L 0401 Violin 2 B 0451 Voice Aahs B 0252 Ac Bass A 0302 Oboe mf B 0352 OrcUnisonA R 0402 Violin 2 C 0452 Voice Aahs C 0253 Ac Bass B 0303 Oboe mf C 0353 OrcUnisonB L 0403 Cello A 0453 Voice Oohs1A 0254 Ac Bass C 0304 OboefA 0354 OrcUnisonB R 0404 Cello B 0454 Voice Oohs1B 0255 Slap Bass 1 0305 Oboe fB 0355 OrcUnisonC L 0405 Cello C 0455 Voice Oohs1C 0256 Slap amp Pop 0306 OboefC 0356 OrcUnisonC R 0406 Cello2A 0456 Voice Oohs2A 0257 Slap Bass 2 0307 E Horn A 0357 BrassSectA L 0407 Cello 2 B 0457 Voice Oohs2B 0258 Slap Bass 3 0308 E Horn B 0358 BrassSectA R 0408 Cello2 C 0458 Voice Oohs2C 0259 Jz Bs Thumb 0309 E HornC 0359 BrassSectBL 0409 Cello Wave 0459 Choir 1A 0260 Jz Bs Slap 1 0310 Bassoon A 0360 BrassSectB R 0410 Pizz 0460 Choir 1B 0261 Jz Bs Slap 2 0311 Bassoon B 0361 BrassSectC L 0411 STR Attack A 0461 Choir 1C 0262 Jz Bs Slap 3 0312 Bassoon C 0362 BrassSectC R 0412 STR Attack B 0462 Oohs Chord L 0263 Jz Bs Pop 0313 T Recorder A 0363 Tpt Sect A 0413 STR Attack C 0463 Oohs Chord R 0264 Funk Bass1 0314 T_Recorder B 0364 Tpt Sect B 0414 DolceStr A L 0464 Male Ooh A 0265 Funk Bass2 0315 T Recorder C 0365 TptSect C 0415 DolceStr A R 0465 Male Ooh B 0266 Syn Bass A 0316 Sop Sax A 0366 Tb Sect A 0416 DolceStr B L 0466 Male Ooh C 0267 SynBassC 0317 Sop SaxB 0367 Tb Sect B 0417 DolceStr B R 0467 Org Vox A 0268 Syn Bass
13. x ZONE PART SELECT sss 25 310 Apparatus containing Lithium batteries ADVARSEL Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage til leveranderen ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruks joner This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89 336 EEC and LVD 73 23 EEC For EU Countries CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion VAROITUS Paristo voi rajahtaa jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit kaytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti For EU Countries For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
14. I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH j 00 2F Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Sens 2 L 127 I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I I I 63 463 I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I 00 30 OOaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Destination 3 0 33 I I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I I I OFF I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I I I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I I I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I 00 45 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Sens 4 1 127 I I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I 63 63 I I I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I I I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I I I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I 00 31 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Sens 3 1 127 j I I 63 63 MIDI Implementation I 1 00 29 0000 aaaa I I 00 46 Oaaa aaaa Ma
15. a Multi effects dry send level e Multi effects output assign M Multi effects reverb send level a 116 Multi effects source ei Multi effects type as ieie a tenente 01 STEREO EQ 02 OVERDRIVE n 03 DISTORTION n nu O4 PHASER utn iere er Eee ETE See Heus 05 SPECTRUM 06 ENHANCER 07 AUTO WAH 08 ROTARY 09 COMPRESSOR 10 LIMITER 11 HEXA CHORUS 12 TREMOLO CHORUS 13 SPACE D 14 STEREO CHORUS 15 STEREO FLANGER is 16 STEP FLANGER aN n eee reed esee edad 17 STEREO DELAY anun a eee teda eerie 18 MODULATION DELAY x 19 TRIPLE TAP DELAY rhe Biever 20 QUADRUPLE TAP DELAY cette 130 21 TIME CONTROL DELAY n 22 2VOICE PITCH SHIFTER essere 23 FBK PITCH SHIFTER iere tete aaa aa 24 REVERB A 25 GATED REVERB ua aaa nad re ded daa reo 26 OVERDRIVECHORUS esee 27 OVERDRIVEFLANGER E 28 OVERDRIVE DELAY eene 29 DISTORTIONCHORUS 30 DISTORTIONFLANGER 31 DISTORTIONDELAY 32 ENHANCER gt CHORUS 33 ENHANCER gt FLANGER 34 ENHANCER DELAY 12197 35 CHORUS DELAY 137 36 FLANGERDELAY 138 37 CHORUSSFLANGER 138 38 CHORUS DELAY 139 39 FLANGER DELAY 139 40 CHORUS FLANG
16. sss 92 TVA envelope velocity curve Rhythm Tone Tone TVA envelope velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone JL ORIG ect tenta iet o d eie HH a AENEAN ARETE ag TVA group Pateh 90 Rhythm Set 103 TVA EQ d epth l ou tente tte tle testis 85 TVA TIME ENV Rhythm Tone L sassa sss entente 104 Tone TVA VELOCITY 142 e a ettet sene ipe o aas ass 104 TVF ENVELOPE Rhythm TONE eee Ie etae i as ede teres 102 Tone u aguan etie tue faoc stesura 89 TVF envelope depth Rhythm Tone a sess 102 TOT cett ua aa S MT ATA det e eirca 89 TVF envelope level 0 Rhythm Tone sese nennen 103 Eo TRE M LEE 90 TVF envelope level 1 4 Rhythm TONS prunenn Ra aan awama ass 103 TONE ue pankaka wakaka eder aid 90 TVF envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone ua ertt fct tr net ren e e 103 TOME 5i debis act ERA P a e aM asa 89 TVF envelope time 1 4 Rhythm Tone sansa uquna tte 103 SOME ncs Cres cotes ree E ete Meis A unser i NL I esther 90 TVF envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone srayane eea Eaa a e E 103 Tone TVF envelope time keyfollow a 89 TVF envelope velocity curve Rhythm Tone siere ea eaea tentent 102 Ten esaa aaa a DI ENEE 89 TVF envelope velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone ese sea aea e hae E ee AEE nennen 102 Obe a HL 89 TVF FILTER Rhythm Tone Fiore a a AE sss 101 VONE aaa na aaa sua RANG MET aetema 87
17. 121 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 07 AUTO WAH The Auto Wah cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre Lin gt L out Auto Wah Rin gt R out Filter Filter Type Select the type of filter LPF The wah effect will be applied over a wide frequency range BPF The wah effect will be applied over a narrow frequency range Sens Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity with which the filter is controlled Manual Adjust the center frequency from which the effect is applied Peak Adjust the amount of the wah effect that will occur in the area of the center frequency Lower settings will cause the effect to be applied in a broad area around the center frequency Higher settings will cause the effect to be applied in a more narrow range Rate Adjust the frequency of the modulation Depth Adjust the depth of the modulation Level Output Level Adjust the output level 08 ROTARY The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rotary speakers often used with the electric organs of the past Since the movement of the high range and low range rotors can be set independently the unique type of modulation characteristic of these speakers can be simulated quite closely This effect is most suitable for electric organ Patches Lin L out p R in R out Low Slow Low Frequency Slow Rate Adjust the slow speed SLOW of the low frequency rotor Low Fast Low Frequency Fast Rate Adjus
18. LowGain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo position of the delay sound A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Adjust the output level 52 SPEAKER SIMULATOR Speaker Simulator is an effect that simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to record the speaker sound Speaker Type Select the type of speaker The specifications of each type are as follows The speaker column indicates the diameter of each speaker unit in inches and the number of units Type Cabinet Speaker Microphone SMALL 1 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic SMALL 2 small open back enclosure 10 dynamic mic MIDDLE open back enclosure 12x1 dynamic mic JC 120 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILTIN 1 open back enclosure 12x2 dynamic mic BUILT IN 2 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 3 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BUILT IN 4 open back enclosure 12x2 condens
19. TMT UELDT CONTROL 4 MEMO You can have the XV 88 s keyboard produce different THT Welocity Control H tones according to the register the force with which the keys are played or a variety of different MIDI messages The group of settings affecting this is called the TMT Tone Mix Table TMT Velocity Control TMT Velocity Control Switch TMT Velocity Control determines whether a different Tone is played ON or not OFF depending on the force with which the key is played velocity When set to RANDOM the Patch s constituent Tones will sound randomly regardless of any Velocity messages o Oe of using Velocity you can also have Tones substituted using the Matrix Controller p 80 However the keyboard velocity and the Matrix Controller cannot be used simultaneously to switch Tones When using the Matrix Controller to switch Tones set the TMT Velocity Control to OFF TMT VEL RANG TMT Velocity Range 1 THT L Fade Lower Urrer U Fade WEL RANGE BI 1l 1271 B Specifies the range of playing dynamics key velocity which will sound the Tone Make these settings when you want different Tones to sound in response to notes played at different strengths won When the TMT Velocity Control parameter PATCH COMMON TMT VELO CONTROL is set to OFF you cannot change the tone that is played according to the force with which the keys are played velocity Mir When using the Matrix Controller to have differe
20. or W is pressed the song either before or after the Song Number set with the Song Number parameter SYSTEM INFO TRANSMIT SONG SEL is selected p 178 o z sequencers cannot be started or stopped without receiving the MIDI Clock F8h and settings on certain sequencers also cannot be changed Please use a sequencer able to perform START STOP without requiring reception of the MIDI Clock F8h For more detailed information refer to the owner s manual for your sequencer Modifying a Value To modify a value use the VALUE dial INC DEC or 0 9 numeric keys Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 VALUE NEXT SONG START STOP CURSOR D RESET PREV SONG 7 SYNTH 8 PAD 9 ETHNIC ooo 800 800 ooo 00 66 ooo 00 000 4 BASS 5 ORCH 6 BRASS o0 800 800 ooo Soo Soo 090 996 996 1 PIANO 2 KEY amp ORG 3 GUITAR ooo 66 66 900 06 600 HRASE PATCH PI PREVIEW FINDER DEC INC ooo 200 200 200 900 800 900 990 96 96 900 990 DEMO FAVORITE LIST O RHY amp SFX 909 888 898 DIGIT HOLD ENTER 000 996 Soo REGISTRY won Each parameter has a specific range so you cannot set any value smaller than the minimum value or greater than the maximum value VALUE Dial Rotating the VALUE dial clockwise increases the value counterclockwise decreases the value Holding down SHIFT as you m
21. 1 destination 1 2 3 4 1 sensitivity 1 2 3 4 Matrix Control 1 tone 1 2 3 4 Matrix contro Matrix contro 2 destination 1 2 3 4 2 sensitivity 1 2 3 4 Matrix Control 2 tone 1 2 3 4 Matrix contro Matrix contro 3 destination 1 2 3 4 3 sensitivity 1 2 3 4 Matrix Control 3 tone 1 2 3 4 Matrix contro Matrix contro 4 destination 1 2 3 4 4 sensitivity 1 2 3 4 Matrix Control 4 tone 1 2 3 4 1 OFF CC01 95 except 32 PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL2 SYS CTRL3 SYS CTRL4 VELOCITY KEYFOLLOW TEMPO LFO1 Value POLY MONO OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 0 127 NORMAL LEGATO RATE TIME PITCH NOTE OFF ON OFF ON CONTINUOUS KEY ON OFF ON OFF ON NO SUSTAIN SUSTAIN OFF ON 48 0 semitone OFF ON R 2 63 63 OFF ON R 2 63 63 OFF ON R 2 63 63 OFF ON R aQd da a ada 2 OFF PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL2 MFX CTRL3 MFX CTRL4 WAVE Group p 81 Display WAVE FXM TONE DELAY Parameter Group Number Gain Switch Wave Tempo Sync Switch C
22. 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 I I MIDI Implementation 01 01 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 29 12768 52768 20000 20000 01 05 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 30 12768 52768 20000 20000 01 09 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 31 12768 52768 20000 20000 01 OD 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 ccce 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 32 12768 52768 20000 20000 00 00 01 11 Total Size O 1 2 3 Performance Common Chorus
23. 93 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets 6 Use 4 or P to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 7 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to modify the parameter value HINT If you ve made a mistake in setting a parameter value or you have second thoughts about the changes press UNDO COMPARE to restore the value to what it was 8 If you wish to move to another display group press EDIT to make its indicator light and use the function buttons HINT You can also move to another display group by holding down SHIFT and using 4 or D Since this can be done even when the EDIT indicator is dark it is a faster way to get around because you don t have to turn on the EDIT indicator each time 9 Repeat steps 3 8 to complete a Rhythm Set 10 When you finish making settings press EXIT or RHYTHM to return to the RHYTHM PLAY page An asterisk will be displayed at the left of the Rhythm Set group This indicates that the Rhythm Set settings have been modified RHYTHM PR R 001 PoeDrumSet 1 R nme PLAY Note If you select another Rhythm Set in the group with an asterisk the modified Rhythm Set settings will be lost To keep these modified settings perform the save operation p 164 Making Settings While Comparing Waveforms Palette Edit When modifying Wave settings for a Rhythm Set the values for four Waves will be displayed together on a single display This
24. A D Selecting Patches Using the Digit Hold Function 1 Press SHIFT numeric key 0 turn on the Digit Hold function 2 Use the numeric keys to specify the number of the one s place Toturn off the Digit Hold function press SHIFT 0 once again Transposing the Keyboard by Octave Press OCT or 4 OCT Transposing the Keyboard in Semitone Steps Transpose on off Press TRANSPOSE Lower the keyboard Press TRANSPOSE OCT Raise the keyboard press TRANSPOSE OCT 221 Quick Reference of Procedures 222 Modifying Patch Settings basic procedure Turn on the EDIT indicator Use the function buttons to select the display group Use 4 W toselect the desired setting page Turn off the EDIT indicator Boe Dew P Use TONE SELECT 1 4 function buttons to select the Tone D Use D to select a Parameter 7 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to modify the value fyou wish to move to a different display group turn on the EDIT indicator Changing the Patch Assigned to a Performance Part 1 Press PERFORM PATCH 2 Use 4 P toselecta Part 3 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to choose the Patch The rest procedure is the same as for the basic procedure listed above Simultaneously Modifying the Values of Two or More Tones In a Tone setting display hold do
25. Offset I 00 OD OOOa aaaa MFX Control Channel 0 16 I Address Description l I I 1 16 OFF l I l 00 OE 0000 000a MFX Control MIDI1 lt XV 5080 gt 0 1 I 00 00 0000 000a Transmit Program Change 0 1 I I OFF ON l OFF ON 00 OF 0000 000a MFX Control MIDI2 lt XV 5080 gt 0 1 I 00 01 0000 000a Transmit Bank Select 0 1 I I I OFF ON I I I OFF ON l 00 02 0000 000a Transpose Switch 0 1 I 00 10 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 1 0 64 I I I OFF ON I I I 0 63 FULL I 00 03 0000 aaaa Transpose Value 59 70 00 11 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 2 0 64 I I I 5 6 I I 0 63 FULL I 00 04 0000 Oaaa Octave Shift 61 67 I 00 12 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 3 0 64 I I I 3 3 I I 0 63 FULL I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Keyboard Velocity 0 127 00 13 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 4 0 64 I I I REAL 1 127 I I 0 63 FULL I 00 06 0000 OOaa Keyboard Sens 0 3 00 14 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 5 0 64 I I I LIGHT MEDIUM HEAVY FULL I I 0 63 FULL I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Aftertouch Sens 0 100 I 00 15 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 6 0 64 I I I I 0 63 FULL I 00 08 OOOa aaaa Patch Transmit Channel 0 17 00 16 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 7 0 64 I I I 1 16 Rx Ch OFF I I I 0 63 FULL I l 00 17 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 8 0 64 I 00 09 Oaaa a
26. Specifies the type of portamento effect RATE The time it takes will depend on the distance between the two pitches TIME The time it takes will be constant regardless of how far apart in pitch the notes are Chapter 5 Creating Patches Start Portamento Start Pitch Portamento will begin anew if you press another key during a pitch movement This setting specifies the pitch at which the change will begin PITCH When another key is pressed while the pitch is moving portamento will begin anew from the pitch that had been reached at that moment Pitch Time press D4 key press C5 key press C4 key NOTE Portamento will begin anew from the pitch where the current change would end Pitch Time press D4 key press C5 key press C4 key CTRL Rx MIDI Control Receive MIDI 1l CTEL Bender Exrression Pan Mode Ex MIDI OH OH CONTIHUOUS 1 CTEL Hold 1 RedamEer Env elore Mode Ex MIDI OH OFF SUSTAIH Here you can specify for each Tone how MIDI messages such as pitch bend expression and pan will be received Bender Receive Pitch Bend Switch Specifies whether Pitch Bend messages will be received ON or not OFF ote Generally pitch bend messages control the pitch of the currently sounding note expression messages control the volume In addition to this the XV 88 allows these MIDI messages to be used to control Tone settings or Multi effects settings as well p 78 p
27. Tone settings from any desired Patch can be copied to any desired Tone of the currently selected Patch This function can help you save time 1 Make sure that a Patch is selected 2 Press UTILITY getting its indicator to start blinking 3 Press the numeric key 2 then 4 or W tocall up the PATCH TONE CPY page PATCH Source Tone CCOMPARE CEHTERI TOHE CPY SUSER Bei TitUser Patch 3 Ti aie ew Copy source Patch Copy source Patch name group number Copy destination Tone Copy source Tone 4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to set 5 Either rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set the value HINT To specify the currently selected Patch as the copy source set Source to TEMP When the cursor is located at Source you can also use USER PRESET and A F to select a Patch group and then use numeric keys to specify the Patch number By using TONE SWITCH 1 4 you can also select the copy source Tone By using TONE SELECT 1 4 you can select the copy destination Tone 6 Press ENTER to execute the Copy operation When the Copy operation is executed an symbol will be displayed in front of the copy destination Tone 7 Press UTILITY to return to the previous page Cautions When Selecting a Waveform The sounds of the XV 88 are based on complex PCM waveforms and if you attempt to make settings that are contrary to the type of
28. Wave Expansion Board Installation Slot Remove the cover to reveal the slots for installation of optional Wave Expansion Boards SR JV80 Series SRX Series Quick Start p 4 10 Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 How the XV 88 Is Organized Basic Structure The XV 88 can be broadly divided into two sections a keyboard controller section and a sound generator section The two sections are connected internally by means of MIDI Sound Generator Section III Keyboard Controller Section controllers such as keyboard pitch bend lever etc Keyboard Controller Section This section consists of the keyboard pitch bend modulation lever panel sliders and D Beam controller It also includes any pedals that may be connected to the rear panel Actions such as pressing and releasing of keys on the keyboard depressing a pedal and so forth are converted to MIDI messages and sent to the sound generator section or to an external MIDI device HINT When playing in Performance mode the settings for the MIDI connections between the keyboard controller section and the sound generator section or external MIDI device are made in Zone mode p 57 Sound Generator Section The sound generator section produces the sound Here MIDI messages received from the keyboard controller section or external MIDI device are converted to musical signals which are then output as analog signals f
29. When the Clock Source parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to INT the display will indicate Tempo SYS and this will be the same value as the system tempo With a setting of MIDI the display will indicate Tempo EXT and you will be synchronized to the clock of the external MIDI device Setting the D Beam Controller D BEAM This is where the settings are made for applying effects to the sound by moving your hand over the D Beam controller in Patch Rhythm Set GM mode Mb When using the D Beam controller in Performance mode the settings are made in Zone mode p 63 D BEAM CONTROL D BEAM Hzsisn QutEut Falarit4s COHTROL CCHzZ BREATH BOTH STANDARD Assign D Beam Assign Specifies the function controlled by the D Beam controller CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 cS For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 270 PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch OCT UP Raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher OCT DOWN Lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower START STOP Starts Stops the external sequencer TAP TEMPO Tap tempo a tempo specified by the interval at which you move your hand over the D Beam controller Output D Beam Output Selects the sound generator s the internal sound generator and or external sound generators connected to MIDI OUT connector to be controlled by the
30. sese 100 Coarse tune Rhythm Wave n Coarse tune Tone ukuka aaa rere peces Coarse tune GM Part ua sasaqa ceti e qr teneri degere ce 196 Tap conn o Uso S MEN Hoa Eod eo Lora oe oM Ho M Eo LE 55 Patch ueteri e ed nl e e condis 70 Rhythm Tone 100 Rhythm Wave 100 v ganana saka Mie EE NN AE ASN 86 Color FXM color Rhythm Wave a 100 FEXM color Tone 2 nee tremere 81 COMMON group Patch eed pe equ eni ce epe ato 69 Performance eerte rehenes 51 Rhythm Set AAN E EA A eet tenente 96 Zone COMPUTER connector essent 17 208 COMPUTER switch tenerent 17 208 209 212 Connecting with computer Computer cable seen Continuous ott eie pb re u aS Pe N Continuous switch eese CONTROL GM Pantas sanan Qanaq ceteri dde cepa ee fe cet 197 Rhythm Tone iaeiei eee iranere EE eeri EEEn 97 Control 1 4 Matrix control source 1 4 System control assign 1 4 n Control Channel repe t etes ihr boars CONTROL group Patchs teo eet eq gens Rhythm Set System CONTROL PEDAL 1 2 we 172 CONTROLLER teeren reniet kann eene nennen 14 COPY oet c eM A d US 182 Copy Compare function ete dies n rente tienden 183 184 Effects eee b re TEM 161 Effects Patch 183 Effects Performance Effects Rhythm Set Name Patch 183 Name Performance 182 Name Rhy thimiSet i
31. 0 1 I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 l l OFF ON l 00 3C Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Sens 4 1 127 I I 63 63 I 00 22 0aaa aaaa Cutoff Offset 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 00 3D Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Source 0 109 I 00 23 Oaaa aaaa Resonance Offset 1 127 I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I I 63 63 I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I 00 24 Oaaa aaaa Attack Time Offset 1 127 I VELOCITY KEYFOLLOW TEMPO LFO1 LFO2 I I I 63 63 I I PITCH ENV TVF ENV TVA ENV I 00 25 Oaaa aaaa Release Time Offset 1 127 I 00 3E OOaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Destination 1 0 33 I I I 63 463 I OFF I 00 26 Oaaa aaaa Velocity Sens Offset t S29 27 1 I I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I I I 63 463 I I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH l I I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH l 00 27 0000 aaaa Patch Output Assign 0 13 I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I I I MFX A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I l l 1 2 3 4 5 lt XV 3080 5080 gt 6 lt XV 3080 5080 gt I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I I I 7 XV 5080 8 lt XV 5080 gt TONE I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I l I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME T
32. 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc 10 00 00 00 Temporary Performance 1 2 I 0000 dddd Master Tune 24 2024 11 00 00 00 Temporary Patch Rhythm Performance Mode Part 1 1 3 I I l 100 0 100 0 cent 11 20 00 00 Temporary Patch Rhythm Performance Mode Part 2 I I 00 05 O0aa aaaa Master Key Shift 40 88 l 24 24 14 60 00 00 Temporary Patch Rhythm Performance Mode Part 16 I I 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Master Level 0 127 1F 00 00 00 Temporary Patch Rhythm Patch Mode 00 07 0000 000a Scale Tune Switch 0 1 l OFF ON 20 00 00 00 User Performance 01 1 2 00 08 0000 000a Patch Remain 0 1 20 01 00 00 User Performance 02 I I I I OFF ON I I I 00 09 0000 000a Mix Parallel 0 1 20 3F 00 00 User Performance 64 I I I l MIX PARALLEL 4 30 00 00 00 User Patch 001 A 3 1 l 00 OA 0000 000a MEX Switch 0 1 30 01 00 00 User Patch 002 I I I I BYPASS ON I l I 00 OB 0000 000a Chorus Switch 0 1 30 7F 00 00 User Patch 128 I I I I OFF ON I I I 00 OC 0000 000a Reverb Switch 0 1 40 00 00 00 User Rhythm 001 1 3 2 I I l OFF ON 40 10 00 00 User Rhythm 002 I I 40 20 00 00 User Rhythm 003 I 00 OD 000a aaaa Performance Control Channel 0 16 40 30 00 00 User Rhythm 004 I I I l 1 16 OFF I 00 OE Oaaa aa
33. 0aaa aaaa Part Release Time Offset CC 72 0 127 I 0000 cccc I I I 64 63 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 10 12768 52768 I E I I I 20000 20000 00 15 0000 Oaaa Part Octave Shift 61 67 00 2B 0000 aaaa I I I 3 43 I 0000 bbbb I 00 16 Oaaa aaaa Part Velocity Sens Offset 1 127 I 0000 cccc I I 63 63 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 11 12768 52768 00 17 Oaaa aaaa Keyboard Range Lower 0 127 I I I 20000 20000 I I C 1 UPPER IE 00 2F 0000 aaaa I I 00 18 Oaaa aaaa Keyboard Range Upper 0 127 l 0000 bbbb LOWER G9 I 0000 cccc I I 00 19 Oaaa aaaa Keyboard Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 12 12768 52768 00 1A 0aaa aaaa Keyboard Fade Width Upper 0 127 I I I 20000 20000 00 1B 0000 000a Mute Switch 0 1 E 00 33 0000 aaaa I I OFF MUTE I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc 00 1C 0aaa aaaa Part Dry Send Level 0 127 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 13 12768 52768 00 1D Oaaa aaaa Part Chorus Send Level CC 93 0 127 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 1E 0aaa aaaa Part Reverb Send Level CC 91 0 127 E 00 37 0000 aaaa 00 1F 0000 aaaa Part Output Assign 0 13 I 0000 bbbb I I MFX A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt I 0000 cccc I I I 1 2 3 4 5 lt XV 3080 5080 gt 6 lt XV 3080 5080 gt I 0000 d
34. Based on the TVA envelope times for the C4 key center C positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times and negative settings will cause them to have increasingly longer times Higher values will cause more Key TVA ENVELOPE 1 TVA T1 T2 T3 T4 Lil L2 L EHUELOFE B 591 8 28 127 97 3 B T1 T4 TVA Envelope Time 1 4 x Specify the TVA envelope times T1 T4 Larger values result in longer times until the next volume is reached for instance T2 controls the time from L1 until L2 is reached HINT To edit the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences in the T1 parameter Attack Time values set for each Tone set the Atk parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH MODIFY p 71 Similarly to edit the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences in the T4 parameter Release Time values set for each Tone set the Rel parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH MODIFY p 72 L1 L3 TVA Envelope Level 1 3 Specify the TVA envelope levels L1 L3 These settings specify how the volume will change at each point relative to the standard volume the Tone Level value specified in the TVA page Level Time Li L2 L3 Note on Note off Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets With the XV 88 you have total control over a wide variety of settings Each item that can be set is known as a parameter When you change the values of parameters you are d
35. LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE 00 42 00aa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Destination 3 07 333 I I I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I OFF I I l TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I 00 2D Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Sens 1 2 22 0 I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I I I 63 463 I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I 00 2E OOaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Destination 2 0 33 I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME OFF l l I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I I I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I I l LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I 00 43 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Sens 3 1 127 I I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I 63 63 I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE 00 44 00aa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Destination 4 0 331 I I I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I OFF I l l TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME
36. Setting the MIDI Receive Channel for Performance Mode for each Part Channel parameter PERFORM MIDI MIDI Turning On Off the MIDI Receive Switch in Performance Mode for each Part Rx Sw parameter PERFORM MIDI MIDI Setting the Receive Channel on which Performances will be Selected Control Channel parameter SYSTEM MIDI PERFORM MIDI Turning On Off the Receive Switch of the MIDI Messages in Performance Mode for each Part RxSWITCH page PERFORM MIDI Confirming the Receive Status of MIDI Messages in Performance Mode for each Part INFO page PERFORM INFO Setting the MIDI Receive Channel for Patch Rhythm Set Mode Rx Ch parameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI Turning On Off the Receive Switch of Program Change Message Program Change parameter SYSTEM MIDI RECEIVE MIDI Turning On Off the Receive Switch of Bank Select Messages Bank Select parameter SYSTEM MIDI RECEIVE MIDI Turning On Off the Receive Switch of the MIDI Messages in Patch Rhythm Set Mode for each Tone CTRL Rx MIDI page PATCH CONTROL Quick Reference of Procedures Others Using the Panic Function Press SHIFT EXIT Adjusting the Tuning Master parameter SYSTEM TUNE SYSTEM TUNE Adjusting the Display LCD parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP Contrast Restoring the Temporary Performance Patch Rhythm Set to the Factory Setting Select a Perform
37. 0 127 I I 0 600 cent 40 2x 05 0aaa aaaa Mod LFOl TVF Depth 0 127 I I 0 2400 cent 40 2x 06 Oaaa aaaa Mod LFO1 TVA Depth 0 127 I I 0 100 0 40 2x 07 Oaaa aaaa Mod LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 I I 10 0 10 0 Hz 40 2x 08 Oaaa aaaa Mod LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 I I 0 600 cent 40 2x 09 Oaaa aaaa Mod LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 I I 0 2400 cent 40 2x OA Oaaa aaaa Mod LFO2 TVA Depth 0 127 I I 0 100 0 LE 40 2x 10 Oaaa aaaa Bend Pitch Control 64 88 I I 0 24 semitone 40 2x 11 Oaaa aaaa Bend TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 I I 9600 9600 cent 40 2x 12 Oaaa aaaa Bend Amplitude Control 0 127 I I 100 0 100 0 40 2x 13 Oaaa aaaa Bend LFO1 Rate Control 0 127 I I 10 0 10 0 Hz 40 2x 14 0aaa aaaa Bend LFOl Pitch Control 0 127 I I 0 600 cent 40 2x 15 Oaaa aaaa Bend LFOl TVF Depth 0 127 I I 0 2400 cent 40 2x 16 Oaaa aaaa Bend LFO1 TVA Depth 0 127 I I 0 100 0 40 2x 17 Oaaa aaaa Bend LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 I I 10 0 10 0 Hz 40 2x 18 Oaaa aaaa Bend LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 I I 0 600 cent 40 2x 19 Oaaa aaaa Bend LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 I I 0 2400 cent 40 2x 1A Oaaa aaaa Bend LFO2 TVA Depth 0 127 I I 0 100 0 40 2x 20 Oaaa aaaa CAf Pitch Control 40 88 I I 24 424 semitone 40 2x 21 Oaaa aaaa CAf TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 I I 9600
38. 0000 00aa Tone Control 2 Switch 4 0 2 1 00 6E 0000 aaaa l l l OFF ON REVERSE 0000 bbbb LFO1 Rate 0 149 I 00 1F 0000 00aa Tone Control 3 Switch 1 0 2 I I 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES I I I OFF ON REVERSE 00 70 0000 Oaaa LFO1 Offset 0 4 00 20 0000 00aa Tone Control 3 Switch 2 0 2 100 50 0 50 100 l OFF ON REVERSE 00 71 Oaaa aaaa LFO1 Rate Detune 0 127 I 00 21 0000 OOaa Tone Control 3 Switch 3 0 2 00 72 Oaaa aaaa LFOl Delay Time 0 127 I I OFF ON REVERSE l 00 73 000a aaaa LFO1 Delay Time Keyfollow 54 74 00 22 0000 00aa Tone Control 3 Switch 4 0 2 l 100 100 I I I OFF ON REVERSE 00 74 0000 OOaa LFO1 Fade Mode 0 3 I 00 23 0000 00aa Tone Control 4 Switch 1 0 2 I I ON IN ON OUT I I OFF ON REVERSE I I OFF IN OFF OUT I 00 24 0000 OOaa Tone Control 4 Switch 2 0 2 00 75 Oaaa aaaa LFO1 Fade Time 0 127 I I I OFF ON REVERSE 00 76 0000 000a LFO1 Key Trigger 0 1 l 00 25 0000 00aa Tone Control 4 Switch 3 0 2 l OFF ON I I I OFF ON REVERSE 00 77 Oaaa aaaa LFO1 Pitch Depth 1 127 00 26 0000 00aa Tone Control 4 Switch 4 0 2 63 63 I I I OFF ON REVERSE 00 78 Oaaa aaaa LFO1 TVF Depth 1 127 I I 63 63 I 00 27 0000 OOaa Wave Group Type 0 3 00 79 Oaaa aaaa LFO1 TVA Depth 1 127 I
39. 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 10 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 2C 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 11 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 30 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 12 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 Hi 00 00 00 34 Total Size O 1 2 4 Performance Common Reverb Offset I Address Description 00 00 0000 aaaa Reverb Type 0 4 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Reverb Level 0 127 00 02 0000 00aa Reverb Output Assign 0 3 I I A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D XV 5080 Xx F 00 03 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 1 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 07 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 2 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 0B 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 3 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 OF 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 4 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 00 13 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 5 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 281 donet gine eI eli eR ee MIDI Implementation qc Z X e E a e a Sm i Sr zT WRITE
40. 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Channel Pressure 00H 7FH 0 127 Not received in Performance mode when the Caf parameter PERFORM MIDI RxSWITCH is OFF Pitch Bend Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte EnH HH mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 272 MIDI Implementation mm ll Pitch Bend value 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 8192 0 8191 Notreceived when the Bender parameter PATCH CONTROL CTRL RxMIDI is OFF Not received in Performance mode when the Bnd parameter PERFORM MIDI RxSWITCH is OFF lilChannel Mode Messages Not received in Performance mode when the Rx Sw parameter PERFORM MIDI MIDI is OFF All Sounds Off Controller number 120 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 78H 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 When this message is received all notes currently sounding on the corresponding channel will be turned off Reset All Controllers Controller number 121 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 79H 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 When this message is received the following controllers will be set to their reset values Controller Reset value Pitch Bend Change 0 center Polyphonic Key Pressure 0 off Channel Pressure 0 off Modulation 0 off Breath Type 0 min Expression 127 max Hold 1 0 off Sostenuto 0 off Soft 0 off Hold 2 0 off RPN unset previously set data will not change NRPN unset previously set da
41. 12 dB I 01 07 0000 000a WMT4 Wave FXM Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 01 08 0000 00aa WMT4 Wave FXM Color 0 3 I I I 1 4 I 01 09 000a aaaa WMT4 Wave FXM Depth 0 16 I 01 0A 0000 000a WMT4 Wave Tempo Sync 0 1 OFF ON I 01 OB Oaaa aaaa WMT4 Wave Coarse Tune 16 112 I I I 48 48 I 01 OC Oaaa aaaa WMT4 Wave Fine Tune 14 114 I I I 50 50 I 01 OD Oaaa aaaa WMT4 Wave Pan 0 1233 I I I L64 63R I 01 OE 0000 000a WMT4 Wave Random Pan Switch 0 1 I OFF ON I 01 OF 0000 00aa WMT4 Wave Alternate Pan Switch 0 2 OFF ON REVERSE I 01 10 Oaaa aaaa WMT4 Wave Level 0 127 I 01 11 Oaaa aaaa WMT4 Velocity Range Lower 1 127 1 UPPER I 01 12 Oaaa aaaa WMT4 Velocity Range Upper 1 127 LOWER 127 I 01 13 Oaaa aaaa WMT4 Velocity Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 01 14 Oaaa aaaa WMT4 Velocity Fade Width Upper 0 127 I I 01 15 000a aaaa Pitch Env Depth 52 76 I I I 12 412 I 01 16 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 01 17 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 1 Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 01 18 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 4 Velocity Sens i 4277 I I I 63 63 I 01 19 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 1 0 127 I 01 1A Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 2 0 127 I 01 1B Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 3 0 127 I 01 1C Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 4 0 127 I 01 1D Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Lev
42. 24 semitones Il ignored processed as 00H 00H 01H mmH IIH Channel Fine Tuning mm ll 20 00H 40 00H 60 00H 4096 x 100 8192 0 4096 x 100 8192 cent 00H 02H mmH IIH Channel Coarse Tuning mm 10H 40H 70H 48 0 48 semitones ll ignored processed as 00H 00H 05H mmH IIH Modulation Depth Range mm ll 00 00H 06 00H 0 16384 x 600 16384 cent 7FH 7FH SUE RPN null RPN and NRPN will be set as unspecified Once this setting has been made subsequent Program Change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH prog 1 prog 128 n MIDI channel number pp Program number These messages are transmitted when Performance Patch or Rhythm set is selected But not transmitted when Program parameter SYSTEM MIDI TRANSMIT MIDI is OFF n Performance Zone mode these messages are not transmitted when P C parameter ZONE EXT CONTROL EXT P C is NO SEND 277 Appendices MIDI Implementation Channel Pressure Status 2nd byte DnH vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Channel Pressure 00H 7FH 0 127 Pitch Bend Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte EnH IIH mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll Pitch Bend value 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 8192 0 8191 llChannel Mode Messages All Sounds Off Controller number 120 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 78H 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 This
43. 46 177 LONE Si cose cate has verte e Ree eee ene EH Ure ee eee e eee Pe eee eee dde ieee 46 64 Data type 186 187 DEC 16 27 Delay Keyfollow 1 aa 84 Delay Time 84 DELETE Lous 189 DEMO 16 Depth FXM depth Rhythm Wave sss 100 FXM depth Tone 81 Pitch envelope depth Rhythm Tone 100 Pitch envelope depth Tone 86 TVF envelope depth Rhythm Tone 102 TVF envelope depth Tone sss 89 Desktop MUSIC 208 Ip o M 79 Destination 116 IB uS 83 Device ID 171 Device ID number we 171 Digit hold function U 30 Direction u oie trien toii Ec ERR ee p ksaq E SAVER u sas 91 Dd E 116 DIU EA EEE EE 208 E EDIE neti the t tee et o dee 15 25 26 Effects C HOFUS ar coe te ees edes creer e eue 105 Multi effects 105 Reverb iie wee 105 Turning effects on off 105 EFFECTS group GME 194 Patch ure oin ete tended t ats 75 Performance oe ee censet eet eme recie 52 Rhythm Set s ENTER ciet nir ere e Eee ER seems Envelope Mode Rhythm Tone sheret a nene nennen 97 Tore io nero qno rod pam OT re vp ee cH DAS Las 78 Equal temp eramentusu aa ayamarka aun tentent 174 Error message E EXCLUSIVE era er stet iss Exclusive protect 1
44. 64 Cga Open Lo Cga Open Lo Cga Open Lo HumanClapsEQ Timbale Hi Timbale Hi Timbale Hi JD Cowbell cc Timbale Lo Timbale Lo Timbale Lo 70s CI HiHat 67 AgogoBellsHi AgogoBellsHi AgogoBellsHi AgogoBells EF AgogoBellsLo AgogoBellsLo AgogoBellsLo 70s CI HiHat 69 Cabasa Up Cabasa Up Cabasa Up 909 NZ HiHat E Maracas Maracas Maracas 70s Op HiHat 71 ShortWhistle ShortWhistle ShortWhistle Cabasa Up cs T Long Whistle Long Whistle 1 Long Whistle Long Whistle E Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro REV RkOpHH f 74 Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Tambourine 2 E Claves Claves Claves REV JzOpHH f 76 WoodBlock Hi WoodBlock Hi WoodBlock Hi Scratch 2 WoodBlock Lo WoodBlock Lo WoodBlock Lo Mute Triangl wm Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica 909 CI HiHat 79 Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Triangl E Mute Triangl Mute Triangl Mute Triangl 909 CI HiHat 81 Open Triangl Open Triangl Open Triangl Cabasa E Cabasa Cut Cabasa Cut Cabasa Cut 909 Op HiHat 83 Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum cee Wind Chimes Wind Chimes Wind Chimes Maple Kick U E Wood Block Wood Block Wood Block Woody Stick 86 Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Maple SN EA Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo SN Roll 88 Lite Kick Lite Kick Lite Kick Maple Tom 3 T Hybrid Kick2 Hybrid Kick2 Hybrid Kick2 909 Kick 1 gra Old Kick Old Kick Old Kick Old Kick 91 Pop Voice Pop Voice Pop Voice 808 Kick o2 Wind Agogo Wind Agogo Wind Agogo 909 SN 2 93 Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat
45. 8 Try changing from another Performance to the Performance just saved and see if the sound of the external MIDI device changes to what you want If not check your settings and the external MIDI device Changing Sounds with a Pedal Switch You can change the sounds such as a Patch in succession using a pedal switch 1 Connect an optional pedal switch DP 2 DP 6 etc to the CTL 1 PEDAL jack 2 Setthe Assign parameter SYSTEM CONTROL CONTROL PEDAL 1 to 102 PROG UP p 172 3 Call up the PLAY page of the sound generator mode PERFORM PATCH RHYTHM GM 4 Eachtime you press the pedal you call up the next number of Performance Patch or Rhythm Set Controlling an External MIDI Sequencer with the D Beam Controller You can start and stop an external MIDI sequencer by placing your hand above the D Beam controller 1 Usea MIDI cable to connect the XV 88 s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of the external MIDI sequencer 2 Setthe D Beam Controller s Assign parameter setting to 100 START STOP In Patch Rhythm Set Mode Assign parameter SYSTEM D BEAM D BEAM CONTROL p 176 In Performance Mode Assign parameter ZONE D BEAM D BEAM CONTROL p 63 3 Press D BEAM CONTROLLER ON to turn on the D Beam Controller 4 When you place your hand over the D Beam Controller the external MIDI sequencer begins playing Moving your hand over the controller again stops the external MIDI sequencer Using E
46. By pressing the notes in the appropriate order you can produce melody lines Up to 128 notes will be remembered GLISSANDO Each chromatic step between the highest and lowest notes you press will sound in succession repeating upward and downward Press only the lowest and the highest notes CHORD All notes you press will sound simultaneously BASS CHORD 1 5 The lowest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will sound as a chord BASS UP 1 8 The lowest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will be arpeggiated BASS RND 1 3 The lowest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will sound in random order TOP UP 1 6 The highest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will be arpeggiated BASS UP TOP The highest and the lowest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will be arpeggiated 175 Chapter 9 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions Beat Pattern Select the beat pattern from the choices below This setting will affect the location of the accent and length of the notes to determine the beat rhythm yon Some settings will not be available depending on the Style parameter setting For details on the possible values refer to Arpeggio Style List p 268 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 3 PORTA A 01 11 PORTA B 01 15 SEQ A 1 7 SEQ B 1 5 SEQ C 1 2 SEQ D 1 8 ECHO 1 3 MUTE 01 16 STRUM
47. OCT once to raise the keyboard one octave the display will indicate kbd C 5 This means that when you press the C4 key the C5 note will sound PHTCH PR A 001 122vo0iceFno PLAY tone 2 Nore There is only one Octave Shift setting in the XV 88 so it remain valid even if you select a different Patch Performance or Rhythm Set or turn power off 2 To turn off the Octave Shift function press the other button OCT or OCT of that pressed in step 1 The indicator will go off 47 Chapter 2 Chapter 2 Playing Transposing the Keyboard in Semitone Steps Transpose Transpose changes keyboard pitch in units of semitones 5 6 semitones This function is useful when you play transposed instruments such as trumpet or clarinet following a printed score 1 Press TRANSPOSE to light indicator This turns Transpose on 2 While holding down TRANSPOSE press OCT or OCT to transpose the keyboard Pressing OCT once while holding down TRANSPOSE will raise the keyboard one semitone Pressing OCT once while holding down TRANSPOSE will lower the keyboard one semitone The specified Transpose setting will be added to the Octave Shift value For example if you hold down TRANSPOSE and press OCT once to raise the keyboard a semitone the display will indicate kbd C 4 So when C4 is pressed the C 4 note will sound 3 To turn off Transpose press TRANSPOSE once again s
48. Oaaa aaaa System Control 4 Source 0 97 Offset I l l OFF CCO0l CC31 CC33 CC95 Address Description l l l PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH I I 00 00 00 Temporary Patch tezat I 00 1C 0000 000a Receive Program Change 0 1 10 00 00 Temporary Rhythm 1 3 2 I I OFF ON _ I 00 1D 0000 000a Receive Bank Select 0 1 I I OFF ON O1 2 Performance 00 00 00 1E Total Size I err a Offset I I l Address Description O1 1 2 System Part l I 00 00 00 Performance Common 1 2 1 a N I 00 02 00 Performance Common MFX 1 2 2 Offset 00 04 00 Performance Common Chorus 1 2 3 address Description 00 06 00 Performance Common Reverb 1 2 4 jz x l 00 10 00 Performance MIDI Channel 1 1 2 5 I 00 00 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for C O 127 I 00 11 00 Performance MIDI Channel 2 I I I I 64 x63 I od I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for C 0 127 I 00 1F 00 Performance MIDI Channel 16 I I I I 264 463 I 00 20 00 Performance Part Part 1 1 2 6 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for D 0 127 l 00 21 00 Performance Part Part 2 I I 64 x63 c I 00 03 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for D 0 127 I 00 2F 00 Performance Part Part 16 I I 64 463 I 00 30 00 Performance Part Part 17 XV 5080 I I 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for E 0 127 l 00 31 00 Performance Part Part
49. PART 1 f Wolume Fan Coarse Fine SETTIHG iB B B B Volume Part Volume Adjusts the volume of an individual Part This setting s main purpose is to adjust the volume balance between Parts Pan Part Pan Adjusts the pan of each Part L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Memb If you modify the settings of the Volume parameter or Pan parameter they will be reflected in the INFO page p 197 Coarse Part Coarse Tune Adjusts the pitch of the Part s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves Fine Part Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the Part s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents Mi One cent is 1 100th of a semitone MODIFY PART 1 Cutatrf REezszonance Httack REelease MODIFY 4 127 B B B Cutoff Part Cutoff Frequency Offset Adjusts the cutoff frequency for the GM Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part Resonance Part Resonance Offset Adjusts the Resonance for the GM Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part Attack Part Attack Time Offset Adjusts the TVA Envelope Attack Time for the GM Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part Release Part Release Time Offset Adjusts the TVA Envelope Release Time for the GM Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part 196 Chapter 11 Using the XV 88 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode CONTROL PART 1 BendREna Hono PFols Forta Swi Time COHTROL zl FOLY OFF B BendRng Bend Range Specifies the amount of pitch c
50. PR A F Preset A F These are groups inside the XV 88 which cannot be rewritten However you can modify the settings of the currently selected Patch and then save the modified settings in User memory or a memory card Banks A F already contain 128 prepared Patches each for a total of 768 Patches p 253 PR H GM2 This is an internal group of Patches compatible with General MIDI 2 a system of MIDI function specifications designed to transcend differences between makers and types of devices these Patches cannot be overwritten Furthermore settings of currently selected Patches from this group cannot be changed The XV 88 includes 256 preset Patches XP A B Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP A B Slots These are the groups of Patches from Wave Expansion Boards optional SR JV80 Series installed in the EXP A and B slots and cannot be overwritten However you can modify Chapter 2 the settings of the currently selected Patch and then save the modified settings in User memory or a memory card The number of onboard Patches depends on the specific Wave Expansion Boards installed Nore XP A B Patches can be selected only if a Wave Expansion Board SR JV80 Series is installed in the corresponding slot XP C D Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP C D Slots These are the groups of Patches from Wave Expansion Boards optional SRX Series installed in the EXP C and D slots and cannot be overwritten Howeve
51. Press the numeric key 2 then 4 or W tocallup the RHYTHM KEY COPY page RHYTHM Source Eew CCOMPARE CEMTERI KEY R aal B Rhythm 3 E 1 ony laure source Rhythm Set name Copy source Rhythm ws group number Copy source Key Copy destination Key 4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter you want to set 5 Either rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set the value HINT To specify the currently selected Rhythm Set as the copy source set Source to TEMP When the cursor is located at Source you can also use USER PRESET and A F to select a Rhythm Set group and then use numeric keys to specify the Rhythm Set number When the cursor is located at Key you can also press the keyboard to select the key By using TONE SELECT 1 4 you can also select the copy source key By using TONE SWITCH 1 4 you can select the copy destination key TONE SELECT SWITCH 1 move to an octave lower key TONE SELECT SWITCH 2 move to the semitone below TONE SELECT SWITCH 3 move to the semitone above TONE SELECT SWITCH 4 move to an octave higher key 6 Press ENTER to execute the copy operation When the Copy operation is executed an symbol will be displayed in front of the copy destination Part 7 Press UTILITY to return to the previous page Cautions When Selecting a Waveform The sounds of the XV 88 are based on complex PCM waveforms
52. REV JzFlm L REV JzFlm M REV JzFlm H No 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 Wave Name REV MplTom2 REV MplTom4 REV 808Tom REV VerbTomH REV VerbTomL REV DryTom H REV DryTom M REV RkCIH1 p REV RkCIH1mf REV RkCIH1 f REV RkCIH2 p REV RkCIH2mf REV RkCIH 2 f REV JzCIH1 p REV JzCIH1mf REV JzCIH1 f REV JzCIH2 p REV JzClH2mf REV JzCIH2 f REV CI HH 1 REV CI HH 2 REV CI HH 3 REV CI HH 4 REV CI HH 5 REV RkOpHH p REV RkOpHH f REV JzOpHH p REV JzOpHHmf REV JzOpHH f REV Op HiHat REV OpHiHat2 REV RkPdHH p REV RkPdHH f REV JzPdHH p REV JzPdHH f REV PedalHH REV PedalHH2 REV Dance HH REV 70s CIHH REV 70s OpHH REV 606 CIHH REV 606 OpHH REV 909 NZHH REV 909 OpHH REV HClapsEQ REV TghtClps REV FingSnap REV RealCLP REV RkRCym1p REV RkRCym1f No 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1064 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 1071 1072 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 Wave Name REV RkRCym2p REV RkRCym2f REV JzRCym p REV JzRCymmf REV JzRCym f REV Ride 1 REV Ride 2 REV RideBell REV RkCCym1p REV RkCCym1f REV RkCCym2p REV RkCCym2f REV RkSplash REV JzCCym p REV JzCCym f REV CrashCym REV C
53. Repeat steps 3 8 to complete a Performance 49 Chapter 3 Creating Performances 10 When you finish making settings press EXIT or PERFORM to return to the PERFORM PLAY page An asterisk appears at the left of the Performance group on the display This shows Performance settings have been modified Fart 1 PLAY kbd C 4 PERFORM P R A 01 Sea Teme late gt If you select another Performance in the group with an asterisk the modified Performance settings will be lost To keep these modified settings perform the save operation p 164 Making Settings While Comparing Parts Palette Edit When modifying Part settings for a Performance the values for eight Parts Part 1 8 or Part 9 16 will be displayed together on a single display This is called the Palette page This is useful when you wish to change parameter values while comparing each Part settings 1 When modifying a Part use 4 or P to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 2 Press PALETTE EDIT to call up the Palette page FART 1 Channel Fx Su Mute Su MIDI 1 1 OH OFF PALETTE EDIT ST MIDI IFart 1 PE H nBBlclz8vsoicePna oF CHAHHEL f i 21 3 4 3 61 Fl 8 3 Press or P tochoose the Part to modify The Part number and the Patch or Rhythm Set name assigned to the Part will appear HINT To switch between the palette page for Parts 1 8 and the palette page for Parts 9 16 press 1 8 9 16 gt Use t
54. Specifies the lower limit of the range of the D Beam controller Values below this setting will not be output Upper D Beam Range Upper Specifies the upper limit of the range of the D Beam controller Values above this setting will not be output Note It is not possible to set the lower limit value above the upper limit nor can you set the upper limit value below the lower limit D BEAM SENS D BEAM T D Beam Sensitivity SEHS I D Beam Sensitivity This sets the D Beam Controller s sensitivity The higher the value set the more readily the D Beam Controller goes into effect Ordinarily this is set to 5 wet The D Beam Controller sensitivity is a System setting and as such cannot be saved as a Performance setting Confirming the Settings for Each Zone INFO we When a Single Performance is selected this information is disabled INFO Zone Information ZOHE 1 Ich 1 FE H nmmiclz8SuoicePFno 3 IMFO It Dff In this screen you can check the following information for each Zone MIDI transmit channel ch 1 16 Transmit switch status tx On Off Part connection status part When the Local switch for the currently selected Zone is set to ON you can check that Zone and the linked Part Parts 1 16 are shown in order from left to right and Parts for which the Zone s MIDI transmit channel and the Part s MIDI receive channel coincide are indicated by a o or a For Parts indicated by a yo
55. Synth Reed Synth Saw 1 Synth Saw 2 Syn Saw 2inv Synth Saw 3 JD Syn Saw 2 FAT Saw JP 8 Saw A JP 8 Saw B JP 8 Saw C P5 Saw A P5 Saw B P5 Saw C P5 Saw2 A P5 Saw2 B P5 Saw2 C D 50 Saw A D 50 Saw B D 50 Saw C Synth Square JP 8 SquareA JP 8 SquareB JP 8 SquareC Wave Name DualSquare A DualSquare C DualSquareA JD SynPulse1 JD SynPulse2 JD SynPulse3 JD SynPulse4 Synth Pulse1 Synth Pulse2 JD SynPulse5 Sync Sweep Triangle JD Triangle Sine Metal Wind Wind Agogo Feedbackwave Spectrum CrunchWind ThroatWind Pitch Wind JD Vox Noise Vox Noise BreathNoise Voice Breath White Noise Pink Noise Rattles Ice Rain Tin Wave Anklungs Wind Chimes Orch Hit Tekno Hit Back Hit Philly Hit Scratch 1 Scratch 2 Scratch 3 Shami Org Atk 1 Org Atk 2 Sm Metal StrikePole Thrill Switch Tuba Slap Plink Plunk EP Atk Wave Name TVF Trig Org Click Cut Noiz Bass Body Flute Click Gt amp BsNz MENU Ac BassNz 1 Ac BassNz 2 El BassNz 1 El BassNz 2 DistGtrNz 1 DistGtrNz 2 DistGtrNz 3 DistGtrNz 4 SteelGtrNz 1 SteelGtrNz 2 SteelGtrNz 3 SteelGtrNz 4 SteelGtrNz 5 SteelGtrNz 6 SteelGtrNz 7 Sea Thunder Windy Stream Bubble Bird Dog Bark Horse Telephone 1 Telephone 2 Creak Door Slam Engine Car Stop Car Pass Crash Gun Shot Siren Train Jetplane Starship Breath Laugh Scream Punch Heart Steps Machine Gun Laser Wave Name Thunder 2 AmbientSN pL AmbientSN pR AmbientSN fL AmbientSN fR
56. TVF group Patel cuc disce e oeste e Ne an e Med 87 Rhythm 101 TVF LFO depth 1 2 eiee eiiieaenii ketidan 85 TVF VELOCITY Rhythm Tone a sess nter 102 Tone 89 bc as 59 Tx Ch 170 TX Edit 171 Type Chorus type eese et etd de ette 156 Chorus type GM we 195 Data type 186 187 Filter type Rhythm Tone 101 Filter type Tone isserrat eeen r re Ae E eE Ee 87 Multi effects type usasapa aap a 114 Part type Part type GM epes aeren e deer ede ren dine 196 Portamento type sse tenente 76 Reverb type Reverb type GM sekiye iasi yai EN ONR eE 195 Stricture type selst situe tinh eree a PEE ee E ndS 73 U U Fade Key fade width upper Part sss 51 Key fade width upper Tone a 73 Velocity fade width upper Rhythm Wave 99 Velocity fade width upper Tone 73 Urid eee teh ree eco te Mee aud bte 27 UNDO COMPARE eene 15 165 181 183 184 Upper D Beam range upper System sss 46 177 D Beam range upper Zone 46 64 Key range upper Part sss 51 Key range upper Tone 73 Key range upper Zone 59 Velocity range upper Rhythm Wave 99 Velocity range upper Tone 72 USER 8 16 UTIL 1 UTIL 2 UTILITY ii aeterne ettet 1
57. There are three kind of memory temporary rewritable and non rewritable Preset F PR F Preset E PR E Preset D PR D Preset C PR C Preset B PR B Preset A PR A User USER Performance Performance 32 1 Preset H GM2 64 Patch Patch Patch 128 256 128 Rhythm Set Rhythm Set Rhythm Set 2 9 4 Select Select 2 Select Write Y Temporary Area EXP D Slot XP D EXP C Slot XP C Performance EXP B Slot XP B 64 Data File SVD EXP A Slot XP A Patch 128 Rhythm Set 4 Patch Rhythm Set System Expansion Board Memory Card 1 Only in PR A and B 2 The selected Patches Rhythm Sets cannot be changed 3 Only the Performances Patches Rhythm Sets in the CD A H group can be selected Chapter 8 Saving Sounds Temporary Memory Temporary Area This area holds data for the Performance Patch and Rhythm Set you select using the front panel buttons When you play the keyboard or play back an external sequence sound is produced based on data in the temporary area When you modify a Performance Patch or Rhythm Set you are modifying the data that has been called into the temporary area instead of the data in memo
58. Tones 1 and 2 will be combined with Tone 2 and the outputs of Tones 3 and 4 will be combined with Tone 4 For this reason Tone 1 will follow the settings of Tone 2 and Tone 3 will follow the settings of Tone 4 p 73 Mode Tone Delay Mode Selects the type of tone delay No Tone Delay A A Note on Note off NORMAL The Tone begins to play after the time specified in the Time parameter has elapsed Delay time A A Note on Note off HOLD Although the Tone begins to play after the time specified in the Time parameter has elapsed if the key is released before the time specified in the Time parameter has elapsed the Tone is not played No sound played Delay time EN ES Note on Note off KEY OFF NORMAL Rather than being played while the key is pressed the Tone begins to play once the period of time specified in the Time parameter has elapsed after release of the key This is effective in situations such as when simulating noises from guitars and other instruments KEY OFF NORMAL D Delay time A A Note on Note off KEY OFF DECAY Rather than being played while the key is pressed the Tone begins to play as soon as the period of time specified for the Time parameter has elapsed after release of the key Here however changes in the TVA Envelope begin while the key is pressed which in many cases means that only the sound from the release portion of the envelope is heard
59. VELD CR OFE OFF Velocity Curve Velocity Curve selects for each MIDI channel one of the four following Velocity Curve types that best matches the touch of the connected MIDI keyboard Set this to OFF if you are using the MIDI keyboard s own velocity curve ducc Phase Lock Phase Lock Switch Set Phase Lock to ON when you want to suppress discrepancies in timing of Parts played on the same MIDI channel or to OFF when you want to leave the expression timing unchanged we When the Phase Lock parameter is set to ON Parts on the same MIDI channel are put in a condition in which their timing is matched enabling them to be played at the same time Accordingly a certain amount of time may elapse between reception of the Note messages and playing of the sounds Turn this setting to ON only as needed Making Settings for Each Part PART Here you can select the Patch Rhythm Set assigned to each Part and set the volume pan pitch and polyphony of each Part PATCH PART 1 WHTaFe Grour dumber PATCH 4 PHI PR H 8Bicl28voicePno 3 Type Part Type Sets the assignment of a Patch PAT or Rhythm Set RHY to each of the Parts Group Patch Rhythm Set Group Selects the group to which the desired Patch or Rhythm Set belongs USER User CD A H Memory card A H PR A F GM Preset A F GM XP A D Wave Expansion Board A D o Oe s Rhythm Sets of CD A H cannot be accessed unless a memory card SmartMedia is inserted
60. Wet SNpL Wet SNpR Wet SNfL Wet SN f R DrySN p Dry SN f Sharp SN Piccolo SN Maple SN Old Fill SN 70s SN SN Roll Natural SN1 Natural SN2 Ballad SN Rock SN p L Rock SN p R Rock SN mf L Rock SN mf R Rock SN f L Rock SN f R Rock Rim p L Rock Rim p R Rock Rim mfL Rock Rim mfR Rock Rim f L Rock Rim f R Rock Gst L Rock Gst R Snare Ghost Jazz SN p L Jazz SNpR Jazz SN mf L Jazz SN mf R Jazz SN f L Jazz SN f R Jazz SN ff L Jazz SN ff R Jazz Rim p L Jazz Rim p R Jazz Rim mfL Jazz Rim mfR Jazz Rim f L Jazz Rim f R Jazz Rim ffL Wave Name Jazz Rim ffR Brush Slap Brush Swish Jazz Swish p Jazz Swish f 909 SN 1 909 SN 2 808 SN Rock Roll L Rock Roll R Jazz Roll Brush Roll Dry Stick Dry Stick 2 Side Stick Woody Stick RockStick pL RockStick pR RockStick fL RockStick fR Dry Kick Maple Kick Rock Kick p Rock Kick mf Rock Kick f Jazz Kick p Jazz Kick mf Jazz Kick f Jazz Kick Pillow Kick JazzDry Kick Lite Kick Old Kick Hybrid Kick Hybrid Kick2 Verb Kick Round Kick MplLmtr Kick 70s Kick 1 70s Kick 2 Dance Kick 808 Kick 909 Kick 1 909 Kick 2 Rock TomL1 p Rock TomL2 p Rock Tom M p Rock Tom H p Rock TomL1 f Rock TomL2 f 265 Appendices 266 Wave Name Rock Tom M f Rock Tom H f Rock Fim L1 Rock Flm L2 Rock Flm M Rock Flm H Jazz Tom L p Jazz Tom Mp Jazz Tom Hp Jazz Tom L f Jazz Tom Mf Jazz Tom Hf Jazz Flm L Jazz Fim M Jazz Flm H Maple Tom 1 Maple Tom 2 Maple Tom 3 Map
61. and specify the key range over which you want arpeggio Chapter 2 Playing 4 Press W move the cursor to Motif and specify the order in which the notes of the chord will be sounded Note The available choices depend on the Style parameter setting For details refer to Arpeggio Style List p 268 5 Move the cursor to Beat Pattern then change the rhythm note The available choices depend on the Style parameter setting For details refer to Arpeggio Style List p 268 6 Press W move the cursor to Accent Rate and specify the groove ratio A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel 7 Move the cursor to Shuffle Rate and specify the swing rate With a setting of 50 the notes will be spaced evenly As the value increases the note timing will have more of a swing feel 8 Press W move the cursor to Key Velocity and specify the strength with which the notes of the chord will be sounded When REAL is selected the velocity at which the notes are actually played will be used With a setting of 1 127 the specified velocity value will be used regardless of the force with which you play the chord 9 When playing in Layer Performance move the cursor to Zone and specify the Zone linked to the part playing arpeggios Note Arpeggios will be played only in the Zone and linked Part specified here Chords will sound exactly as played in othe
62. or P to move the cursor to the parameter you re going to modify 5 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to change the parameter value 6 When you finish making settings press EXIT to return to the previous PLAY page An asterisk will be displayed at the left of the Patch Rhythm Set Performance group This indicates that the Patch Rhythm Set Performance settings have been modified Oo vov you select another Patch Rhythm Set Performance in the group with an asterisk the modified Patch Rhythm Set Performance settings will be lost To keep these modified settings perform the save operation p 164 114 Functions of Parameters The functions of Multi effects parameters are explained according to the display arrangement MFX TYPE PERFORM Ture Source HFa TvVPERBI STEREO ED IFEFFDFH Type Multi Effects Type Use this parameter to select from among the 63 available Multi effects For details on Multi effects parameters refer to Multi Effects Types p 117 Source Multi Effects Source Selects the Multi effects parameter settings that will be used by the Performance If you wish to use the Performance settings select PERFORM If you wish to use the settings of the Patch Rhythm Set assigned to one of the Parts select the Part number Mi If you have selected the Part number here the Part number will be displayed in the upper left of the MFX parameter setting display of Perfo
63. p 241 Value MFX OUTPUT A B INDIV 1 4 0 127 0 127 0 127 1 2 C3 63 63 A B 0 127 0 127 0 127 OFF CHORUS DELAY A B 0 127 MAIN REV MAIN REV OFF REVERB SRV ROOM SRV HALL SRV PLATE A B 0 127 OFF CC01 95 except 32 PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL2 SYS CTRL3 SYS CTRL4 Refer to Multi Effects Types p 117 Refer to Chorus Parameters p 248 Refer to Reverb Parameters p 249 234 4454 CONTROL Group p 76 Display PATCH KEY MODE PATCH PORTAMNT CTRL Rx MIDI TMT CTRL amp BENDER MATRIX CTRL SRG MATRIX CONTROL1 MATRIX CONTROL2 MATRIX CONTROL3 MATRIX CONTROL4 LFO2 PITCH ENV TVF ENV TVA ENV Parameter Assign Legato Legato Retrigger Sw Time Mode Type Start Bender Expression Pan Mode Hold 1 Redamper Envelope Mode TMT Ctrl Sw Bend Range Control 1 Control 2 Control 3 Control 4 Parameter List Key assign Solo legato switch Legato retrigger switch Portamento switch Portamento time Portamento mode Portamento type Portamento start pitch Receive pitch bend switch Receive expression switch Receive pan mode Receive hold 1 switch Redamper switch Envelope mode TMT control switch Bend range down Bend range up Matrix control source 1 Matrix control source 2 Matrix control source 3 Matrix control source 4 Dest Sns Tone Dest Sns Tone Dest Sns Tone Dest Sns Tone Matrix contro Matrix contro
64. p9Aro281 LOY JO pe1nooexe si JoJsUeJ eje u uA SPUSULIL LAW J Uu A I Se peziuDooeH Z lqelo l s SI XO 1 bs ZZ1 21 OOxxOx 2t 9zt OZL O x OOxOOx O 821 1 ON Wesbold Zel 0 RAER JequinN end O O gS 891 NdH O O LOL OOL aS HS1 NdHN x X 66 86 p g J9 joquoo esodind eJ9u8t ve O O S6 v9 LE 1 2 Jejo quo9 sodind ej9u9t z 99 O O 96 9 1 1 Jeseud x O S6 3 Ss9 99 x O v6 Sjoojjo esodind eeuec smiou2 O O 6 OJOUJO9J X O 266 r 1299je esodund eeuec quency O O 16 JO1JUOD ojueuieuog O O v8 g J9j 0Jjuoo esodind ejeuar J8 91 euo1 O o 8 Z 49 O3u09 esodind eyeuac J8 91 euo1 O o zg 9 J9j 0Jju09 sodind ejeuar I8A 7 Z euo1 O O I8 G Jo oJ1uo9 sodind jeJ8u o I8A 7 uol O O 08 Aejap qA r O O 82 udeporJqiA vs O O 44 ayes OAA v O O 92 euin Aeooq v O O S HORNO O O t eui y0e1lV O O Saul eseo oH O O eZ eseyu uieis S Buisues eAnoy HO SO9ION IIV HO UO e907 SJO JONUOD v JOSEY HO punoS Ily spueululo5 39019 1senbeg eun josjeg Buos uonisog Buos L Spo S ON soDesso N xny Ol BOY uj ls sS UOWWWOD ul9 s S oAISn 9X3 ul8 s S Bueuo wesbOld 297 Specifications XV 88 128 Voice Expandable Synthesizer Conforms to General MIDI 2 System Keyboard 88 keys Full weighted w
65. procedure refer to Saving to Internal Memory p procedure refer to Saving to Internal Memory p 164 164 The Compare Function The Compare Function The Compare function allows you to play the Patch The Compare function allows you to play the Rhythm currently stored in the selected memory location so that Set currently stored in the selected memory location so you can make sure you really want to overwrite it To that you can make sure you really want to overwrite it play the Patch of the writing destination press UNDO To play the Rhythm Set of the writing destination press COMPARE to access the PATCH COMPARE page You UNDO COMPARE to access the RHYTHM can select the writing destination Patch in this display as COMPARE page You can select the writing destination well After selecting the desired Patch return to the Rhythm Set in this display as well After selecting the previous page by pressing UNDO COMPARE or Rhythm Set return to the previous page by pressing EXIT UNDO COMPARE or EXIT PATCH Humber CCOMPHARE J RHYTHM Humber CCOMPARE J COMPARE JUserihej cUser Patch 3 COMPARE User hej cUser REhethm 3 Writing destination Patch group number name Writing destination Rhythm Set group number name Note Note The Patch auditioned using the Compare function The Rhythm Set auditioned using the Compare may sound slightly different than when it is played function may sound slightly different than when it is norm
66. rr 00H 7FH 0 600 cents 10H model ID 2 XV 88 pp 4 LFO Filter Depth 11H command ID RQ1 rr 00H 7FH 0 2400 cents aaH address MSB pp 5 LFO Amplitude Depth bbH address rr 00H 7FH 0 100 ccH address F7H EOX End Of Exclusive ddH address LSB ssH size MSB OScale Octave Tuning Adjust tH size Status Data byte Status uuH size FOH 7EH 7FH 08H 08H ffH ggH hhH ssH F7 vvH size LSB sum checksum Byte Explanation F7H EOX End Of Exclusive FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message The size of data that can be transmitted at one time is fixed for each type of data And 7FH Device ID Broadcast data requests must be made with a fixed starting address and size Refer to the address 08H Sub ID 1 MIDI Tuning Standard and size given in Parameter Address Map p 279 08H Sub ID 2 scale octave tuning 1 byte form For the checksum refer to p 294 ffH Channel Option byte 1 Not received when the Rx Sys Excl parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI is OFF bits 0 to 1 channel 15 to 16 bit 2 to 6 Undefined ggH Channel byte 2 bits 0 to 6 channel 8 to 14 hhH Channel byte 3 bits 0 to 6 channel 1 to 7 ssH 12 byte tuning offset of 12 semitones from C to B 00H 64 cents 40H 0 cents equal temperament 7FH 63 cents F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Appendices 275 MIDI Implementation O Data set 1DT1 12H Status Data byte Status FOH 41H dev 00H 10H 12H aaH bbH
67. set you can view the programs that are being broadcast by different stations In the same way MIDI also allows a device to select the information intended for that device out of the variety of information that is being transmitted to it The cable from the antenna carries the TV signals from many broadcast stations Station A Station B Uu The TV is set to the channel of the station you wish to watch MIDI uses sixteen channels 1 through 16 Set the receiving device so that it will receive only the channel that it needs to receive Example Set the XV 88 to send Channel 1 and Channel 2 then set sound module A to receive only Channel 1 and sound module B only Channel 2 With this setup you can get an ensemble performance with for example a guitar sound from sound module A and bass from sound module B MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI THRU Transmit channel 1 2 Receive channel 1 Sound Wm w MIDI keyboard Sound Receive channel 2 Module fo SS 52 n When used as a sound module the XV 88 can receive on up to sixteen MIDI channels Sound modules like the XV 88 which can receive multiple MIDI channels simultaneously to play different sounds on each channel are called multi timbral sound modules 269 MIDI Implementation Model XV 88 128 Voice Expandable Synthesizer The Performances Rhythms and P
68. set the Clock Source parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH TEMPO to SYSTEM set the Clock Source parameter SYSTEM COMMON SYSTEM SETUD to INT and specify the System tempo with the System Tempo parameter SYSTEM COMMON SYSTEM SETUP When synchronizing to the tempo of the connected MIDI sequencer set the Clock Source parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH TEMPO to SYSTEM and set the Clock Source parameter SYSTEM COMMON SYSTEM SETUP to MIDI Although there are no MIDI messages for LFO 1 through TVA Envelope they can be used as Matrix Controllers In this case you can change the Tone settings in realtime by playing Patches Select SYS CTRL1 4 if you want to use the controllers globally for the entire XV 88 MIDI messages used as System Controllers 1 4 are set with the Control 1 4 parameters SYSTEM CONTROL SYS CTRL ASSIGN 1 2 p 173 o Oe s are parameters that determine whether or not Pitch Bend Controller Number 11 Expression and Controller Number 64 Hold 1 are received p 77 When these settings are ON and the MIDI messages are received then when any change is made in the settings of the desired parameter the Pitch Bend Expression and Hold 1 settings also change simultaneously If you want to change the targeted parameters only then set these to OFF There are parameters that determine whether or not specific MIDI messages are received for each MIDI channel p 52 When a Patch with Matrix Control settings is assi
69. settings will cause the pitch to be higher than the standard pitch and negative settings will cause it to be lower n T1 T2 TS T4 Pitch Modifying the Brightness of a Sound with a Filter TVF Here you can make settings for the TVF Time Variant Filter This allows you to modify the brightness or thickness of the sound changing the timbre of the Tone TVF FILTER 1 TUF ET sre Cutoff Resonance Kesfollow FILTER 4 LFEI 15 B B Type Filter Type Selects the filter type A filter is a function that cuts off a specific frequency band to change a sounds brightness thickness and other qualities OFF No filter is used LPF A Low Pass Filter reduces the volume of frequencies above the Cutoff frequency Cutoff parameter in order to round off or un brighten the sound This is the most common filter used in synthesizers BPF A Band pass filter reduces the volume of frequencies below and above the cutoff frequency range This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds HPF A High Pass Filter reduces the volume of the frequencies below the cutoff frequency This is suitable for creating percussive sounds emphasizing their higher ones PKG A Peaking Filter emphasizes frequencies around the cutoff frequency by raising their level You can use this to create wah wah effects by employing an LFO to change the cutoff frequency cyclically 87 Chapter 5 Creating Patches LPF2 Low Pass Filter 2 Altho
70. to specify the Performance Patch or Rhythm Set number of the destination of writing HINT When saving the Patch or Rhythm Set you can check the save destination Patch or Rhythm Set the Compare function p 164 g Press ENTER If Internal Write Protect is turned off the save operation will be executed 164 6 If Internal Write Protect p 188 is turned on the following display will appear Change the ON setting to OFF and press ENTER Internal Write Protect will be turned off and you will return to the display of step 3 Press ENTER once again to execute the save operation WRITE I PROTECT MEMO Internal Write Protect is automatically turned ON when Internal Write Protect OH the XV 88 s power is turned on When Changing the Settings for the Patch or Rhythm Set Assigned to a Part in a Performance After changing the settings for the Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part in a Performance if you then try to save the Performance without first saving the changes in the settings the following display appears PERFORM Bhulite Edited Patch Rhathm WRITE I YES CEHTERI HO CEITI If you want to keep the Patch or Rhythm Set settings press ENTER the PATCH WRITE or RHYTHM WRITE page is displayed then after saving the Patch or Rhythm Set the PERFORM WRITE page is displayed save the Performance Comparing with the Save Destination Patch Compare Function Before you save a Patch you c
71. volume and pan of the entire Patch PATCH NAME FATCH Pli2z8vo0icePra J MAME 1 CSHIFTI You can assign a name of up to 12 characters to the Patch cS For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 28 PATCH CATEGORY Category HC PIAWOC PHOS FHTCH t CATEGOR Category Patch Category Specifies the type category of the Patch The Patch Finder function uses this setting It also determines the phrase that will be sounded when using the Phrase Preview function cS For details on the possible category names refer to p 31 Chapter 5 Creating Patches PATCH LVL amp PAN Patch level amp Pan FATCH f Level Pa n Analog Feel LULEPAH 1 127 B B Level Patch Level Specifies the volume of the Patch HINT You can specify the level of each Tone in a Patch using the Level parameter PATCH TVA TV A p 90 Pan Patch Pan Specifies the pan of the Patch A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right HINT You can specify the pan setting for each Tone using the Pan parameter PATCH TVA TVA p 90 Analog Feel Analog Feel Depth Specifies the depth of 1 f modulation that is to be applied to the Patch 1 f modulation is a pleasant and naturally occurring ratio of modulation that occurs in a babbling brook or rustling wind By adding this 1 f modulation you can simulate the natural instability characteristic of an analog synthesizer PAT
72. 0 0 0 0 33 101 sum 101 sum 128 0 quotient 101 remainder checksum 128 101 remainder 27 1BH This means that F0 41 10 00 10 11 20 02 22 00 00 00 00 21 1B F7 is the message should be sent lt Example 3 gt Getting Temporary Performance data RQ1 cf This operation is the same as Data Transfer function in Utility mode with PERFORM Type parameter and TEMP PATCH Source parameter options According to the Parameter Address Map p 279 the start address of Temporary Performance is assigned as following 10 00 00 00H Temporary Performance Common 10 00 20 00H Temporary Performance Part 1 1000 2F 00H Temporary Performance Part 16 As the data size of Performance Part is 00 00 00 21H summation of the size and the start address of Part 16 at Temporary Performance will be 10 00 2F OOH 00 00 00 21H 10 00 2F 21H And the size that have to be got should be 10 00 2F 21H 10 00 00 00H 00 00 2F 21H Therefore the system exclusive message should be sent is F0 41 10 0010 41 10 00 00 00 00 00 2F 21 F7 02 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 3 Device ID 17 4 Model ID XV 88 5 Command ID RO1 6 End of Exclusive Calculating the checksum as shown in Example 2 gt we get a message of F0 41 10 00 10 11 10 00 00 00 00 00 2F 21 20 F7 to be transmitted Example 4 gt Getting data RQ1 at once Temporary Performance data Temporary
73. 0 25 seconds 60 240 0 25 seconds 4 eighth note is selected for the Form parameter this setting will be ignored Detune LFO Rate Detune LFO Part Detune makes subtle changes in the LFO cycle rate Rate parameter each time a key is pressed Higher settings will cause greater change KeySync LFO Key Sync Sets whether you want the LFO cycle to start in sync with the timing of a key press ON or not OFF 83 Chapter 5 Creating Patches LFO1 LFO2 FADE 1 LF lif FADE 1 Fade Mode Fade Time DH IH B Fade Mode LFO Fade Mode Specifies how the LFO will be applied IE After referring to How to Apply the LFO p 84 change the setting until the desired effect is achieved Fade Time LFO Fade Time Specifies the time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the maximum minimum TS After referring to How to Apply the LFO p 84 change the setting until the desired effect is achieved LFO 1 LFO2 DELAY 1 LF lf Delay Time Delas Kesfollow DELAY 1 B Delay Time LFO Delay Time Delay Time LFO Delay Time specifies the time elapsed before the LFO effect is applied the effect continues after the key is pressed or released After referring to How to Apply the LFO p 84 change the setting until the desired effect is achieved HINT When using violin wind or certain other instrument sounds in a performance rather than having vibrato added immedi
74. 04 71 3F 41 7B F7 to be transmitted 294 MIDI Implementation EThe Scale Tune Feature address 40 1x 40 E ASCII Code Table The scale Tune feature allows you to finely adjust the individual pitch of the notes from C Patch Name and Performance Name etc of MIDI data are described the ASCII through B Though the settings are made while working with one octave the fine code in the table below adjustments will affect all octaves By making the appropriate Scale Tune settings you can obtain a complete variety of tuning methods other than equal temperament As examples three possible types of scale setting are explained below p char p E cher p E Char p yP 8 P 4 32 20H SP 64 40H e 96 60H 33 21H i 65 41H A 97 61H a O Equal Temperament 34 22H 66 42H B 98 62H b This method of tuning divides the octave into 12 equal parts It is currently the most widely 35 23H 67 43H c 93 63H e i pA 7 36 24H 68 44H D 100 64H d used form of tuning especially in occidental music On the XV 88 the default settings for 37 25H 69 45H E 101 65H e the Scale Tune feature produce equal temperament 38 26H 20 46H E 102 66H f 39 27H 71 47H G 103 67H g 40 28H 72 48H H 104 68H h O Temperament Tonic of 41 29H 73 49H I 105 69H i Just Te perame t once o C 42 2AH x 74
75. 04 C5 C6 C7 Key add dud ul PCH ENVELOPE Pitch Envelope l 1 PCH Derth U Sers Time Kesfollow EMWELOPE gl gl B i PCH U T 1 J T4 La EHUELUOPEAR al B 1 PCH Til T2 T3 T4 Lil L2 L3 L4 EHJELOFE P B B Bl Bl B BI B Here you can make pitch envelope settings changes in pitch over time Depth Pitch Envelope Depth Adjusts the effect of the Pitch Envelope Higher settings will cause the pitch envelope to produce greater change Negative settings will invert the shape of the envelope V Sens Pitch Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to control the depth of the pitch envelope If you want the pitch envelope to have more effect for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want the pitch envelope to have less effect for strongly played notes set this to a negative value Chapter 5 Creating Patches Time Keyfollow Pitch Envelope Time Keyfollow Use this parameter when you want the keyboard location of notes to affect times T2 T4 of the pitch envelope Based on the pitch envelope times for the C4 key positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times and negative settings will cause them to have increasingly longer times Higher settings result in more change Pitch Envelope Time 1 Velocity
76. 073 Cyber Swing 4 POLY 009 Piano AirPad 5 POLY 073 Lush Strings 4 POLY 010 RingE Piano 4 POLY 074 Keep 2 POLY 010 ChoraLeader 8 POLY 074 Strings4Film 6 POLY 011 Soap Opera 1 POLY 075 Resojuice 2 MONO 011 SparklePiano 6 POLY 075 Marcato Str 4 POLY 012 Dirty Organ 3 POLY 076 B ond moov 3 POLY 012 RetroRhodes 3 POLY 076 End Titles 4 POLY 013 Surf s Up 2 POLY 077 Dist TB 303 2 MONO 013 Fat Rhodes 3 POLY 077 ChmbrQuartet 4 POLY 014 Organesque 3 POLY 078 Temple of JV 4 POLY 014 Rhodes Trem 2 POLY 078 ChamberSect 4 POLY 015 pp Harmonium 1 POLY 079 Planet Asia 4 POLY 015 PhaserDyno 3 POLY 079 FullChmbrStr 6 POLY 016 PieceOfCheez 1 POLY 080 Afterlife 3 POLY 016 Hit Rhodes 3 POLY 080 Tape Strings 2 POLY 017 Harpsy Clav 2 POLY 081 Trancing Pad 2 POLY 017 SweetTynes 4 POLY 081 Henry VIII 8 POLY 018 Exotic Velo 4 POLY 082 Pulsatronic 3 POLY 018 PlukRhodes 3 POLY 082 Prelude 4 POLY 019 HolidayCheer 4 POLY 083 Cyber Dreams 3 POLY 019 Rhodes Trip 2 POLY 083 Str amp Brs Orch 7 POLY 020 Morning Lite 2 POLY 084 Warm Pipe 1 MONO 020 AmbiRhodes 4 POLY 084 Hornz 5 POLY 021 Prefab Chime 3 POLY 085 Pure Pipe 2 POLY 021 Rholitzer 3 POLY 085 TudorFanfare 4 POLY 022 Belfry Chime 3 POLY 086 SH 2000 2 MONO 022 Wurlie 2 POLY 086 ChamberPlyrs 4 POLY 023 Stacc Heaven 4 POLY 087 X Whistle 3 POLY 023 FM Delight 2 POLY 087 Flute Clari 2 POLY 024 2 2BellPad 4 POLY 088 Jay VeeSolo 3 POLY 024 Cutter Clav 2 POLY 088 Orch Reeds 3 POLY 025 Far East 4 POLY 089 ProgressoLld 4 MONO 025 Mute C
77. 1 2 048 Reed Organ 1 0 21 112 ChorusAahs 2 1 176 Space Voice 2 0 92 240 Car Pass 1 3 049 Puff Organ 2 1 113 Voice Oohs 1 0 54 177 ltopia 2 1 241 Car Crash 2 4 050 AccordionFr 2 0 22 114 Humming 2 1 178 Bowed Glass 3 0 93 242 Siren 1 5 051 Accordion It 2 1 115 SynVox 1 0 55 179 Metal Pad 3 0 94 243 Train 1 6 052 Harmonica 1 0 23 116 Analog Voice 1 1 180 Halo Pad 2 0 95 244 Jetplane 2 7 053 Bandoneon 2 0 24 117 OrchestraHit 2 0 56 181 Sweep Pad 1 0 96 245 Starship 2 8 054 Nylon str Gt 1 0 25 118 Bass Hit 2 1 182 Ice Rain 2 0 97 246 Burst Noise 2 9 055 Ukulele 1 1 119 6th Hit 2 2 183 Soundtrack 2 0 98 247 Applause 2 0 127 056 Nylon Gt o 2 2 120 Euro Hit 2 3 184 Crystal 2 0 99 248 Laughing 1 1 057 Nylon Gt 2 2 3 121 Trumpet 1 0 57 185 Syn Mallet 1 1 249 Screaming 1 2 058 Steel str Gt 1 0 26 122 Dark Trumpet 1 1 186 Atmosphere 2 0 100 250 Punch 1 3 059 12 str Gt 2 1 123 Trombone 1 0 58 187 Brightness 2 0 101 251 Heart Beat 1 4 060 Mandolin 2 2 124 Trombone 2 1 1 188 Goblin 2 0 102 252 Footsteps 1 5 061 Steel Body 2 3 125 Bright Tb 1 2 189 Echo Drops 1 0 4103 253 Gun Shot 1 0 128 062 Jazz Gt 1 0 27 126 Tuba 1 0 59 190 Echo Bell 2 1 254 Machine Gun 1 1 063 Pedal Steel 1 1 127 MutedTrumpet 1 0 60 191 Echo Pan 2 2 255 Lasergun 1 2 064 Clean Gt 1 0 28 128 MuteTrumpet2 1 1 192 Star Theme 2 0 104 256 Explosion 2 3 Voice number of voice LSB Bank Select LSB MSB is all 121 PC Program Change Number Key Assign all POLY 257 Appendices Rhythm Set List
78. 1 4 Tone sese 87 TVA envelope time 1 4 Rhythm Tone 104 TVA envelope time 1 4 Tone 92 TVF envelope time 1 4 Rhythm Tone 103 TVF envelope time 1 4 Tone sse 90 308 Tempo Arpeggio tempo System sss 42 176 Arpeggio tempo Zone a 42 Patch tempo SAL Rhythm Set tempo 96 JempooSyne gun AAEE TT 98 Time Portamento timen sua ae a nuqa sas 76 Tone delay time Time Keyfollow Pitch envelope time keyfollow sss 87 TVA envelope time keyfollow 92 Time KE 2c te etate 89 TMT control switch 78 TMT Ctrl Sw 78 TMT CTRL amp BENDER 78 TMT KEY RANG 73 TMT VBL RANG itt ine ee peii ee i ee s 72 TMT VELO CONTROL uqusqa gua nennen 72 TMT Velocity Control TMT velocity control switch TODO suska ETT EET mau M IDE E DE How a Tone is organized turning a Tone on Off need ee eee aaa ss TONE DELAY ae nte tenente tnnt tentent Tone delay mode Tone delay Ameer Su hi au EE Tone level n agua reto eee e ERR E eat ras TONE NAME Tone pan TONE SELECT TONE SWITCH Tone switch Transfer GM Modera a aS anasu Transmitting data to an external MIDI device 185 Transmitting data to the XV 88 186 TRANSFER
79. 1 7 Velocity Sens TVA Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Specifies how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the depth of the TVA envelope Positive settings will cause the TVA envelope to have a greater effect for strongly played notes and negative settings will cause the effect to be less Velocity Curve TVA Envelope Velocity Curve Selects one of the following seven curves to specify how keyboard dynamics will affect the TVA envelope Set this to FIXED when the amount of TVA Envelope applied is not to be changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed e ZL TVA TIME ENV TVA Time Envelope Hua TUAH U T1 W T4 TIME EMS gl B Here you can make settings for the TVA envelope time variant changes in volume V T1 TVA Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want keyboard playing velocity to affect T1 Time 1 of the TVA envelope If you want T1 time to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value V T4 TVA Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want key release speed to influence the T4 Time 4 value of the TVA envelope If you want T4 time to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value TVA ENVELOPE B T UBE Ti T2 T3 T4 Li
80. 1 8 REGGAE 1 2 REFRAIN 1 2 PERC 1 4 WALKBS HARP BOUND RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA 1 4 MAMBO 1 2 CLAVE REV CLA GUILO AGOGO SAMBA TANGO 1 4 HOUSE 1 2 HINT If PORTA A 01 11 PORTA B 01 15 is selected as the Beat Pattern the Time parameter PATCH CONTROL PATCH PORTAMNT will control the speed of portamento p 76 Adjust the portamento time as appropriate for the playback tempo It is not necessary to turn portamento switch on Accent Rate Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the arpeggio A 100 setting will result in the most pronounced groove feel Shuffle Rate This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms With a setting of 50 the notes will sound at equal spacing As this value is increased the notes will become more bouncy as if they were dotted notes Shuffle Rate 50 Shuffle Rate 90 50 50 50 50 90 10 90 10 yore If the Beat Pattern setting is 1 4 shuffle will not be applied even if you increase the Shuffle Rate setting Key Velocity Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play If you want the velocity value to change according to how strongly you played each note set this to REAL If you want each note to have a fixed velocity regardless of how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to the desired value 1 127 Tempo Arpeggio Tempo Sets the speed of the arpeggio
81. 106 December Sky 4 POLY 042 Cathdr Harmn 5 POLY 106 XV Trumpet 3 POLY 043 Pilgrimage 4 POLY 107 Octapad 3 POLY 043 Morph Pad 8 FOLY 107 JupiterHorns 2 POLY 044 202 Rude Bs 2 MONO 108 JUNO Power 4 POLY 044 Air Pad 3 POLY 108 Solo SoprSax 1 MONO 045 2pole Bass 2 MONO 109 Spectrum Mod 4 POLY 045 SoftPadding 2 POLY 109 Solo Altosax 2 MONO 046 4pole Bass 2 MONO 110 Stringsheen 3 POLY 046 Warmth Pad 2 POLY 110 XV DynoTenor 3 POLY 047 Phaser MC 2 POLY 111 GR500 TmpDly 2 POLY 047 ClassicJPpad 2 POLY 111 Honker Bari 2 POLY 048 Miniphaser 2 POLY 112 Mod DirtyWav 3 POLY 048 Jupiter Str 2 POLY 112 Full Saxz Z POLY 049 Acid TB 1 MONO 113 Silicon Str 4 POLY 049 Fat Pad 4 POLY 113 SoaringHrns 6 POLY 050 FullOrchest 4 POLY 114 D50FantaPerc 3 POLY 050 GR700 Pad 3 POLY 114 Glass Orbit 3 POLY 051 Str Winds 4 POLY 115 Rotodreams 3 POLY 051 Paradise 3 POLY 115 5th Atm Aft 2 POLY 052 Flute 2080 2 POLY 116 Blue Notes 4 POLY 052 Moonchimes 3 POLY 116 Lo fi Sweep 2 POLY 053 Scat Flute 2 POLY 117 RiversOfTime 4 POLY 053 SusPed Swap 4 POLY 117 Modular Life 4 POLY 054 Sax Choir 4 POLY 118 Phobos 2 POLY 054 PhasingPad 2 POLY 118 Oscillations 4 POLY 055 Ballad Trump 4 POLY 119 2080 4 POLY 055 Ethereal Str 4 POLY 119 Combing 2 POLY 056 Sm Brass Grp 4 POLY 120 Unearthly 4 POLY 056 Velcropad 4 POLY 120 Rolling 5ths 4 POLY 057 Royale 4 POLY 121 Glistening 4 POLY 057 NothrnLights 4 POLY 121 Analogue Str 4 POLY 058 Brass Mutes 2 POLY 122 Sci Fi Str 3 POLY 058 Sun Dive 7 POLY 122 Lunar Strng
82. 115 If you are using this capability turn reception of these MIDI messages OFF If the receive switch is ON for these messages they will control their usual function in addition to their special function When assigning and playing a Patch to a Part in a Performance check the MIDI message settings for each MIDI channel p 52 If the MIDI channels for that part are set not to receive MIDI messages then the MIDI messages will not be received Expression Receive Expression Switch Specifies whether Expression messages will be received ON or not OFF Pan Mode Receive Pan Mode Specifies how Pan messages will be received CONTINUOUS Whenever Pan messages are received the stereo position of the Tone will be changed KEY ON The pan of the Tone will be changed only when the next note is played If a pan message is received while a note is sounding the panning will not change until the next key is pressed vt The channels cannot be set so as not to receive Pan messages Hold 1 Receive Hold 1 Switch Specifies whether Hold 1 messages will be received ON or not OFF Y If NO SUSTAIN is selected for Envelope Mode parameter PATCH CONTROL CTRL Rx MIDI this setting will have no effect 77 Chapter 5 Creating Patches Redamper Redamper Switch When a Hold 1 message is received after a key was released but before the sound has completely decayed this setting specifies whether or not the soun
83. 127 l l l 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES 00 56 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 2 tb 12 l 00 57 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 3 0 127 l 00 OC Oaaa aaaa Tone Dry Send Level 0 127 00 58 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 4 0 127 I 00 OD Oaaa aaaa Tone Chorus Send Level MFX 0 127 00 59 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Level 0 0 127 I 00 OE Oaaa aaaa Tone Reverb Send Level MFX 0 127 00 5A Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Level 1 0 127 I 00 OF Oaaa aaaa Tone Chorus Send Level non MFX 0 127 00 5B Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Level 2 0 127 I 00 10 Oaaa aaaa Tone Reverb Send Level non MFX 0 127 I 00 5C Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Level 3 0 127 I 00 11 0000 aaaa Tone Output Assign 0 12 00 5D Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Level 4 0 127 l l l MFX A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt E 1 2 3 4 5 lt XV 3080 5080 gt 6 XV 3080 5080 00 5E 000a aaaa Bias Level 54 74 7 lt XV 5080 gt 8 XV 5080 100 100 l 00 5F Oaaa aaaa Bias Position 0 127 00 12 0000 000a Tone Receive Bender 0 1 l l C 1 G9 OFF ON 00 60 0000 00aa Bias Direction 0 3 I 00 13 0000 000a Tone Receive Expression 0 1 I I LOWER UPPER LOWER amp UPPER ALL l OFF ON 00 61 0000 Oaaa TVA Level Velocity Curve 0 7 00 14 0000 000a Tone Receive Hold 1 O Xy 11 l FIXED 1 7 l l l OFF ON 00 62 Oaaa aaaa TVA Level
84. 1271 B B Output Multi Effects Output Assign Adjusts the output destination of the sound that has passed through the Multi effects A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo Mb If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 169 Dry Multi Effects Dry Send Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through the Multi effects Chorus Multi Effects Chorus Send Level Adjusts the amount of Chorus for the sound that passes through Multi effects If you don t want to add the Chorus effect set it to 0 Reverb Multi Effects Reverb Send Level Adjusts the amount of Reverb for the sound that passes through Multi effects If you don t want to add the Reverb effect set it to 0 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Multi Effects Ty pes 33 ENHANCER FLANGER p 136 Multi Effects provides 63 types of effect This section ku ee DELE pz Ton explains the features of each Multi effects and the functions 35 CHORUS DELAY p 137 of the parameters 36 FLANGER DELAY p 138 37 CHORUSSFLANGER p 138 Nore 38 CHORUS DELAY p 139 _ with x A bi uei m 39 FLANGER DELA Y p 139 ifi messages Multi effects Controller oa rum items du simultaneously for 1 and a HORUS MANGER p 199 32 Settings in the MFX CTRL page will determine how 41 STEREO PHASER p 139 these parame
85. 156 Making Reverb Settings p 158 Distorted area of the Waveform changes V Shift in waveform by WG1 75 Chapter 5 Creating Patches Using Controllers to Change How Sounds Are Played CONTROL The parameters in this group determine how various controllers will affect the Patch and its Tones PATCH KEY MODE Patch Key Assign Mode FATCH I Hszsisn Lesato Lesato Fetrigder KEV MODES POL OFF OFF Assign Key Assign Specifies whether the Patch will play polyphonically POLY or monophonically MONO The MONO setting is effective when playing a solo instrument Patch such as sax or flute POLY Two or more notes can be played simultaneously MONO Only the last played note will sound Legato Solo Legato Switch Solo Legato is valid when the Assign parameter is set to MONO This setting specifies whether the Solo Legato function will be used ON or not OFF When the Legato parameter is ON pressing one key when another is already pressed causes the currently playing note s pitch to change to that of the newly pressed key while continuing to sound This can be effective when you wish to simulate performance techniques such as a guitarist s hammering on and pulling off strings Legato Retrigger Legato Retrigger Switch Legato Retrigger is enabled when the Assign parameter is set to MONO and the Legato parameter to ON The setting determines whether sounds are replayed ON or not OFF whe
86. 18 XV 5080 I I I I 64 63 l I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for F 0 127 l 00 3F 00 Performance Part Part 32 XV 5080 I I 64 463 l 00 40 00 Perrormance Keyboard Ld I 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for Ff 0 127 I 00 50 00 Performance Zone Channel 1 1 2 8 I 64 63 00 51 00 Performance Zone Channel 2 I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for G 0 127 E l l I 64 63 I 00 5F 00 Performance Zone Channel 16 I I 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for G 0 127 2 l 64 63 I 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for A 0 127 I I l 64 63 O1 3 1 Patch I 00 OA Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for A 0 127 I I l 64 63 i E I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa Scale Tune for B 0 127 Offset I I I i I 64 63 I Address Description I m H I 00 00 00 Patch Common 1 3 1 1 yaaa Ie Tore IUe I 00 02 00 Patch Common MFX 1 3 1 2 I 00 04 00 Patch Common Chorus 1 3 1 3 I 00 06 00 Patch Common Reverb 1 3 1 4 I 00 10 00 Patch TMT Tone Mix Table 1 3 1 5 I 00 20 00 Patch Tone Tone 1 1 3 1 6 I 00 22 00 Patch Tone Tone 2 I I 00 24 00 Patch Tone Tone 3 I I 00 26 00 Patch Tone Tone 4 I 279 MIDI Implementation O1 1 3 System Keyboard pe I I 00 OC 00aa aaaa Solo Part Select lt XV 5080 gt 0 32 I I OFF 1 16 17 32
87. 2 Use the f ion b lect the displ basic procedure se the function buttons to select the display group 3 Use 4 to select the desired setting page 4 Turn off the EDIT indicator 5 Use ZONE PART SELECT function button to select the Part 6 Use 4 P toselect a Parameter 7 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to modify the value fyou wish to move to a different display group turn on the EDIT indicator Adjusting the Volume of Level parameter PERFORM PART SETTING Each Part Adjusting the Pan of Pan parameter PERFORM PART SETTING Each Part 220 Quick Reference of Procedures Modifying Zone Settings basic procedure Turn on the ZONE indicator Use the function buttons to select the display group Use 4 W toselect the desired setting page Turn off the EDIT indicator Bode qe oed Use ZONE PART SELECT function button to select the Zone D Use D to select a Parameter 7 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to modify the value Ifyou wish to move to a different display group turn on the EDIT indicator Patch Mode Selecting the Patch Mode PLAY Page Press PATCH Selecting a Patch Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or numeric keys to select Selecting a Patch Group USER Press USER CD A H Press CARD A H PR A F H Press PRESET gt AIF H XP A D Press EXP
88. 2 Verb Tom Lo Verb Tom Hi Crash 1 Verb Tom Hi Ride 1 China Cym Ride Bell Tambourine 1 Crash 1 Cowbell Crash 1 Vibraslap Round Kick Side Stick 808 SN 808 Claps 808 SN 808 Kick 606 CI HiHat Tekno Hit 606 CI HiHat 808 Kick 606 Op HiHat Tekno Hit 808 Kick Crash 1 Tekno Hit Voice Breath MC500 Beep 1 MC500 Beep 2 R8 Click Pizz DIGI Bell 1 Rattles Ride Bell REV Tamb 1 Side Stick Ballad SN Hand Claps SN Roll Verb Tom Lo CI HiHat 5 Dry Tom Lo Pedal HiHat2 Verb Tom Lo Op HiHat 2 Dry Tom Lo Verb Tom Hi Crash 1 Dry Tom Hi Ride 2 China Cym Ride Bell Tambourine 1 Crash 1 Cowbell Crash 1 Vibraslap Bongo Hi Bongo Lo Cga Mute Hi Cga Open Hi Cga Open Lo Timbale Timbale AgogoBells AgogoBells Cabasa Up Maracas 2 2 Vibwave Low Pink NZ Kalimba Metal Wind Lead Wave Tin Wave AgogoBells Lite Kick AgogoBells Lite Kick AgogoBells Gtr Harm A Cga Mute Hi Cga Open Hi Cga Open Lo Timbale Timbale AgogoBells AgogoBells Cabasa Up Maracas Soft Pad A Long Guiro Long Guiro Claves Wood Block Wood Block Cuica Cuica Open Triangl Open Triangl Maracas Ice Rain Gtr Harm A Piano Thump Natural SN1 Hand Claps Natural SN1 808 SN PowerChord B Hybrid Kick2 PowerChord B Gt FretNoise Banjo B Slap Bass 1 Brush Swish Long Guiro Long Guiro Claves Wood Block Metronome 2 Cuica Cuica Open Triangl Open Triangl Cabasa Cut Spectrum Wind Chimes Claves 808 SN Verb Tom H
89. 2 1 202 Shanai 1 0 112 011 St Soft EP 2 1 075 Dist Rtm GTR 2 2 139 VeloBrass1 2 2 203 Tinkle Bell 3 0 113 012 FM SA EP 2 2 076 Gt Harmonics 1 0 32 140 SopranoSax 1 0 65 204 Agogo 1 0 114 013 Wurly 2 3 077 Gt Feedback 1 1 141 Alto Sax 1 0 66 205 Steel Drums 1 0 115 014 E Piano2 2 0 6 078 Acoustic Bs 1 0 33 142 Tenor Sax 2 0 67 206 Woodblock 1 0 116 015 Detuned EP2 2 1 079 FingeredBs 1 0 34 143 Baritone Sax 1 0 68 207 Castanets 1 1 016 St FM EP 2 2 080 Finger Slap 2 1 144 Oboe 2 0 69 208 Taiko 3 0 117 017 EP Legend 2 3 081 Picked Bass 1 0 35 145 English Hom 1 0 70 209 Concert BD 2 1 018 EP Phase 2 4 082 Fretless Bs 1 0 36 146 Bassoon 1 0 71 210 Melo Tom 1 1 0 118 019 Harpsichord 1 0 7 083 Slap Bass 1 1 0 37 147 Clarinet 1 0 72 211 Melo Tom2 1 1 020 Coupled Hps 2 1 084 Slap Bass 2 2 0 38 148 Piccolo 1 0 73 212 Synth Drum 2 0 119 021 Harpsi w 1 2 085 SynthBass1 1 0 39 149 Flute 1 0 74 213 808 Tom 2 1 022 Harpsi o 2 3 086 SynthBass101 1 1 150 Recorder 1 0 75 214 Elec Perc 1 2 023 Clav 1 0 8 087 Acid Bass 1 2 151 Pan Flute 1 0 76 215 Reverse Cym 1 0 120 024 Pulse Clav 1 1 088 Clavi Bass 2 3 152 Bottle Blow 2 0 77 216 GtFretNoise 1 0 121 025 Celesta 1 0 9 089 Hammer 2 4 153 Shakuhachi 2 0 78 217 Gt CutNoise 1 1 026 Glockenspiel 1 0 10 090 SynthBass2 2 0 40 154 Whistle 1 0 79 218 String Slap 1 2 027 Music Box 1 0 11 091 Beef FM Bass 2 1 155 Ocarina 2 0 80 219 Breath Noise 1 0 122 028 Vibraphone 2 0 12 092 RubberBass2 2 2 156 Square Wave 2 0 81 220 Fl Key Cl
90. 2 frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 Sens Sensitivity 0 127 Mid2 Q Middle 2 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Manual Manual 0 127 Mid2 Gain Middle 2 gain 15 15 dB Peak Peak 0 127 EON Output level uci Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Depth Depth 0 127 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz Level Output level 0 127 02 OVERDRIVE p 119 08 ROTARY p 122 Parameter Value Parameter Value Drive Drive 0 127 LowSlow Low frequency slow rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Level Output level 0 127 LowFast Low frequency fast rate 0 05 10 00 Hz LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB LowAccl Low frequency acceleration 0 15 Hi Gain High gain 15 15 dB Low Lvl Low frequency level 0 127 Amp Type Amp simulator type SMALL BUILT IN Hi Slow High frequency slow rate 0 05 10 00 Hz 2 STACK 3 STACK Hi Fast High frequency fast rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Pan Output pan L64 0 63R Hi Accl High frequency acceleration 0 15 Hi Lvl High frequency level 0 127 03 DISTO RTIO N p 1 20 Separation Separation 0 127 Speed Speed SLOW FAST Parameter Value Level Output level 0 127 Drive Drive 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 LowGain Low gain 15 415 dB 09 COMPRESSOR p 123 Hi Gain High gain 15 415 dB Parameter Value Amp Type Amp simulator type SMALL BUILT IN Attack Attack time 0 127 2 STACK 3 STACK Sustain Sustain 0 127 Pan Output pan L64 0 63R Post Gain Post gain 0 6 12 18 dB LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB 04 PHASER p 120 Hi Gain High gain 15 15 dB
91. 32 127 ASCII I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 6 32 127 I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I I I 32 127 ASCII I VELOCITY KEYFOLLOW TEMPO LFOl LFO2 I 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 7 32 127 I I PITCH ENV TVF ENV TVA ENV I I I 32 127 ASCII l 00 35 00aa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Destination 1 0 33 I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 8 32 127 I I I OFF f l 32 127 ASCII l PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 9 32 127 I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I I I 32 127 ASCII I I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 10 32 127 I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I I I 32 127 ASCII I I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I 00 OA Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 11 32 127 I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I I I 32 127 ASCII I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 12 32 127 I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I I I 32 127 ASCII I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I 00 0C Oaaa aaaa Patch Category 0 127 I 00 36 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Sens 1 1 127 I I I I l 63 63 I 00 OD 0000 000a Tone Type lt XV 5080 gt 0 1 I 00 37 OOaa aaaa Matrix
92. 4 Usea MIDI cable to connect the MIDI IN connector of the MIDI interface with the XV 88 s MIDI OUT connector Apple Macintosh series XV 88 Rear Panel MIDI COMPUTER THRU our IN LI e Modem or gt s Printer Port in V x The setting MIDI Interface Adapter is MIDI PC Super MPU64 XV 88 Rear Panel 5 3 MIDI COMPUTER 2999 999 c p s amp 3 G3 oT Ll ESO 225 USB H Connector e err NET TE E E E The setting is MIDI HINT The connection in Step 4 is not required when producing sounds only with the sound generator section of the XV 88 such as when playing back song data This connection does become necessary when performance data from the XV 88 s keyboard controller section is to be recorded with sequencer software However in this case you must also turn the XV 88 s Local switch to OFF and the Thru function of your software to ON p 211 210 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 Disconnecting the Keyboard from the Internal Sound Generator Local OFF The XV 88 contains a keyboard controller section and sound generating section packaged as a single unit This means that you can make a setting Local Switch on off that specifies whether or not the performance data from the XV 88 s keyboard will be transmit
93. 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 19 TRIPLE TAP DELAY p 129 Parameter Value Delay C Delay time center 200 1000 ms note Delay L Delay time left 200 1000 ms note Delay R Delay time right 200 1000 ms note Fbk Feedback level 98 98 Level C Center level 0 127 Level L Left level 0 127 Level R Right level 0 127 HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 415 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 20 QUADRUPLE TAP DELAY p 130 Parameter Value Delay 1 Delay time 1 200 1000 ms note Delay 2 Delay time 2 200 1000 ms note Delay 3 Delay time 3 200 1000 ms note Delay 4 Delay time 4 200 1000 ms note Level 1 Level 1 0 127 Level 2 Level 2 0 127 Level 3 Level 3 0 127 Level 4 Level 4 0 127 Fok Feedback level 98 98 HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 21 TIME CONTROL DELAY p 131 Parameter Value Delay Delay time 200 1000 ms Accel Acceleration 0 15 Fbk Feedback level 98 98 HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 Pan Output pan L64 0 63R LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Ga
94. 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 37 CHORUS FLANGER p 138 Parameter Cho Dly ChoRate Cho Dpt Cho Bal Flg Dly FlgRate Flg Dpt Flg Fbk Chorus pre delay time Chorus rate Chorus depth Chorus balance Flanger pre delay time Flanger rate Flanger depth Flanger feedback level Flanger Balance Flanger balance Level Output level Value 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 D100 0W D0 100W 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 98 98 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 38 CHORUS DELAY p 139 Refer to 35 CHORUS gt DELAY 39 FLANGER DELAY p 139 Refer to 36 F LANGER gt DELAY 40 CHORUS FLANGER p 139 Refer to 37 CHORUS FLANGER 41 STEREO PHASER p 139 Parameter Type Mode Pol Man Rate Depth Res X Fbk Step Rate Mix LowGain Hi Gain Level Phaser type Mode Polarity Manual Phaser rate Phaser depth Phaser resonance Cross feedback level Step rate switch Step rate Mix level Low gain High gain Output level Value 1 2 4 STAGE 8 STAGE INVERSE SYNCHRO 0 127 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 0 127 98 98 OFF ON 0 1 20 0 Hz note 0 127 15 415 dB 15 415 dB 0 127 42 KEYSYNC FLANGER p 140 Parameter Pre Dly Pre delay time Rate LFO rate Depth LFO depth Fbk Feedback Phase Phase Filter Filter type Cutoff Cutoff frequency Step Rate Step rate switch Step rate Keysync Keysync switch Thre Keysync threshold Keysync Phase Ke
95. ATIUM MFX PRM sake MEX udin MIDL GM Part MIDI channel MIDI connector 17 269 MIDI dataflow u gun uuu Sub awa te rae deve 212 MIDI group MIDI receive channel GM Pat eite associe eden ssh uY 195 Party ciet eret ie eee ede ei rette rio E eoe PT CULTE HER wA dede 52 MIDI EEIRU cormector ua aa irrita tenni tte Bleeds 204 MIDI thru function m MIDI transmit channel rennen 59 Mi x Parallel 5 a II a u repetere noa rene TR 169 Mno Pol Mno7PBO lyq2 A E ANE AA rco vette ineptis etie et MTM 197 Mod Modulation information GM Part sss 197 Modulation information Part sss 56 Receive modulation switch sse 52 Mode Initialize mode sees 185 Initialize mode GM 198 Portamento mode 76 Tone delay mode sse 82 MODIFY GM Part p 196 MULTI Multi effects Category audere e RENE e 118 Multi effects parameters T Multi effects settings ee Multi effects types a 117 Multi effects chorus send level Multi effects control channel essere 51 Multi effects control destination Multi effects control sensitivity a Multi effects control source a Multi effects controller
96. Adjusts the amount of Chorus for each Part If you don t want to add the Chorus effect set it to 0 Reverb Reverb Send Level Adjusts the amount of Reverb for each Part If you don t want to add the Reverb effect set it to 0 HINT When the Output Assign parameter is set to PATCH the output level settings for the Patch or Rhythm Set as well as the Part go into effect If you want the various level settings of the Patch Rhythm Set to be reflected as they are set the various Part levels to 127 maximum 113 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 5 Either rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set the value 6 Press EXIT to return to the PERFORM PLAY page An asterisk appears at the left of the Performance group on the display This shows Performance settings have been modified Oo x you select another Performance in the group with an asterisk the modified Performance settings will be lost To keep these modified settings perform the save operation p 164 Making Multi Effects Settings You can make the settings for Multi Effects used by Patches Rhythm Sets Performances Setting Procedure 1 After confirming that you are in Patch Rhythm Set Performance mode select the desired Patch Rhythm Set Performance p 29 p 35 p 39 2 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light and then press the EFFECTS function button 3 Press 4 or W to display the desired Edit page 4 Press
97. B 0034 Dyn Rhd mp A 0084 HarpsiWave A 0134 StlGtr mp C 0184 Strat Atk 0234 Pick Bass C 0035 Dyn Rhd mp B 0085 HarpsiWave B 0135 StlGtr mf A 0185 ODGtrA 0235 Fingerd Bs A 0036 Dyn Rhd mp C 0086 HarpsiWave C 0136 X StlGtr mf B 0186 OD Gtr B 0236 Fingerd Bs B 0037 Dyn Rhd mf A 0087 Jazz Organ 1 0137 StlGtr mf C 0187 OD Gtr C 0237 Fingerd Bs C 0038 Dyn Rhd mf B 0088 Jazz Organ 2 0138 StlGtr ff A 0188 OD Gtr A 0238 E Bass 0039 Dyn Rhd mf C 0089 Organ 1 0139 StlGtr ff B 0189 Heavy Gtr A 0239 P Bass 1 0040 Dyn Rhdff A 0090 Organ 2 0140 StlGtr ff C 0190 Heavy Gtr B 0240 P Bass 2 0041 Dyn Rhd ff B 0091 Organ 3 0141 StIGtr sld A 0191 Heavy Gtr C 0241 Stick 0042 Dyn Rhd ff C 0092 Organ 4 0142 StlGtr sld B 0192 Heavy Gtr A 0242 Fretless A 0043 Wurly soft A 0093 60 s Organ 0143 StlGtr sid C 0193 Heavy Gtr B 0243 Fretless B 0044 Wurly soft B 0094 60 s Organ2 0144 StlGtr Hrm A 0194 Heavy Gtr C 0244 Fretless C 0045 Wurly soft C 0095 60 s Organ3 0145 StlGtr Hrm B 0195 PowerChord A 0245 Fretless 2A 0046 Wurly hard A 0096 60 s Organ4 0146 X StlGtr Hrm C 0196 PowerChord B 0246 Fretless 2B 0047 Wurly hard B 0097 Full Organ 0147 Gtr Harm A 0197 PowerChord C 0247 Fretless 2C 0048 Wurly hard C 0098 Full Draw 0148 Gtr Harm B 0198 EG Harm 0248 UprightBs 1 0049 E Piano 1A 0099 Rock Organ 0149 Gtr Harm C 0199 Gt FretNoise 0249 UprightBs 2A 0050 E Piano 1B 0100 RockOrg1 AL 0150 Jazz Gtr A 0200 Syn Gtr A 0250 UprightBs 2B Appendices 263
98. B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit NOTICE For Canada This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Inf
99. Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the pitch shift sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the pitch shift sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 132 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 24 REVERB 25 GATED REVERB The Reverb effect adds reverberation to the sound Gate Reverb is a special type of reverb in which the simulating an acoustic space reverberant sound is cut off before its natural length L out Balance W Lin O L out Lin O J Balance W O b O R out Rin O 5 R out Rin Balance D Balance D Type Reverb Type Type Gated Reverb Type Select the type of Reverb effect Select the type of reverb ROOM1 dense reverb with short decay NORMAL conventional gate reverb ROOM sparse reverb with short decay REVERSE backwards reverb STAGE1 reverb with greater late reverberation SWEEP1 the reverberant sound moves from right to left STAGE2 reverb with strong early reflections SWEEP2 the reverberant sound moves from left to right HALL1 reverb with clear reverberance Pre Diy Pre Delay Time HALL2 reverb with rich reverberance Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins Pre Dly Pre Delay Time until the reverb sound is heard Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins Gate Time until the reverb sound is heard M Adjust the time from when the rever
100. D Beam controller OFF Neither will be controlled INT Only the internal sound generator will be controlled MIDI Only external sound generators will be controlled BOTH Both the internal sound generator and external sound generators will be controlled 176 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions Polarity D Beam Polarity Switches the polarity of the D Beam controller With a setting of REVERSE the direction of control for the D Beam controller will be inverted D BEAM RANGE D BEAM f Lower UFPer FAHGE 1 BI 127 Lower D Beam Range Lower Specifies the lower limit of the range of the D Beam controller Values below this setting will not be output Upper D Beam Range Upper Specifies the upper limit of the range of the D Beam controller Values above this setting will not be output Note It is not possible to set the lower limit value above the upper limit nor can you set the upper limit value below the lower limit D BEAM SENS D BEAM f D Beam Sensitivity SEHS I D Beam Sensitivity This sets the D Beam Controller s sensitivity The higher the value set the more readily the D Beam Controller goes into effect Ordinarily this is set to 5 Phrase Preview Settings PREVIEW Specifies how the phrase will play when you press PHRASE PREVIEW SYSTEM PREVIEW Preview Mode FHERSE SYSTEM FREEUIEN 1 Preview Mode Preview Sound Mode SINGLE The notes specif
101. D TIME TVF ENV R TIME 4 00 49 0000 aaaa I I I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I 0000 bbbb I I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I 0000 cccc I I 00 4C Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Sens 3 1 127 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 15 12768 52768 I I I 63 63 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 4D OOaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Destination 4 0 33 L 00 4D 0000 aaaa I I I I OFF I 0000 bbbb I I I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I 0000 cccc I I I I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 16 12768 52768 I I I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I I I 20000 420000 I I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH 4 00 51 0000 aaaa I I I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I 0000 bbbb I I I I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I 0000 ccce I I I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 17 12768 52768 I I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I I I 20000 20000 I I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 E 00 55 0000 aaaa I 00 4E Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Sens 4 1 127 I 0000 bbbb I I I I 63 63 I 0000 cccc I I I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 18 12768 52768 00 00 00 4F Total Size I I I I 20000 20000 4 00 59 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc
102. DEL ooo 900 ooo PERFORM JC Sea Template MAME 1 6 14 7 15 8 16 ooo ooo ooo 000 ooo 000 600 000 ooo A a switch between uppercase lowercase characters INS insert a space at the cursor location DEL delete the character at the cursor location Chapter 2 Playing Playing in Patch Mode The sounds used for an ordinary performance are called Patches Select a Patch before playing Selecting a Patch The XV 88 has eight Patch groups including the User group and Preset Groups A F and H with each group storing 128 Patches 256 in Preset H for a total of 1 152 Patches In addition to these you can also select Patches stored on memory cards SmartMedia What s more you can further expand your options by installing up to four optional Wave Expansion boards two SR JV80 two SRX Series enabling you to select from a huge assortment of available Patches USER This is the group inside the XV 88 which can be rewritten Patches you yourself create can be stored in this group The XV 88 includes 128 preset Patches p 253 CD A H Memory Card A H This is the group to accessed when using Patches stored on memory cards SmartMedia inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot You can also rewrite Patches you create Each bank A H holds 128 Patches meaning you can select from a maximum of 1 024 Patches wow Patches in CD A H cannot be selected if no memory card SmartMedia is inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot
103. Elec Kick 1 Side Stick Elec Snare 909 HandClap Elec Snare 2 Synth Drum 2 Close HiHat2 Synth Drum 2 Pedal HiHat2 Synth Drum 2 Open HiHat2 ith Drum Crash Cym 1 Synth Drum 2 Ride Cymbal ReverseCymbl Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo PC Program Change Number 005 PC 26 GM2 ANALOG High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Mix Kick TR 808 Kick 808 Rimshot 808 Snare 1 909 HandClap Elec Snare 3 808 Tom 2 TR 808 CHH 808 Tom 2 808 chh 808 Tom 2 TR 808 OHH 808 Crash 808 Tom 2 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym 808cowbe Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo 808 Conga 808 Conga 808 Conga High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa 808marac ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro 808clave Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo 006 PC 33 GM2 JAZZ High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Jazz Kic
104. End Of Exclusive Theamount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 279 Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms 278 MIDI Implementation 3 Parameter Address Map OL enh Offset I I I Address Description I Transmission of marked address is divided to some packets For example ABH in I hexadecimal notation will be divided to 0AH and 0BH and is sent received in this nD ae Q0 pied Cn MEX IE order l 00 04 00 Rhythm Common Chorus 1 3 2 3 I 00 06 00 Rhythm Common Reverb 1 3 2 4 I 00 10 00 Rhythm Tone Key 21 1 3 2 5 I 00 12 00 Rhythm Tone Key 22 I E I sa Ti 1 XV 88 Model ID 00H 10H 01 38 90 Rhythm Tone Key 108 lt gt marked address valid on the XV 3080 5080 are ignored when the XV 88 receive O 1 1 1 System Common them s n Offset I I I Address Description I Start I I 00 00 0000 Oaaa Sound Mode 0 4 Address Description I I I l PERFORM PATCH GM1 GM2 GS I 2 E I E 00 01 0000 aaaa 00 00 00 00 System 1 1 I
105. F7H ccH ddH eeH ffH sum Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev Device ID dev 00H 1FH Initial value is 10H 00H Model ID 1 XV 88 0H Model ID 2 XV 88 2H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent bbH Address upper middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ccH Address lower middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ddH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent eeH Data the actual data to be sent Multiple bytes of data are transmitted in order starting from the address ffH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Theamount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 279 Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms Regarding the checksum please refer to p 294 Not received when the Rx Sys Excl parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI is OFF Status Data byte Status FOH 41H dev 42H 12H aaH bbH ccH F7H ddH eeH sum Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev Device ID dev 10H 42H Model ID GS 2H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starti
106. FRANCE TEL 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Lauttasaarentie 54 B Fin 00201 Helsinki FINLAND TEL 9 682 4020 GERMAN Y Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road Patras 26442 GREECE TEL 061 043 5400 HUNGARY Intermusica Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland Audio House Belmont Court Donnybrook Dublin 4 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 2603501 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 273 0074 POLAND P P H Brzostowicz UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Tecnologias Musica e Audio Roland Portugal S A Cais Das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 PORTO PORTUGAL TEL 022 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 RO 4200 Gheorghehi TEL 095 169 5043 RUSSIA MuTek 3 Bogatyrskaya Str 1 k 1 107 564 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 169 5043 SPAIN Roland Electronics de Espa a S A Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 308 1000 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN
107. Feedback Feedback O o Balance D When Feedback Mode is CROSS L in L in Feedback Feedback Rin Balance D Delay L Delay Time Left Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay R Delay Time Right Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard Fbk Feedback Level Adjust the proportion 76 of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Mode Feedback Mode Select the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay and the right delay sound into the left delay Phase L Feedback Phase Left Select the phase of the left delay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted Phase R Feedback Phase Right Select the phase of the right delay sound NORMAL Phase is not changed INVERT Phase is inverted HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS LowGain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adju
108. H 0 OOH 32 20H 64 40H 96 60H 1 01H 33 21H 65 41H 97 61H 2 02H 34 22H 66 42H 98 62H 3 03H 35 23H 67 43H 99 63H 4 04H 36 24H 68 44H 100 64H 5 05H Qu 25H 69 45H 101 65H 6 06H 38 26H 70 46H 102 66H 7 07H 39 27H 71 47H 103 67H 8 08H 40 28H 72 48H 104 68H 9 09H 41 29H 73 49H 105 69H 10 OAH 42 2AH 74 4AH 106 6AH 11 OBH 43 2BH TS 4BH 107 6BH 12 OCH 44 2CH 76 4CH 108 6CH 13 ODH 45 2DH 77 4DH 109 6DH 14 OEH 46 2EH 78 4EH 110 6EH 15 OFH 47 2FH 79 4FH 111 6FH 16 10H 48 30H 80 50H 112 70H 17 11H 49 31H 81 51H LIS 71H 18 12H 50 32H 82 52H 114 72H 19 13H 51 33H 83 53H 115 73H 20 14H 52 34H 84 54H 116 74H 21 15H 53 35H 85 55H 117 75H 22 16H 54 36H 86 56H 118 76H 23 17H 55 FHE 87 57H 145 77H 24 18H 56 38H 88 58H 120 78H 25 19H 57 39H 89 59H 121 79H 26 1AH 58 3AH 90 SAH 122 7AH 27 1BH 99 3BH 91 5BH 123 7BH 28 1CH 60 3CH 92 5CH 124 7CH 29 1DH 61 3DH 93 5DH 125 7DH 30 1EH 62 3EH 94 5EH 126 7EH 31 1FH 63 3FH 95 5FH 127 7FH D decimal H hexadecimal Decimal values such as MIDI channel bank select and program change are listed as one greater than the values given in the above table AT bit byte can express data in the range of 128 steps For data where greater precision is required we must use two or more bytes For example two hexadecimal numbers aa bbH expressing two 7 bit bytes would indicate
109. I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 16 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 43 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 4 12768 52768 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 0000 cccc E 00 14 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 17 12768 52768 l 0000 bbbb l I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 47 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 5 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc E 00 18 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 18 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I 20000 20000 0000 cece I 00 4B 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 6 12768 52768 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc j 00 1C 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 19 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 4F 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 7 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc E 00 20 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 20 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 8 12768 52768 00 00 00 53 Total Size I I I 20000 20000 E 00 24 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I O1 3 1 5 Patch TMT Tone Mix Table I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 9 12768 52768
110. I For instructions on how to connect up and set the MIDI receive channel in Patch Rhythm Set mode refer to Playing the XV 88 s Sound Generator from an External MIDI Device p 205 Oo x the Program Change numbers on your external MIDI device are referenced as values from 0 to 127 find the appropriate number by subtracting 1 from the number in the following correspondence chart On the XV 88 when just a Program Change message is received without receiving a Bank Select message only sounds within a group such as USER or PR A are changed Selecting Performances The MIDI messages transmitted by the external MIDI device will be received by the XV 88 to select Performances as shown in the following table Group Number Bank Select Program Change MSB LSB Number USER 001 064 85 00 001 064 CD A 001 064 85 32 001 064 CD H 001 064 85 39 001 064 PR A 001 032 85 64 001 032 PR B 001 032 85 65 001 032 In order to select a Performance the MIDI channel of the transmitting device must match the XV 88 s Control Channel parameter SYSTEM MIDI PERFORM MIDI p 169 In order to select the Patch or Rhythm Set of a Part the transmit channel must match the receive channel of the Part However if the Control Channel parameter and the receive channel of a Part have the same setting the Control Channel parameter setting will take priority so that messages received on this channel will select Performances Chapter 12 Realizing the P
111. I O1 3 1 2 Patch Common MFX 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 19 12768 52768 I I I 20000 420000 4 00 5D 0000 aaaa I Offset I I I 0000 bbbb I I Address Description I I 0000 cccc I I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 20 12768 52768 I 00 00 Oaaa aaaa MFX Type 0 127 I I I 20000 420000 I I I 0 72 4 00 61 0000 aaaa I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa MFX Dry Send Level 0 127 I 0000 bbbb I I 00 02 Oaaa aaaa MFX Chorus Send Level 0 127 I 0000 ccce I 00 03 Oaaa aaaa MEX Reverb Send Level 0 127 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 21 12768 52768 I 00 04 0000 00aa MFX Output Assign 0 3 I I 20000 20000 I I I A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt ES 00 65 0000 aaaa I I I 0000 bbbb I I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 1 Source 0 101 I 0000 ccce I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 22 12768 52768 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 l I I 20000 20000 I 00 06 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 1 Sens 1 127 L 00 69 0000 aaaa I I I 63 63 I 0000 bbbb I I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 2 Source 0 101 I 0000 ccce I I I OFF CCOl CC31 CC33 CC95 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 23 12768 52768 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 08 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 2 Sens 1 127 4 00 6D 0000 aaaa I I I I 6
112. I I I OFF ON I 0000 bbbb I 00 18 Oaaa aaaa TMT3 Keyboard Range Lower 0 127 I 0000 cccc I I I I C 1 UPPER l 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 4 12768 52768 00 19 Oaaa aaaa TMT3 Keyboard Range Upper 0 127 l l l 20000 20000 l LOWER G9 1 00 13 0000 aaaa 00 1A Oaaa aaaa TMT3 Keyboard Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 0000 bbbb I 00 1B 0aaa aaaa TMT3 Keyboard Fade Width Upper 0 127 I 0000 cccc 00 1C 0aaa aaaa TMT3 Velocity Range Lower 1 127 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 5 12768 52768 I I l 1 UPPER I I I 20000 20000 00 1D Oaaa aaaa TMT3 Velocity Range Upper 1 127 E 00 17 0000 aaaa l I I LOWER 127 I 0000 bbbb I 00 1E 0aaa aaaa TMT3 Velocity Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 0000 cccc I 00 1F 0aaa aaaa TMT3 Velocity Fade Width Upper 0 127 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 6 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 20 0000 000a TMT4 Tone Switch 0 1 E 00 1B 0000 aaaa I I I I OFF ON I 0000 bbbb I 00 21 Oaaa aaaa TMT4 Keyboard Range Lower 0 127 I 0000 cccc I I I I C 1 UPPER I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 7 12768 52768 l 00 22 Oaaa aaaa TMT4 Keyboard Range Upper 0 127 I I I 20000 20000 I l LOWER G9 Li 00 1F 0000 aaaa I 00 23 Oaaa aaaa TMT4 Keyboard Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 0000 bbbb I 00 24 Oaaa aaaa TMT4 Keyboard Fade
113. I I INT WAVE SRJV80 EXP SRX EXP I I 63 63 l SAMPLE XV 5080 00 7A Oaaa aaaa LFO1 Pan Depth 1 127 1 00 28 0000 aaaa 63 63 l 0000 bbbb l I 0000 ccce 00 7B 0000 aaaa LFO2 Wave Form 0 10 I 0000 dddd Wave Group ID 0 16384 I I SIN TRI SAW UP SAW DW SQR I I I OFF 1 16384 I I RND BEND UP BEND DW TRP S amp H IE 00 2C 0000 aaaa l l CHS 0000 bbbb 00 7C 0000 aaaa 0000 ccce 0000 bbbb LFO2 Rate 0 149 I 0000 dddd Wave Number L Mono 0 16384 I I 0 127 MUSICAL NOTES l l l OFF 1 16384 00 7E 0000 0aaa LFO2 Offset 0 ww Ay IE 00 30 0000 aaaa 100 50 0 50 100 0000 bbbb 00 7F Oaaa aaaa LFO2 Rate Detune 0 127 0000 ccce 01 00 Oaaa aaaa LFO2 Delay Time KO II 0000 dddd Wave Number R 0 16384 01 01 000a aaaa LFO2 Delay Time Keyfollow 54 74 l l l OFF 1 16384 l l 100 100 00 34 0000 00aa Wave Gain 0 9 31 01 02 0000 00aa LFO2 Fade Mode 0 3 I I I 6 0 6 12 dB I I ON IN ON OUT I 00 35 0000 000a Wave FXM Switch 0 1 I I I OFF IN OFF OUT l OFF ON 01 03 Oaaa aaaa LFO2 Fade Time 0 127 00 36 0000 00aa Wave FXM Color to 311 01 04 0000 000a LFO2 Key Trigger IU ce KT l l 1 4 l OFF ON 00 37 000a aaaa Wave FXM Depth 0 16 01 05 Oaaa aaaa LFO2 Pi
114. KEY ON I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 8 12768 52768 I I I I I 20000 20000 I 00 20 0000 00aa WMT Velocity Control 0 2 E 00 23 0000 aaaa I OFF ON RANDOM I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 9 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 IE 00 27 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 10 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 N Co 00 I I 00 21 0000 000a WMT1 Wave Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 00 22 0000 00aa WMT1 Wave Group Type 0 3 INT WAVE SRJV80 EXP SRX EXP SAMPLE lt XV 5080 gt nu 00 23 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT1 Wave Group ID 0 16384 I I I OFF 1 16384 E 00 27 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT1 Wave Number L Mono 0 16384 I I I OFF 1 16384 1 00 2B 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT1 Wave Number R 0 16384 I I I OFF 1 16384 j 00 2F 0000 OOaa WMT1 Wave Gain 0 3 I I I 6 0 6 12 dB I 00 30 0000 000a WMT1 Wave FXM Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 00 31 0000 00aa WMT1 Wave FXM Color 0 3 I I I 1 4 I 00 32 000a aaaa WMT1 Wave FXM Depth 0 16 I 00 33 0000 000a WMT1 Wave Tempo Sync 0 1 l l l OFF ON I 00 34 Oaaa aaaa WMT1 Wave Coarse Tune 16 112 I I I 48 448 I 00 35 Oaaa aaaa WMT1 W
115. Level LAN L Fade Lower Upper U Fade VELO CONTROL Velocity Control A a WELOt WAT Welocity Control COHTROL OFE WMT Velocity Control WMT Velocity Control Switch WMT Velocity Control determines whether a different Rhythm Tone is played ON or not OFF depending on the force with which the key is played velocity When set to RANDOM the Rhythm Set s constituent Rhythm Tones will sound randomly regardless of any Velocity messages WMT PAN A llIMT1T Fan Random Alternate FAH 1 B OFF OFF Pan Wave Pan This specifies the pan of the waveform A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right HINT The pan of the entire Rhythm Tone is set by the Pan parameter RHYTHM TVA TV A p 103 Random Random Pan Switch Use this setting to cause the waveform s panning to change randomly each time a key is pressed ON or not OFF The range of the panning change is set by the Random parameter RHYTHM TVA TV A p 103 Alternate Alternate Pan Switch This setting causes panning of the waveform to be alternated between left and right each time a key is pressed Set Alternate Pan Switch to ON to pan the Wave according to the Alternate parameter RHYTHM TVA TV A p 103 settings or to REVERSE when you want the panning reversed If you do not want the panning to change each time a key is pressed set this to OFF 99 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets WMT TUNE WMT Tune A
116. Multi effects controller p 115 5 Setting the Output Destination and Volume for the Sounds Passing Through the Multi Effects Select the output jack and set the output level volume of the sounds passing through the Multi effects You can also apply Chorus or Reverb to the sound that passes through Multi effects p 116 106 6 Making Chorus Settings Select the Chorus type to be used and set each of the parameters for the selected Chorus p 156 p 157 7 Setting the Output Destination and Volume for the Sounds Passing Through the Chorus Select the output jack and set the output level volume of the sounds passing through the Chorus You can also apply Reverb to the sound that passes through Chorus p 158 8 Making Reverb Settings Select the Reverb type to be used and set each of the parameters for the selected Reverb p 159 9 Setting the Output Destination and Volume for the Sounds Passing Through the Reverb Select the output jack and set the output level volume of the sounds passing through the Reverb p 160 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Audio Signal Flow The audio path of direct sounds or sounds that have been passed through the effects in Patch Rhythm Set mode is shown in the figure below Patch Rhythm Set w stereo signal mono signal Tone Rhythm Tone MFX l 2 92 Chapter 7 Output Assign p 108
117. N a nahua 14 29 PATCH GM Patb tuor nete uN et PERDER Y ass 196 Tayta oer ie aaa eM e Caveat dde she tae eut 53 Patch Category Sua a kuq aquy qu ente 31 How a Patch is organized 20 65 Patehgr6up Jaana N 29 Patch list cette eame e eb te isa yaaa 253 Patch parameters 69 233 Patch settings S nu una aa uu asss 66 Selecting a Patchic tiie ieee SEEE AREE Eneteia 29 PATCH CATEGORY iuret etienne e esa sore a erano 69 P atchi category i e eee rir ecce Duae een a 69 Patch clock source srren iiia 7 PATGH COMMON retener eite bene ebbe edes 70 PATCH COMPARE 165 181 183 PATCH FINDER 16 30 Patch finder eden reete cirea eene tee etn en eo eerie un tie Deas 30 PATCH FX COPY 183 PATCH INIT ss 185 PATCH KEY MODEL aus s aaa aa viec eere rey a gu 76 Patch level 70 PATCH LVL amp PAN aa aaa aasawa 70 PATCH MIDI 170 Patehitnode nhe ertet ua t eei as 24 Applying effects in Patch mode 106 Playing in Patch mode 29 PATCH MODIFY 71 PAT CEUINAME rogi nni tsei i o s a i E a asas 69 PATCH NAME CPY PATCH OCT amp TUNE Batty arn ies ee eee e PEE EE EEEa PATCH PLAY T J a eonte tee e P EE EE EEEa PATCH PORTAMNT Patch Remain ceno Sana uama ee e Pls 169 Patch remain switch sss 169 PATCH SCALE ER PATCH TEMPO U u enne tenentes 71 Pateh tempo mox ad RE RE
118. Of Exclusive This parameter affects drum instruments only O Controller Data Transmission Status Data byte Status This instrument can use exclusive messages to exchange many varieties of internal settings FOH 7FH 7FH 09H 03H OnH ccH ppH rrH F7H with other devices The model ID of the exclusive messages used by this instrument is 00H 10H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status O Data Request 1RQ1 11H 7FH ID number universal realtime message This message requests the other device to transmit data The address and size indicate the ZEH Device ID Broadcast type and amount of data that is requested 09H Sub ID 1 Controller Destination Setting When a Data Request message is received if the device is in a state in which it is able to oH Sub ID 2 Control Change transmit data and if the address and size are appropriate the requested data is transmitted Ont MIDI Channel 00 OF as a Data Set 1 DT1 message If the conditions are not met nothing is transmitted ccH Controller number 01 1F 40 5F ppH Controlled parameter status data byte status BE Controlled range FOH 41H dev 00H 10H 11H aaH bbH ccH F7H pp 0 Pitch Control ddH ssH ttH uuH vvH sum rr 28H 58H 24 24 semitones pp 1 Filter Cutoff Control Byte Remarks rr 00H 7FH 9600 9450 cents FOH Exclusive status pp 2 Amplitude Control 41H ID number Roland H SOURCE 02008 dev devdevice ID dev 10H 1FH 7FH pp 3 LFO Pitch Depth 00H model ID 1 XV 88
119. Output Level Adjust the output level Positive settings will emphasize boost the low LowGain Low Gain frequency range Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Hi Gain High Gain Positive settings will emphasize boost the low Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut frequency range Positive settings will emphasize boost the high Hi Gain High Gain frequency range Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Amp Type Amp Simulator Switch Type Positive settings will emphasize boost the high Chapter 7 Turns the Amp Simulator on off frequency range And adjust the type of guitar amp Amp Type Amp Simulator Switch Type SMALL small amp Turns the Amp Simulator on off BUILT IN single unit type amp And adjust the type of guitar amp 2 STACK large double stack amp SMALL small amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Tone Adjust the sound quality of the Overdrive effect Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Tone Adjust the sound quality of the Overdrive effect Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right 149 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 55 STEREO COM
120. Output Level Adjust the output level 37 CHORUS FLANGER This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in series Balance D Balance D Lin L out Balance W y Balance W Rin R out Balance D O Balance D Cho Diy Chorus Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard ChoRate Chorus Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Dpt Chorus Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Cho Bal Chorus Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Fig Diy Flanger Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard FigRate Hanger Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect Flg Dpt Hanger Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect Flg Fbk Flanger Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance Adjust the volume balance between the chorus sound and the chorus sound that is passed through the flanger With a setting of D100 0W only the chorus sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound that passes through the flang
121. POLY 072 Ooh Aah Mod 4 POLY 008 E Grand 1 POLY 072 Fantasia JV 4 POLY 009 Pianomonics 4 POLY 073 Perclnterval 8 POLY 009 MiIDled Grand 3 POLY 073 Jimmee Dee 4 POLY 010 Nylozzicato 3 POLY 074 Vocals Boys 6 POLY 010 Piano Blend 3 POLY 074 Heavenals 4 POLY 011 SearingLead 3 MONO 075 Fat Strings 3 POLY 011 West Coast 4 POLY 075 Mallet Pad 4 POLY 012 Square Roots 2 MONO 076 Str amp Brs Orch 7 POLY 012 PianoStrings 4 POLY 076 Huff N Stuff 3 POLY 013 Winky 8 POLY 077 ChamberPlyrs 4 POLY 013 Bs Pno Brs 4 POLY 077 Puff 1080 2 POLY 014 Atmospherics 4 POLY 078 Glass Orbit 3 POLY 014 Waterhodes 2 POLY 078 BellVox 1080 4 POLY 015 Soft Perky 5 POLY 079 The Andes 1 POLY 015 S A E P 3 POLY 079 Fantasy Vox 4 POLY 016 NewR amp RBrass 8 POLY 080 ClassicJPpad 2 POLY 016 SARhodes1 4 POLY 080 Square Keys 2 POLY 017 LunarStmgs 4 POLY 081 FullStBrass 5 POLY 017 SARhodes2 2 POLY 081 Childlike 4 POLY 018 LegatoBamboo 4 MONO 082 Punker 2 POLY 018 Stiky Rhodes 3 POLY 082 Music Box 3 POLY 019 WestEndBs 5 MONO 083 Pop Bass 1 POLY 019 Dig Rhodes 2 POLY 083 Toy Box 2 POLY 020 Marcato Str 4 POLY 084 Solo SoprSax 1 MONO 020 NylonEPiano 4 POLY 084 Wave Bells 4 POLY 021 Henry VIII 8 POLY 085 Fat Rhodes 3 POLY 021 Nylon Rhodes 4 POLY 085 Tria Bells 4 POLY 022 Chime Bells 4 POLY 086 X mod Sweep 1 POLY 022 Rhodes Mix 3 POLY 086 Beauty Bells 4 POLY 023 Morph Pad 8 POLY 087 XV DynoTenor 3 POLY 023 PsychoRhodes 2 POLY 087 Music Bells 2 POLY 024 Dirty Hit 4 POLY 088 Hybrid Nylon 3 POLY 024 Tremo Rho
122. Parameter 3 12768 52768 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc l IE 00 10 0000 aaaa 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 16 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 43 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 4 12768 52768 0000 bbbb I I I I 20000 20000 0000 cccc I E 00 14 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 17 12768 52768 l 0000 bbbb l I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 47 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 5 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I E 00 18 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 18 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 0000 cece I 00 4B 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 6 12768 52768 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc j 00 1C 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 19 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I E 00 4F 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 7 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I E 00 20 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 20 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I Ni I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 8 12768 52768 00 00 00 53 Total Size I I I 20000 20000 1 00 24 0000 aa
123. Part volume 0 127 P Pan Part pan L64 0 63R P Coarse Part coarse tune 48 48 semitone P Fine Part fine tune 50 50 cent P MODIFY Cutoff Part cutoff frequency offset 64 63 P Resonance Part resonance offset 64 63 P Attack Part attack time offset 64 63 P Release Part release time offset 64 63 P CONTROL BendRng Bend range 0 24 P Mono Poly Part mono poly MONO POLY P Porta Sw Time Part portamento switch time OFF ON 0 127 P INFO Group p 197 Display Parameter Value INFO Mod Modulation information 0 127 P Breath Breath information 0 127 P Foot Foot information 0 127 P Vol Volume information 0 127 P Pan Pan information L64 0 63R P Exp Expression information 0 127 P Hold Hold 1 information 0 127 P Bend Pitch bend information 128 127 P Aftertouch Aftertouch information 0 127 P Voices Voice information 0 128 P 240 Parameter List Multi Effects Parameters 06 ENHANCER p 121 Parameter Value 01 STEREO EQ p 119 Sens Sensitivity 0 127 Mix Mix level 0 127 Parameter Ci LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB LowFreq Low frequency 200 400 Hz Hi Gain High gain 15 415 dB LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Level Output level 0 127 Hi Freq High frequency 4000 8000 Hz Hi Gain High gain 15 415 dB Mid1 Freq Middle 1 frequency 200 8000Hz 1 07 AUTO WAH p 122 Mid1 Q Middle 1 Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Parameter Value Mid1 Gain Middle 1 gain 15 15 dB Filter Filter type LPF BPF Mios Freq Middle
124. Patch data of whole part in Performance mode Temporary Rhythm data of whole part in Performance mode cf This operation is the same as Data Transfer function in Utility mode with PERFORM Type parameter and TEMP PATCH Source parameter options According to the Parameter Address Map p 279 the start address of the above all parameters is assigned as following 10 00 00 00H Temporary Performance 112000 00H Temporary Patch Performance Mode Part 1 11 30 00 00H Temporary Rhythm Performance Mode Part 1 14 60 00 00H Temporary Patch Performance Mode Part 16 14 70 00 00H Temporary Rhythm Performance Mode Part 16 The offset address of Rhythm is also assigned as follows 00 00 00H Rhythm Common 00 10 00H Rhythm Tone 1 01 3E 00H Rhythm Tone 4 As the data size of Rhythm Tone is 00 00 01 41H summation of the size and the start address of Tone 4 of Part 16 at Temporary Patch in Performance mode will be 14 70 00 OOH 01 3E OOH 00 00 01 41H 14 71 3F 41H And the size that have to be got should be 14 71 3F 41H 10 00 00 00H 04 71 3F 41H Therefore the system exclusive message should be sent is F0 41 10 0010 11 10 00 00 00 0471 3F 41 2 F7 1 2 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 3 Device ID 17 4 Model ID XV 88 5 Command ID RQ1 6 End of Exclusive Calculating the checksum as shown in Example 2 gt we get a message of F0 41 10 00 10 11 10 00 00 00
125. RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I 0000 bbbb I I I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I 0000 cccc I I I I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 11 12768 52768 I I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I I I 20000 20000 I I I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE 4 00 3D 0000 aaaa I I I I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I 0000 bbbb I I I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I 0000 cccc I I I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 12 12768 52768 I I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 4A Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Sens 2 1 127 00 41 0000 aaaa I I I I 63 63 I 0000 bbbb I I 00 4B OOaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Destination 3 0 33 I 0000 ccce I I I I OFF I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 13 12768 52768 I I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I I I 20000 20000 I I I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH 4 00 45 0000 aaaa I I I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I 0000 bbbb I I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I 0000 cccc I I I I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 14 12768 52768 I I I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I I I 20000 420000 I l I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV
126. SEQ D 3 92 PERC 4 13 PORTA A 04 53 SEQ D 4 93 WALKBS 14 PORTA A 05 54 SEQ D 5 94 HARP 15 PORTA A 06 55 SEQ D 6 95 BOUND 16 PORTA A 07 56 SEQ D 7 96 RANDOM 17 PORTA A 08 57 SEQ D 8 97 BOSSA NOVA 18 PORTA A 09 58 ECHO 1 98 SALSA 1 19 PORTA A 10 59 ECHO 2 99 SALSA 2 20 PORTA A 11 60 ECHO 3 100 SALSA 3 21 PORTA B 01 61 MUTE 01 101 SALSA 4 22 PORTA B 02 62 MUTE 02 102 MAMBO 1 23 PORTA B 03 63 MUTE 03 103 MAMBO 2 24 PORTA B 04 64 MUTE 04 104 CLAVE 25 PORTA B 05 65 MUTE 05 105 REV CLA 26 PORTA B 06 66 MUTE 06 106 GUIRO 24 PORTA B 07 67 MUTE 07 107 AGOGO 28 PORTA B 08 68 MUTE 08 108 SAMBA 29 PORTA B 09 69 MUTE 09 109 TANGO 1 30 PORTA B 10 70 MUTE 10 110 TANGO 2 31 PORTA B 11 71 MUTE 11 111 TANGO 3 SZ PORTA B 12 72 MUTE 12 112 TANGO 4 33 PORTA B 13 73 MUTE 13 1 153 HOUSE 1 34 PORTA B 14 74 MUTE 14 114 HOUSE 2 35 PORTA B 15 75 MUTE 15 36 SEQ A 1 76 MUTE 16 ST SEQ A 2 TT STRUM 1 38 SEQ A 3 78 STRUM 2 39 SEQ A 4 79 STRUM 3 292 MIDI Implementation ilDecimal and Hexadecimal Table An H is appended to the end of numbers in hexadecimal notation In MIDI documentation data values and addresses sizes of Exclusive messages etc are expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits The following table shows how these correspond to decimal numbers D H D H D H D
127. Sens Enhancer sensitivity 0 127 Enhancer Mix Enhancer mix level 0 127 Delay Delay time 0 0 500 0 ms Dly Fbk Delay feedback level 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 Delay Balance Delay balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS Delay HF Damp Delay HF damp 35 CHORUS DELAY p 137 Parameter Value Cho Dly Chorus pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms ChoRate Chorus rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Cho Dpt Chorus depth 0 127 Cho Bal Chorus balance D100 0W D0 100W DlyTime Delay time 0 0 500 0 ms Dly Fbk Delay Feedback level 98 98 Delay HF Damp Delay HF damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 Delay Balance Delay balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS Parameter List 36 FLANGER gt DELAY p 138 Parameter Flg Diy FlgRate Flg Dpt Flg Fbk Flg Bal DiyTime Diy Fbk HF Damp Delay Balance Level Flanger pre delay time Flanger rate Flanger depth Flanger feedback level Flanger balance Delay time Delay feedback level HF damp Delay balance Output level Value 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 98 98 D100 0W D0 100W 0 0 500 0 ms 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 500 0
128. Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want keyboard playing dynamics velocity to affect T1 Time 1 of the pitch envelope Positive settings will cause T1 to speed up for strongly played notes and negative settings will cause it to slow down V TA Pitch Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want key release speed to impact on T4 Time 4 value of the pitch envelope If you want T4 time to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value LO Pitch Envelope Level O Specifies the pitch envelope level LO Pitch Envelope Level 0 determines the degree to which the pitch of the sound at the instant the key is pressed is altered relative to the reference pitch the Coarse Tune or Fine Tune value set in the PITCH page Positive 4 settings will cause the pitch to be higher than the standard pitch and negative settings will cause it to be lower T1 T4 Pitch Envelope Time 1 4 x Specify the pitch envelope times T1 T4 Larger values result in longer times until the next pitch is reached for instance T2 controls the time from L1 until L2 is reached L1 L4 Pitch Envelope Level 1 4 Set the level L1 L4 for the Pitch Envelope It determines how much the pitch changes from the reference pitch the value set with Coarse Tune or Fine Tune on the PITCH page at each point Positive
129. Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level Chapter 7 Adding Effects 47 SHUFFLE DELAY Pan A Shuffle Delay adds a shuffle to the delay sound giving the Adjust the pan of the delay A sound sound a bouncy delay effect with a swing feel Pan B L in Adjust the pan of the delay B sound Level Balance Sets the balance for the levels of the delay A and the delay B LowGain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Delay Delay Time Positive settings will emphasize boost the low Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay frequency range sound is heard Hi Gain High Gain MEMO Delay parameter can be set as a note value of a specified Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range When Delay is Set as a Note Value Balance Effect Balance As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system effect sound p 169 With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be N output and with a setting o
130. Shift Shifts the overall pitch of the XV 88 in semitone steps Scale Tune Scale Tune Switch Turn this ON when you wish to use a tuning scale other than equal temperament One set of Scale Tune settings can be created in Patch mode In Performance mode and GM mode each Part can have its own Scale Tune settings The XV 88 allows you to play the keyboard using temperaments other than equal temperament The pitch is specified in one cent units relative to the equal tempered pitch NEM One cent is 1 100th of a semitone The selected scale applies to MIDI messages received from an external MIDI device Nore The SCALE page in which the tuning settings are made varies depending on the mode selected before SYSTEM is pressed PATCH SCALE PATCH t Cl Pl El F Gl Al Bl SCALE 1 8l BI 4 Bl BI Bl Bi PATCH f C EF F G Bb SCALE B B mij Bl Bl If you wish to define a scale for use in Patch mode press SYSTEM while in Patch mode and then press TUNE located in the row of function buttons to access the PATCH SCALE page In Patch mode there are separate screens for the white keys and black keys and the settings for one octave C B will determine the tuning for all octaves Chapter 9 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions KEY SCALE KEV C fFart 1 k SCALE 4 B Bl Bl SI Bl B BI B8 If you wish to define a scale for use in Performance mode GM mode press SYSTE
131. Switch Determines whether the LFO for switching the vowels is reset according to the input sound ON or not OFF Threshold Keysync Threshold Specifies the volume level for which reset will be applied Manual Sets the point at which the two vowels will be switched When set to 50 Vowels 1 and 2 switched in the same amount of time Setting this higher than 50 increases the time for Vowel 1 setting this lower than 50 decreases the time for Vowel 1 141 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects LowGain Low Gain Specifies the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Specifies the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Pan Output Pan Specifies the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Specifies the output volume 142 44 RING MODULATOR Ring Modulator is an effect which applies amplitude modulation AM to the input signal producing bell like sounds You can also change the modulation frequency according to the volume of the sound input to the effects device L in Ring Mod 2 Band EQ L out Rin Ring Mod 2 Band EQ R out Freq Frequency Sets the frequency at which modulation will be applied Mod Modulator Selects the input of the direct sound
132. TEL 08 702 0020 SWITZERLAND Roland Switzerland AG Musitronic AG Gerberstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4410 Liestal SWITZERLAND TEL 061 927 8383 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITED KINGDOM TEL 01792 700139 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores No 16 Bab Al Bahrain Avenue P O Box 247 Manama 304 State of BAHRAIN TEL 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou Street Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 02 66 9426 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 021 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency 245 Prince Mohammad St Amman 1118 JORDAN TEL 06 464 1200 KUWAIT Easa Husain Al Yousifi Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 243 6399 LEBANON Chahine S A L Gerge Zeidan St Chahine Bldg Achrafieh P O Box 16 5857 Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 20 1441 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 Doha QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor Alkhobar SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Techni
133. The following display will appear FILE Sec 81 50UND_66 SUB CENTER I COPY Please Insert Destination Card 4 Insert the copy destination card and press ENTER The following display will appear Copy source file number file name FILE Src 81 S0UHD_ aa SUD COPY ID t ESOLUHD 881 SUD LEHTEF 1 Copy destination file number file name 5 Specify the number of copy destination file When necessary change the name of copy destination file You can assign the file a name of up to eight characters For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 28 6 Press ENTER to execute the File Copy and the following display will appear FILE Continue COPY I VESZEEHTER 1 4 HO ZEERIT To continue on and copy more files press ENTER To exit the operation press EXIT 1 Co Chapter 10 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode Checking the Contents of a Memory Card INFO You can view the number of files on a memory card its remaining free memory and the size of each file In addition you can also change and delete assignments to the CARD Group Banks A H File name File number Mil File size CARD P61 S00HD 66 SUD CAs ESKB 3844KB free SHIFT IMFO I ifiles Free area Number of files on memory card Pressing A H in this page displays the files to which the applicable bank A H is assigned The display does not change if there is no data assigned to the ba
134. The value changes in 6 dB decibel steps an increase of 6 dB doubles the waveform s gain Level Wave Level You can set the volume of the waveform HINT The volume level of the overall Rhythm Tone is set with the Level parameter RHYTHM TVA TVA p 103 the volume levels of the entire Rhythm Set is set with the Level parameter RHYTHM COMMON RHYTHM COMMON p 96 Sw Wave Switch This setting determines whether the Rhythm Tone s constituent Waves are played ON or not OFF In order to make best use of the available number of simultaneous voices unused waveforms should be turned off Tempo Sync Wave Tempo Sync When you wish to synchronize a Phrase Loop to the clock tempo set this to ON This is valid only when an optional Wave Expansion Board such as SR JV80 10 BASS amp DRUMS is installed and you have selected a Tone which uses a waveform that displays tempo BPM For details refer to Playing Phrase Loops in Sync with the System Tempo p 201 von When the Tempo Sync parameter is set to ON settings related to Pitch p 100 and FXM p 100 are disabled 98 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets What is a Phrase Loop A Phrase Loop is a portion of a song that is excerpted with a sampler or by other means and then played back repeatedly One technique involving the use of Phrase Loops is the excerpting of a Phrase from a pre existing song in a certain genre for example dance m
135. Time Offset Adjusts the TVA Envelope Attack Time for the Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part 54 o Oe s also contain the Attack Time Offset setting p 71 The final TVA Envelope attack time value is therefore the sum of the Tone s TVA Envelope T1 setting the Patch s Attack Time Offset and the Part s Attack Time Offset If the Tone s T1 parameter is already set to 127 maximum there will be no change produced by setting the Attack Time Offset to a positive value Rel Part Release Time Offset Adjusts the TVA Envelope Release Time for the Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part won Patches also contain a Release Time Offset setting p 72 The final TVA Envelope release time value is therefore the sum of the Tone s TVA Envelope T4 setting the Patch s Release Time Offset and the Part s Release Time Offset If the tone s T4 parameter is set to 127 maximum there will be no change in the Release Time Offset even when this is set to a positive value Velocity Sens Part velocity Sensitivity Offset This changes the volume and cutoff frequency for each part according to the velocity with which the keys are pressed If you want strongly played notes to raise the volume cutoff frequency set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to lower the volume cutoff frequency use negative settings Set Velocity Sensitivity to 0 when you want sounds played at a fixed volume and cutoff
136. Universal Realtime System Exclusive Messages O Master Volume Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 01H 1H mmH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control messages 01H Sub ID 2 Master Volume 1H Master Volume lower byte mmH Master Volume upper byte F7H EOX End Of Exclusive The lower byte IIH of Master Volume will be handled as 00H The Master Level parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP will change O Master Fine Tuning Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 03H 11H mmH F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 03H Sub ID 2 Master Fine Tuning 1H Master Fine Tuning LSB mmH Master Fine Tuning MSB F7H EOX End Of Exclusive mm ll 00 00H 40 00H 7F 7FH 100 0 99 9 cents The Master parameter SYSTEM TUNE SYSTEM TUNE will change O Master Coarse Tuning Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 04H 11H mmH F7 Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 04H Sub ID 2 Master Coarse Tuning 1H Master Coarse Tuning LSB mmH Master Coarse Tuning MSB F7H EOX End Of Exclusive IH ignored processed as 00H mmH 28H 40H 58H 24 0 24 semitones The Key Shift
137. Used asa Multi timbral Sound Generator In a Single Performance you can sound the single specified Chapter 2 Part current Part making this convenient in such situations as when performing along with songs Part 1 Rx ch 1 Tx ch 1 Selecting a Part You Want to Play on the Keyboard If a Single Performance is selected press Function button to select the Part you want to play The selected Part is called the Current Part 1 Make sure the PERFORM PLAY page is displayed 2 Confirm that the EDIT indicator is extinguished and press the Function button to select the Part you want to play using the keyboard When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is out Parts 1 8 can be selected and when the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit Parts 9 16 can be selected The Part number shown in the upper right of the display will change PERFORM PFE H 1 Ses Template PLAY HINT You can also select the Part by pressing ob The keyboard controller s performance data will be transmitted on the same MIDI channel as the MIDI Receive channel that is set for the current Part 37 Chapter 2 Playing Muting a Specific Part Turning Receive Switch On Off While you play along with the playback of a song you can turn on off any specific Part This allows you to turn off the melody Part for karaoke applications or for practicing the muted Part 1 Make sure that EDIT indicator is ex
138. Velocity Sens 1 127 00 15 0000 000a Tone Receive Pan Mode 0 1 l 63 63 I I I CONTINUOUS KEY ON I 00 63 Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 1 Velocity Sens 1 127 00 16 0000 000a Tone Redamper Switch a 19 l 63 63 l l OFF ON 00 64 Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 4 Velocity Sens Lr 4127 l I I 63 63 00 17 0000 00aa Tone Control 1 Switch 1 O 2 00 65 000a aaaa TVA Env Time Keyfollow 54 74 I I I OFF ON REVERSE I I I 100 100 I 00 18 0000 OOaa Tone Control 1 Switch 2 0 2 I 00 66 Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 1 0 127 l l l OFF ON REVERSE 00 67 Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 2 0 127 I 00 19 0000 OOaa Tone Control 1 Switch 3 0 2 00 68 Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 3 0 127 I I I OFF ON REVERSE I 00 69 Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 4 0 127 I 00 1A 0000 00aa Tone Control 1 Switch 4 0 2 00 6A 0aaa aaaa TVA Env Level 1 0 127 I I OFF ON REVERSE I 00 6B Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Level 2 0 127 l 00 1B 0000 00aa Tone Control 2 Switch 1 0 2 I 00 6C Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Level 3 0 127 I I I OFF ON REVERSE I 00 1C 0000 00aa Tone Control 2 Switch 2 0 2 I 00 6D 0000 aaaa LFOl Wave Form 0 10 I I I OFF ON REVERSE I I SIN TRI SAW UP SAW DW SQR 00 1D 0000 00aa Tone Control 2 Switch 3 0 2 I I RND BEND UP BEND DW TRP S amp H I I I OFF ON REVERSE I I CHS 00 1E
139. XV 88 function as a GM compatible sound generator You should select this mode when you want to play back a GM score music files created for General MIDI sound generator To set GM mode hold down SHIFT and press PERFORM PERFORM PATCH and RHYTHM indicators will not light System Mode This mode is for determining global XV 88 settings such as tuning display contrast and how MIDI messages are received Utility Mode Here you can save and transmit settings for the sound generator and make settings related to memory cards Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 About the Function Buttons Function buttons are buttons that perform a variety of functions The function they perform will depend on the current mode and on whether EDIT is on lit or off extinguished EDIT will turn on or off each time you press it PALETTE EDIT EXIT PANIC UNDO COMPARE TVA INFO PREVI Ew INFO 7 5 8716 ZONE PART SELECT 179 2 10 3 1 4 2 3 2 3 TONE SWITCH TONE SELECT o Or 3 switches the function of the function buttons but pressing EDIT will not make the display change If you wish to modify a setting press the EDIT to make the indicator light and then press a function button to select the display group and switch the display When you finish making settings press EXIT or a mode button to switch the
140. XV 88 s onboard effects and describes the type and operation of each effect Be sure to read this when adding effects to Patches and Performances Chapter 8 Saving Sounds This chapter describes how the XV 88 s memory is arranged and explains how tones are saved Read this chapter when you wish to save created sounds Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions This chapter describes how the System parameters that determine the XV 88 s operation environment work and how these parameters are organized Refer to it as necessary Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode This chapter goes over the various Utility functions such as storing Patch Performance or Rhythm Set data clearing the internal memory etc Refer to it as necessary Chapter 11 Using the XV 88 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode This chapter explains needed procedures and parameters for using the XV 88 as a General MIDI General MIDI 2 System compatible sound generator Read this chapter when you want to play back commercially available General MIDI scores music files created for General MIDI sound generators Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 This chapter includes various techniques that expand the XV 88 s operational scope It includes use with external MIDI devices live performance applications and others Refer to it as necessary Appendices This chapter contains a troubleshooting section for use w
141. You can perform a bulk dump when two XV 88s are connected to each other or when you wish to store Patch Performance Rhythm Set or System data on an external MIDI device as a safety backup of your XV 88 data TRAHSFER I Tare Block LEHTEF 1 TO MIDI 4 ALL USER MIDI Data type Destination Source block While data is being transmitted the following display will appear TEHHSFEREB Executina TO MIDI PERFORMIUSER B1 MIDI HINT To interrupt the transmission of data press EXIT Chapter 10 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode You can specify the data to be transmitted by selecting the appropriate combination shown below For example if you wish to transmit the USER group Patches 001 020 you would specify PATCH USER 001 020 Type Block ALL USER TEMP PERFORM USER 01 64 TEMP PATCH PATCH CTRL PATCH USER 001 128 TEMP RHYTHM USER 001 004 TEMP SYSTEM USER Only the current Performance settings will be transmitted 2 The current Performance settings and the setting of a Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to the Part will be transmitted Type Data Type Specifies the type of data to be transmitted ALL Performance Patch and Rhythm Set PERFORM Performance PATCH Patch RHYTHM Rhythm Set SYSTEM System Block Source Block Specifies the source of the data to be transmitted USER Data from user memory will be transmitted TEMP Data in Temporary area will be tr
142. an external MIDI device 5 Try playing the keyboard while you change the System Tempo parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP to various values p 169 You ll notice that the tempo of the Patch s modulation changes in accordance to the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system M You can modify Multi effects parameter values in time with a specified tempo or the tempo of an external MIDI device when you have selected the following values for the Type parameter of Multi effects PATCH EFFECTS PATCH MFX TYPE Multi effects Type Parameter synchronized to tempo 16 STEP FLANGER Step Rate parameter 19 TRIPLE TAP DELAY 20 QUADRUPLE TAP DELAY 41 STEREO PHASER 42 KEYSYNC FLANGER 43 FORMANT FILTER 45 MULTI TAP DELAY 46 REVERSE DELAY 47 SHUFFLE DELAY 48 3D DELAY 58 SLICER 60 3D CHORUS 61 3D FLANGER 62 TREMOLO 63 AUTO PAN Delay C L R parameter Delay1 4 parameter Rate Step Rate parameter Rate Step Rate parameter Rate parameter Delay1 4 parameter Delay1 4 parameter Delay parameter Delay C L R parameter Rate parameter Rate parameter Rate Step Rate parameter Rate parameter Rate parameter Playing Phrase Loops in Sync with the System Tempo Samples of drum percussion or other such phrases are called Phrase Loops Normally to play a Phrase Loop at an altered tempo the pitch has to be adjusted This is because of the nature of Phrase Loops that is when the tempo of a Phrase Loop is increased the pitc
143. and if you attempt to make settings that are contrary to the type of the original waveform the results will not be as you expect The XV 88 s internal waveforms fall into the following two groups One shot These waveforms contain sounds that have short decays A one shot waveform records the initial rise and fall of the sound Some of the XV 88 s one shot waveforms are sounds that are complete in themselves such as percussive instrument sounds The XV 88 also contains many other one shot waveforms that are elements of other sounds These include attack components such as piano hammer sounds and guitar fret noises Looped These waveforms include sounds with long decays as well as sustained sounds Loop waveforms repeatedly play back loop the portion of the waveform after the sound has reached a relatively steady state The XV 88 s looped waveforms also include components of other sounds such as piano string resonant vibrations and the hollow sounds of brass instruments Cautions When Using a One shot Waveform It is not possible to use the envelope to modify a one shot waveform to create a decay that is longer than the original waveform or to turn it into a sustaining sound If you were to program such an envelope you would be attempting to shape a portion of the sound that simply doesn t exist and the envelope would have no effect Cautions When Using a Loop Waveform With many acoustic instruments such as piano and s
144. appear FAVORITE Select CSHIFTI LIST IBlcPR H 881 1289u0icePnao 3 PHO 3 Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a Patch 4 When you press ENTER the Patch is selected and you are returned to the PATCH PLAY page 31 Chapter 2 Playing Using Phrase Preview to Play Patches The XV 88 allows you to preview Patches by hearing a phrase appropriate for each type of Patch 1 Select a Patch p 29 2 Press and hold PHRASE PREVIEW won n Performance mode only the Patches of the currently selected Part current Part will sound In Rhythm Set mode a drum phrase will sound Patches of the USER group or from an optional Wave Expansion Board SR JV80 Series and SRX Series may not sound at the appropriate pitch range If this occurs press OCT or OCT to select the desired pitch range Octave Shift p 47 Ifthe pitch range of a Phrase is wider than the range of the Tones within a Patch p 73 or wider than the range of a Part within a Performance p 51 any notes in the Phrase that fall outside that range will not be heard 3 Release your finger from PHRASE PREVIEW and the phrase will stop playing 4 Tochange the way in which the phrase is played press SYSTEM to make the indicator light Then press the PREVIEW function button and press or W to access the SYSTEM PREVIEW page Preview Mode PHRASE SYSTEM J FREUIEN 5 Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC D
145. arpeggio settings are made in Zone mode p 61 ARPEGGIO HRFEGGSIU St a1 e Octave Range 4 LATIN PERCUSSION B ARPEGGIO Motif Beat Pattern 1 SINGLE LIF DDIIH AGOGO AR FPEGGEIOF Accent Rate Shuffle Fate 1 Eis SB HEPEGGI US Key Yelocity Temnrotrzs 52 I REAL 128 Style Arpeggio Style Specifies the basic way in which the arpeggio will be played Select one of the following 45 types 1 4 The rhythm will be divided in quarter notes 1 6 The rhythm will be divided in quarter note triplets 1 8 The rhythm will be divided in eighth notes 1 12 The rhythm will be divided in eighth note triplets 1 16 The rhythm will be divided in 16th notes 1 32 The rhythm will be divided in 32nd notes PORTAMENTO A B A style using the portamento effect GLISSANDO A glissando style SEQUENCE A D Styles for sequenced patterns ECHO An echo like style SYNTH BASS HEAVY SLAP LIGHT SLAP WALK BASS Styles appropriate for bass playing RHYTHM GTR 1 5 Styles for rhythm guitar Styles 2 5 are effective when 3 4 notes are held 3 FINGER Three finger guitar style STRUM GTR UP STRUM GTR DOWN STRUM GTR UP amp DW Guitar chords strummed both up and down Effective when five or six notes are held PIANO BACKING CLAVI CHORD Styles for keyboard instrument backing WALTZ SWING WALTZ Styles in triple meter REGGAE A reggae type style Effective when three notes are held PERCUSSION A style suitable for percussiv
146. be modified Direction Bias Direction Selects the direction in which change will occur starting from the Bias Point LOWER The volume will be modified for the keyboard area below the Bias Point UPPER The volume will be modified for the keyboard area above the Bias Point LOWER amp UPPER The volume will be modified symmetrically toward the left and right of the Bias Point ALL The volume changes linearly with the bias point at the center PAN MODULATE 1 PHHgkesfollaouw Fandom Alternate MODULATES B B B Keyfollow Pan Keyfollow Use this parameter if you want key position to affect panning Positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 key center C to be panned increasingly further toward the right and negative settings will cause notes higher than C4 key center C to be panned toward the left Higher settings result in more change Random Random Pan Depth Use this parameter when you want the stereo location to change randomly each time you press a key Higher values will result in a greater width of change Alternate Alternate Pan Depth This setting causes panning to be alternated between left and right each time a key is pressed Higher values will result in a greater width of change This can be set either to L or R which will invert the order in which the panning is moved between left and right For example if two Tones are set to L and R
147. can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Step Rate is Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Mix Mix Level Adjust the volume of the phase shifted sound relative to the direct sound LowGain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Level Output Level Adjust the output level 42 KEYSYNC FLANGER Keysync FLanger controls the Flanger by resetting the effect at the volume of the sound input to the effects device restarting from the same pitch each time the Flanger is reset This parameter lets your playing dynamics on the keyboard control the flanger effect L in Feedback Feedback Pre Dly Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until the flanger sound is heard Rate LFO Rate Adjust the modulation frequency of the flanger sound MEMO Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Rate is Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo
148. change to the pitch of that Note on Therate of the pitch change caused by Portamento Control is determined by the Portamento Time value O Effect 1 Reverb Send Level Controller number 91 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5BH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Reverb Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127 In Performance mode the Reverb parameter PERFORM EFFECTS OUTPUT will change O Effect 3 Chorus Send Level Controller number 93 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 5DH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Chorus Send Level 00H 7FH 0 127 In Performance mode the Chorus parameter PERFORM EFFECTS OUTPUT will change O RPN MSBI LSB Controller number 100 101 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 65H mmH BnH 64H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm upper byte MSB of parameter number specified by RPN ll lower byte LSB of parameter number specified by RPN lt lt lt RPN gt gt gt Control Changes include RPN Registered Parameter Numbers which are extended When using RPNs first RPN Controller numbers 100 and 101 they can be sent in any order should be sent in order to select the parameter then Data Entry Controller numbers 6 and 38 should be sent to set the value Once RPN messages are received Data Entry messages that is received at the same MIDI channel after that are recognized as changing toward the value of the RPN messages In order not to make an
149. clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Depth LFO Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger sound Fbk Feedback Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase Higher settings will produce a more distinctive sound Phase Adjust the spaciousness of the flanger sound Filter Filter Type OFF A filter will not be used LPF he frequency region above the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut HPF The frequency region below the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut 140 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Sets the cutoff frequency when a specific frequency band is cut off by a filter Step Rate Step Rate Switch Step Rate Adjust the frequency of pitch change This setting determines whether the pitch is changed in a stepped fashion ON or not OFF Nn Step Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Step Rate is Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Keysync Keysync Switch Determines whether the Flanger LFO is reset according to the input sound ON or not OFF Thre Keysync Threshold Adjust the volume level for which rese
150. cutoff frequency 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 51 LOFI NOISE p 148 Parameter Type Post Fltr Radio Detune Disc LPF Lev LowGain Hi Gain Balance Pan Level LoFi type Post Filter type Radio detune Disc LPF Level Low gain High gain Effect balance Output pan Output level Parameter List Value 1 9 OFF LPF HPF 1 0 127 0 127 2 3 4 5 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W L64 63R 0 127 1 Post Filter cutoff frequency 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 2 Radio detune Radio noise level 3 Disc noise type LP EP SP RND 4 Disc noise LPF 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPS 5 Disc noise level 0 127 52 SPEAKER SIMULATOR p 148 Parameter Value Speaker Type Speaker type 1 Mic Set Mic setting 1 2 3 Mic Dir Mic level Direct level 0 127 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 1 SMALL 1 SMALL 2 MIDDLE JC 120 BUILT IN 1 BUILT IN 2 BUILT IN 3 BUILT IN 4 BUILT IN 5 BG STACK 1 BG STACK 2 MS STACK 1 MS STACK 2 METAL STACK 2 STACK 3 STACK 53 OVERDRIVE 2 p 149 Parameter Value Drive Drive 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 15 dB Amp Type Amp simulator switch OFF ON Amp simulator type SMALL BUILT IN 2 STAC
151. dede tr nere 168 SERIE Mc 16 Shuffle Rate Sole l gato SWitchi i e teen redeat erred dea ihid inspira 76 Song Number e eh eene e e iae eerte cen 178 Sound generator section u 19 Source CHhOrusSseuree ua a a HERO UR Serie 156 Multi effects control source 116 Multi effects source a 114 ReverbsoutCe vis cd diede a tege nm 159 Source block 186 187 Stare auccm cp so s A kayu ntes 77 Stretch nece 70 Stretch tuning depth 70 STRUCT LO Structure type 73 Style Arpeggio style System a 41 174 Arpeggio style Zone a 41 61 Sw Portamento SWitch 2e ette ette Re ite 76 WaveSwitch ite st Aaa 98 Switch FXM switch Rhythm Wave see 100 EXM switch Tone ertt he teint ina reines Tone switchi nece ameet an IT LO Grecia SYS CTRL ASSIGN 1 2 E EDA EE dot Dd PRISE SYSTEM i zat hte tiet eet ern E System clock source 168 System control assign 1 4 173 System function w 168 System function settings 168 System parameters 168 250 SYSTEM MIDI es 171 System Mode kestir a au as enne 24 SYSTEM PREVIEW 177 SYSTEM SETUP 168 System Tempo 169 SYSTEM TUNE i eite ipe iba vd pl bae s 173 T T1 T4 Pitch envelope time 1 4 Rhythm Tone 101 Pitch envelope time
152. display In Performance Mode IEDIT Indicator is Extinguished The Function buttons work as ZONE SELECT buttons that switch each Zone s Local switch and Transmit switch on lit and off extinguished When the LOCAL TX indicator is extinguished the switch has the linked Part for each Zone play lit or not play extinguished When the LOCAL TX indicator is lit the switch allows the data describing all actions using the keyboard controller section for each Zone to be sent lit or prevents it from being sent extinguished Since 16 Zones are being controlled using only 8 buttons use 1 8 9 16 to select the set of Zones you want to control When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is out you can switch Zones 1 8 on off When it is lit you can switch Zones 9 16 on off If the EDIT indicator is turned off in the Part setting page the function buttons will act as PART Select buttons PART SELECT that select the Part to be edited Chapter 1 In Patch Mode IEDIT Indicator is Extinguished The function buttons will act as Tone Switch buttons TONE SWITCH and Tone Select buttons TONE SELECT TONE SWITCH allow you to turn each Tone in the Patch on lit or off extinguished When a Tone is turned on it can be heard Use TONE SELECT to select the Tone you wish to modify To select a Tone to modify turn off EDIT indicator in the Tone setting page To select two or more Tones simultaneously hold down one of TON
153. frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positi tti ill hasize boost the high As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch ositive settings will emphasize boost ie hig frequency range Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the Pan 1 Output Pan 1 effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Sets the stereo position of the delay sound Delay 1 A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Pan 2 Output Pan 2 Sets the stereo position of the delay sound Delay 2 A Lev Output Level setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Adjust the output level Pan 3 Output Pan 3 Sets the stereo position of the delay sound Delay 3 A 143 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 46 REVERSE DELAY Reverse Delay isa delay effect that adds the reverse of the input sound as the delay sound Lin L out Feedback Rev Delay Rin R out Delay 1 Delay Time 1 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 1 sound is heard Delay 2 Delay Time 2 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 2 sound is heard Delay 3 Delay Time 3 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 3 sound is heard Delay 4 Delay Time 4 Adj
154. from any sequencer or other external recording device required Quick Start p 4 p 10 Powerful Array of Effects While including of course all of the algorithms of the JV 2080 the XV 88 s effects comprise a huge collection of Roland s digital signal processing technology 3D DELAY that makes full use of RSS Roland Sound Space technology Lo Fi processing from Roland s MC 505 groovebox the SRV 330 s popular REVERB along with a newly designed RING MODULATOR and more for a total of 63 different algorithms p 117 General MIDI and General MIDI 2 Compatible The XV 88 is compatible with both General MIDI and General MIDI 2 standards When working with music data that conforms to General MIDI and or General MIDI 2 GM scores you can combine the XV 88 with a computer or sequencer and use the XV 88 to play back the data p 192 88 Key Piano Keyboard Features Hammer Action with Aftertouch The XV 88 is equipped with a full 88 key piano keyboard utilizing a hammer action system for rich expressiveness with aftertouch provided as well The XV 88 gives you both the pure unspoiled expression you get with a piano and the dynamic play of a synthesizer all in a single instrument Sophisticated User Interface The XV 88 also features the Roland XP 30 s popular Patch Search function and Phrase Preview function The Patch Finder function p 30 lets you rapidly find the patch you want simply by specifying a patch category By
155. function controlled by the pedal CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 IS For more detailed information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 270 PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch OCT UP Each pedal press raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher OCT DOWN Each pedal press lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower START STOP Starts Stops the external sequencer TAP TEMPO Tap tempo a tempo specified by the interval at which you press the pedal PROG UP Every press of the pedal selects the next Performance number Patch number or Rhythm Set number PROG DOWN Every press of the pedal selects the previous Performance number Patch number or Rhythm Set number Output Pedal 1 2 Output Selects the sound generator s the internal sound generator and or external sound generators connected to MIDI OUT connector which will be controlled by the pedals OFF Neither will be controlled INT Only the internal sound generator will be controlled MIDI Only external sound generators will be controlled BOTH Both the internal sound generator and external sound generators will be controlled Polarity Pedal 1 2 Polarity Selects the polarity of the pedal On some pedals the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of other pedals If your pedal has an effect opposite of what yo
156. gt 0 64 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH OCT UP OCT DOWN I I 0 63 FULL I I l START STOP TAP TEMPO PROG UP PROG DOWN l 00 2B Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 28 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I 00 18 0000 OOaa Pedal 2 Output Mode 0 3 I I 0 63 FULL I I I OFF INT MIDI BOTH 00 2C Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 29 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I 00 19 0000 000a Pedal 2 Polarity 0 1 I I I 0 63 FULL I I I STANDARD REVERSE I 00 2D Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 30 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I I I I I 0 63 FULL I 00 1A 0000 000a Arpeggio Switch 0 1 00 2E 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 31 XV 5080 0 64 I I I OFF ON I I I 0 63 FULL I 00 1B 0000 000a Beam Switch 0 1 00 2F Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 32 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I I I OFF ON I I I 0 63 FULL I 00 1C 0000 aaaa Beam Sens 1 10 l l l 1 10 00 30 00aa aaaa MFX 1 Source 0 3211 I I PERFORM 1 16 17 32 lt XV 5080 gt I 00 1D OOaa aaaa Arpeggio Style 0 44 l 00 31 OOaa aaaa MFX2 Source lt XV 5080 gt 0 32 I I 1 45 I I PERFORM 1 16 17 32 I 00 1E 00aa aaaa Arpeggio Motif 0 37 00 32 OOaa aaaa MFX3 Source lt XV 5080 gt 0 32 I I I 1 38 I I PERFORM 1 16 17 32 l 00 1F Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Beat Pattern 0 114 00 33 00aa aaaa
157. gt L out Simulator 7 Pan R gt R out CO Rin Drive Adjust the degree of distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion Level Output Level Adjust the output level LowGain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Amp Type Amp Simulator Ty pe Select the type of guitar amp SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right 120 04 PHASER A phaser adds a phase shifted sound to the direct sound producing a twisting modulation that creates spaciousness and depth L in gt L out Pan L L Pan R R in Resonance R out Manual Adjust the basic frequency from which the sound will be modulated Rate Adjust the frequency period of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Res Resonance Adjust the amount of feedback for the phaser Mix Mix Level Adjust the ratio with which the phase shifted sound is combined with the direct sound Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Adjust the output level Chapter 7 Adding Effects 05 SPECTRUM 06 ENHANCER Sp
158. in volume Lin L out R out Attack Adjust the attack time of an input sound Sustain Adjust the time over which low level sounds are boosted until they reach the specified volume Post Gain Adjust the output gain LowGain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Adjust the output level 10 LIMITER The Limiter compresses signals that exceed a specified volume level preventing distortion from occurring L in L out J Pan L Y Pan R Rin R out Thresh Threshold Level Adjust the volume at which compression will begin Ratio Compression Ratio Adjust the compression ratio Release Release Time Adjust the time from when the volume falls below the Threshold Level until compression is no longer applied Gain Post Gain Adjust the output gain Low Gain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Adjust the output level 123 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 11 HEXA CHORUS Hexa chorus uses a six phase chorus six layers of chorused sound to give richness and spatial spread to th
159. is to be As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch heard through speakers set this parameter to SPEAKER Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 If the sound is to be heard through headphones set it to PHONES This will ensure that the optimal 3D effect will be heard If this parameter is not set correctly the full 3D D epth m effect may not appear Sets the depth to which the effect is applied LowGain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Level Output Level Adjust the output level 155 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Making Chorus Settings You can make the settings for Chorus used by Patches Rhythm Sets Performances Setting Procedure 1 After confirming that you are in Patch Rhythm Set Performance mode select the desired Patch Rhythm Set Performance p 29 p 35 p 39 2 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light and then press the EFFECTS function button 3 Press 4 or W to display the desired Edit page 4 Press or P to move the cursor to the parameter you re going to modify 5 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to change the parameter value 6 When you finish making se
160. jacks Mb If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 169 RHYTHM TEMPO Rhythm Set Tempo FHYTH f Clock Source Temro TEMPO I FHY THE 12H Clock Source Rhythm Set Clock Source The Multi effects changes and Phrase Loop can be synchronized to a clock tempo The Clock Source setting selects the timing reference to be used by the Rhythm Set RHYTHM Synchronize to the Rhythm Set Tempo setting SYSTEM The global System Tempo or clock messages received from an external sequencer will be used Ux For details on using clock tempo refer to p 200 Tempo Rhythm Set Tempo When Clock Source Patch Clock Source is set to RHYTHM this setting value is effective Miro The Rhythm Set Tempo Clock does not transmit clock messages from the MIDI OUT connector 6 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets Setting Effects for a Rhythm Set EFFECTS u For details regarding effect settings refer to the pages shown below Applying Effects in Patch Mode or Rhythm Set Mode p 106 Making Multi Effects Settings p 114 Making Chorus Settings p 156 Making Reverb Settings p 158 Controlling How a Rhythm Tone will Sound with Controllers CONTROL The parameters in this group determine how the controllers function and how instruments in a Rhythm Set will sound CONTROL These parameters dete
161. lass O Enea aguante 156 Making Reverb Settings a uu u Esa unu ua tette tente nennen 158 Setting Procedure ap eriei ree hn iie n egere ied ree dete Ea Eei ST en 158 Functions of Parameters c ccccccccsscscssseesescecescscecenesesesesnsnesssesceceesescensnsnesesesuensnssesceceseseseanananes 159 Copying Another Effect Setting Effects Copy u u 161 Chapter 8 Saving Sounds 162 About MEMORY eue e RR RUE RE PADRE INA REPRE e OR ER ERR 162 Temporary Memory u eene teer eterni Irish e deti eei eee teen ee eei eee einen 163 Rewritable M Mmory s a a ua aeee AOE e squalene aaa assasi 163 Non Rewritable Memory una aka inan atakay aasan ah tenete nenne nennen 163 Saving to Internal Memi ry ssi settore kiniinin ripset iaer aeret naii esie ikine Saa alatasa 164 Comparing with the Save Destination Patch Compare Function 164 Registering Favorite Patches Rhythm Sets in the Favorite List a 165 Saving to an External MIDI Device eren netten kotas ara 166 Saving a Group of Tones to a Memory Card eee 167 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions 168 How to Make the System Function Settings eene 168 Functions of System Parameters sssssssssssssseeeeeeenenet tenen nennen tnter tenens 168 Display Screen Contrast and Clock Settings SETUP sss 1
162. line plug one blade wider than the other This is a safety feature If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet Do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug For Polarized Line Plug CAUTION For Canada TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT FULLY INSERT ATTENTION pour VITER LES CHOCS LECTRIQUES INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU AU FOND For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug USING THE UNIT SAFELY INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About N WARNING and N CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly NWARNING U
163. may not be possible to restore the data and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Memory Backup This unit contains a battery which powers the unit s memory circuits while the main power is off When this battery becomes weak the message shown below will appear in the display Once you see this message have the battery replaced with a fresh one as soon as possible to avoid the loss of all data in memory To have the battery replaced consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Battery Low Additonal Precautions Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction or the improper operation of the unit To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the unit s memory on a memory card Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored in the unit s memory a memory card or another MIDI device e g a sequencer once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data Usea reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions Never strike or apply strong pressure to t
164. memory card data cannot be saved to the card bank Action Remove the write protect seal from the memory card MIDI Buffer Full Situation Due to an inordinate volume of MIDI messages received the XV 88 has failed to process them properly Action Reduce the amount of MIDI messages to be transmitted N 18 Error Messages HIDI Communication Error Situation A problem has occurred with the MIDI cable connections Action Check that MIDI cables are not broken or pulled BULE DUMP Receive Data Error pr Situation A MIDI message was received incorrectly Action If the same error message is displayed repeatedly there is a problem with the MIDI messages that are being transmitted to the XV 88 Unformatted Memory Card Situation This memory card cannot be used by the XV 88 Action Format the memory card on the XV 88 User Memory Damaged Situation The data in user memory has been lost Action Use the Factor Reset function UTILITY UTIL 2 FACTORY RESET to initialize the memory to the factory settings User Memory Write Protected Situation 1 The Internal parameter UTILITY UTIL 1 PROTECT WRITE PROTECT is turned ON Action 1 Turn the Internal parameter OFF Situation 2 The Exclusive parameter UTILITY UTIL 1 PROTECT WRITE PROTECT is turned ON and Exclusive messages cannot be received Action 2 Turn the Exclusive parameter OFF nM Patche Rhusthm Cannot Edit Situation The PR
165. message is sent on Panic operation Reset All Controllers Controller number 121 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 79H 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 This message is sent on Panic operation MONO Controller number 126 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7EH mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm mono number 00H 10H 0 16 POLY Controller number 127 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7FH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 System Common Messages Song Position Pointer Status 2nd byte 3rd byte F2H 00H 00H This message is sent on NEXT PREV or RESET operation in the external sequencer control function Song Select Status 2nd byte F3H ssH ss Song number 0H 7FH 0 127 This message is sent on NEXT or PREV operation in the external sequencer control function mSystem Realtime Messages Continue Status FBH This message is sent on START operation in the external sequencer control function Stop Status FCH This message is sent on STOP operation in the external sequencer control function Active Sensing Status FEH This message is transmitted at intervals of approximately 250 msec This message is not sent when Active Sensing parameter SYSTEM MIDI TRANSMIT MIDI is OFF i System Exclusive Messages Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Message and Data Set 1 DT1 are the only System Exclusive messages transmi
166. mode p 176 D BEAM CONTROL D BEAM Assign CDOHMTROL CCO BREATH QutEut Polarity BOTH STHHDPHED Assign D Beam Assign Specifies the function controlled by the D Beam controller CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 IS For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 270 PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch OCT UP Raises the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves higher OCT DOWN Lowers the key range in octave steps up to 3 octaves lower START STOP Starts Stops the external sequencer TAP TEMPO Tap tempo a tempo specified by the interval at which you move your hand over the D Beam controller Output D Beam Output Selects the sound generator s the internal sound generator and or external sound generators connected to MIDI OUT connector to be controlled by the D Beam controller OFF Neither will be controlled INT Only the internal sound generator will be controlled MIDI Only external sound generators will be controlled BOTH Both the internal sound generator and external sound generators will be controlled Polarity D Beam Polarity Switches the polarity of the D Beam controller With a setting of REVERSE the direction of control for the D Beam controller will be inverted 63 Chapter 4 Chapter 4 Zone Settings D BEAM RANGE D BEAM f Lower Lli F r FAHGE 1 BI 127 Lower D Beam Range Lower
167. n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON OSoft Controller number 67 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 43H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON vv Control value O Legato Foot Switch Controller number 68 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 44H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value In Performance mode the Legato parameter change OHold 2 Controller number 69 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON PERFORM PART MONO POL will Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 45H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value Ahold movement isn t done O Resonance Controller number 71 Status 2nd byte BnH 47H vvH n MIDI channel number vv Resonance value relative change 00H 7FH 0 127 3rd byte 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 64 0 63 In Performance mode the Res parameter PERFORM PART MODIFY will change ORelease Time Controller number 72 3rd byte Status 2nd byte BnH 48H vvH n MIDI channel number vv Release Time value relative change 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 64 0 63 In Performance mode the Rel parameter PERFORM PART MODIFY will change O Attack time Controller number 73 Status 2nd byte BnH 49H vvH n MIDI channel number vv Attack time value r
168. n b HE Rt ER EE RE HERES 193 Making Effects Settings in GM Mode EFFECTS 194 Making Settings for Receiving MIDI MIDD sss 195 Making Settings for Each Part PART nenne nene 196 Confirming MIDI Information for Each Part INFO sse 197 Convenient Functions in GM Mode GM Utility sese nnns 198 Initializing GM Mode INTD nette timete tee dee pn eet rE 198 Transmitting GM Mode Settings XFER sss tenerent 198 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 199 Techniques for Using P tches ssi eerie tee shua a hina ahus atuq 199 Reinforcing Filter CharaetermISties u una enen ea i E E tenente 199 Using the Slider to Change the Pan in Realtime sss 199 Using a Pedal Switch to Modify the Speed of the Rotary Effect 199 Changing the Speed of the Rotary Effect to Synchronize It to the LFO Cycle 200 Changing the Tone Produced with the Modulation Lever sess 200 Syncing the LFO Cycle to System Tempo u 200 Modifying Multi Effects to Match the System s Tempo a 201 Playing Phrase Loops in Sync with the System Tempo sss 201 Synchronizing the Timing at Which Tones Play to the System Tempo 202 Using the XV 88 to Play Diven irene anae ae nete tenete tenete nitet nnne tenens 202 Changing Multipl
169. p 135 31 DISTORTION DELAY p 135 32 ENHANCER CHORUS p 136 117 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Selecting Multi Effects by Category Pressing PATCH FINDER in the MFX TYPE page switches the display to the following page where each Multi effect type is displayed in order by category effect sound This allows you to quickly select the Multi effects you wish to use Category FHTCH tlre Filter 2 HFA TVPERBI STEREU E m Modulation Effects that modulate the sound 04 PHASER 07 AUTO WAH 41 STEREO PHASER 42 KEYSYNC FLANGER 43 FORMANT FILTER 44 RING MODULATOR B Delay Effects that delay the sound 17 STEREO DELAY 18 MODULATION DELAY 19 TRIPLE TAP DELAY 20 QUADRUPLE TAP DELAY 21 TIME CONTROL DELAY 22 2VOICE PITCH SHIFTER 23 FBK PITCH SHIFTER 34 ENHANCER gt DELAY 45 MULTI TAP DELAY 46 REVERSE DELAY 47 SHUFFLE DELAY 48 3D DELAY 49 PITCH SHIFTER B Keyboard Effects useful for the keyboard 08 ROTARY LoFi Effects that intentionally degrades the sound quality 50 LOFI COMPRESS LOFI NOISE O1 pay B Guitar amp Bass Effects useful for the Guitar and Bass 02 OVERDRIVE 03 DISTORTION 26 OVERDRIVESCHORUS 27 OVERDRIVE gt FLANGER 28 OVERDRIVEDELAY N 9 0 1 2 53 4 a 0 w Gl 09 10 55 56 57 58 m 11 12 13 14 15 16 32 33 35 36 37 DISTORTION CHORUS DISTORTION FLANGER DISTORTION DELAY SPEAKER SIMULATOR OVERDRIVE 2 DI
170. p 68 Patch Effects Copy You can copy the effect settings from any Performance Patch or Rhythm Set into the currently selected Patch FATCH f Source HNumber k Fx COPY J PATCHIUSER 61 User Patch 3 Do Copy source Copy source Performance Patch Rhythm Set group number name Press P to move to the next display and then select the contents of the effect that you wish to copy PHTCH 4TsFe CCOMPARE CEHTER 1 Fe COPY EBLL Copy type ALL Multi effects Chorus and Reverb settings MFX Multi effects settings CHORUS Chorus settings REVERB Reverb settings CHO amp REV Chorus and Reverb settings cS For more detailed information and instructions for this procedure refer to Copying Another Effect Setting Effects Copy p 161 The Compare Function For the Patch Tone Copy and Patch Effect Copy operations you can use the Compare function The Compare function allows you to play the copy source Patch To play the Patch of the copy source press UNDO COMPARE to access the PATCH COMPARE page The new Patch can also be selected from page however it is not possible to select Patc this hes from CD A H or XP A D After selecting the desired Patch return to the previous page by pressing UNDO COMPARE or EXIT PATCH IHunber SELBE COMPARE zert amp m lcrleer Patch Copy source Patch group number name Note The Compare function cannot be used with Patch Tone Cop
171. page Always turn the unit off and unplug the power cord before attempting installation of the circuit board SR JV80 SRX Series Quick Start p 19 USING THE UNIT SAFELY N CAUTION Always grasp only the plug on the power supply cord when plugging into or unplugging from an e9 outlet Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be AN placed so they are out of the reach of children Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on the unit SO Never handle the power cord or its plug with wet 7 hands when plugging into or unplugging from an lt outlet Before moving the unit disconnect the power plug from the outlet and pull out all cords from external e devices Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet Quick e Start p 19 Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area pull the plug on the power cord out of e the outlet e Install only the specified circuit board s SR JV80 SRX Series Remove only the specified screws Qo Quick Start p 4 p 10 Important Notes In addition to the items listed under IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and USING THE UNIT SAFELY on pages 2 and 3 please read and observe the following Power Supply Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable l
172. parameter is set to 12 the pitch itself is raised one octave On the other hand when the Octave parameter is set to 1 it is the same as pressing the keys one octave up In other words use the Coarse parameter when changing the pitch and the Octave parameter when you want to shift the entire keyboard for example when the number of keys is insufficient h Ow Note that when a Rhythm Set is assigned to a Part if the Octave parameter is set the Rhythm Tone that is played also changes BendRng Bend Range Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones 2 octaves that will occur when the Pitch Bend Lever is moved The amount of change when the lever is tilted is set to the same value for both left and right sides When using the setting of the Patch assigned to each Part p 78 set this to PATCH MONO POL Mono Poly PART 1 thno Poll Legato Portament 5wsiTm MOHO POLE PATCH PATCHI PATCH PATCH Mno Pol Part Mono Poly Set Mno Pol to MONO when the Patch assigned to the Part is to be played monophonically or to POLY when the Patch is to be played polyphonically When using the setting of the Patch assigned to each Part p 76 set this to PATCH Note For the Part to which the Rhythm Set is assigned this setting is ignored Legato Part Legato Switch You can add legato when performing monophonically Legato is a playing style in which the spaces between notes are smoothed creating a flowing feel wi
173. pitch of the direct sound This 2 voice pitch shifter has two pitch shifters and can add two pitch shifted sounds to the direct sound Balance D Lin Level Balance A Rin Balance D CoarseA Coarse Pitch A 1 Adjust the pitch of Pitch Shift A in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Fine A Fine Pitch A 1 Make fine adjustments to the pitch of Pitch Shift A in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Pan A Output Pan A Adjust the stereo location of the Pitch Shift A sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right PreDlyA Pre Delay Time A Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift A sound is heard CoarseB Coarse Pitch B 2 Adjust the pitch of Pitch Shift B in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Fine B Fine Pitch B 2 Make fine adjustments to the pitch of Pitch Shift B in 2 cent steps 100 100 cents One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Pan B Output Pan B Adjust the stereo location of the Pitch Shift B sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right PreDlyB Pre Delay Time B Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the Pitch Shift A sound is heard Mode Pitch Shifter Mode Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch 131 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Lvl Bal Level Balance Adjust the volume balance between the Pitch Shi
174. pressing PHRASE PREVIEW you can then hear the selected patch play a phrase suitable for that type of patch Phrase Preview p 32 Equipped with COMPUTER Connector A special computer cable makes it easy for you to connect the XV 88 to your computer so that you can enjoy ensemble playing p 208 Arpeggiator Included You can easily perform arpeggios and use rhythm guitar simply by pressing a few chords You can even specify the rhythmical feel you want p 41 Equipped with D Beam Controller The XV 88 also comes with the D Beam Controller which allows you to change the sound dynamically as you perform according to the position of your hand as you move it over the controller By moving your hand above the panel you can control even subtle changes in tones effects and pitches that are difficult to make using bender and aftertouch all in realtime bringing your live performances to a whole new level p 45 MEMO The D Beam Controller is provided under license from Interactive Light Inc General MIDI General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices Sound generating devices and music files that meet the General files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance General M
175. received by the XV 88 to select Rhythm Sets as shown in the following table Group Number Bank Select Program Change MSB LSB Number USER 001 004 86 00 001 004 CD A 001 004 86 32 001 004 CD H 001 004 86 39 001 004 PR A 001 002 86 64 001 002 PR B 001 002 86 65 001 002 PR C 001 002 86 66 001 002 PR D 001 002 86 67 001 002 PR E 001 002 86 68 001 002 PR F 001 002 86 69 001 002 XP A 1 2 1 XP D 1 2 1 1 Depends on the Wave Expansion Board installed 2 Fixed Bank Select numbers are assigned to the Wave Expansion Board itself SR JV80 Number Bank Select Program Change Series MSB LSB Number SR JV80 01 001 128 88 00 001 128 SR JV80 01 129 256 88 01 001 128 SR JV80 02 001 128 88 02 001 128 SR JV80 02 129 256 88 03 001 128 SR JV80 65 001 128 90 00 001 128 SR JV80 65 129 256 90 01 001 128 SR JV80 99 001 128 90 68 001 128 SR JV80 99 129 256 90 69 001 128 D For details on the SRX Series refer to the owner s manual for the SRX Series Wave Expansion Board 207 Chapter 12 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 Enjoying Desktop Music The XV 88 can be controlled by music software running on a computer This will allow you to create your own songs and also to select sounds or edit sounds from the computer display This type of system is know as DTM desktop music The features available to you when using a computer will vary greatly depending on the software you use so it is important that
176. remaining notes will be arpeggiated Beat Pattern Select the beat pattern from the choices below This setting will affect the location of the accent and length of the notes to determine the beat rhythm o e 8 settings will not be available depending on the Style parameter setting For details on the possible values refer to Arpeggio Style List p 268 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 3 PORTA A 01 11 PORTA B 01 15 SEQ A 1 7 SEQ B 1 5 SEQ C 1 2 SEQ D 1 8 ECHO 1 3 MUTE 01 16 STRUM 1 8 REGGAE 1 2 REFRAIN 1 2 PERC 1 4 WALKBS HARP BOUND RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA 1 4 MAMBO 1 2 CLAVE REV CLA GUILO AGOGO SAMBA TANGO 1 4 HOUSE 1 2 HINT If PORTA A 01 11 PORTA B 01 15 is selected as the Beat Pattern the Time parameter PATCH CONTROL PATCH PORTAMNT will control the speed of portamento p 76 Adjust the portamento time as appropriate for the playback tempo It is not necessary to turn portamento switch on Accent Rate Modifies the strength of accents and the length of the notes to adjust the groove feel of the arpeggio A 100 setting will result in the most pronounced groove feel Shuffle Rate This setting lets you modify the note timing to create shuffle rhythms With a setting of 50 the notes will sound at equal spacing As this value is increased the notes will become more bouncy as if they were dotted notes Shuffle Rate 50 Shuffle Rate 90 If the Beat
177. respectively the panning of the two Tones will alternate each time they are played o Oe any value from Type 2 10 is selected for the Type parameter PATCH COMMON STRUCT in the Keyfollow Random Alternate parameter settings the output of Tones 1 and 2 are joined in Tone 2 and the output of Tones 3 and 4 are joined in Tone 4 For this reason Tone 1 will follow the settings of Tone 2 and Tone 3 will follow the settings of Tone 4 p 73 91 Chapter 5 Creating Patches TVA TIME ENV TVA Time Envelope 1 TWAt U T1 U T4 Time Kesfollaw TIME EHU gl BI 74 Here you can make settings for the TVA envelope time variant changes in volume V T1 TVA Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want keyboard playing velocity to affect T1 Time 1 of the TVA envelope If you want T1 time to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value V T4 TVA Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want key release speed to influence the T4 Time 4 value of the TVA envelope If you want T4 time to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value Time Keyfollow TVA Envelope Time Keyfollow Use this parameter when you want keyboard position to affect TVA envelope times T2 T4
178. right For example if the right value is set to 12 the pitch will rise one octave when the bender lever is moved to the right most position MATRIX CTRL SRC Matrix Control Source MHTEIS T Control 1 Control 2 CTRL SECE 168 55 CTRLS BB DFF What is the Matrix Controller Ordinarily if you wanted to change Tone parameters using an external MIDI device you would need to send System Exclusive messages MIDI messages designed exclusively for the XV 88 However System Exclusive messages tend to be complicated and the amount of data that needs to be transmitted can get quite large For that reason a number of the more typical of the XV 88 s Tone parameters have been designed so they accept the use of Control Change or other MIDI messages for the purpose of making changes in their values This provides you with a variety of means of changing the way Patches are played For example you can use the Pitch Bend lever to change the LFO cycle rate or use the keyboard s touch to open and close a filter The function which allows you use MIDI messages to make these changes in realtime to the Tone parameters is called the Matrix Controller Up to four Matrix Controllers can be used in a single Patch When the Matrix Controller is used you can select the amount of control Sns parameter applied the parameter selected Dest parameter the MIDI message used to transmit the effect Control 1 4 parameter and the Tone to which t
179. select the desired Performance p 35 2 Press EDIT to make the indicator light up press the EFFECTS function button and press A or W to display the OUTPUT page FART 1 J OUTPUT 4 Dutrut Assign Chorus Reverb PATCH 127 B B 3 Choose the Part for which you want to make settings Turn off the EDIT indicator and then use 1 8 9 16 and ZONE PART SELECT 1 9 8 16 to select a Part 4 Press or P to move the cursor to the parameter you re going to modify Output Assign Output Assign Output Level Sets the direct sound s output method and volume for each Part MFX Output in stereo through Multi effects You can also apply Chorus or Reverb to the sound that passes through Multi effects OUTPUT A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo without passing through Multi effects OUTPUT B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo without passing through Multi effects INDIV 1 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 2 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 3 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 3 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 4 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 4 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects PATCH The Part s output destination is determined by the settings of the Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to the Part The value on the right sets the Part volume When Multi effects are b
180. service station to have the battery replaced File Format Error Situation The XV 88 cannot handle this file File I2 Error Situation It was not possible to save load a file Action Try the operation once again If the same message appears that file has been damaged Delete the damaged file File Hame Durlicate Situation A file of the same name exists on the memory card Action Use a different file name File Hame Format Error Situation A file name has not been assigned Action Assign a file name File nat Found Situation The specified file was not found Action Insert the memory card that contains the specified file and try the operation once again Memory Card Full Push arma Kes Situation There is insufficient space available on the memory card to save the data Action Either insert a different memory card or delete unnecessary data and try the operation once again Memory Card I2z Error Situation Itis possible that the memory card has been scratched or otherwise damaged Action If the memory card has been damaged do not use that memory card If the same error message appears repeatedly consult your dealer or a nearby Roland service station Memory Card not Ready Situation A memory card is not inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot Action Turn off the power and insert a memory card Memory Card Write Protected Situation Since a write protect seal is affixed to the
181. settings for enhanced musical expression Entering GM Mode GM mode can be likened to a Performance for which the sound generator has been set to comply with General MIDI system and to which GM compliant Patches and Rhythm Sets have been assigned GM Patch Rhythm Set number group Part number rn Gh 001i Piano 1 Fart 1 PLAY kbd C 4 The GM PLAY page shows the Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to each Part Each time you enter GM mode the GM2 STANDARD is assigned to Part 10 and Piano 1 is assigned to other Parts You can also select other GM Patches and GM Drum Sets for each Part to match the performance 1 Hold down SHIFT and press PERFORM to call up the GM PLAY page When you switch the XV 88 into GM mode the sound generator initializes itself for basic General MIDI settings N To change the current Part press ob w To change the GM Patch or GM Rhythm Set assigned to the Part perform the same procedure as you do when you select a Patch or Rhythm Set Initializing the Sound Generator for General MIDI System Basic Settings To play back a GM score correctly the sound generator must first be initialized to basic General MIDI system settings The XV 88 s sound generator is initialized in the General MIDI settings e When Switching to GM Mode e When it receives a General MIDI General MIDI 2 System On message from an external MIDI device When the music data being played back on an external MIDI device contai
182. sss 54 Resonance offset Patch sse 7 RESONANCE tiet eren tiet oreet oett 34 39 Resonance Resonance offset GM Part sss 196 Rhythm TONE reet hiiri aie EE SEEE S 102 TONE a cc ME pM M RETE 88 Resonance offset GM Bri 196 P rtjs ma u ER EEUU I HER dietus 54 Patch 71 Resonance velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 102 TODO c toten Debit eet etcetera f eret ENTIS 89 REV OUT 160 REV PRM 159 REVALYBH EEE m e HH asan p aa chawa uapa aaa coe 159 REVERB nme ree e cereo ce etg 15 105 Reverb Multi effects reverb send level sss 116 Reverb parameters 249 Reverb send level GM Part 194 Reverb send level Part 113 Reverb send level Rhythm Tone 110 Reverb send level Tone eene 110 Reverb level l uie eterne e He HERE PHP qa Reverb output assign Reverb send level GM Pattern M e debe De ARE eee eeu 194 PATE E 113 Rhythm Tone sess netten 110 Tone o I RHYTHM RHYTHM COMMON uu e ge Rene d ME ere tuse 96 RHYTHM COMPARE 181 184 RHYTHM FX COPY uu aa the eer ther eri Herten 184 IdahaHal MI 185 RHYTHM KEY COPY 95 184 RHYTHM KEY INIT eene nenne 185 RHYTHM NAME esent nennen eterne 96 RHYTHM NAME CPY ik RHYTHM PLAY SLA eu aa aaa cnt dee e Tete 40 Rhythm Set How a
183. steps Balance D 2 9 Step Flanger O Balance W Feedback Feedback X Step Flanger Q Balance W 2 Band Balance D Lin Pre Dly Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate Adjust the rate of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Fbk Feedback Level Adjust the amount of the flanger sound that is returned fed back into the input Negative settings will invert the phase Phase Adjust the spatial spread of the sound Step Rate Adjust the rate period of pitch change ra Step Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note Chapter 7 Adding Effects When Step Rate is Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 LowGain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 17 STEREO DELAY This is a stereo delay When Feedback Mode is NORMAL Balance D wm ds Q Balance W
184. strong impact Do not drop it About the Symbols The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The 6 symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other S devices Be especially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through A Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information
185. the XV 88 along with answers to those questions Please refer to this booklet as needed Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 This chapter covers XV 88 sound generator section configurations as well as basic operation Reading it is essential for understanding XV 88 operational procedures Chapter 2 Playing This chapter explains how to play in Patch Performance and Rhythm Set modes and how to use the XV 88 s many different performance functions Reading it is essential for understanding XV 88 operational procedures Chapter 3 Creating Performances This chapter explains how to create Performances and describes what the Performance parameters do and how they are composed Read this chapter when you wish to create Performances Chapter 4 Zone Settings This chapter explains how to make Zone settings for Performance mode and describes what the Zone parameters do and how they are composed Read this chapter when you wish to make Zone settings Chapter 5 Creating Patches This chapter explains how to create Patches and describes what the Patch parameters do and how they are composed Read this chapter when you wish to create Patches Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets This chapter explains how to create Rhythm Sets and describes what the Rhythm Set parameters do and how they are composed Read this chapter when you wish to create Rhythm Sets Chapter 7 Adding Effects This chapter explains how to make settings for the
186. the gate trigger is output ON or not OFF Mode GATE Gate Reverb When the source volume falls below a certain level the gate closes giving the effect of the reverb sound being cut with a gate reverb DUCK Ducking Reverb When the source volume gets high enough the gate closes which gives a ducking reverb type effect Stop the reverb sound only when input loud sound so that prevent the play sound become unclear Atk Attack Time Sets the time it takes the gate fully opens after being triggered Hold Hold Time Sets the time it takes the gate starts closing after the instant the direct sound goes under the threshold level Rel Release Time Sets the time it takes the gate fully closes after passes by the hold time Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 58 SLICER By applying successive cuts to the sound this effect turns a conventional sound into a sound that appears to be played as a backing phrase This is especially effective when applied to sustain type sounds Beat 1 1 4 4 For a single measure containing four quarter notes this sets the level of each sixteenth note when the measure is divided into sixteenth notes When set to 0 no sound is output Rate D
187. to these jacks By assigning a desired function to a pedal you can use it to select or modify sound or perform various other control You can also connect optional pedal switches DP 2 DP 6 etc to sustain sound p 172 Quick Start p 16 p 69 HOLD PEDAL Jack An optional pedal switch DP 2 DP 6 etc can be connected to this jack for use as a hold pedal p 43 p 172 Quick Start p 16 69 This can also be set so it supports the use of half pedaling techniques So after connecting an optional expression pedal EV 5 etc you can employ pedal work to achieve even finer control in performances in which piano tones are used gt p 172 17 Front and Rear Panel OUTPUT MIX L R L MONO PHONES BALANCED 1 3 INDIVIDUAL OUTPUT A MIX Jacks L MONO R These jacks output the audio signal to the connected mixer amplifier system in stereo For mono output use the L jack Quick Start p 16 OUTPUT B Jacks L R These jacks output the audio signal to the connected mixer amplifier system in stereo INDIVIDUAL 1 4 Jacks These jacks output audio signals in mono to an amp or mixer o 3 setting determining whether these jacks are used as stereo OUTPUT jacks or monaural INDIVIDUAL jacks is made with the Output Assign setting p 70 p 96 p 108 p 109 p 113 PHONES Jack This is the jack for connecting headphones sold separately Quick Start p 16 Roland
188. to be set you can use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to make the settings HINT To cancel the operation press EXIT 5 Press ENTER to execute the function When the operation is completed the display will briefly indicate COMPLETED Memb When certain functions are executed you are then returned to the original mode page 6 To return to the UTIL 1 or UTIL 2 page press EXIT To return to the display of the previous mode press UTILITY to make the indicator go dark 180 Storing Sound Data in User Memory WRITE If you turn the power off or select another Performance Patch or Rhythm Set after you have modified a Performance Patch or Rhythm Set the changes you have made will be lost If you wish to keep the data store it into internal memory user memory Internal Write Protect The Internal Write Protect setting is provided to help prevent the accidental overwriting of data in the user memory When saving new data to the user memory you must turn off Internal Write Protect If you attempt to save data when it is on the following display will appear WRITE I PROTECT Change the displayed ON to OFF and press ENTER to turn Internal Write Protect off Press ENTER once again and the data will be written into the user memory Internal Write Protect Uf Once you disable Internal Write Protect it will remain disabled until the XV 88 s power is turned off When th
189. to be controlled by each controller the C1 C4 slider control pedal etc see previous 2 Choosea control source MIDI messages used for control Control 1 4 parameters PATCH CONTROL MATRIX CTRL SRC If you do not need to set different control sources for each Patch select SYS CTRL 1 4 and use the Control 1 4 parameters SYSTEM CONTROL SYS CTRL ASSIGN 1 4 to choose the MIDI messages that you wish to use for control 3 Specify the control destination the parameter to be controlled Dest parameter PATCH CONTROL MATRIX CONTROL 1 4 4 Setthe Control Sensitivity the amount of the effect that is applied Sns parameter PATCH CONTROL MATRIX CONTROL 1 4 5 Select the Control Tone the Tone to which the effect is applied Tone parameter PATCH CONTROL MATRIX CONTROL 1 4 Quick Reference of Procedures Controlling Multi effects Up to four Multi effects Controllers can be used in a single Parameters by the Slider Performance Patch Rhythm Set or Pedal Multi effects Controller 1 Specify the MIDI messages to be controlled by each controller the C1 C4 slider control pedal etc see previous 2 The multi effects Source parameter PERFORM EFFECTS MEX TYPE is set to PERFORM set the Control channel the receive channel of control destination only Performance MFX Control Channel parameter PERFORM COMMON PERFORM MEX CH 3 Choose a control source MIDI messages used for control S
190. to make the indicator light XP A D Press EXP and then press A D to make the indicator light 3 Select the Rhythm Set number Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select the number HINT You can also select the Rhythm Set number by using the numeric keys In this case after specifying the number using the numeric keys press ENTER Also Using the Digit Hold function a Rhythm Set number can be selected simply by specifying the 1 s place number p 30 Selecting Favorite Rhythm Sets from the Favorite List On the XV 88 you can bring together your favorite and most frequently used Rhythm Sets in one place by registering them in the Favorite List The Favorite List gives you immediate access to your favorite Rhythm Sets wherever they are stored whether in the XV 88 itself on Wave Expansion Boards or on memory cards won If you have saved Rhythm Sets located on Wave Expansion Boards or memory cards onto the Favorite List and then attempt to select one of the saved Rhythm Sets without having the corresponding Wave Expansion Board installed or the relevant memory card inserted No media appears in the display and the selected Rhythm Set cannot be played I For instructions on how to register to the Favorite List refer to Registering Favorite Patches Rhythm Sets in the Favorite List p 165 1 Press PATCH to call up the RHYTHM PLAY page 2 While holding down SHIFT press PATCH F
191. when the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit zones 9 16 can be selected The Local Switch for the selected zone will be turned ON HINT At the factory settings there is a one to one correspondence between each of the Zones 1 16 and Parts 1 16 MEMO The setting here is linked to the setting at the Local parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI p 60 4 Repeat Step 3 to set the Local switch to ON for all Zones linked to the Parts you want to have play 5 Press ZONE getting the indicator to light and then press the KEY RANGE function button to access the KEY RANG page ZOHE 1 J Lower UFrer KEY FHHi C dl Ga 6 Turn off the EDIT indicator and press a Function button to select the Zone whose Local switch is set to ON When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is out zones 1 8 can be selected and when the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit zones 9 16 can be selected 7 Specifies the keyboard range for the Zone Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to Lower and set the lowest note of the range Move the cursor to Upper and set the highest note of the range 8 Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to specify the range of notes HINT By specifying sections for different Zones so that they overlap each other you can combine two or more Patches only in a specific section 9 When you are finished making settings press EXIT to return to the PERFORM PLAY page and begin playing Playing Along with Song Playback XV 88
192. will not be displayed For Type REVERB Type Reverb Delay Type This selects a type of reverb or delay ROOM1 This is a short reverb with high density ROOM This is a short reverb with low density STAGE 1 This is a long reverb STAGE2 This is a reverb with strong early reflections HALL1 This is a very clear sounding reverb HALL2 This is a rich reverb DELAY This is a conventional delay effect PAN DLY This is a delay effect with echoes that pan left and right Time Reverb Delay Time When the Type parameter setting is ROOMI HALL2 this adjusts the length of reverberation When the Type parameter setting is DELAY or PAN DLY this adjusts the delay time Higher settings produce a more spacious ambience HF Damp Reverb Delay HF Damp This specifies the frequency above which the high frequency content of the reverb sound will be cut or damped Lower values cause a greater range of high frequencies to be cut producing a softer reverb sound If you do not want to damp the high frequencies set this parameter to BYPASS Fbk Delay Feedback When the Type parameter setting is DELAY or PAN DLY this adjust the amount of delay feedback controlling the number of delay repeats Higher values result in more repeats 159 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects For Type SRV ROOM SRV HALL SRV PLATE Pre Delay Pre Delay Time This specifies the time between when the direct sound is he
193. you choose software suited to your needs Connecting to Your Computer Two Connection Methods There are two methods that can be used to connect the XV 88 to a computer connecting to the COMPUTER connector and connecting with MIDI connectors To make connections via the COMPUTER connector use a Computer cable to connect the serial port RS 232C connector of your computer to the COMPUTER connector of the XV 88 To make connections via MIDI you will need a MIDI interface such as the Roland Super MPU64 etc In this case the MIDI interface is connected to the computer and a MIDI cable is used to connect the MIDI connectors of the MIDI interface to the XV 88 s MIDI connectors Connect the XV 88 to your computer using the method that is appropriate for your setup I If connecting using the MIDI connectors please read the related information starting on p 209 Connecting with COMPUTER Connector 1 Turn off the XV 88 your computer and all peripheral devices von To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections 2 Setthe COMPUTER switch on the XV 88 s rear panel to match the type of computer to be connected as described below In general set the switch to Mac for Apple Macintosh series and to PC for PC Apple Macintosh series PC a E aii L ma mo L mae o ex new se
194. 0 4 01 05 0000 aaaa I EI 00 19 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 30 12768 52768 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 3 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 I I I 20000 20000 4 01 09 0000 aaaa I EI 00 1D 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 31 12768 52768 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 4 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 I I I 20000 20000 b 01 OD 0000 aaaa I ES 00 21 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 32 12768 52768 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 5 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 I I I 20000 20000 j I ES 00 25 0000 aaaa I 00 00 01 11 Total Size I I 0000 bbbb I t D I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 6 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 E 00 29 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 7 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 ES 00 2D 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 8 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 ES 00 31 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 9 12768 52768 I I I I 20000 20000 287 MIDI Implementation
195. 0 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 243 Appendices Parameter List 25 GATED REVERB p 133 Parameter Value Type Gated Reverb type NORMAL REVERSE SWEEP1 SWEEP2 Pre Dly Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Gate Time Gate time 5 500 ms LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 415 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 26 OVERDRIVES CHORUS p 134 Parameter Value OD Drive Drive 0 127 OD Pan Overdrive pan L64 0 63R Cho DIy Chorus pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms ChoRate Chorus Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Chorus Depth Chorus depth 0 127 Chorus Balance Chorus balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 27 OVERDRIVE FLANGER p 134 Parameter Value OD Drive Drive 0 127 OD Pan Overdrive pan L64 0 63R Flg Dly Flanger pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms FlgRate Flanger rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Flg Dpt Flanger depth 0 127 Flg Fok Flanger feedback level 98 98 Flanger Balance Flanger balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 28 OVERDRIVE DELAY p 135 Parameter Value OD Drive Drive 0 127 OD Pan Overdrive pan L64 0 63R DlyTime Delay time 0 0 500 0 ms Dly Fbk Delay feedback level 98 98 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 Delay Balance Delay balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS Delay HF Damp
196. 0 I 00 03 OOOa aaaa Tone Random Pitch Depth 0 30 I 00 4B 0000 Oaaa TVF Cutoff Velocity Curve 0 7 I I I 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FIXED 1 7 I I I 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 00 4C 0aaa aaaa TVF Cutoff Velocity Sens 1 127 l 90 100 200 300 400 500 l 63 63 l 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 00 4D Oaaa aaaa TVF Resonance 0 127 l 1200 00 4E Oaaa aaaa TVF Resonance Velocity Sens 1 127 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Tone Pan 0 127 I l 63 63 l l L64 63R 00 4F Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Depth 1 127 l 00 05 000a aaaa Tone Pan Keyfollow 54 74 l 63 63 l l 100 100 00 50 0000 Oaaa TVF Env Velocity Curve 0c y l 00 06 00aa aaaa Tone Random Pan Depth 0 63 FIXED 1 7 I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Tone Alternate Pan Depth 1 127 00 51 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Velocity Sens i 127 l L63 63R l 63 63 00 08 0000 000a Tone Env Mode 05 4 7 00 52 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 1 Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I NO SUS SUSTAIN I I 63 63 I 00 09 0000 OOaa Tone Delay Mode 0 3 00 53 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 4 Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I NORMAL HOLD KEY OFF NORMAL I I 63 63 I I I KEY OFF DECAY 00 54 OOOa aaaa TVF Env Time Keyfollow 54 74 1 00 0A 0000 aaaa l 100 100 I 0000 bbbb Tone Delay Time 0 149 I 00 55 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 1 0
197. 0 00 0000 aaaa Reverb Type 0 4 I I l LOWER 127 l 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Reverb Level 0 127 00 OC Oaaa aaaa TMT1 Velocity Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 00 02 0000 OOaa Reverb Output Assign 0 3 00 OD Oaaa aaaa TMT1 Velocity Fade Width Upper 0 127 I I I A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt j I 00 OE 0000 000a TMT2 Tone Switch 0 1 E 00 03 0000 aaaa I I I I OFF ON I 0000 bbbb 00 OF 0aaa aaaa TMT2 Keyboard Range Lower 0 127 I 0000 cccc I I I I C 1 UPPER i 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 1 12768 52768 l 00 10 Oaaa aaaa TMT2 Keyboard Range Upper 0 127 l l 20000 20000 LOWER G9 1 00 07 0000 aaaa I 00 11 0aaa aaaa TMT2 Keyboard Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 0000 bbbb I 00 12 Oaaa aaaa TMT2 Keyboard Fade Width Upper 0 127 I 0000 cccc I 00 13 Oaaa aaaa TMT2 Velocity Range Lower 1 127 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 2 12768 52768 I I l 1 UPPER I I I 20000 20000 I 00 14 Oaaa aaaa TMT2 Velocity Range Upper 1 127 E 00 OB 0000 aaaa I I I l LOWER 127 I 0000 bbbb 00 15 Oaaa aaaa TMT2 Velocity Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 0000 cccc I 00 16 Oaaa aaaa TMT2 Velocity Fade Width Upper 0 127 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 3 12768 52768 I I I I 20000 20000 I 00 17 0000 000a TMT3 Tone Switch 0 1 E 00 OF 0000 aaaa
198. 0 07 0000 000a Receive Pan 0 1 I 00 02 0000 000a External Switch 0 1 I I I OFF ON I I OFF ON I 00 08 0000 000a Receive Expression 0 1 t I I I OFF ON 00 03 0000 aaaa 00 09 0000 000a Receive Hold 1 0 1 0000 bbbb External Bank Select MSB CC 0 10 128 I I I OFF ON I I 0 127 NO SEND l I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa External Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 I 00 OA 0000 000a Phase Lock 0 1 E 00 06 0000 aaaa I I I OFF ON I 0000 bbbb External Program Number PC 0 128 I 00 OB 0000 0aaa Velocity Curve Type 0 4 I I 0 127 NO SEND l l l OFF 1 4 ES 00 08 0000 aaaa l 0000 bbbb External Volume CC 7 0 128 00 00 00 OC Total Size I I I 0 127 NO SEND E 00 OA 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb External Pan CC 10 0 128 I I I L64 63R NO SEND O1 2 6 Performance Part I 00 0C Oaaa aaaa Keyboard Range Lower 0 127 I I C 1 UPPER Offset I I 00 OD Oaaa aaaa Keyboard Range Upper 0 127 I Address Description I I I I LOWER G9 l t I 00 00 0000 aaaa Receive Channel 0 15 00 00 00 OE Total Size I I I 1 16 4 I 00 01 0000 000a Receive Switch 0 1 l l l OFF ON I 00 02 0000 000a Receive MIDI1 lt XV 5080 gt 0 1 l l OFF ON I 00 03 0000 000a Receive MIDI2 XV 5080 0 1 I I I OFF ON l b I 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Patch Bank Select M
199. 00 aaaa I I I I 63 63 I 0000 bbbb I I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 4 Source 0 101 I 0000 cccc I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 25 12768 52768 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 0C Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 4 Sens 1 127 4 00 75 0000 aaaa I I I 63 63 I 0000 bbbb I I I 0000 cccc I I 00 OD 000a aaaa MFX Control Assign 1 0 16 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 26 12768 52768 I I I OFF 1 16 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 OE 000a aaaa MFX Control Assign 2 0 16 4 00 79 0000 aaaa I I I I OFF 1 16 I 0000 bbbb I I 00 OF 000a aaaa MFX Control Assign 3 0 16 I 0000 cccc I I I I OFF 1 16 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 27 12768 52768 I 00 10 000a aaaa MFX Control Assign 4 0 16 I I I 20000 20000 I I I OFF 1 16 4 00 7D 0000 aaaa I EI 00 11 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 28 12768 52768 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 1 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 I I I 20000 20000 4 01 01 0000 aaaa I EI 00 15 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 29 12768 52768 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 2 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 I I I 20000 2000
200. 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb cccc dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd aaaa bbbb ccce dddd aaaa bbbb cece dddd Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000 20000 12768 52768 20000
201. 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc Offset I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 11 12768 52768 I Address Description I I 20000 20000 l I ES 00 2F 0000 aaaa I 00 00 0000 aaaa Chorus Type 0 2 I 0000 bbbb I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Chorus Level 0 127 I 0000 cccc l 00 02 0000 00aa Chorus Output Assign 0 3 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 12 12768 52768 I I I A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt I 20000 20000 l 00 03 0000 00aa Chorus Output Select 0 2 E 00 33 0000 aaaa I I I MAIN REV MAIN REV I 0000 bbbb l 0000 cccc IE 00 04 0000 aaaa I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 13 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 37 0000 aaaa 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 1 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc IE 00 08 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 14 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 3B 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 2 12768 52768 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc E 00 OC 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 15 12768 52768 I 0000 bbbb I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc I 00 3F 0000 aaaa I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 3 12768 52768 0000 bbbb I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 cccc IE 00 10 0000 aaaa
202. 000a aaaa WMT3 Wave FXM Depth 0 16 I 00 6D 0000 000a WMT3 Wave Tempo Sync 0 1 OFF ON I 00 6E Oaaa aaaa WMT3 Wave Coarse Tune 16 112 I I I 48 448 I 00 6F Oaaa aaaa WMT3 Wave Fine Tune 14 114 I I I 50 50 I 00 70 Oaaa aaaa WMT3 Wave Pan 0 127 I I I 164 63R I 00 71 0000 000a WMT3 Wave Random Pan Switch 0 1 I OFF ON I 00 72 0000 00aa WMT3 Wave Alternate Pan Switch 0 2 OFF ON REVERSE I 00 73 Oaaa aaaa WMT3 Wave Level 0 127 MIDI Implementation I 00 74 Oaaa aaaa WMT3 Velocity Range Lower i 127 1 UPPER I 00 75 Oaaa aaaa WMT3 Velocity Range Upper 121 LOWER 127 I 00 76 Oaaa aaaa WMT3 Velocity Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 00 77 Oaaa aaaa WMT3 Velocity Fade Width Upper 0 127 I 00 78 0000 000a WMT4 Wave Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 00 79 0000 00aa WMT4 Wave Group Type 0 3 fi INT WAVE SRJV80 EXP SRX EXP SAMPLE lt XV 5080 gt 00 7A 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT4 Wave Group ID 0 16384 I l I OFF 1 16384 E 00 7E 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT4 Wave Number L Mono 0 16384 I I OFF 1 16384 is 01 02 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT4 Wave Number R 0 16384 I I I OFF 1 16384 I 01 06 0000 OOaa WMT4 Wave Gain 0 3 I I I 6 0 6
203. 0318 Sop Sax C 0368 TbSect C 0418 DolceStr C L 0468 Org Vox B 0269 Syn Bass 2 A 0319 Sop Sax mf A 0369 T Sax Sect A 0419 DolceStr C R 0469 Org Vox G 0270 Syn Bass 2 B 0320 Sop Sax mf B 0370 T Sax Sect B 0420 JV Strings L 0470 Org Vox 0271 Syn Bass 2 C 0321 Sop Sax mf C 0371 T Sax Sect C 0421 JV Strings R 0471 ZZZ Vox 0272 Mini Bs 1A 0322 Alto mp A 0372 Flugel A 0422 JV Strings A 0472 Bell VOX 0273 Mini Bs 1B 0323 Alto mp B 0373 Flugel B 0423 JV Strings C 0473 Kalimba 0274 Mini Bs 1C 0324 Alto mp C 0374 Flugel C 0424 JP Strings1A 0474 JD Kalimba 0275 Mini Bs 2 0325 Alto Sax 1A 0375 FlugelWave 0425 JP Strings1B 0475 Klmba Atk 0276 Mini Bs 24 0326 Alto Sax 1B 0376 Trumpet 1A 0426 JP Strings1C 0476 Wood Crak 0277 MC 202 Bs A 0327 Alto Sax 1C 0377 Trumpet 1B 0427 JP Strings2A 0477 Block 0278 MC 202 Bs B 0328 T Breathy A 0378 Trumpet 1C 0428 JP Strings2B 0478 Gamelan 1 0279 MC 202 Bs C 0329 T Breathy B 0379 Trumpet 2A 0429 JP Strings2C 0479 Gamelan 2 0280 Hollow Bs 0330 T Breathy C 0380 Trumpet 2B 0430 PWM 0480 Gamelan 3 0281 Flute 1A 0331 SoloSax A 0381 Trumpet 2C 0431 Pulse Mod 0481 Log Drum 0282 Flute 1B 0332 SoloSax B 0382 HarmonMute1A 0432 Soft Pad A 0482 Hooky 0283 Flute 1C 0333 SoloSax C 0383 HarmonMute1B 0433 Soft Pad B 0483 Tabla 0284 Jazz Flute A 0334 Tenor Sax A 0384 HarmonMute1C 0434 Soft Pad C 0484 Marimba Wave 0285 Jazz Flute B 0335 Tenor Sax B 0385 Trombone 1 0435 Fantasynth A 0485 Xylo 0286 Jazz Flute C 0336 Tenor Sax C 0386 Trombon
204. 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 246 48 3D DELAY p 146 Parameter Value Delay C Delay time center 0 1800 ms note Delay L Delay time left 0 1800 ms note Delay R Delay time right 0 1800 ms note Fbk Feedback 98 98 Level C Level center 0 127 Level L Level left 0 127 Level R Level right 0 127 HF Damp HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 Out Output mode SPEAKER PHONES LoG Low gain 15 15 dB Hi G High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO0 100W Lev Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 49 PITCH SHIFTER p 147 Parameter Value Coarse 1 2 3 Coarse pitch 1 2 3 24 412 Fine 1 2 3 Fine pitch 1 2 3 100 100 cent Pre Delay 1 2 3 Pre Delay time 1 2 3 0 0 500 ms Fbk 1 2 3 Feedback level1 2 3 98 98 Pan 1 2 3 Output pan 1 2 3 L64 63R Level 1 2 3 Level 1 2 3 0 127 Mode Pitch shifter mode 1 2 3 4 5 Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 50 LOFI COMPRESS p 147 Parameter Value Type LoFi type 1 9 Pre Filter Pre filter type TYPE1 6 Post Filter 1 Post filter 1 type TYPE1 6 Post Filter 2 Post filter 2 type OFF LPF HPF 1 LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Pan Output pan L64 63R Level Output level 0 127 1 Post filter
205. 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit Zones 9 16 are switched on and off Controlling External Sound Module EXT CONTROL Note When a Single Performance is selected this setting is disabled EXT P C External Program Change Z HE 1 F C Bank Select MSB LSB EXT P C BRri SEHD When switching Performances send MIDI messages Program Change Bank Select to each Zone to switch the Tones corresponding to the external sound module After setting each value you can transmit it by pressing ENTER won The data of the Zone for which the Transmit switch is turned off will not be transmitted P C External Program Change Number Selects the Program Change number you wish to transmit If you do not want this message to be transmitted set this to NO SEND Bank Select MSB LSB External Bank Select MSB LSB Selects the Bank Select number MSB Controller number 0 and LSB Controller number 32 you want to transmit M Information on the XV 88 Tone Group Bank corresponding to the Bank Select message sent is displayed in parentheses EXT CTRL External Control ZOHE 1 f EST CTRLI Mao lume Fan HO SEHP HO SEHD Volume External Volume If you want Volume messages to also be transmitted when you select a Performance specify the desired value 0 127 for the Zone Turn this parameter NO SEND if you do not want this data to be transmitted note The data of the Zone for which the Tran
206. 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 2 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 TVA Group p 90 Display Parameter Value TVA Level Tone level 0 127 T Pan Tone pan L64 0 63R T V Sens TVA envelope velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V Curve TVA envelope velocity curve FIXED 1 7 an BIAS Bias Bias level 100 100 1 T Point Bias point C 1 G9 T Direction Bias direction LOWER UPPER LOWER amp UPPER ALL T PAN MODULATE Keyfollow Pan keyfollow 100 100 1 T Random Random pan depth 0 63 T Alternate Alternate pan depth L63 0 63R T TVA TIME ENV V T1 TVA envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V T4 TVA envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T Time Keyfollow TVA envelope time keyfollow 100 100 1 T TVA ENVELOPE T1 T2 T3 T4 TVA envelope time 1 2 3 4 0 127 T L1 L2 L3 TVA envelope level 1 2 3 0 127 T 1 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Rhythm Set Parameters Parameters that can be set independently for each Rhythm Tone are indicated by T Parameters that can be set independently for each Wave comprising the Rhythm Tone are indicated by W COMMON Group p 96 Display Parameter Value RHYTHM NAME Rhythm set name ASCII Cha
207. 1000 ms note Depth LFO depth 0 127 Fbk Feedback 98 98 Fbk Feedback 98 49895 Level C Delay center level 0 127 Phase Phase 0 180 degree Level L Delay left level 0 127 Filter Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Level R Delay right level 0 127 Cutoff Cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz Step Rate Step rate switch Step rate OFF ON 0 1 20 0 Hz BYPASS 1 note 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Out Output mode SPEAKER PHONES 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS LoG Low gain 15 15 dB Hi G High gain 15 415 dB Balance Balance D100 0W D0 100W Lev Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 62 TREMOLO p 154 Parameter Value Mod Wave Modulation wave TRI SQR SIN SAW1 SAW2 Rate Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz note Depth Depth 0 127 LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 15 dB Level Output level 0 127 63 AUTO PAN p 155 Parameter Value Mod Wave Modulation wave TRI SQR SIN SAW1 SAW2 Rate Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz note Depth Depth 0 127 LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 415 dB Level Output level 0 127 248 Parameter List Reverb Parameters REVERB p 159 Parameter Value Type Reverb Delay type ROOM1 ROOM2 STAGE1 STAGE2 HALL1 HALL2 DELAY PAN DLY Time Reverb Delay time 0 127 HF Damp Reverb Delay HF damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 Fbk
208. 121 SynStrat 2 POLY 058 JupiterHorns 2 POLY 122 AmbiPizza 5 POLY 058 Assalt Organ 3 POLY 122 Rotary Gtr 2 POLY 059 Talking Box 3 MONO 123 GR700 Pad 3 POLY 059 D 50 Organ 2 POLY 123 Muted Gtr 1 POLY 060 Piano SftPad 4 POLY 124 Tape Strings 2 POLY 060 Cathedral 4 POLY 124 SwitchOnMute 2 POLY 061 8VCO MonoSyn8 MONO 125 Soaring Saws 6 MONO 061 Church Pipes 4 POLY 125 Power Trip 2 POLY 062 Double Steel 8 POLY 126 Temple of JV 4 POLY 062 Poly Key 3 POLY 126 Crunch Split 4 POLY 063 Cutter Clav 2 POLY 127 Alternative 2 MONO 063 Poly Saws 4 POLY 127 Rezodrive 2 MONO 064 Prelude 4 POLY 128 Sun Dive 7 POLY 064 Poly Pulse 4 POLY 128 RockYurSocks 4 MONO Voice number of voice Appendices 253 PR B Preset B Group PR C Preset C Group No Name Voice Key Assign No Name Voice Key Assign No Name Voice Key Assign No Name Voice Key Assign 001 Dist Gtr 1 3 POLY 065 Analog Seq 2 POLY 001 Harmon Mute 1 POLY 065 Harmonicum 2 POLY 002 Dist Gtr 2 3 POLY 066 Impact Vox 4 POLY 002 Tp amp Sax Sect 4 POLY 066 D 50 Heaven 2 POLY 003 R amp R Chunk 4 POLY 067 TeknoSoloVox 2 POLY 003 Sax Tp Tb 3 POLY 067 Afro Horns 3 POLY 004 Phripphuzz 1 MONO 068 X Mod Man 2 POLY 004 Brass Sect 4 POLY 068 Pop Pad 4 POLY 005 Grungeroni 3 POLY 069 Paz lt gt Zap 1 MONO 005 Trombone 1 POLY 069 Dreamesque 4 POLY 006 Black Widow 4 POLY 070 4Hits4You 4 POLY 006 Hybrid Bones 4 POLY 070 Square Pad 4 POLY 007 Velo Wah Gtr 1 POLY 071 Impact 4 POLY 007 Noble Horns 4 POLY 071 JP 8 Hollow 4 PO
209. 127 85 21127 This is used for setting TVF envelope how cutoff frequency changes over time Depth TVF Envelope Depth Specifies the depth of the TVF envelope Higher settings will cause the TVF envelope to produce greater change Negative settings will invert the shape of the envelope V Sens TVF Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Specifies how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the depth of the TVF envelope Positive settings will cause the TVF envelope to have a greater effect for strongly played notes and negative settings will cause the effect to be less V Curve TVF Envelope Velocity Curve Selects one of the following 7 curves that will determine how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the TVF envelope Set this to FIXED when the amount of TVF Envelope applied is not to be changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed ZA ut cu g Time KF TVF Envelope Time Keyfollow Use this parameter when you want the keyboard location of notes to affect times T2 T4 of the TVF envelope Based on the TVF envelope times for the C4 key center C positive settings will cause notes higher than C4 to have increasingly shorter times and negative settings will cause them to have increasingly longer times Higher settings produce more change C7 Key M bd adul V T1 TVF Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want velocity to affect T1 C1 c2 C3 C4 C5 C6
210. 177 D Beam polarity Zone s Pedal 1 2 polarity eiie detecte a Rees 172 Pedal polarity e ted de ded tee sets 172 Porta Sw Time ui Potrtamient Sw Tt ete ee terere rete o eet 55 PORTAMENTO sess eene trennen 14 33 Portamento ss Portamento mode u aaa 76 Portamento start pitch 77 Portamento switch POrtaMentO ME arieni i ia eoe a dei oni pii odes PortaMent0 type gaa aut u E au ua Power switch Power Up Mode usay an n ha M Nasa she goi PREVIEW group e PREVIEW KEY Preview Mode Preview note set 1 4 I A au u wa 177 Preview sound mode 32 177 PREVIEW VELOCITY ihrer eee tede nter denen eden 177 Preview velocity e 177 POL coheret ea ue sie ais MN DUNS e esreuds 70 Program 171 Program Change Receive program change switch Part ssssss 52 Receive program change switch System 170 PROTECT ue ndr ree TTE ARE 188 306 R Random Random pan depth Rhythm Tone 2 s 103 Random pan depth Tone sss 91 Random pan switch aa 99 Random pitch depth Rhythm Tone Random pitch depth Tone sss Random pan depth Rhythm Tone aee eoe dede aes ie cen Toners Random pan switch Random pitch depth Rhythm Tone Te eer ie aE E EE 100 TONES A TEER AEEA NNG ETE ETE aaa asua sua 86 Recalling factory default settings B RECEIVE MIDI 5 aN aaa aa
211. 2 909 SN 1 EE Anklungs Anklungs Anklungs 808 SN 95 Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 Dance Kick cree 1 Metronome2 TUTTY Metronome2 W Metronome2 REVTimp3 o7 R8 Click R8 Click R8 Click R8 Click 98 Metronome 1 Metronome 1 Metronome 1 Metronome 2 E Hand Claps Hand Claps Hand Claps 808 Claps 260 z Q z o ey oo C2 Az i c3 a i C4 m z w e w o O o O eo o 3 A a AR oo a o z a N 5 a N A o z Oo N i D R C5 M i N A M T o e 2 i 6 T a C6 o co 4 8 PR H GM2 Group 001 PC 1 002 PC 9 GM2 STANDARD GM2 ROOM High Q High Q Slap Slap ScratchPush ScratchPush ScratchPull ScratchPull Sticks Sticks SquareClick SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mix Kick Mix Kick Standard KK1 Standard KK1 Side Stick Side Stick Standard SN1 Standard SN1 909 HandClap 909 HandClap Elec Snare 3 Elec Snare 3 Real Tom 6 Room Tom 5 Close HiHat2 Close HiHat2 Real Tom 6 Room Tom 5 Pedal HiHat2 Pedal HiHat2 Real Tom 4 Room Tom 2 Open HiHat2 Cym 1 Crash Cym 1 Real Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Ride Cymbal Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Ride Bell Tambourine Tambourine Splash Cym Splash Cym Cowbell Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Vibraslap Ride Cymb
212. 2 CTL 1 HOLD O00 Modem Port or Printer Port PC Computer cable XV 88 Rear Panel Serial Port Computer cable HINT When you record the performance data of the keyboard controller section to sequence software you need to set the Local Switch to off and set the Thru function of your software to on p 211 Connecting with MIDI Connectors If a MIDI interface Roland Super MPU64 etc or a MIDI interface adaptor is connected to your computer you can use the MIDI connectors to make connections I For details on how to install the MIDI interface refer to the owner s manual for your MIDI interface 1 Turn off the XV 88 your computer and all peripheral devices won To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections 2 Setthe COMPUTER switch on the XV 88 s rear panel to MIDI COMPUTER The new setting of the COMPUTER switch will take effect when the power is turned on Before changing the setting of the COMPUTER switch you must first turn off the power on the XV 88 Chapter 12 209 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 3 Use a MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN connector of the XV 88
213. 2 Mod Depth vv 00H 7FH 0 127 pp 3 Feedback vv 00H 7FH 0 127 pp 4 Send To Reverb vv 00H 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive MIDI Implementation OChannel Pressure O Key based Instrument Controllers Status Data byte Status Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 09H 01H 0nH ppH rrH F7H FOH 7FH 7FH 0AH 01H 0nH kkH nnH vvH F7H Byte Explanation Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 Controller Destination Setting 0AH Sub ID 1 Key Based Instrument Control 01H Sub ID 2 Channel Pressure 01H Sub ID 2 Controller OnH MIDI Channel 00 OF OnH MIDI Channel 00 OF ppH Controlled parameter kkH Key Number rrH Controlled range nnH Control Number pp 0 Pitch Control vvH Value rr 28H 58H 24 24 semitones nn 07H Leve pp 1 Filter Cutoff Control vv 00H 7FH 0 200 Relative rr 00H 7FH 9600 9450 cents nn 0AH Pan pp 2 Amplitude Control vv 00H 7FH Left Right Absolute rr 00H 7FH 0 200 nn 5BH Reverb Send pp 3 LFO Pitch Depth vv 00H 7FH 0 127 Absolute rr 00H 7FH 0 600 cents nn 5D Chorus Send pp 4 LFO Filter Depth vv 00H 7FH 0 127 Absolute rr 00H 7FH 0 2400 cents pp 5 LFO Amplitude Depth F7 EOX End Of Exclusive rr 00H 7FH 0 100 F7H EOX End
214. 3 63 I 0000 bbbb I 00 09 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 3 Source 0 101 l 0000 cccc I I I I OFF CCOl CC31 CC33 CC95 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 24 12768 52768 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I 20000 420000 I 00 0A Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 3 Sens 1 127 4 00 71 0000 aaaa I I I I 63 63 I 0000 bbbb I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 4 Source 0 101 I 0000 cccc I I I OFF CCOl CC31 CC33 CC95 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 25 12768 52768 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 OC Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 4 Sens 1 127 4 00 75 0000 aaaa I I I I 63 63 I 0000 bbbb I I I 0000 cccc I I 00 OD 000a aaaa MFX Control Assign 1 0 16 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 26 12768 52768 I I OFF 1 16 l I I 20000 20000 I 00 OE 000a aaaa MFX Control Assign 2 0 16 4 00 79 0000 aaaa I I I I OFF 1 16 I 0000 bbbb I I 00 OF 000a aaaa MFX Control Assign 3 0 16 I 0000 ccce I I I OFF 1 16 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 27 12768 52768 I 00 10 000a aaaa MFX Control Assign 4 0 16 I I I 20000 420000 I I I OFF 1 16 4 00 7D 0000 aaaa I IE 00 11 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 ccce I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 28 12768 52768 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 1 12
215. 3 40 1x 35 0aaa aaaa Tone Modify 6 TVF amp TVA Env Decay 0 127 I I 64 63 40 1x 36 0aaa aaaa Tone Modify 7 TIVF amp TVA ENv Release 0 127 I I 64 63 40 1x 37 0aaa aaaa Tone Modify 8 Vibrato Delay 0 127 I I 64 63 AE T 40 1x 40 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning C 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 1x 41 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning C 0 127 I 64 63 cent 40 1x 42 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning D 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 1x 43 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning D 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 1x 44 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning E 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 1x 45 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning F 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 1x 46 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning F4 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 1x 47 0aaa aaaa Scale Tuning G 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 1x 48 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning G 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 1x 49 Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning A 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 1x 4A Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning A 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 1x 4B Oaaa aaaa Scale Tuning B 0 127 I I 64 63 cent 40 2x 00 Oaaa aaaa Mod Pitch Control 40 88 I I 24 424 semitone 40 2x 01 Oaaa aaaa Mod TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 I I 9600 9600 cent 40 2x 02 0aaa aaaa Mod Amplitude Control 0 127 I I 100 0 100 0 40 2x 03 Oaaa aaaa Mod LFO1 Rate Control 0 127 I I 10 0 10 0 Hz 40 2x 04 Oaaa aaaa Mod LFO1 Pitch Control
216. 3 L4 Note on Note off Adjusting the Volume and Pan IVA Here you can make settings for the TVA Time Variant Amplifier This specifies the volume change and pan of the Tone TVA BI Level Fan W Sens U Curwe TWA 1 127 B 24 am Level Tone Level x Sets the volume of the Tone This setting is useful primarily for adjusting the volume balance between Tones HINT The overall volume of the Patch is set by the Level parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH LVL amp PAN and the Tone level setting is multiplied to this setting p 70 Pan Tone Pan Sets the pan of the Tone A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right HINT The overall panning of the entire Patch is set by the Pan parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH LVL amp PAN and the Tone Pan setting is added to this setting p 70 o e any value from Type 2 10 is selected for the Type parameter PATCH COMMON STRUCT in the Pan parameter settings the output of Tones 1 and 2 are joined in Tone 2 and the output of Tones 3 and 4 are joined in Tone 4 This means that the setting of Tone 1 will follow the setting of Tone 2 and the setting of Tone 3 will follow the setting of Tone 4 p 73 V Sens TVA Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Specifies how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the depth of the TVA envelope Positive settings will cause the TVA envelope to have a greater effect for strongly played notes and negative settings will ca
217. 38 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 06H mmH BnH 26H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll the value of the parameter specified by RPN NRPN mm MSB ll LSB When execute the GM Data Transfer Data Entry messages will transmit MIDI Implementation O Volume Controller number 7 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 07H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Volume In Performance Zone mode these messages are not transmitted when Volume parameter ZONE EXT CONTROL EXT CTRL is NO SEND OPanpot Controller number 10 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 0AH vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 40H 7FH Left Center Right n MIDI channel number vv Panpot In Performance Zone mode these messages are not transmitted when Pan parameter ZONE EXT CONTROL EXT CTRL is NO SEND O Expression Controller number 11 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH OBH vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Expression OHold 1 Controller number 64 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 40H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON n MIDI channel number vv Control value When Continuous parameter SYSTEM CONTROL HOLD PEDAL is OFF just only 00H OFF and 40H ON can be send as the control value OPortamento Controller number 65 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 41H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7F
218. 3R Level 1 Level 1 0 127 Level 2 Level 2 0 127 Level 3 Level 3 0 127 Level 4 Level 4 0 127 Fbk Feedback 98 98 HF Damp HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 LoG Low gain 15 15 dB HiG High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Lev Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 46 REVERSE DELAY p 144 Parameter Value Delay 1 Delay time 1 0 900 ms note Delay 2 Delay time 2 0 900 ms note Delay 3 Delay time 3 0 900 ms note Delay 4 Delay time 4 0 900 ms note Feedback 1 4 Feedback 1 4 98 98 HF Damp 1 4 HF Damp 1 4 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 Thr Threshold level 0 127 Pan 1 2 3 Output pan 1 2 3 L64 63R Level 1 2 3 Level 1 2 3 0 127 LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 47 SHUFFLE DELAY p 145 Parameter Value Delay Delay time 0 1800 ms note Shuffle Shuffle rate 0 100 Accel Acceleration 0 15 Fbk Feedback 98 98 HF Damp HF Damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 PanA PanA L64 63R Pan B Pan B L64 63R Level Balance Level balance A100 0B A0 100B LowGain Low gain 15 415 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 415 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127
219. 4 00H and the address of CHORUS TYPE is 00 00H Therefore the address of CHORUS TYPE of PERFORMANCE COMMON is 10 00 00 00H 04 00H 00 OOH 10 00 04 00H DELAY has the value of 02H So the system exclusive message should be sent is F0 41 10 00 10 12 10 00 04 00 02 F7 1 2 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 3 Device ID 17 4 Model ID XV 88 5 Command ID DT1 6 End of Exclusive Then calculate the checksum 10H 00H 04H 00H 02H 16 0 4 0 2 22 sum 22 sum 128 0 quotient 22 remainder checksum 128 22 remainder 106 6AH This means that FO 41 10 00 10 12 10 00 04 00 02 6A F7 is the message should be sent lt Example 2 gt Getting the data RQ1 of Performance Part 3 in USER 03 According to the Parameter Address Map p 279 the start address of USER 03 is 20 02 00 00H and the offset address of Performance Part 3 is 00 22 00H Therefore the start address of Performance Part 3 in USER 03 is 20 02 00 00H 00 22 00H 20 02 22 00H As the size of Performance Part is 00 00 00 21H the system exclusive message should be sent is FO 41 10 0010 A 20 02 22 00 00 00 00 21 F7 1 2 3 4 5 address data checksum 6 1 Exclusive Status 2 ID Roland 3 Device ID 17 4 Model ID XV 88 5 Command ID RQ1 6 End of Exclusive Then calculate the checksum 20H 02H 22H 00H 00H 00H 00H 21H 32 2 34
220. 4AH J 106 6AH j The principal triads resound much more beautifully than with equal temperament but this 43 2BH 5 4BH K 107 6BH k benefit can only be obtained in one key If transposed the chords tend to become b CH 16 ACH m 10 SCH T TOES y Pone 45 2DH 77 4DH M 109 6DH m ambiguous The example given involves settings for a key in which C is the keynote 46 2EH 78 4EH N 110 6EH n 47 2FH 79 4FH 111 6FH 48 30H 0 80 50H P T2 70H p O Arabian Scale 49 31H 1 81 51H Q 113 71H q i 50 32H 2 82 52H R 114 72H r By altering the setting for Scale Tune you can obtain a variety of other tunings suited for 51 33H 3 83 53H S 115 73H s ethnic music For example the settings introduced below will set the unit to use the Arabian 52 34H 4 84 54H T 11e AH t 53 35H 5 85 SSH U AJ 75H u Scale 54 36H 6 86 56H V 118 76H v 529 37H z 87 57H W 119 77H w 56 38H 8 88 58H x 120 78H x Example Settings 57 39H 9 89 59H Y 121 79H y Note name Equal Temperament Just Temperament Key tone C Arabian Scale 58 3AH 90 SAH 2 122 TAN z bj 7 59 3BH 91 5BH 123 7BH c 0 0 6 60 3CH lt 92 5CH N 124 7CH I C 0 8 45 61 3DH 93 5DH 125 DH H 62 3EH gt 94 5EH Pa T D 0 2 63 3FH 95 5FH 2 Eb 0 16 12 D decimal E 0 14 51 H hexadecimal F 0 2 8 F 0 10 43 SP is space G 0 2 4 p G 0 14 47 A 0 16 0 Bb 0 14 10 B 0 12 49 The values in the table are given in
221. 5 164 166 167 179 198 Utility mode serraria ieaie anai aaiae ennienni ins 24 179 V VALUE dial 35e t N Susa 15 27 V Curve Cutoff frequency velocity curve Rhythm Tone 102 Cutoff frequency velocity curve Tone sss 89 TVA envelope velocity curve Tone sss 91 TVF envelope velocity curve Rhythm Tone 102 TVF envelope velocity curve Tone sse 89 V Cutoff Cutoff frequency velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 102 Cutoff frequency velocity sensitivity Tone 89 yells rin a on tem UM IRE DM VELO CONTROL VELO CRV 5 iecit en e ae dee a d e e ee ia etu Velocity Curve PATE ER 53 Rliythim TOn6 tee entente t Hec 104 Velocity fade width lower Rhythm Wave ccscccccccscsesseseeseseseeseseseessssesessesseseessseeseseseesesneseenes 99 TOTO ch oie MAL css T Aaa bed IN LI Ims DLE 73 Velocity fade width upper Rhythm Wave erea E ea AEE E E A a E ENR 99 TOME EA 73 Velocity range lower Rhythm Wave Qu an s E M s e S ie 99 TONE isses ret Eas EEES AE waya KETER t 72 Velocity range upper RhythmWayes u TE u T A 99 TOR xcd E A e P A ET 72 Velocity Sens TVA envelope velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 104 Velocity sensitivity offset Part Velocity sensitivity offset Patch a 72 Velocity sensitivity offset inp EE Pateh zen ere e ene reete r e d ER ANLE MO n d
222. 5 Controller number 80 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 50H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 The Level parameter PATCH TVA TVA of Tone 1 will change O General Purpose Controller 6 Controller number 81 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 51H vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 The Level parameter PATCH TVA TVA of Tone 2 will change O General Purpose Controller 7 Controller number 82 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 52H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 The Level parameter PATCH TVA TVA of Tone 3 will change O General Purpose Controller 8 Controller number 83 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 53H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 The Level parameter PATCH TVA TVA of Tone 4 will change O Portamento control Controller number 84 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 54H kkH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 kk source note number 00H 7FH 0 127 A Note on received immediately after a Portamento Control message will change continuously in pitch starting from the pitch of the Source Note Number Ifa voice is already sounding for a note number identical to the Source Note Number this voice will continue sounding i e legato and will when the next Note on is received smoothly
223. 5 Aa ia au yas 184 Patt nv senes 50 182 Rhythm Tone 94 184 Tone asnus 68 183 CTL T CTE Z PEDAL Sack rni tnr tete 17 CTRE RX MIDI iii saa ette eee peak feret ese eden e et a as 77 Cursor button 15 26 Cut Cutoff frequency offset Part u 54 Cutoff frequency offset Patch sss 71 CUTOFF attente tentem tee te PORE u aY 34 39 Cutoff Cutoff frequency Rhythm Tone sss 102 Cutoff frequency Tone vsisi isinira iii 88 Cutoff frequency offset GM Part sss 196 Cutoff frequency Rhythm Tone e nennen 102 Tone Cutoff frequency keyfollow sse 88 Cutoff frequency offset GM Patte sasin an aaa RARE HORREA 196 Part Patch Cutoff frequency velocity curve Rhythm Tone 2 gno ete re edt hoarse 102 POMC es sasaqa erret egere deca vete astu E 89 Cutoff frequency velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone a a nennen 102 En 89 D D Beam assign Sy MP EE AE 45 176 ZoNe esrin 45 63 D BEAM CONTROL cete tnmen depre reete 45 System 176 Zoe n Saleh s dede e eere n be t oet 63 D Beamconttroller aa ine a a Ire rei CH HERR 45 D BEAM group System ise aa ee RC Athe 176 Vo 63 D Beam output SYSTE etienne NARI HL ers ct ed 46 176 LOM MEC M 46 63 D Beam polarity VY SECT res tite rd e eodd s doves tepe ete 46 177 SVStemic iut ton SN pd ecc cn 46 177 D Beam Sensitivity System
224. 56 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 002 003 001 128 SR JV80 02 Patch 001 256 9nH kkH vvH 092 000 001 SRX Rhythm 001 n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 093 000 001 SRX Patch 001 kk note number 00H 7FH 0 127 E vv note on velocity 01H 7FH 1 127 120 001 057 GM Rhythm 001 009 121 000 009 001 128 GM Patch 001 256 Polyphonic Key Pressure O Modulation Controller number 1 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte Status 2nd byte 3rd byte AnH kkH vvH BnH 01H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 kk note number 00H 7FH 0 127 vv Modulation depth 00H 7FH 0 127 vv Polyphonic Key Pressure 00H 7FH 0 127 Not received in Performance mode when the Mod parameter PERFORM MIDI Not received in Performance mode when the Paf parameter PERFORM MIDI RxSWITCH is OFF RxSWITCH is OFF O Breath type Controller number 2 Control Change Status 2nd byte 3rd byte If the corresponding Controller number is selected for the Control 1 2 3 or 4 parameter BnH 02H vvH PATCH CONTROL MATRIX CTRL SRC the corresponding effect will occur n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 Ifa Controller number that corresponds to the Control 1 2 3 or 4 parameter SYSTEM vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 CONTROL SYS CTRL ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 is selected the specified effect will apply if Control 1 2 3 or 4 parameter PATCH CONTROL MATRI
225. 6 POLY 105 Minorlncidnt 4 MONO 041 Velo Rez Clv 1 POLY 105 Dulcimer 2 POLY 042 Flyin High 3 MONO 106 Slap Timps 4 POLY 042 Clavicembalo 4 POLY 106 EastMelody 2 POLY O43 Soft Nylon 4 POLY 107 Comp Steel 4 POLY O43 Analog Clavi 1 POLY 107 MandolinTrem 4 POLY 044 Don t Jump 8 POLY 108 Reel Slam 4 POLY 044 Analog Clav2 1 POLY 108 Nylon Gtr 1 POLY 045 RockPiano Ch 3 POLY 109 Adrenaline 4 POLY 045 Metal Clav 3 POLY 109 Gir Strings 3 POLY 046 St Choir 4 POLY 110 Choir Bounce 4 POLY 046 Full Stops 2 POLY 110 Steel Away 3 POLY 047 Galactic 8 POLY 111 Jet Voxs 3 POLY 047 Ballad B 3 POLY 111 Heavenly Gtr 4 POLY 048 PhaserDyno 3 POLY 112 Halographix 2 POLY 048 Mellow Bars 4 POLY 112 12str Gtr 1 2 POLY 049 Andreas Cave 4 POLY 113 3PartInventn 4 POLY 049 AugerMentive 3 POLY 113 12str Gtr 2 3 POLY 050 ChmbrQuartet 4 POLY 114 Retro Rhodes 3 POLY 050 Perky B 2 POLY 114 Jz Gtr Hall 1 POLY 051 Plug n Play 2 POLY 115 Slap Bass 3 1 MONO 051 The Big Spin 3 POLY 115 LetterFrmPat 4 POLY 052 Agent X 7 POLY 116 Guttural 8 MONO 052 GospelSpin 3 POLY 116 Jazz Scat 3 POLY 053 Lo fi Sweep 2 POLY 117 Blades 4 POLY 053 Roller Spin 3 POLY 117 Lounge Gig 3 POLY 054 2ndRateChord 4 MONO 118 NasalSpray 2 MONO 054 RockerSpin 3 POLY 118 JC Strat 1 POLY 055 Creamy Bass 2 MONO 119 Synergistic 2 POLY 055 Tone Wh Solo 3 POLY 119 Twin Strats 3 POLY 056 Phunky DC 2 MONO 120 Dragnet 4 POLY 056 Purple Spin 4 POLY 120 JV Strat 2 POLY 057 Suite Combo 6 POLY 121 5th Atm Aft 2 POLY 057 60 s LeadORG 2 POLY
226. 63R T Random Random pan depth 0 63 T Alternate Alternate pan depth L63 0 63R T TVA VELOCITY Velocity Sens TVA envelope velocity sensitivity 63 63 T Velocity Curve TVA envelope velocity curve FIXED 1 7 T TVA TIME ENV V T1 TVA envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V T4 TVA envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity 63 63 JT TVA ENVELOPE T1 T2 T3 T4 TVA envelope time 1 2 3 4 0 127 T L1 L2 L3 TVA envelope level 1 2 3 0 127 T Appendices 239 Parameter List GM Mode Parameters EFFECTS Group p 194 Parameters that can be set independently for each Part are indicated by P Display Parameter Value PART OUTPUT Output Assign Output assign OUTPUT A B P Output level 0 127 P Chorus Chorus send level 0 127 P Reverb Reverb send level 0 127 P GM CHORUS Type Chorus type CHORUS 1 4 FB CHORUS FLANGER Rate Chorus rate 0 127 Dpth Chorus depth 0 127 Fbk Chorus feedback level 0 127 Rev Chorus reverb send level 0 127 Out Chorus output assign A B GM REVERB Type Reverb type SMALL ROOM MEDIUM ROOM LARGE ROOM MEDIUM HALL LARGE HALL PLATE Time Reverb time 0 127 Out Reverb output assign A B MIDI Group p 195 Display Parameter Value PART MIDI Channel MIDI receive channel 1 16 OFF P Rx Sw Receive switch OFF ON P Mute Sw Mute switch OFF MUTE P PART Group p 196 Display Parameter Value PATCH Type Part type PAT RHY Number GM patch rhythm set number 001 256 001 009 P SETTING Volume
227. 68 MIDI Settings MIDI ss a sasa Oa pU cen Hever Mn ete sre ove aaa u a dl aA 169 Keyboard and Controllers Settings CONTROL sse 171 Adjusting Tuning TUNE seres isere sine er tiens iari rRe retener enne nennen nennen 173 Arpeggiator Settings ARPEGGIO sssssessseseseeenenene nennen nenne nennen 174 Setting the D Beam Controller D BEAM sss enne nnne 176 Phrase Preview Settings PREVIEW sse nennen nennen nennen nn nennnnnen 177 Checking the Installation of the Wave Expansion Board and Controlling External MIDI Devices INFO sess 178 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode 179 ADOUPU BE Medezg asses u ua m aqapana uu n Ee do tuere utr pi ER RE RAD 179 Basic Procedure in Utility Modessssr sieni inne oE EEE i L ER AEE E ETEA E nnne 179 Storing Sound Data in User Memory WRITE eene 180 Saving a Performance sdb ritum hab Sapa le s istae e anie ashes aes 180 Saving a Patch eroi ann aus u tasted unten 181 Saving a Rhythm Set eee dem i een ite n hee itid den ee eee denis S E 181 Copying Sound Generator Settings COPY 182 Copying a Performance ie uU e Heer iie teres ete EG ee Ha is eaea ie dada asee ikia 182 Copying Patch essi e ete ee eet ca teet 183 Copying a Rhythm Set nee tede iei re eden efe ee Ennii dne ied e pene een 184 10 Initializing Sound Generator Settings INIT N 185 Initia
228. 7 1 127 1 127 0 127 0 127 C 1 G9 C 1 G9 0 127 1 10 0 6 12 18 dB HAA AAA AAAS 1 NO ASSIGN AC PIANO EL PIANO KEYBOARDS BELL MALLET ORGAN ACCORDION HARMONICA AC GUITAR EL GUITAR DIST GUITAR BASS SYNTH BASS STRINGS ORCHESTRA HIT amp STAB WIND FLUTE AC BRASS SYNTH BRASS SAX HARD LEAD SOFT LEAD TECHNO SYNTH PULSATING SYNTH FX OTHER SYNTH BRIGHT PAD SOFT PAD VOX PLUCKED ETHNIC FRETTED PERCUSSION SOUND FX BEAT amp GROOVE DRUMS COMBINATION 233 Appendices Parameter List EFFECTS Group p 75 Display Parameter OUTPUT Output Assign Output assign Output level Chorus Chorus send level Reverb Reverb send level PATCH MFX TYPE Type Multi effects type PATCH MFX PRM 1 Multi effects parameters PATCH MFX CTRL Source Multi effects control source 1 2 3 4 Destination Multi effects control destination 1 2 3 4 Sens Multi effects control sensitivity 1 2 3 4 PATCH MFX OUT Output Multi effects output assign Dry Multi effects dry send level Chorus Multi effects chorus send level Reverb Multi effects reverb send level PATCH CHO TYPE Type Chorus type PATCH CHO PRM 4 Chorus parameters PATCH CHO OUT Output Assign Chorus output assign Level Chorus level Select Chorus output select PATCH REV TYPE Type Reverb type PATCH REV PRM 5 Reverb parameters PATCH REV OUT Output Assign Reverb output assign Level Reverb level T5 12 19 4 15 Refer to Multi Effects Parameters
229. 7 I 01 35 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Level 4 0 127 I I 01 36 0000 0aaa TVA Level Velocity Curve 0 7 FIXED 1 7 I 01 37 Oaaa aaaa TVA Level Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 01 38 Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 1 Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 01 39 Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 4 Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 01 3A Oaaa aaaa IVA Env Time 1 0 127 I 01 3B Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 2 0 127 I 01 3C Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 3 0 127 I 01 3D Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Time 4 0 127 I 01 3E Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Level 1 0 127 I 01 3F Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Level 2 0 127 I 01 40 Oaaa aaaa TVA Env Level 3 0 127 I 00 00 01 41 Total Size A 289 k EAN CCP Xd UI IET EUER I dct LE T coma LEE A Td d EL CI TEE REMISE E MIDI Implementation 2 GS Model ID 42H O System Parameter Start I Address Description IE 40 00 00 0000 aaaa l 0000 bbbb l 0000 cccc 0000 dddd Master Tune 24 2024 l I l 100 0 100 0 cent 40 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Master Volume 0 127 l 40 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Master Key Shift 40 88 I l 24 424 semitone 40 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Master Pan Ig l L63 63R 40 00 7F Oaaa aaaa Mode Set 10 127 GS RESET GS EXIT O Common Parameter Start I Address Description 40 01 10 Oaaa aaa
230. 768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 I I I 20000 20000 4 01 01 0000 aaaa I 1 00 15 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 ccce I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 29 12768 52768 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 2 12768 52768 I I I 20000 420000 I I I 20000 20000 4 01 05 0000 aaaa I E 00 19 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 ccce I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 30 12768 52768 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 3 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 I I I 20000 20000 4 01 09 0000 aaaa I IE 00 1D 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 ccce I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 31 12768 52768 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 4 12768 52768 I I 20000 420000 l 20000 20000 01 OD 0000 aaaa IE 00 21 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 32 12768 52768 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 5 12768 52768 l I I 20000 420000 I I I 20000 20000 I E 00 25 0000 aaaa I 00 00 01 11 Total Size I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 6 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 MIDI Implementation O1 3 1 3 Patch Common Chorus is 00 2B 0000 aaaa
231. 8 M In this manual Parameters that can be controlled using the Matrix Controller are marked with a x For instructions on how to connect up and set the MIDI receive channel refer to Playing the XV 88 s Sound Generator from an External MIDI Device p 205 1 Select the Patch you wish to use 2 Use the Control 1 4 parameters PATCH CONTROL MATRIX CTRL SRC to specify which MIDI message will be used for control p 78 3 Call up the MATRIX CONTROL 1 4 pages PATCH CONTROL then set the following parameters p 79 Dest Sets which parameter is controlled Sns Specifies how deeply the parameter is to be controlled Tone Sets the Tone you wish to apply the effect 4 When the MIDI message set with the Control 1 4 parameter is sent from an external MIDI device to the XV 88 the Tone parameter set with the Dest parameter changes according to the Tone set in the Tone parameter when at the same level as that set in the Sns parameter 205 Chapter 12 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 Changing the Multi Effects Settings From an External MIDI Device in Realtime The Multi effects settings can be controlled using specified MIDI messages from an external MIDI device in realtime Multi effects Controller p 115 Nei The parameters that can be changed are predetermined for each type of Multi effects among the parameters described in Multi Effects Types p 117 these are i
232. 8 Palette slider Adjusting the volume balance between Parts 39 Changing the volume of Tone Modify the sound in realtime Pan Extetnial pan cete tet ete bed e he 60 Pan information GM Part 197 Pan information Part sse 56 Pan LFO depth 1 2 85 Part pan aaa ntes A ove eed ree 53 Part pan GM 196 Pateh pam sa 70 Receive pan mode Rhythm Tone 97 Receive pan switch Part J 52 Rhythm Tone pan a a 103 Tone pan WAVE paltas La m a aa aap u aa a Pan keyfollow u u uuu sess nennen Pan LFO depth 1 2 Pan Mode ss eee eoim eoim needed eee PAN MODULATE PANIC Panti eon x y I M MD M dU BU assqa Part Current Part orientem ree eee rere be iere neget PART group GM GS OY tenemus SIM tM 196 Pettormi nce gaa teet nee ti er ente nih 53 Part legato switch 55 Part level 53 Part mono poly a eg dede eden Tie dede edes eid 55 Part mono poly GM a 197 Part pan GM Partt iniecit nee interne Parba cd ec AI DM LI ERE ED RE ee PART PEAY een a Su u rete tete the ene ordena edlen ben aed onn Part portamento switch time Part portamento switch time GM sse 197 Part type e Bri ae 196 Tant eee esos ae ec ARM ORI NM E EE 53 Part volume xa a aasawa HE VERO HIVER URN RUS 196 PATI CH rp
233. 80 Series installed in the EXP A and B slots and cannot be overwritten However you can modify the settings of the currently selected Rhythm Set and then save the modified settings in User memory or a memory card The number of onboard Rhythm Sets depends on the specific Wave Expansion Boards installed Nore XP A B Rhythm Sets can be selected only if a Wave Expansion Board SR JV80 Series is installed in the corresponding slot XP C D Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP C D Slots These are the groups of Rhythm Sets from Wave Expansion Boards optional SRX Series installed in the EXP C and D slots and cannot be overwritten However you can modify the settings of the currently selected Rhythm Set and then save the modified settings in User memory or a memory card The number of onboard Rhythm Sets depends on the specific Wave Expansion Boards installed Noe XP C D Rhythm Sets can be selected only if a Wave Expansion Board SRX Series is installed in the corresponding slot 1 Press RHYTHM to call up the RHYTHM PLAY page Rhythm Set number Rhythm Set group Rhythm Set name RHYTHM PR A 001 PorDrumset 1 PLAY A Br 3 kbd C 4 2 Select a Rhythm Set group or Bank USER Press USER to make the indicator light CD A H Press CARD and then press A H to make the indicator light PR A F Press PRESET and then press A F to make the indicator light PR H GM2 Press PRESET and then press H
234. 9 ISOLATOR p 152 Parameter Value High Level high 60 4 dB Middle Level middle 60 4 dB Low Level low 60 4 dB Anti Phase Mid Anti phase middle switch level OFF ON 0 127 Anti Phase Low Anti phase low switch level OFF ON 0 127 Low Boost Low Booster switch level OFF ON 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 247 Appendices Parameter List 60 3D CHORUS p 152 Chorus Parameters Parameter Value Pre Dly Pre delay time 0 0 100 ms CHORUS p 157 Rate LFO rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Depth LFO depth 0 127 Parameter Value Phase Phase 0 180 degree Pre Dly Chorus pre delay 0 0 100 ms Filter Type Filter Type OFF LPF HPF Rate Chorus rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Cutoff Cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 Depth Chorus depth 0 127 Out Output mode SPEAKER PHONES Fbk Chorus Feedback 0 127 LoG Low gain 15 415 dB Phase Phase 0 180 degree Hi G High gain 15 415 dB Filter Type Filter type OFF LPF HPF Balance Balance D100 0W D0 100W Cutoff Cutoff frequency 200 8000 Hz 1 Lev Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz DELAY p 157 Parameter Value 61 3D FLANGER p 153 Parameter Value Delay C Delay center 200 1000 ms note Pre Dly Pre delay time 0 0 100 ms Delay L Delay left 200 1000 ms note Rate LFO rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Delay R Delay right 200
235. 9600 cent 40 2x 22 0aaa aaaa CAf Amplitude Control 0 127 I I 100 0 100 0 40 2x 23 Oaaa aaaa CAf LFO1 Rate Control 0 127 I I 10 0 10 0 Hz 40 2x 24 Oaaa aaaa CAf LFOl Pitch Control 0 127 I I 0 600 cent 40 2x 25 0aaa aaaa CAf LFOl TVF Depth 0 127 I l 0 2400 cent 40 2x 26 Oaaa aaaa CAf LFOl TVA Depth 0 127 I I 0 100 0 40 2x 27 Oaaa aaaa CAf LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 I I 10 0 10 0 Hz 40 2x 28 Oaaa aaaa CAf LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 I I 0 600 cent 40 2x 29 0aaa aaaa CAf LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 I I 0 2400 cent 40 2x 2A Oaaa aaaa CAf LFO2 TVA Depth 0 127 I I 0 100 0 MIDI Implementation 0 100 0 I ODrum Setup Parameter 40 2x 30 Oaaa aaaa PAf Pitch Control 40 88 l 24 24 semitone 4 40 2x 31 0aaa aaaa PAf TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 Start I l l 9600 9600 cent l Address Description 40 2x 32 0aaa aaaa PAf Amplitude Control 0 127 I I 100 0 100 0 I 41 mO 00 Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 1 32 127 40 2x 33 0aaa aaaa PAf LFOl Rate Control 0 127 I I l 32 127 ASCII l 10 0 10 0 Hz 41 mO 01 Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 2 32 127 40 2x 34 0aaa aaaa PAf LFOl Pitch Control 0 127 I I I 32 127 ASCII I I 0 600 cent I 41 mO 02 Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 3 32 127 40 2x 35
236. A B Dry Multi effects dry send level 0 127 Chorus Multi effects chorus send level 0 127 Reverb Multi effects reverb send level 0 127 PERFORM CHO TYPE Type Chorus type OFF CHORUS DELAY Source Chorus source PERFORM PART 1 16 PERFORM CHO PRM 4 Chorus parameters PERFORM CHO OUT Output Assign Chorus output assign A B Level Chorus level 0 127 Select Chorus output select MAIN REV MAIN REV PERFORM REV TYPE Type Reverb type OFF REVERB SRV ROOM SRV HALL SRV PLATE Source Reverb source PERFORM PART 1 16 PERFORM REV PRM 5 Reverb parameters PERFORM REV OUT Output Assign Reverb output assign A B Level Reverb level 0 127 1 Refer to Multi Effects Parameters p 241 2 OFF CC01 95 except 32 PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL2 SYS CTRL3 SYS CTRL4 3 Refer to Multi Effects Types p 117 4 Refer to Chorus Parameters p 248 5 Refer to Reverb Parameters p 249 230 MIDI Group p 52 Parameter List Display Parameter Value MIDI Channel MIDI receive channel 1 16 P Rx Sw Receive switch OFF ON P Mute Sw Mute switch OFF MUTE P RxSWITCH Bank Select Receive bank select switch OFF ON P Program Change Receive program change switch OFF ON P Vol Receive volume switch OFF ON P Pan Receive pan switch OFF ON P Exp Receive expression switch OFF ON P Hid Receive hold 1 switch OFF ON P Bnd Receive pitch bend switch OFF ON P Mod Receive modulation switch OFF ON P Caf Receive chann
237. ATCH COMMON TMT VELO RANG p 73 The higher the values set the smoother the switch is between the Tones Changing the Depth of Frequency Modulation for FXM FXM DEPTH Changing Specific Multi Effects Parameters MFX CTRL1 The specified parameter is changed by the MFX CTRL41 Destination parameter MFX CTRL2 The specified parameter is changed by the MFX CTRL2 Destination parameter MFX CTRL3 The specified parameter is changed by the MFX CTRL3 Destination parameter MFX CTRL4 The specified parameter is changed by the MFX CTRL4 Destination parameter won No effects are available even with the Matrix Controller when the settings are such that no Multi effects are applied Sns Matrix Control Sensitivity Sets the amount of the Matrix Controller s effect that is applied To make an increase in the currently selected value to get higher values move to the right increase rates and so on select a positive value to make a decrease in the currently selected value to get lower values move to the left decrease rates and so on select a negative value When both positive and negative are selected the changes are greater as the value increases To have no effect applied select 0 Tone Matrix Control Tone Matrix Control Tone selects the Tone to which the effect is applied when using the Matrix Controller Indicated from left to right are Tones 1 2 3 and 4 Tones to which effects are applied are i
238. Alternate Pan Depth 1 127 I 0000 cccc I I I I L63 63R I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 4 12768 52768 I 00 15 0000 000a Tone Env Mode 0 1 20000 20000 I NO SUS SUSTAIN IE 00 13 0000 aaaa I I I 0000 bbbb I 00 16 0aaa aaaa Tone Dry Send Level 0 127 I 0000 cccc I 00 17 Oaaa aaaa Tone Chorus Send Level 0 127 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 5 12768 52768 l 00 18 Oaaa aaaa Tone Reverb Send Level 0 127 I I I 20000 20000 00 19 Oaaa aaaa Tone Chorus Send Level non MEX 0 127 00 17 0000 aaaa I I 00 1A 0aaa aaaa Tone Reverb Send Level non MFX 0 127 I 0000 bbbb 00 1B 0000 aaaa Tone Output Assign 0 12 l 0000 cccc I I I MFX A B C XV 3080 5080 D lt XV 5080 gt I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 6 12768 52768 I I I 1 2 3 4 5 XV 3080 5080 6 lt XV 3080 5080 gt l l I 20000 20000 I I I 7 XV 5080 8 lt XV 5080 gt 00 1B 0000 aaaa I I I I 0000 bbbb 00 1C 00aa aaaa Tone Pitch Bend Range 0 48 I 0000 cccc 00 1D 0000 000a Tone Receive Expression 0 1 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 7 12768 52768 I l l OFF ON I I I 20000 20000 00 1E 0000 000a Tone Receive Hold 1 0 1 1 00 1F 0000 aaaa I I l OFF ON I 0000 bbbb I 00 1F 0000 000a Tone Receive Pan Mode 0 1 I 0000 cccc I I I CONTINUOUS
239. BACKING 42 TANGO 13 ECHO 28 CLAVI CHORD 43 HOUSE 14 SYNTH BASS 29 WALTZ Arpeggio Motif O value parameter value parameter value parameter Wa P sss r ADS HO DZ n Su TZ SM CRM T MER RR u E 0 SINGLE UP 13 GLISSANDO 26 BASS UP 7 1 SINGLE DOWN 14 CHORD 27 BASS UP 8 2 SINGLE UP amp DOWN 15 BASS CHORD 1 28 BASS RND 1 3 SINGLE RANDOM 16 BASS CHORD 2 29 BASS RND 2 4 DUAL UP 17 BASS CHORD 3 30 BASS RND 3 5 DUAL DOWN 18 BASS CHORD 4 31 TOP UP 1 6 DUAL UP amp DOWN 19 BASS CHORD 5 32 TOP UP 2 7 DUAL RANDOM 20 BASS UP 1 33 TOP UP 3 8 TRIPLE UP 21 BASS UP 2 34 TOP UP 4 9 TRIPLE DOWN 22 BASS UP 3 35 TOP UP 5 10 TRIPLE UP amp DOWN 23 BASS4UP 4 36 TOP UP 6 11 TRIPLE RANDOM 24 BASS UP 5 37 BASS UP TOP 12 NOTE ORDER 25 BASS UP 6 Mp ee CENE MEL POLI Darf MNMEEMEE MESE LEO ORE MEME Arpeggio Beat Pattern a WNCOPCOEMOERSESCTEVQPP E EOS MOI CEP TWEEN KEEN value parameter value parameter value parameter Sp eeu redes cce pra rs petri ee ee ee E 0 1 4 40 SEQ A 5 80 STRUM 4 1 1 6 41 SEQ A 6 81 STRUM 5 2 1 8 42 SEQ A 7 82 STRUM 6 3 1 12 43 SEQ B 1 83 STRUM 7 4 1 16 1 44 SEQ B 2 84 STRUM 8 5 1 16 2 45 SEQ B 3 85 REGGAE 1 6 1 16 3 46 SEQ B 4 86 REGGAE 2 7 1 32 1 47 SEQ B 5 87 REFRAIN 1 8 1 32 2 48 SEQ C 1 88 REFRAIN 2 9 1 32 3 49 SEQ C 2 89 PERC 1 10 PORTA A 01 50 SEQ D 1 90 PERC 2 1 PORTA A 02 51 SEQ D 2 91 PERC 3 12 PORTA A 03 52
240. CH OCT amp TUNE Patch Octave amp Tune FATCH f Octave Coarse Fine Stretch OCT amp TUHES BI B B OFF Octave Octave Shift Adjusts the pitch of the Patch s sound up or down in units of an octave 3 octaves Coarse Coarse Tune Adjusts the pitch of the Patch s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves HINT You can specify the coarse tune of each Tone using the Coarse parameter PATCH PITCH PITCH p 86 Fine Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the Patch s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents M One cent is 1 100th of a semitone HINT You can specify the fine tune of each Tone using the Fine parameter PATCH PITCH PITCH p 86 Stretch Stretch Tuning Depth This setting allows you to apply stretched tuning to the Patch Stretched tuning is a system by which acoustic pianos are normally tuned causing the lower range to be lower and the higher range to be higher than the mathematical tuning ratios would otherwise dictate With a setting of OFF the Patch s tuning will be equal temperament A setting of 3 will produce the greatest difference in the pitch of the low and high ranges The diagram shows the pitch change relative to equal temperament that will occur in the low and high ranges This setting will have a subtle effect on the way in which chords resonate Pitch difference from equal temperament Parameter value Low note range High note range PATCH COMMON
241. Chorus Source 07 32 I I I 1 115 I I PERFORM 1 16 17 32 lt XV 5080 gt I 00 20 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Accent Rate 0 100 I 00 34 OOaa aaaa Reverb Source 0 32 I 00 21 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Shuffle Rate 50 90 I I PERFORM 1 16 17 32 lt XV 5080 gt I 00 22 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity 0 127 I I I REAL 1 127 00 00 00 35 Total Size I 00 23 0000 0aaa Arpeggio Octave Range 61 67 gp l l I 00 24 Oaaa aaaa Beam Assign 0 103 O 1 2 2 Performance Common MFX I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH OCT UP OCT DOWN I I I START STOP TAP TEMPO Offset I 00 25 0000 00aa Beam Output Mode 0 3 Address Description I I I OFF INT MIDI BOTH l 00 26 0000 000a Beam Polarity 0 1 00 00 Oaaa aaaa MFX Type 0 127 l l l STANDARD REVERSE 00 01 Oaaa aaaa MFX Dry Send Level 0 127 I 00 27 Oaaa aaaa Beam Range Lower 0 127 00 02 Oaaa aaaa MFX Chorus Send Level 0 TAT i I 00 28 Oaaa aaaa Beam Range Upper 0 127 00 03 Oaaa aaaa MFX Reverb Send Level 0 127 lene pes eee ES ee ee ee a SEL PLERCUN AGMEN RUE I l 00 04 0000 00aa MFX Output Assign 0 3 00 00 00 29 Total Size l I I I A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt LENS HS EUNT Mu Kara pM ICTU D en RR RR RUN I I l 00 05 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 1 Source 0 101
242. Control 2 Destination 2 0 33 I I I 4TONES MULTI PARTIAL I OFF l l PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I 00 OE Oaaa aaaa Patch Level 0 127 I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I 00 OF Oaaa aaaa Patch Pan 0 127 I I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I I I L64 63R I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I 00 10 0000 000a Patch Priority 0 1 I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I I I LAST LOUDEST I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I 00 11 Oaaa aaaa Patch Coarse Tune 16 112 l I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I I I 48 48 I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I 00 12 Oaaa aaaa Patch Fine Tune 14 114 I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I I I 50 50 I 00 38 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Sens 2 1 127 I 00 13 0000 Oaaa Octave Shift 61 67 I 63 63 I I I 3 3 l 00 39 OOaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Destination 3 0 33 I 00 14 0000 OOaa Stretch Tune Depth 0 3 I OFF I I I OFF 1 3 I I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I 00 15 Oaaa aaaa Analog Feel 0 127 I I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH l 00 16 0000 000a Mono Poly 0 1 l LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I I I MONO POLY I I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN D
243. D L in Enhancer Sens Enhancer Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Enhancer Mix Level Adjust the ratio with which the overtones generated by the enhancer are combined with the direct sound DlyTime Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard Dly Fbk Delay Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input Negative settings will invert the phase Delay HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the delay feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance Adjust the volume balance between the enhancer sound that is sent through the delay and the enhancer sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the enhancer sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the enhancer sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 35 CHORUSSDELAY This effect connects a chorus and a delay unit in series Balance D L in O Balance D Balance D Cho Diy Chorus Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard ChoRate Chorus Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Dpt Chorus D
244. DI transmit channel Channel parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI of the Zone matches the MIDI receive channel Channel parameter PERFORM MIDI MIDI of the Part p 52 p 59 Have all tones in the patch been turned off Press TONE SWITCH 1 4 getting the indicators to light p 32 Are the Tone Patch and Part level settings excessively low Check the level settings of each Tone Patch and Part with the following parameters Tone level Level parameter PATCH TVA TV A p 90 Patch level Level parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH LVL amp PAN p 70 Part level Level parameter PERFORM PART SETTING p 53 Are the effect settings correct Check the Effect settings ON or OFF p 105 in the Effect Balance or Level Are the output destination settings correct Check the Output Assign settings p 108 p 109 p 113 p 116 p 158 p 160 p 194 p 195 Is the Wave Expansion Board properly installed When selecting the settings that stipulate the use of XP A D waves Patches or Rhythm Sets check that the specified Wave Expansion Board is installed properly in the specified slot Quick Start p 4 p 10 Has the volume been lowered by pedal operations or by MIDI messages volume messages or ex pression messages received from an external MIDI device Use the Panic function to raise the volume p 48 Ifyou are in Performance mode access the INFO display PERFORM INFO to check the settings of the Vo
245. Delay HF damp 29 DISTORTION CHORUS p 135 The parameters are essentially the same as 26 OVERDRIVES CHORUS with the exception of the following two OD Drive Dist Drive OD Pan Dist Pan OD Drive Dist Drive OD Pan bDist Pan 30 DISTORTION FLANGER p 135 The parameters are essentially the same as 27 OVERDRIVESFLANGER with the exception of the following two OD Drive Dist Drive OD Pan bDist Pan OD Drive Dist Drive OD Pan bDist Pan 244 31 DISTORTION S DELAY p 135 The parameters are essentially the same as 28 OVERDRIVE DELAY with the exception of the following two OD Drive Dist Drive OD Pan Dist Pan OD Drive Dist Drive OD Pan Dist Pan 32 ENHANSERSCHORUS p 136 Parameter Value Enhancer Sens Enhancer sensitivity 0 127 Enhancer Mix Enhancer mix level 0 127 Cho Dly Chorus pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms ChoRate Chorus rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Chorus Depth Chorus depth 0 127 Chorus Balance Chorus balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 33 ENHANSER FLANGER p 136 Parameter Value Enhancer Sens Enhancer sensitivity 0 127 Enhancer Mix Enhancer mix level 0 127 Flg Dly Flanger pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms FlgRate Flanger rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Flg Dpt Flanger depth 0 127 Flg Fok Flanger feedback level 98 98 Flanger Balance Flanger balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 34 ENHANSER gt DELAY p 137 Parameter Value Enhancer
246. Delay feedback 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS SRV ROOM SRV HALL SRV PLATE p 160 Parameter Value Pre Delay Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Time Reverb time 0 127 Size Size 1 8 High Cut High cut frequency 160 12500 Hz BYPASS 1 Diffusion Reverb diffusion 0 127 Density Reverb density 0 127 LF Damp LF damp frequency 50 4000 Hz 2 LF Gain LF damp gain 36 0 dB HF Damp HF damp frequency 4000 5000 6400 8000 10000 12500 Hz HF Gain HF damp gain 36 0 dB 1 160 200 250 320 400 500 640 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 5000 6400 8000 10000 12500 Hz BYPASS 2 50 64 80 100 125 160 200 250 320 1600 2000 2500 3200 4000 Hz Appendices 249 Parameter List System Parameters SETUP Group p 168 Display Parameter Value SYSTEM SETUP LCD LCD contrast 1 10 Power Up Mode Power up mode LAST SET DEFAULT Master Level Master level 0 127 Clock Source System clock source INT MIDI System Tempo System tempo 20 250 Mix Parallel Mix Parallel MIX PARALLEL Patch Remain Patch remain switch OFF ON MIDI Group p 169 Display Parameter Value PERFORM MIDI Control Channel Performance control channel 1 16 OFF Local Local switch OFF ON Remote Remote keyboard switch OFF ON PATCH MIDI Rx Ch Patch Rhythm set receive channel 1 16 Tx Ch Patch Rhythm set transmit channel 1 16 Rx Ch OFF Local Loc
247. Destination parameter and the MIDI message used Source parameter HINT By using the Matrix Controller instead of the Multi Effects controller you can also change the parameters of some popular Multi effects in realtime p 80 115 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Source Multi Effects Control Source Sets the MIDI message used to change the Multi effects parameter with the Multi effects Controller Set this to OFF when the Multi effects Controller is not being used The following are MIDI messages that can be used as Multi effects Controllers Controller numbers 01 31 33 95 CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 IEJ For more detailed information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 270 Pitch Bend PITCH BEND e Aftertouch AFTERTOUCH System Controller 1 4 SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 MIDI messages used as global Multi effects Controllers HINT Select SYS CTRL1 4 if you want to use the controllers globally for the entire XV 88 MIDI messages used as System Controllers 1 4 are set with the Control 1 4 parameters SYSTEM CONTROL SYS CTRL ASSIGN 1 2 p 173 o x Patch Rhythm Set mode there are parameters that determine for each Tone Rhythm Tone whether or not Pitch Bend Controller Number 11 Expression and Controller Number 64 Hold 1 are received p 77 p 97 When these settings are ON and the MIDI messages are received then when any change is made in t
248. E DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER BASS UP 1 8 BASS RND 1 3 TOP UP 1 6 CHORD CHORD CHORD SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN BASS UP TOP SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN CHORD BASS CHORD 4 BASS CHORD 5 BASS CHORD 2 BASS UP 2 BASS RND 2 TOP UP 2 BASS CHORD 2 BASS UP 2 BASS RND 2 TOP UP 2 CHORD BASS CHORD 1 SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER BASS UP 1 8 BASS RND 1 3 TOP UP 1 6 SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN GLISSANDO TOP UP 4 6 SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO SINGLE RANDOM DUAL RANDOM BASS RND 1 3 all all all SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO all all all all all there is no restriction on the value which can be set 268 Beat Pattern 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 3 PORTA A 01 11 PORTA B 01 15 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 3 SEQ A 1 7 SEQ B 1 5 SEQ C 1 2 SEQ D 1 8 ECHO 1 3 SEQ A 1 SEQ C 1 MUTE 02 03 MUTE 02 03 WALKBS REFRAIN 1 MUTE 01 04 MUTE 07 13 14 MUTE 08 12 15 MUTE 09 10 11 16 STRUM 1 6 SEQ A 7 STRUM 7 8 STRUM 7 8 STRUM 7 8 MUTE 12 REFRAIN 2 MUTE 05 06 1 6 1 12 1 16 1 3
249. E SELECT D BEAM CONTROLLER Section You can apply a variety of effects to sounds simply by moving your hand p 45 ON Switches the D Beam controller on off 2 Volume Slider Adjusts the overall volume that is output from the rear panel OUTPUT jacks and PHONES jack Quick Start p 18 3 PALETTE Section Use the four sliders to modify sounds in realtime FILTER ENV Press this button ON when modifying filter and or envelope settings in realtime using the four sliders CUTOFF RESONANCE ATTACK RELEASE p 34 p 38 LEVEL Press this button ON when adjusting volume balance in realtime using the four sliders 1 2 3 4 p 34 p 39 CONTROLLER Can be switched on when you wish to assign various parameters to the four sliders and modify the sound as you play C1 C2 C3 C4 Quick Start p 66 6 4 KEY EFFECTS Section The buttons in this section allow you to assign various functions to the keys of the XV 88 s keyboard PORTAMENTO Switches Portamento on off p 33 SOLO Specifies playing a single note at a time p 33 TRAN SPOSE Specifies transposing the keyboard in semitone steps gt p 48 ARPEGGIO Switches Arpeggiator on off p 41 0 cT O CT These buttons adjust the pitch of the keyboard in octave steps p 47 Pressing either of these buttons while holding down TRANSPOSE allows you to set the desired amoun
250. E SELECT and press the other TONE SELECT In this case the numbers of Tones other than the first selected Tone will be displayed as symbols In Rhythm Set Mode IEDIT Indicator is Extinguished The function buttons TONE SELECT section will select the key shown in the display If the EDIT indicator is turned off in the Rhythm Set setting page the setting page for individual keys the function buttons will select the key to be edited TONE SELECT 1 move to an octave lower key TONE SELECT 2 move to the semitone below TONE SELECT 3 move to the semitone above TONE SELECT 4 move to an octave higher key In GM Mode IEDIT Indicator is Extinguished The Function buttons work as PART SELECT buttons that switch the reception of Note messages on lit and off extinguished Since 16 Parts are being controlled using only 8 buttons use 1 8 9 16 to select the set of Parts you want to control When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is out you can switch Parts 1 8 on off When it is lit you can switch Parts 9 16 on off If the EDIT indicator is turned off in the Part setting page the function buttons will act as PART Select buttons PART SELECT that select the Part to be edited 25 Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 When EDIT Indicator is Lit Each mode contains a large number of settable items and these items are organized into groups When EDIT indicator is lit the function buttons are used to select p
251. EC to make the setting Preview Mode Preview Sound Mode SINGLE The notes specified by Note 1 4 parameter SYSTEM PREVIEW PREVIEW KEY will sound successively one by one CHORD The notes specified by Note 1 4 parameter SYSTEM PREVIEW PREVIEW KEY will sound simultaneously PHRASE The Phrase associated with the Patch s type category is played u For details on the Note 1 4 parameter settings refer to Phrase Preview Settings PREVIEW p 177 6 Press EXIT to return to the PATCH PLAY page 7 If youset the Preview Mode parameter to PHRASE in step 5 you can specify the phrase that will sound After pressing EDIT to make the indicator light up press the COMMON function button and press 4 amp or W to display the PATCH CATEGORY page FATCH t Category CATEGOR HC PIBHOZCZPH 8 Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to make the setting For details on the available categories refer to p 31 Mb The Patch Finder function uses this setting Making a Patch Sound Thick or Thin Turning a Tone On Off Since a Patch is a combination of up to four Tones you can switch unwanted Tones out of the four off and get just the sound of a specific Tone 1 Make sure that the PATCH PLAY page is displayed 2 Make sure that EDIT indicator is extinguished If it is lit press EDIT At this time the on off setting of each Tone in the displayed Patch will be shown by the indicators of T
252. EPTH I 00 17 0000 000a Legato Switch 0 1 I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I I I OFF ON I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME l 00 18 0000 000a Legato Retrigger 0 1 I I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I I I OFF ON I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I 00 19 0000 000a Portamento Switch 0 1 I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 OFF ON 00 3A Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Sens 3 Qum 127 I 00 1A 0000 000a Portamento Mode 0 1 I 63 63 l NORMAL LEGATO 00 3B 00aa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Destination 4 02 333 11 I 00 1B 0000 000a Portamento Type 0 1 I OFF I I I RATE TIME I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I 00 1C 0000 000a Portamento Start 0 1 I I I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I I I PITCH NOTE I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I 00 1D Oaaa aaaa Portamento Time 0 127 I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I 00 1E 0000 000a Patch Clock Source 0 1 I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I I I PATCH SYSTEM I I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME E 00 1F 0000 aaaa I I I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I 0000 bbbb Patch Tempo 20 250 I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I 00 21 0000 000a One Shot Mode lt XV 5080 gt
253. EPTH1 2 Pitch Pitch LFO depth1 2 63 63 T TVF TVF LFO depth 1 2 63 63 T TVA TVA LFO depth 1 2 63 63 T Pan Pan LFO depth 1 2 63 63 T 1 Itcan also be set in terms of notes P Sixty fourth note triplet 2 Sixty fourth note Thirty second note triplet Thirty second note as Sixteenth note triplet Dotted thirty second note Sixteenth note Js Eighth note triplet A Dotted sixteenth note P Eighth note Ji Quarter note triplet D Dotted eighth note J Quarter note Da Half note triplet J Dotted quarter note J Half note es Whole note triplet d Dotted half note Whole note 1o13 Double note triplet Dotted whole note ei Double note 2 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 3 Same as LFO1 PITCH Group p 86 Display Parameter Value PITCH Coarse Coarse tune 48 48 semitone T Fine Fine tune 50 50 cent T Random Random pitch depth 0 1200 cent 1 T Keyfollow Pitch keyfollow 200 200 2 T PCH ENVELOPE Depth Pitch envelope depth 12 12 T V Sens Pitch envelope velocity sensitivity 63 63 T Time Keyfollow Pitch envelope time keyfollow 100 100 3 T V T1 Pitch envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V T4 Pitch envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T LO Pitch envelope level 0 63 63 T T1 T2 T3 T4 Pitch envelope time 1 2 3 4 0 127 T L1 L2 L3 L4 Pi
254. ER 139 41 STEREO PHASER n nnne 139 42 KEYSYNC FEANGPER ren tr temet tree 140 43 FORMANT FILTER A 44 RING MODULATOR a 142 45 MUE TAP DELAY ai ette eter tero genie 143 46 REVERSE DELAY 47 SHUFFLE DELAY 48 3 DXDED AY aa oe tace eet ni c ege ee 49 PITCH SHIFTER la u u u u ua sauna 304 50 LOBECOMPRESS Su cett et tds 147 BICLOBLNOISE cte aaa aasawa aiakasaaaqssak 148 52 SPEAKER SIMULATOR 148 53 OVERDRIVE 2 149 54 DISTORTION 2 149 55 STEREO COMPRESSOR 150 56 STEREO LIMITER 150 59 ISOLATOR 60 3D CHORUS 61 3D FLANGER 62 TREMOLO 154 63 AUTO PAN we 155 Multi timbral sound generator 21 269 Mute Group en aaa a i area antrian 97 Mute Sw Mute switch GM Part sseseesssssesssssrsssesrisresresrisresrterenrrrenrrsrrsresres 196 Mu te switch Part cese ieee TAEA s 52 Mute switch GM Patt ue ient d eet iade 196 Barton M ot Lp t Lem d cues 52 N Note 1 4 Preview note set 1 4 177 Preview velocity ashuan ahua yy apa 177 Number GM Patch Rhythm Set number eee 196 Patch Rhythm Set number A Wave number Rhythm Wave sees 98 Wave number Tone
255. FF ON I 00 51 Oaaa aaaa WMT2 Wave Coarse Tune 16 112 48 48 I 00 52 Oaaa aaaa WMT2 Wave Fine Tune 14 114 50 50 I 00 53 Oaaa aaaa WMT2 Wave Pan 0 127 I I I 164 63R I 00 54 0000 000a WMT2 Wave Random Pan Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 00 55 0000 00aa WMT2 Wave Alternate Pan Switch 0 2 OFF ON REVERSE 00 56 Oaaa aaaa WMT2 Wave Level 0 127 I 00 57 Oaaa aaaa WMT2 Velocity Range Lower 1 127 1 UPPER I 00 58 Oaaa aaaa WMT2 Velocity Range Upper 1 120 LOWER 127 I 00 59 Oaaa aaaa WMT2 Velocity Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 00 5A Oaaa aaaa WMT2 Velocity Fade Width Upper 0 127 l I 00 5B 0000 000a WMT3 Wave Switch 0 1 l OFF ON I 00 5C 0000 00aa WMT3 Wave Group Type 0 3 INT WAVE SRJV80 EXP SRX EXP SAMPLE XV 5080 1 00 5D 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc 0000 dddd WMT3 Wave Group ID 0 16384 I I I OFF 1 16384 l4 00 61 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT3 Wave Number L Mono 0 16384 I I I OFF 1 16384 Hu 00 65 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT3 Wave Number R 0 16384 I I I OFF 1 16384 I 00 69 0000 OOaa WMT3 Wave Gain 0 3 I I I 6 0 6 12 dB I 00 6A 0000 000a WMT3 Wave FXM Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 00 6B 0000 00aa WMT3 Wave FXM Color 0 3 I I I 1 4 j 00 6C
256. FOl Rate Control 0 127 I M l l 10 0 10 0 Hz 41 ml rr 0aaa aaaa Play Note Number 0 127 40 2x 44 0aaa aaaa CCl LFOl Pitch Control 0 127 I 41 m2 rr Oaaa aaaa Level 0 127 0 600 cent 41 m3 rr 0aaa aaaa Assign Group Number 0 127 40 2x 45 0aaa aaaa CCl LFOl TVF Depth 0 127 l NON 1 127 I I 0 2400 cent I 41 m4 rr 0aaa aaaa Panpot 0 127 40 2x 46 0aaa aaaa CCl LFOl TVA Depth 0 127 I I I RANDOM L63 63R 0 100 0 I 41 m5 rr Oaaa aaaa Reverb Send Level 0 127 40 2x 47 0aaa aaaa CCl LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 I I 0 0 1 0 10 0 10 0 Hz I 41 m6 rr 0aaa aaaa Chorus Send Level 0 127 40 2x 48 Oaaa aaaa CCl LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 I I l 0 0 1 0 I I 0 600 cent 41 m7 rr 0000 000a Rx Note Off 0 1 40 2x 49 0aaa aaaa CCl LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 I I I OFF ON l l 0 2400 cent I 41 m8 rr 0000 000a Rx Note On 0 1 40 2x 4A 0aaa aaaa CCl LFO2 TVA Depth 0 127 I I OFF ON I 0 100 0 b I 40 2x 50 Oaaa aaaa CC2 Pitch Control 40 88 I I 24 424 semitone m Map number 0 MAPI 1 MAP2 40 2x 51 0aaa aaaa CC2 TVF Cutoff Control 0 127 l l 9600 s gs cent rr drum part note number 00H 7FH 40 2x 52 0aaa aaaa CC2 Amplitude Control 0 127 l l 100 0 100 0 40 2x 53 0aaa
257. GLE 11 Labyrinth LAYER 12 FullStrings1 LAYER 44 LoFiTrance88 LAYER 12 Seq Folk SINGLE 12 Sweeper LAYER 13 SearingLd Bs LAYER 45 6 x Hits LAYER 13 Seq Dixie SINGLE 13 Stack Pad LAYER 14 80s Sample88 LAYER 46 Mix Piano LAYER 14 Seq BigBand SINGLE 14 Strobe Pad 2 LAYER 15 PianoRhodes LAYER 47 FullStrings2 LAYER 15 Seq Latin SINGLE 15 Rhythmatic LAYER 16 Blistering88 LAYER 48 XV Pipe LAYER 16 Seq Africa SINGLE 16 Voyage LAYER 17 SuiteCombo LAYER 49 MIDI Strings LAYER 17 Seq World SINGLE 17 S amp H Pad LAYER 18 Springy 88 LAYER 50 BlowPad 88 LAYER 18 Seq Zydeco SINGLE 18 Cyclic Pad LAYER 19 Jupiter2000 LAYER 51 BrassBand 2 LAYER 19 Seq 60 s SINGLE 19 White Hole LAYER 20 Cultivate 88 LAYER 52 Lo Fi Str LAYER 20 Seq Gospel SINGLE 20 EasternSplit LAYER 21 XV SyncLead LAYER 53 DynoRhs amp Bs LAYER 21 Seq PopDance SINGLE 21 Tekno Asia LAYER 22 SlicingPad88 LAYER 54 PhsDyno amp Bs LAYER 22 Seq TeknoPop SINGLE 22 TeknoSplit 1 LAYER 23 Synth Brs 88 LAYER 55 PhsClavi amp Bs LAYER 23 Seq House SINGLE 23 TeknoSplit 2 LAYER 24 Arp Bells LAYER 56 SynClavi amp Bs LAYER 24 Seq Hip Hop SINGLE 24 TknoPopSplit LAYER 25 MinIncidnt88 LAYER 57 XV StlGtr amp Bs LAYER 25 Seq HardCore SINGLE 25 ChildrenSplt LAYER 26 Windy LAYER 58 Nylocato amp Bs LAYER 26 Seq Acid SINGLE 26 Purple Split LAYER 27 RevDlySaws88 LAYER 59 OrganSplit 2 LAYER 27 Seq Ambient SINGLE 27 PulsingSplit LAYER 28 Predator LAYER 60 OrganSplit 3 LAYER 28 Seq New Age SINGLE 28 Pad Lead LAYER 29 XV Rust Kit LAYER 61
258. GS music data However Roland s Sound Canvas Series including the SC 8850 and SC 8820 models feature a different sound module format and expanded tone map so data created exclusively for the Sound Canvas Series may not play back properly on the XV 88 192 Chapter 11 Using the XV 88 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode Muting a Specific Part When you switch over to GM mode all Parts will be set to receive MIDI messages To turn off a specific Part so that it will not sound set the Receive Switch to OFF for the Part 1 Make sure the EDIT indicator is extinguished If it is lit press EDIT At this time the function button indicators will indicate the on off status of each Part When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is out the function button indicators will indicate the status of Parts 1 8 When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit the function button indicators will indicate the status of Parts 9 16 Lit is on and dark is off 2 Press the function button to switch Parts on off Modifying GM Mode Settings GM mode also offers parameters that you can modify for each Part You can modify settings like effects pan and level to customize the playback of GM scores to your liking o oe a GM mode is initialized p 198 all these settings will be lost Youcannot store GM mode settings in internal memory user memory If you want to preserve the GM mode settings save the settings to an external MIDI device by transmitting th
259. H 7FH 0 127 OPanpot Controller number 10 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 0AH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 40H 7FH Left Center Right T vv Panpot Not received in Performance mode when the Pan parameter PERFORM MIDI RxSWITCH is OFF Tn Performance mode the pan parameter PERFORM PART SETTING will change O Expression Controller number 11 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH OBH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Expression 00H 7FH 0 127 Not received when Expression parameter PATCH CONTROL CTRL Rx MIDI or RHYTHM CONTROL Rx MIDI is OFF Not received in Performance mode when Exp parameter PERFORM MIDI RxSWITCH is OFF OHold 1 Controller number 64 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 40H vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON Notreceived when Hold 1 parameter PATCH CONTROL CTRL Rx MIDI or RHYTHM CONTROL Rx MIDI is OFF Not received in Performance mode when Hld parameter PERFORM MIDI RxSWITCH is OFF O Portamento Controller number 65 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 41H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON In Performance mode the Portamento Sw parameter PERFORM PART MONO POL will change O Sostenuto Controller number 66 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 42H vvH
260. H 0 127 0 63 OFF 64 127 ON n MIDI channel number vv Control value OResonance Controller number 71 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 47H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 64 0 63 n MIDI channel number vv Resonance value relative change O Release Time Controller number 72 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 48H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Release Time value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 O Attack time Controller number 73 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 49H vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 64 0 63 n MIDI channel number vv Attack time value relative change O Cutoff Controller number 74 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4AH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Cutoff value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 O General Purpose Controller 5 Controller number 80 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 50H vvH 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value O General Purpose Controller 6 Controller number 81 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 51H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 vv Control value O General Purpose Controller 7 Controller number 82 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 52H vvH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number vv Control value O General Purpose Controller 8 Controlle
261. H GM2 group Patch Rhythm Set cannot be edited Action Select a Patch Rhythm Set from another group USER CD A H PR A F XP A D and edit 219 Quick Reference of Procedures The XV 88 has a large number of functions This section gives the procedures for using some of the frequently used functions For functions that are used simply by setting the applicable parameter only the Parameter name mode display group display is listed A B indicates press B while holding down A A B means press B after first pressing and releasing A Performance Mode Selecting the Performance Press PERFORM Mode PLAY Page Selecting a Performance Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or numeric keys to select Selecting a Performance USER Press USER Group CD A H Press CARD AHH PR A B Press PRESET gt A B Selecting Performances 1 Press SHIFT numeric key 0 turn on the Digit Hold Using the Digit Hold function Function 2 Use the numeric keys to specify the number of the one s place To turn off the Digit Hold function press SHIFT 0 once again Changing the Patch 1 Press PERFORM PATCH Rhythm Set Assigned to a Bark 9 2 Use 4 P toselecta Part 3 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to select a Patch or Rhythm Set Modifying Performance 1 Turn on the EDIT indicator Poti
262. Hz 16 STEP FLANGER p 126 Parameter Pre Dly Rate Depth Fbk Phase Step Rate LowGain Hi Gain Balance Level 17 STEREO DELAY p 127 Parameter Delay L Delay R Fbk Mode Phase L Phase R HF Damp LowGain Hi Gain Balance Level Pre delay time Rate Depth Feedback level Phase Step rate Low gain High gain Effect balance Output level Delay time left Delay time right Feedback level Feedback mode Feedback phase left Feedback phase right HF damp Low gain High gain Effect balance Output level Value 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 98 98 0 180 degree 0 10 20 00 Hz note 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Value 0 0 500 0 ms 0 0 500 0 ms 98 98 NORMAL CROSS NORMAL INVERT NORMAL INVERT 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS Parameter List 18 MODULATION DELAY p 128 Parameter Value Delay L Delay time left 0 0 500 0 ms Delay R Delay time right 0 0 500 0 ms Fbk Feedback level 98 98 Mode Feedback mode NORMAL CROSS Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Depth Depth 0 127 Phase Phase 0 180 degree HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 415 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500
263. I 0 72 4 00 61 0000 aaaa I I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa MEX Dry Send Level 0 127 I 0000 bbbb I I 00 02 Oaaa aaaa MFX Chorus Send Level 0 127 I 0000 cccc I I 00 03 Oaaa aaaa MFX Reverb Send Level 0 127 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 21 12768 52768 I 00 04 0000 00aa MFX Output Assign 0 3 I I I 20000 20000 I I I A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt 4 00 65 0000 aaaa I I I I 0000 bbbb I I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa MEX Control 1 Source 0 101 I 0000 cccc I I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 22 12768 52768 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 06 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 1 Sens 1 127 4 00 69 0000 aaaa I I I I 63 63 I 0000 bbbb I I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa MEX Control 2 Source 0 101 I 0000 cccc I I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 23 12768 52768 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I I 20000 20000 I 00 08 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 2 Sens 1 127 4 00 6D 0000 aaaa I I I I 63 63 I 0000 bbbb I I 00 09 Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 3 Source 0 101 I 0000 cccc I I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 24 12768 52768 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I I I 20000 20000 I 00 OA Oaaa aaaa MFX Control 3 Sens 1 127 4 00 71 00
264. I I I 20000 20000 TI E 00 28 0000 aaaa Offset I l 0000 bbbb Address Description 0000 cece I ia I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 10 12768 52768 00 00 0000 aaaa Structure Type 1 amp 2 0 9 I I I 20000 20000 I 1 10 II 00 2C 0000 aaaa I 00 01 0000 00aa Booster 1 amp 2 0 3 I 0000 bbbb l I 0 6 12 18 dB l 0000 cccc I 00 02 0000 aaaa Structure Type 3 amp 4 0 9 I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 11 12768 52768 I I 1 10 l l l 20000 20000 00 03 0000 00aa Booster 3 amp 4 0 3 00 30 0000 aaaa I 0 6 12 18 dB I 0000 bbbb I l 0000 cccc I 00 04 0000 00aa TMT Velocity Control 0 2 I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 12 12768 52768 I OFF ON RANDOM I I I 20000 20000 l 00 05 0000 000a TMT1 Tone Switch 0 1 00 00 00 34 Total Size I I I OFF ON 00 06 Oaaa aaaa TMT1 Keyboard Range Lower 0 127 I I C 1 UPPER 00 07 Oaaa aaaa TMT1 Keyboard Range Upper 0 127 O 1 3 1 4 Patch Common Reverb I I LOWER G9 I 00 08 Oaaa aaaa TMT1 Keyboard Fade Width Lower 0 127 00 09 Oaaa aaaa TMT1 Keyboard Fade Width Upper 0 127 Offset I I I 00 0A Oaaa aaaa TMT1 Velocity Range Lower 1 127 l Address Description l 1 UPPER I 4 I I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa TMT1 Velocity Range Upper 1 127 I 0
265. IDI 2 The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 22 recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off offering enhanced expressive capabilities and even greater compatibility Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations such as how sounds are to be edited and how effects should be handled have now been precisely defined Moreover the available sounds have been expanded General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo In some cases the conventional form of General MIDI which does not include the new enhancements is referred to as General MIDI 1 as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2 13 Front and Rear Panel Front Panel D BEAM CONTROLLER OI M CJ es 5 MODE PERFORM PATCH RHYTHM PALETTE EDIT PALETTE ATTACK RELEASE FITER ENV KEY EFFECTS PORTAMENTO SOLO VOLUME CUTOFF RESONANCE GM FILTER ENV Sone PART SYSTE 0 CONTROLLER s m CHORUS REVERB ZONE PART SELECT PE EFFECT CJ ocr 0cT MULTI R 2 3 2 3 TONE SWITCH TON
266. INDER The FAVORITE LIST page will appear FAVORITE Select CSHIFTI LIST IBlcPR H 881 128ucicePrha 3 PHO 3 Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a Rhythm Set 4 When you press ENTER the Rhythm Set is selected and you are returned to the RHYTHM PLAY page Chapter 2 Playing Playing Percussion Instruments 1 Press RHYTHM to call up the RHYTHM PLAY page 2 Select a desired Rhythm Set 3 Pressa key on the keyboard to play a percussion instrument The key Note name you press and its percussion instrument name Rhythm Tone name will be displayed below the Rhythm Set name RHYTHM PR B 001 PorDrumset 1 PLAY B itWerkb Kick 3 Note name Rhythm Tone name You can also select a key to be displayed by using TONE SELECT 1 4 TONE SELECT 1 move to an octave lower key TONE SELECT TONE SELECT TONE SELECT 4 move to an octave higher key move to the semitone below 2 3 move to the semitone above Playing Arpeggios Arpeggiator The Arpeggiator provides for the play of the various notes in chords The XV 88 s Arpeggiator lets you produce an arpeggio broken chord simply by playing a chord In addition to normal arpeggios you can also accurately simulate rhythm guitar or strumming techniques depending on the Arpeggiator settings The Arpeggiator can in fact be used as a handy automatic arranger By pressing ARPEGGIO the indicator lights and allows playing ar
267. INFO ch tx part Patch Parameters COMMON Group p 69 Display Parameter PATCH NAME m PATCH CATEGORY Category PATCH LVL amp PAN Level Pan Analog Feel PATCH OCT amp TUNE Octave Coarse Fine Stretch PATCH COMMON Priority Output Assign PATCH TEMPO Clock Source Tempo PATCH MODIFY Cut Res Atk Rel Velocity Sens TMT VELO CONTROL TMT Velocity Control TMT VEL RANG L Fade Lower Upper U Fade TMT KEY RANG L Fade Lower Upper U Fade STRUCT Type Booster MIDI transmit channel Transmit switch status Part connection status Parameters that can be set independently for each Tone are indicated by T Patch name Patch category Patch level Patch pan Analog feel depth Octave shift Coarse tune Fine tune Stretch tuning depth Voice priority Output assign Patch clock source Patch tempo Cutoff frequency offset Resonance offset Attack time offset Release time offset Velocity sensitivity offset TMT Velocity control switch Velocity fade width lower Velocity range lower Velocity range upper Velocity fade width upper Key fade width lower Key range lower Key range upper Key fade width upper Structure type Booster gain Value Value ASCII Characters max 12 1 0 127 L64 0 63R 0 127 3 3 48 448 50 50 OFF 1 2 3 LAST LOUDEST MFX OUTPUT A B INDIV 1 4 TONE PATCH SYSTEM 20 250 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 OFF ON RANDOM 0 12
268. ION DO NOT OPEN ATTENTION RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE NE PAS OUVRIR CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS WARNING When using electric products basic precautions should always be followed including the following Read all the instructions before using the product Do not use this product near water for example near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink in a wet basement or near a swimming pool or the like This product should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer This product either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a
269. K 3 STACK Tone Tone 0 127 Pan Output pan L64 63R 54 DISTORTION 2 p 149 Parameter Drive Level LowGain Hi Gain Amp Type Tone Drive Output level Low gain High gain Amp simulator switch Amp simulator type Tone Output pan Value 0 127 0 127 15 415 dB 15 415 dB OFF ON SMALL BUILT IN 2 STACK 3 STACK 0 127 L64 63R 55 STEREO COMPRESSOR p 150 Parameter Sustain Sustain Attack Attack time Post Gain Post gain LowGain Low gain Hi Gain High gain Level Output level Value 0 127 0 127 0 6 12 18 15 415 15 415 0 127 56 STEREO LIMITER p 150 Parameter Thre Threshold level Release Release time Ratio Compression ratio Gain Post gain LowGain Low gain Hi Gain High gain Level Output level 57 GATE p 151 Parameter Key Key Thre Key threshold Monitor Key monitor Mode Mode Atk Attack time Hold Hold time Rel Release time Balance Effect balance Level Output level 58 SLICER p 151 Value 0 127 0 127 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 100 1 0 6 12 18 15 415 15 415 0 127 Value SOURCE A B 0 127 OFF ON GATE DUCK 0 127 0 127 0 127 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Parameter Value Beat 1 1 4 4 Beat 1 1 4 4 0 127 Rate Rate 0 05 10 0 Hz note Attack Attack 0 127 Reset Reset OFF SRC A B Thre Reset threshold 0 127 Mon Reset monitor switch OFF ON Mode Mode LEGATO SLASH Shuffle Shuffle 0 127 Level Output level 0 127 5
270. KEY OFF DECAY 4 Ho i time A A Note on Note off won If you have selected a waveform that is a decay type sound i e a sound that fades away naturally even if the key is not released selecting KEY OFF NORMAL or KEY OFF DECAY may result in no sound being heard Chapter 5 Creating Patches Time Tone Delay Time Specifies the time from when the key is pressed or if the Mode parameter is set to KEY OFF NORMAL or KEY OFF DECAY the time from when the key is released until when the Tone will sound Tone Delay Time specifies the beat length for the synchronized tempo when the tempo that specifies the elapsed time until the Tone is sounded Patch Tempo is synchronized with the tempo set in a connected sequencer external tempo lt Example gt For a tempo of 120 120 quarter notes occur in 1 minute 60 seconds Setting Delay time 4 half note 1 second 60 60 21 second 4 quarter note 0 5 seconds 60 120 0 5 seconds 4 eighth note 0 25 seconds 60 240 0 25 seconds Modulating Sounds LFO An LFO Low Frequency Oscillator causes change over a cycle in a sound Each Tone has two LFOs LFO1 LFO2 and these can be used to cyclically change the pitch cutoff frequency and volume to create modulation type effects such as vibrato wah and tremolo Since both LFOs have the same parameters the following explanation will cover both of them LFO 1 LFO2 WAVE 1 LF 1 pug abate f n WAVE AT
271. L KEYBOARD KEVBDOHRDE Transreose Sens Wel Aft SOFE Bic 31IMEDILUM REALI 168 Transpose Transpose Switch Value If you wish to transpose the range of the keyboard turn this switch ON and set the desired amount of transposition in semitone steps Tonic is indicated in parentheses ra The transposed note name will be shown in the lower right of the Performance Patch Rhythm Set PLAY display HINT When transposing the keyboard range on a PLAY display press TRANSPOSE and indicator lights Tochange transpose amount on a PLAY display hold down TRANSPOSE and press OCT or OCT Sens Keyboard Sensitivity Adjusts the keyboard s touch LIGHT Light weight synthesizer keyboard like MEDIUM Standard HEAVY Acoustic piano simulation FULL Full concert ground piano simulation Vel Keyboard Velocity Specifies the velocity value that will be transmitted when you play the keyboard If you want actual keyboard velocity to be transmitted set this to REAL If you want a fixed velocity value to be transmitted regardless of how you play specify the desired value 1 127 Aft Aftertouch Sensitivity Specifies the Aftertouch sensitivity Higher values will allow Aftertouch to be applied more easily Normally you should leave this set to 100 171 Chapter 9 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions HOLD PEDAL HOLE t Continuous Outeut Polarits FEDAL 4 nH BOTH S
272. LFO is immediately added after the key is pressed after which the effect gradually fades high more 4 Pitch Cutoff Frequency Level Pan Delay Time Fade Time low less Y Fade Mode ON OUT Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the minimum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time that the LFO will continue after the keyboard is played LFO is gradually added after the key is released Delay high more Time Fade Time Pitch E y Cutoff Frequency i Depth Level Pan Note Note on off low less Fade Mode OFF IN Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the maximum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time from when the keyboard is released until the LFO begins to be applied LFO is added from the time the key is pressed to the time it is released after which the effect gradually fades Delay Time Fade Time high more Pitch Cutoff Frequency Level 25 low less v Noteon Note off Fade Mode OFF OUT Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the minimum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time that the LFO will continue after the keyboard is released LFO DEPTH 1 2 1 LF f Pitch TUF TUB Pan DEPTHi 2 B B B m B m am For each item specify the amount of the LFO effect The effect produced by modulating the pitch is known as vibr
273. LSATING Pulsating Synth FX SYNTH FX Synth FX Noise etc SYN OTHER SYNTH Poly Synth Pad BPD BRIGHT PAD Bright Pad Synth SPD SOFT PAD Soft Pad Synth VOX VOX Vox Choir Ethnic PLK PLUCKED Plucked Harp etc ETH ETHNIC Other Ethnic FRT FRETTED Fretted Inst Mandolin etc Rhythm amp SFX PRC PERCUSSION Percussion SFX SOUND FX Sound FX BTS BEAT amp GROOVE Beat and Groove DRM DRUMS Drum Set CMB COMBINATION Other Patches which use Split and Layer Selecting Favorite Patches from the Favorite List On the XV 88 you can bring together your favorite and most Chapter 2 frequently used Patches in one place by registering them in the Favorite List The Favorite List gives you immediate access to your favorite Patches wherever they are stored whether in the XV 88 itself on Wave Expansion Boards or on memory cards yon If you have saved Patches located on Wave Expansion Boards or memory cards onto the Favorite List and then attempt to select one of the saved Patches without having the corresponding Wave Expansion Board installed or the relevant memory card inserted No media appears in the display and the selected Patch cannot be played cS For instructions on how to register to the Favorite List refer to Registering Favorite Patches Rhythm Sets in the Favorite List p 165 1 Press PATCH to call up the PATCH PLAY page 2 While holding down SHIFT press PATCH FINDER The FAVORITE LIST page will
274. LY 008 Mod Wah Gtr 2 POLY 072 Phase Hit 3 POLY 008 Massed Horns 3 POLY 072 JP 8Haunting 4 POLY 009 Pick Bass 1 MONO 073 Tekno Hit 1 2 POLY 009 Horn Swell 4 POLY 073 Heirborne 4 POLY 010 Hip Bass 2 POLY 074 Tekno Hit 2 2 POLY 010 Brass It 4 POLY 074 Hush Pad 4 POLY 011 Perc Bass 3 MONO 075 Tekno Hit 3 4 POLY 011 Brass Attack 3 POLY 075 Jet Pad 1 2 POLY 012 HomeyBass 2 MONO 076 Reverse Hit 3 POLY 012 Archimede 3 POLY 076 Jet Pad2 2 POLY 013 Finger Bass 1 MONO 077 SquareLead 1 3 POLY 013 Rugby Horn 3 POLY 077 Phaze Pad 3 POLY 014 Nylon Bass 2 POLY 078 SquareLead2 2 POLY 014 MKS 80 Brass 2 POLY 078 Phaze Str 4 POLY 015 Ac Upright 1 MONO 079 YouandLuck 2 MONO 015 True ANALOG 2 POLY 079 Jet Str Ens 2 POLY 016 Wet Fretls 1 MONO 080 Belly Lead 4 POLY 016 Dark Vox 2 POLY 080 Pivotal Pad 4 POLY 017 Fretls Dry 2 POLY 081 WhistlinAtom 2 POLY 017 RandomVowels 4 POLY 081 3D Flanged 1 POLY 018 Slap Bass 1 2 POLY 082 Edye Boost 2 MONO 018 Angels Sing 2 POLY 082 Fantawine 4 POLY 019 Slap Bass 2 1 MONO 083 MG Solo 4 MONO 019 PvoxOooze 3 POLY 083 Glassy Pad 3 POLY 020 Slap Bass 3 1 MONO 084 FXM Saw Lead 4 MONO 020 Longing 3 POLY 084 Moving Glass 1 POLY 021 Slap Bass 4 2 POLY 085 Sawteeth 3 MONO 021 ArasianMorn 4 POLY 085 Glasswaves 3 POLY 022 4 Pole Bass 1 MONO 086 Smoothe 2 MONO 022 Beauty Vox 3 POLY 086 Shiny Pad 4 POLY 023 Tick Bass 4 MONO 087 MG Lead 2 MONO 023 Mary AnneVox 4 POLY 087 ShiftedGlass 2 POLY 024 HouseBass 3 MONO 088 MG Interval 4 MONO 024 Belltree Vox 4 POL
275. LY 122 Cyber Space 3 POLY 059 Raverborg 4 POLY 123 French Bags 4 POLY 059 Warmth 2 POLY 123 Biosphere 2 POLY 060 Blow Hit 4 POLY 124 Majestic Tpt 1 MONO 060 ORBit Pad 2 POLY 124 Variable Run 4 POLY 061 Hammer Bell 3 POLY 125 Voluntare 2 POLY 061 DeepStrings 2 POLY 125 Ice Hall 2 POLY 062 Seq Mallet 2 POLY 126 2Trumpets 2 POLY 062 Pulsify 4 POLY 126 ComputerRoom 4 POLY 063 Intentions 3 POLY 127 Tpt Sect 4 POLY 063 Pulse Pad 4 POLY 127 Inverted 4 POLY 064 Pick It 3 POLY 128 Mute TP mod 4 POLY 064 GreekPower 4 POLY 128 Terminate 3 POLY Voice number of voice 254 PR D Preset D Group PR E Preset E Group No Name Voice Key Assign No Name Voice Key Assign No Name Voice Key Assign No Name Voice Key Assign 001 Echo Piano 3 POLY 065 Civilization 3 POLY 001 Grand XV 4 POLY 065 St Choir 4 POLY 002 Upright Pno 3 POLY 066 Mental Chord 4 MONO 002 Contemplate 2 POLY 066 SampleThe80s 2 POLY 003 RD 1000 3 POLY 067 House Chord 4 MONO 003 Rock Piano 2 POLY 067 SacredTree 2 POLY 004 Player s EP 2 POLY 068 Sequalog 4 POLY 004 RockPiano Ch 3 POLY 068 VP330 OctEko 2 POLY 005 D 50 Rhodes 4 POLY 069 Booster Bips 2 POLY 005 Pianomonics 4 POLY 069 XV Strings 3 POLY 006 InnocentEP 2 POLY 070 VintagePlunk 4 MONO 006 Piano SftPad 4 POLY 070 Fat Strings 3 POLY 007 Echo Rhodes 4 POLY 071 Plik Plok 2 POLY 007 WarmvoxPiano 4 POLY 071 Dolce p m ff 6 POLY 008 See Thru EP 3 POLY 072 RingSequence 4 POLY 008 Y2K Concerto 8 POLY 072 Sad Strings 6 POLY 009 FMBellPiano 3 POLY
276. M PATCH 2 Use q P toselecta Part 3 Usethe VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to choose the Rhythm Set The rest procedure is the same as for the basic procedure listed above Adjusting the Volume of Rhythm Sets Level parameter RHYTHM COMMON RHYTHM COMMON Controller Settings Changing the Range of the Pitch Bend Lever for each Patch Bend Range parameter PATCH CONTROL TMT CTRL amp BENDER Selecting the MIDI Messages Controlled by the C1 C4 Sliders Selecting the MIDI Messages Controlled by the Control Pedal Assign parameters SYSTEM CONTROL C1 C4 ASSIGN Assign parameter SYSTEM CONTROL CONTROL PEDAL 1 2 Reversing the Polarity of Control Pedal when using a pedal of another manufacturer whose polarity is reversed Polarity parameter SYSTEM CONTROL CONTROL PEDAL 1 2 Selecting the MIDI Messages Controlled by the D Beam Controller In Performance Mode Assign parameter ZONE D BEAM D BEAM CONTROL In Patch Rhythm Set Mode Assign parameter SYSTEM D BEAM D BEAM CONTROL 223 Quick Reference of Procedures 224 Controlling Tone Parameters of the Patch by the Slider or Pedal Matrix Controller For each Patch you can specify up to four control sources MIDI messages for controlling For each control source you can specify up to four control destinations parameters to be controlled 1 Specify the MIDI messages
277. M while in Performance mode and then press TUNE located in the row of function buttons to access the KEY SCALE page In Performance mode GM mode make the scale settings for each key in each Part To make settings for another Part use the cursor buttons to select the desired Part Equal Temperament This scale divides an octave into 12 equal parts using the tuning system that is most widely used in Western music The XV 88 employs equal temperament when the Scale Tune Switch is set to OFF Just Temperament Tonic of C With this tuning the three fundamental chords sound richer compared to equal temperament This effect only applies to one key and transposition can produce less pleasing results Arabian Scale In this scale E and B are a quarter note lower and C F and G are a quarter note higher compared to equal temperament The intervals between G and B C and E F and G Bb and C and Eb and F have a natural third the interval between a major third and a minor third On the XV 88 you can use Arabian temperament in the three keys of G C and F lt Examples gt Note Equal Just Temperament Arabian Scale name temperament tonic C C 0 0 C 8 D 4 14 2 10 2 14 16 14 12 oo CO oc Oc oc oc odo o Arpeggiator Settings ARPEGGIO This is where the settings used in performing arpeggios in Patch Rhythm Set GM mode are made When arpeggios are performed in Performance mode the
278. M INFO Settings Common to the Entire Zone COMMON ZONE COMMON Z HE I Keu Mode COMMON I SIHGLE Key Mode The Key Mode determines how the XV 88 will sound when its keyboard is played LAYER When the keys are pressed all Zones whose Local switches Local parameter are set to ON and the sounds for the linked where the MIDI channels coincide Parts are played Transmission of MIDI messages from the keyboard controller section to external MIDI devices will be determined by the Transmit switch Tx parameter setting of each Zone Part 1 Part 2 2 Part 15 Part 16 Rx ch 1 Rx ch 2 Rx ch 15 Rx ch 16 A MIDI OUT Zone 1 Tx ch 1 Zone 15 Tx ch 15 Zone 16 Tx ch 16 Chapter 4 Zone Settings SINGLE When the keys are pressed the single specified Part current Part are played Zone settings are ignored Transmission of MIDI messages from the keyboard controller section to external MIDI devices will be determined by the Receive switch Rx Sw parameter setting for the current Part Part 1 Rx ch 1 MIDI OUT If you have selected a LAYER type Performance the upper right of the PERFORM PLAY page will indicate LAYER p is the Part number If you have selected a SINGLE type Performance part is the Part number will be displayed HINT You can also set the Key Mode parameter on the PERFORM PLAY page By holding down SHIF
279. MPUTER switch you must first turn off the power on the XV 88 2 Usea MIDI cable to connect the MIDI IN connector of the XV 88 to the MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device E MIDI OUT Tee eee MIDI IN B EE m o ojs m slo o fs 000o eC C9 Ce e e 8 3 o Da fem sooo XV 88 3 Set the XV 88 s receive channel to match the external MIDI device s transmit channel The XV 88 s receive channel is determined by the following parameters In Patch Rhythm Set Mode Rx Ch parameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI p 170 In Performance Mode Channel parameter PERFORM MIDI MIDI p 52 Set the Rx Sw parameter PERFORM MIDI MIDI to ON p 52 In GM Mode Channel parameter GM MIDI MIDI p 195 HINT When the Remote parameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI PERFORM MIDI GM MIDI is ON it makes no difference what transmit channel is selected for the MIDI keyboard p 170 EJ For instructions on how to set the transmit channel of the external MIDI device refer to the owner s manual for your external MIDI device 4 When playing the external MIDI device the XV 88 s sound generator will sound Changing the Tone Settings from an External MIDI Device in Realtime The Tone settings can be controlled using specified MIDI messages from an external MIDI device Matrix Controller p 7
280. Modifying Waveform of a Rhythm Tone WAVE sssssseseeeeeeereneeeene nennen 98 Modifying Pitch of a Rhythm Tone PITCH sss 100 Changing the Tone Filter of a Rhythm Tone TVF sse nn 101 Adjusting the Volume and Pan of a Rhythm Tone IVA sss 103 Chapter 7 Adding Elffects 105 About the Onboard Effects aa renee eie EEE ii enS E EE EEE EEE ET tnter tenens 105 Effect Types ME 105 Turning Effects Ori Of 2 5 et ade ne aaa qaku askhas hpa aka was deeper cles 105 Applying Effects in Patch Mode or Rhythm Set Mode sess 106 Selecting the Way the Direct Sound is Output sss 108 The Settings for Each Tone Rhythm Tone esses 109 Applying Effects in Performance Mode sss tentent eene 111 Selecting the Way the Direct Sound is Output sess 113 Making Multi Effects Settings ieiki ee es iE eenia ep ea isie e ier teker Sa Enare tinent tenens 114 Setting Procedure sm asa amat aeee ROET e asna Sua amapas asua AE Eae 114 Functions of PaFametersx uu uma e eene kiss reie ia un a ahua ana ssh 114 Multi Etfects Types osese a a ga u Tobiae eerte ee aede te ed ie eel 117 Making Chorus Settings usses dete annee au ehh Ee EE ee eei deant eg eee edente 156 Setting Procedure uei debt ed Pete Eve tee tetti ettet elei aane 156 Functions of Parameters eed shoe hte datiuo ege a iis
281. Motif Beat Pattern Accent Rate and Shuffle Rate parameters will automatically be set to optimum settings After selecting the style you can also set parameters such as Octave Range and Key Velocity If this selection does not provide the pattern you want modify the settings of the Motif Beat Pattern Accent Rate and Shuffle Rate parameters to add variations to the style as desired o e you make the settings in Patch Rhythm Set GM mode Motif Beat Pattern Accent Rate and Shuffle Rate parameter settings will be lost if you select another style and then turn the power off However in Performance mode you can save them to each Performance as the Performance parameters The values you can set with the Motif or Beat Pattern parameters are normally limited by the selected style Only when the Style parameter is set to LIMITLESS will all values be acceptable 1 Access the ARPEGGIO page In Patch Rhythm Set GM Mode Press SYSTEM getting the indicator to light and then press the ARPEGGIO function button In Performance Mode Press ZONE getting the indicator to light and then press the ARPEGGIO RRPEGGIUO Stule Octave Range 1 LATIH FERECUSSIOH B Here is what appears in the first page of the ARPEGGIO page Ss For details regarding each parameter refer to Arpeggiator Settings ARPEGGIO p 61 p 174 2 Move the cursor to Style and specify the style you want 3 Move the cursor to Octave Range
282. NGE BI E 4l G 3 B These parameters specify the range of notes that will play the Tone This can be used to make notes in different areas of the keyboard play different Tones Lower Key Range Lower Upper Key Range Upper Specify the lower Lower and upper Upper limits in which each Tone will sound Note If you attempt to raise the lower key higher than the upper key or to lower the upper key below the lower key the other value will be automatically modified to the same setting LFade Key Fade Width Lower U Fade Key Fade Width Upper L Fade and U Fade set the range within which the volume gradually fades as the velocity approaches the limits of the Key Range set in the Lower and Upper parameters Use this setting when for example you want to have adjacent Tones in Split mode switched smoothly The higher the values set the smoother the switch is between the Tones When you want the Tones to be switched instantly set these to 0 Level L Fade Lower Upper U Fade STRUCT Structure lz Fi Al Booster STRUCT 1 B Type Structure Type Determines how Tone 1 and 2 or Tone 3 and 4 are connected The following 10 different Types of combination are available Mb The display will show how the Tones are combined The displayed symbols have the following meanings W1 WG1 W2 WG2 F1 TVF1 F2 TVF2 A1 TVA1 A2 TVA2 B booster R ring m
283. O COMPARE to restore the value to what it was 8 If you wish to move to another display group press EDIT to make the indicator light and use the function buttons HINT You can also move to another display group by holding down SHIFT and using 4 amp or W Since this can be done even when the EDIT indicator is dark it is a faster way to get around because you don t have to turn on the EDIT indicator each time 9 Repeat steps 3 8 to make settings for the Zone 10 When you finish making settings press EXIT or PERFORM to return to the PERFORM PLAY page An asterisk appears at the left of the Performance group on the display This shows Performance settings have been modified PERFORM ou R H O1 Se5 Teme late Fart 1 PLAY kbd C 4 Nem Zone settings can be saved individually for each Performance as part of the Performance settings won If you select another Performance in the group with an asterisk the modified Zone settings will be lost To keep these modified settings perform the save operation p 164 57 Chapter 4 Chapter 4 Zone Settings Making Settings While Comparing Zones Palette Edit When modifying Zone settings for a Performance the values for eight Zones Zone 1 8 or Zone 9 16 will be displayed together on a single display This is called the Palette page This is useful when you wish to change parameter values while comparing each Zone settings 1 When editin
284. ONE SWITCH 1 4 Lit is on and dark is off The PATCH PLAY page indicates the Tones that are on as follows Tones that are off are shown as PHTCH PR A 001 125u6 PLAY s kbd c 4 3 Use TONE SWITCH 1 4 to switch Tones on off Mb This setting is linked with the Switch parameter PATCH WAVE WAVE If you want just one or two Tones to sound in a Patch turn the others off and store that setting on a Patch This cuts nonessential use of the XV 88 s simultaneous voices Chapter 2 Playing Playing Single Notes Solo Normally the XV 88 allows you to play chords Pressing SOLO allows performance using single notes This function is effective when performing a solo using single note Patches like sax and flute 1 Make sure that the PATCH PLAY page is displayed 2 Press SOLO so its indicator lights Now you can play a solo 3 Play the XV 88 keyboard Oo a Layer Performance the SOLO indicator goes out each time you change the Performance Also the SOLO indicator does not reflect Mono Poly mode switching information received from an external MIDI device Creating Smooth Pitch Changes Portamento Portamento ensures a smooth pitch changeover from one note to the next note played When SOLO is on indicator lights you can simulate techniques like violin glissandos 1 Make sure that the PATCH PLAY page is displayed 2 Press PORTAMENTO Its indicator lights You re ready to play
285. Oaaa aaaa PAf LFO1 TVF Depth 0 127 I I 32 127 ASCII l 0 2400 cent I 41 mO 03 Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 4 32 127 40 2x 36 0aaa aaaa PAf LFOl TVA Depth 0 127 I I 32 127 ASCII 0 100 0 I 41 m0 04 Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 5 32 127 40 2x 37 0aaa aaaa PAf LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 I I I 32 127 ASCII I I 10 0 10 0 Hz I 41 mO 05 Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 6 32 127 40 2x 38 Oaaa aaaa PAf LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 I I l 32 127 ASCII I I 0 600 cent I 41 mO 06 0aaa aaaa Drum Map Name 7 32 127 40 2x 39 0aaa aaaa PAf LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 I I I 32 127 ASCII I I 0 2400 cent I 41 m0 07 0aaa aaaa Drum Map Name 8 32 127 40 2x 3A 0aaa aaaa PAf LFO2 TVA Depth 0 127 I I l 32 127 ASCII l l 0 100 0 b I 41 mO 08 Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 9 32 127 V T I I l 32 127 ASCII 40 2x 40 0aaa aaaa CCl Pitch Control 40 88 I 41 mO 09 Oaaa aaaa Drum Map Name 10 32 127 l l 24 24 semitone I I l 32 127 ASCII 40 2x 41 0aaa aaaa CCl IVF Cutoff Control 0 127 I 41 mO OA 0aaa aaaa Drum Map Name 11 32 127 I l 9600 9600 cent I I 32 127 ASCII 40 2x 42 Oaaa aaaa CCl Amplitude Control 0 127 41 m0 OB 0aaa aaaa Drum Map Name 12 32 127 l I 100 0 100 0 I I 32 127 ASCII 40 2x 43 0aaa aaaa CCl L
286. Orch Hit REV TeknoHit REV Back Hit REV PhillHit REV Steel DR REV Tin Wave REV AmbiSNpL REV AmbiSNpR REV AmbiSNfL REV AmbiSNfR REV Wet SNpL REV Wet SNpR REV Wet SNfL Wave Name REV Wet SNfR REV Dry SN REV PiccloSN REV Maple SN REV OIdFilISN REV 70s SN REV SN Roll REV NatrlSN1 REV NatrlSN2 REV BalladSN REV RkSNpL REV RkSNpR REV RkSNmfL REV RkSNmfR REV RkSNfL REV RkSNfR REV RkRimpL REV RkRimpR REV RkRimmfL REV RkRimmfR REV RkRimfL REV RkRimfR REV RkGstL REV RkGstR REV SnareGst REV JzSNpL REV JzSNpR REV JzSNmfL REV JzSNmfR REV JzSNfL REV JzSNfR REV JzSNffL REV JzSNffR REV JzRimpL REV JzRimpR REV JzRimmfL REV JzRimmfR REV JzRimfL REV JzRimfR REV JzRimffL REV JzRimffR REV Brush 1 REV Brush 2 REV Brush 3 REV JzSwish1 REV JzSwish2 REV 909 SN 1 REV 909 SN 2 REV RkRoll L REV RkRoll R Wave Name REV JzRoll REV Dry Stk REV DrySick REV Side Stk REV Wdy Stk REV RkStk1L REV RkStk1R REV RkStk2L REV RkStk2R REV Thrill REV Dry Kick REV Mpl Kick REV Rkkik p REV Rkkik mf REV RkKik f REV JzKik p REV JzKik mf REV JzKik f REV Jaz Kick REV Pillow K REV Jz Dry K REV LiteKick REV Old Kick REV Hybrid K REV HybridK2 REV 70s K 1 REV 70s K 2 REV Dance K REV 909 K 2 REV RkTomL1p REV RkTomL2p REV RkTomM p REV RkTomH p REV RkTomL1f REV RkTomL2f REV RkTomM f REV RkTomH f REV RkFlmL1 REV RkFlmL2 REV RkFlm M REV RkFlm H REV JzTomL p REV JzTomM p REV JzTomH p REV JzTomL f REV JzTomM f REV JzTomH f
287. Output Assign p 109 Output Level p 109 Chorus Send Level p 110 Reverb Send Level p 110 Multi effects Output Assign p 116 Multi effects Dry Send Level p 116 Multi effects Chorus Send Level p 116 Multi effects Reverb Send Level p 116 Reverb Output Assign p 160 Reverb Level p 160 Chorus Output Assign p 158 Chorus Level p 158 Chorus Output Select p 158 MAIN M R Multi Effects 92 ojoj NI Sao AJ A Vj N 1 allo Nm w A OUTPUT B A MIX R L R L MONO BALANCED 4 3 2 1 INDIVIDUAL 107 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Selecting the Way the Direct Sound is Output Here set the way the direct sound is output for each Patch or Rhythm Set The settings made here determine whether or not the signal passes through the Multi effects the Jack used to output the sound and the type of output stereo or mono HINT You can select the way the direct sound is output for each Tone or Rhythm Tone individually p 109 About the Output Jacks The XV 88 is equipped with four OUTPUT jacks Patch and Rhythm Set sounds are output from any of these Jacks Each jack can of course output sounds monaurally and by using two jacks as a pair you can output sounds in stereo left right Additionally you can
288. PATCH Priority Output Assign COMMON 4 TOHE LOUDEST Priority Voice Priority This determines how notes will be managed when the XV 88 s maximum polyphony limit is exceeded 128 voices LAST The last played voices will be given priority and currently sounding notes will be turned off in order beginning with the first played note LOUDEST The voices with the loudest volume will be given priority and currently sounding notes will be turned off beginning with the lowest volume voice Output Assign Specifies for each Patch how the direct sound will be output MFX Output in stereo through Multi Effects You can also apply Chorus or Reverb to the sound that passes through Multi effects Chapter 5 Creating Patches OUTPUT A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo without passing through Multi effects OUTPUT B Output to the OUTPUT B MIX jacks in stereo without passing through Multi effects INDIV 1 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 2 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 3 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 3 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 4 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 4 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects TONE Outputs according to the settings for each Tone o e outputting in mono the Pan setting is disabled When the settings are such that signals are spl
289. PATCH TEMPO to SYSTEM p 71 3 Set the Rate parameter PATCH LFO LFO 1 2 WAVE of each Tone to the beat length for the tempo you are synchronizing p 83 4 At the LFO DEPTHI1 2 page PATCH LFO set the modulation depth for each Tone p 85 5 Set the Clock Source parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP to INT p 168 HINT When the Clock Source parameter is set to MIDI you can achieve synchronization with the tempo of an external MIDI device 6 Try playing the keyboard while you change the System Tempo parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP to various values p 169 You ll notice that the tempo of the Patch s modulation changes in accordance to the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system 200 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 Modifying Multi Effects to Match the System s Tempo In the following example we will synchronize the Step Rate parameter of STEP FLANGER to the system tempo 1 Select the Patch PR C 094 Albion on the PATCH PLAY page This Patch uses STEP FLANGER as the Multi effects type 2 Setthe Clock Source parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH TEMPO to SYSTEM p 71 3 SettheStep Rate parameter PATCH EFFECTS PATCH MFX PRM of each Tone to the beat length for the tempo you are synchronizing p 126 4 Setthe Clock Source parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP to INT p 168 HINT When the Clock Source parameter is set to MIDI you can achieve synchronization with the tempo of
290. PERCUSSION HARP SHAMISEN BOUND BALL RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA MAMBO LATIN PERCUSSION SAMBA TANGO HOUSE LIMITLESS 2 SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM TRIPLE UP TRIPLE DOWN TRIPLE UP amp DOWN TRIPLE RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO CHORD BASS CHORD1 5 BASS UP1 8 BASS RND1 3 TOP UP1 6 BASS UP TOP 3 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 3 PORTA A 01 11 PORTA B 01 15 SEQ A 1 7 SEQ B 1 5 SEQ C 1 2 SEQ D 1 8 ECHO 1 3 MUTE 01 16 STRUM 1 8 REGGAE 1 2 REFRAIN 1 2 PERC 1 4 WALKBS HARP BOUND RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA 1 4 MAMBO 1 2 CLAVE REV CLA GUILO AGOGO SAMBA TANGO 1 4 HOUSE 1 2 D BEAM Group p 176 Display Parameter Value D BEAM CONTROL Assign D Beam assign 1 Output D Beam output OFF INT MIDI BOTH Polarity D Beam polarity STANDARD REVERSE D BEAM RANGE Lower D Beam range lower 0 127 Upper D Beam range upper 0 127 D BEAM SENS D Beam Sensitivity D Beam sensitivity 1 10 1 OFF CC01 95 except 32 PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH OCT UP OCT DOWN START STOP TAP TEMPO PREVIEW Group p 177 Display Parameter Value SYSTEM PREVIEW Preview Mode Preview sound mode SINGLE CHORD PHRASE PREVIEW KEY Note 1 2 3 4 Preview note set 1 2 3 4 C 1 G9 PREVIEW VELOCITY Note 1 2 3 4 Preview velocity 0 127 INFO Group p 178 Display Parameter Value INFO EXP Expansion A Wave expansion board name A sie Expansion B Wave expansion
291. PRESSOR Lin 2 Band EQ L out Rin 2 Band EQ R out Sustain Adjust the time over which low level sounds are boosted until they reach the specified volume Attack Attack Time Adjust the attack time of an input sound Post Gain Adjust the output gain LowGain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain Level Output Level Adjust the output level 150 56 STEREO LIMITER Thre Threshold Level Adjust the volume at which compression will begin Release Release Time Adjust the time from when the volume falls below the Threshold Level until compression is no longer applied Ratio Compression Ratio Adjust the compression ratio Gain Post Gain Adjust the output gain Low Gain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain Level Output Level Adjust the output level Chapter 7 Adding Effects 57 GATE The Gate effect cuts the reverb s delay according to the volume of the sound input to the effects device Use this in situations such as when you want to force a decrease in the decay sound Key Selects the input of the sound that acts as the trigger closing the gate When set to SOURCE the gate is closed by the sound input to the Multi effects Thre Key Threshold Sets the volume level at which the gate begins to close Monitor Key Monitor Determines whether the sound used as
292. Pan Output pan L64 0 63R Parameter Value Level Output level 0 127 Manual Manual 100 8000 Hz Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Depth Depth 0 127 Res Resonance 0 127 Mix Mix level 0 127 Pan Output pan L64 0 63R Level Output level 0 127 05 SPECTRUM p 121 Parameter Value Band 1 Band 1 gain 15 415 dB Band 2 Band 2 gain 15 15 dB Band 3 Band 3 gain 15 415 dB Band 4 Band 4 gain 15 15 dB Band 5 Band 5 gain 15 415 dB Band 6 Band 6 gain 15 415 dB Band 7 Band 7 gain 15 415 dB 9 Band 8 Band 8 gain 15 15 dB 9 Q Q 0 5 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 Pan Output pan L64 0 63R Level Output level 0 127 amp 241 Parameter List 10 LIMITER p 123 Parameter Thresh Ratio Release Gain LowGain Hi Gain Pan Level Threshold level Compression ratio Release time Post gain Low gain High gain Output pan Output level Value 0 127 1 5 1 2 1 4 1 100 1 0 127 0 6 12 18 dB 15 415 dB 15 415 dB L64 0 63R 0 127 11 HEXA CHORUS p 124 Parameter Value Pre Dly Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz Depth Depth 0 127 Dly Dev Pre delay deviation 0 20 Dpt Dev Depth deviation 20 20 Pan Dev Pan deviation 0 20 Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 12 TREMOLO CHORUS p 124 Parameter Pre Dly ChoRate Cho Dpt Phase TrmRate Trm Sep Balance Level Pre delay time Chorus rate Chorus depth Tremolo phase Tremolo rate Tremolo separatio
293. Pattern setting is 1 4 shuffle will not be applied even if you increase the Shuffle Rate setting 62 Chapter 4 Zone Settings Key Velocity Specifies the loudness of the notes that you play If you want the velocity value to change according to how strongly you played each note set this to REAL If you want each note to have a fixed velocity regardless of how strongly you play the keyboard set this parameter to the desired value 1 127 Zone Arpeggio Zone Arpeggio Zone sets the Zone for playing an Arpeggio performance when a Layer Performance is being selected The Arpeggio performance corresponding to the Part connected to the Zone set here is played won When a Single Performance is selected this setting is disabled and the single specified Part current Part will play arpeggios Tempo Arpeggio Tempo Sets the speed of the arpeggio When the Clock Source parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to INT the display will indicate Tempo SYS and this will be the same value as the system tempo With a setting of MIDI the display will indicate Tempo EXT and you will be synchronized to the clock of the external MIDI device Setting the D Beam Controller D BEAM This is where the settings are made for applying effects to the sound by moving your hand over the D Beam controller in Performance mode NEm When using the D Beam controller in Patch Rhythm Set GM mode the settings are made in System
294. Pitch Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want keyboard playing dynamics velocity to affect T1 Time 1 of the pitch envelope Positive settings will cause T1 time to speed up for strongly played notes and negative settings will cause it to slow down V T4 Pitch Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want key release speed to impact on T4 Time 4 value of the pitch envelope If you want T4 time to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value LO Pitch Envelope Level 0 Specifies the pitch envelope level L0 Pitch Envelope Level 0 determines the degree to which the pitch of the sound at the instant the key is pressed is altered relative to the reference pitch the Coarse Tune or Fine Tune value set in the PITCH page Positive settings will cause the pitch to be higher than the standard pitch and negative settings will cause it to be lower T1 T4 Pitch Envelope Time 1 4 Specify the pitch envelope times T1 T4 Larger values result in longer times until the next pitch is reached for instance T2 controls the time from L1 until L2 is reached L1 L4 Pitch Envelope Level 1 4 Set the level L1 L4 for the pitch envelope It determines how much the pitch changes from the reference pitch the value set with Coarse Tune or Fine Tune on the PITCH pa
295. QU ENSURE Qs 172 C1 C4 Output m CI CA slider assign 2e nete peser decns endi 172 C1 C4 slider output ereki eai a TE EEEk 173 C1 C4 sliders A CARD INFO Category e Channel MIDI receive channel GM Part eee 195 MIDI receive channel Part sse 52 MIDI transmit channel Zone see 59 CHO OUT eren 158 CHO PRM 157 CHO TYPE 156 CHORUS rece u uama A SS uya 15 105 Chorus Chorus pardMeterS sssri iinis 248 Chorus send level GM Part sss 194 Chorus send level Part 29 Chorus send level Rhythm Tone 110 Chorus send level Tone 110 Multi effects chorus send level 116 Chorus level 158 Chorus output assign 158 GM iniit naq we 195 Chorus output select entente heiter 158 Chorus send level GM Patt iere rather iiri he ceti cere cei 194 Patt 2s 113 Rhythm Tone 110 Tone 110 Chorus source 156 CHOPUS TY PO isc iii u sn unamasa aE ddp 156 3M eis me cbe LIU MUI M a uha sens year ace 195 Clock Source Patch clock soutee seisena ee 7 Rhythm Set clock source sse 96 System clock source sse 168 Coarse Coarse tune GM Part sse 196 Coarse tune Part Coarse tune Patch n 70 Coarse tune Rhythm Tone
296. QUENCE A SEQUENCE B SEQUENCE C SEQUENCE D ECHO SYNTH BASS HEAVY SLAP LIGHT SLAP WALK BASS RHYTHM GTR 1 RHYTHM GTR 2 RHYTHM GTR 3 RHYTHM GTR 4 RHYTHM GTR 5 3 FINGER STRUM GTR UP STRUM GTR DOWN STRUM GTR UP amp DW PIANO BACKING CLAVI CHORD WALTZ SWING WALTZ REGGAE PERCUSSION HARP SHAMISEN BOUND BALL RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA MAMBO LATIN PERCUSSION SAMBA TANGO HOUSE LIMITLESS 2 SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM TRIPLE UP TRIPLE DOWN TRIPLE UP amp DOWN TRIPLE RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO CHORD BASS CHORD1 5 BASS UP1 8 BASS RND1 3 TOP UP1 6 BASS UP TOP 3 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 8 PORTA A 01 11 PORTA B 01 15 SEQ A 1 7 SEQ B 1 5 SEQ C 1 2 SEQ D 1 8 ECHO 1 3 MUTE 01 16 STRUM 1 8 REGGAE 1 2 REFRAIN 1 2 PERC 1 4 WALKBS HARP BOUND RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA 1 4 MAMBO 1 2 CLAVE REV CLA GUILO AGOGO SAMBA TANGO 1 4 HOUSE 1 2 232 D BEAM Group p 63 Display Parameter D BEAM CONTROL Assign Output Polarity D BEAM RANGE Lower Upper D BEAM SENS D Beam Sensitivity D Beam assign D Beam output D Beam polarity D Beam range lower D Beam range upper D Beam sensitivity Parameter List Value 1 OFF INT MIDI BOTH STANDARD REVERSE 0 127 0 127 1 10 1 OFF CC01 95 except 32 PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH OCT UP OCT DOWN START STOP TAP TEMPO INFO Group p 64 Display Parameter
297. REGGAE 1 2 PERC 1 4 HARP SEQ A2 BOUND 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 3 1 32 1 3 RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA 1 4 MAMBO 1 2 CLAVE REV CLA GUIRO AGOGO SAMBA TANGO 1 4 HOUSE 1 2 all Accent Rate Shuffle Rate 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 50 90 About MIDI MIDI Musical Instruments Digital Interface is a standard specification that allows musical data to be exchanged between electronic musical instruments and computers MIDI With a MIDI cable connecting MIDI devices that are equipped with MIDI connectors you can play multiple instruments with a single keyboard have multiple MIDI instruments perform in ensemble program the settings to change automatically to match the performance as the song progresses and more If you mainly u
298. REI B 95 B OFF Form LFO Waveform Specifies the LFO waveform Sine wave Triangle wave i Sawtooth wave 4 Sawtooth wave negative polarity Square wave i Random wave AF Once the attack of the waveform output by the LFO is Lud to develop in standard fashion the waveform then continues without further change i Once the decay of the waveform output by the LFO is Ben to develop in standard fashion the waveform then continues without further change Trapezoidal wave 4P Sample and Hold wave LFO value is changed one time per cycle Chaos wave won When setting 1 ma Set the KeySync parameter to ON If this is OFF it will have no effect Ofset LFO Level Offset Adjusts the LFO waveform up or down from the center value pitch or cutoff frequency Positive 4 settings will move the waveform up from the center value Negative settings will move it down from the center value Rate LFO Rate x Adjusts the modulation rate or speed of the LFO LFO Rate sets the beat length for the synchronized tempo when the tempo that specifies the LFO cycle Patch Tempo is synchronized with the tempo set in a connected sequencer external tempo lt Example gt For a tempo of 120 120 quarter notes occur in 1 minute 60 seconds Setting Delay time d half note 1 second 60 60 1 second 4 quarter note 0 5 seconds 60 120 0 5 seconds
299. Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect Flg Dpt Hanger Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect Flg Fbk Flanger Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance Adjust the volume balance between the overdrive sound that is sent through the flanger and the overdrive sound that is not sent through the flanger With a setting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the overdrive sound that is sent through the flanger will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level Chapter 7 Adding Effects 28 OVERDRIVE DELAY This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series Lin L out Balance D Y Balance W Moss O O Balance D Overdrive Balance W Rin R out OD Drive Adjust the degree of overdrive distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion OD Pan Overdrive Pan Adjust the stereo location of the overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right DlyTime Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard Dly Fbk Delay Feedback Level Adjust the proportion 76 of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Delay HF Dam
300. Rhythm Set is organized u 21 93 Rhythm Set group Rhythm Set listenn aeren n E ane EE EEES Rhythm Set parameters sss 96 237 Rhythm Set settings Selecting a Rhythm Set a a 39 Rhythm Set clock source sse 96 Rhythm Set level Rhythm Set m d 2 sooo e eerte tee tede de dcc erede 24 Applying effects in Rhythm Set mode suus 106 Playing in Rhythm Set mode RhythiSetttempoz sa s u ss tentent RELY PFIMITEMPOQ Las asaaa aayqa ayayasqa qayasqa e t Rhythm Tone level Rhythm Tone pan RHYTHM WRITE Ring modulator Rx Ch Rx GM On Rx GM2 On Rx GS Reset Rx MIDI Rx Sw Receive switch GM Part sese 196 Receive switch Part essent 52 RX SYS XCM ss he eerte niei ao REIR ui E HE REO 171 ES ENARE E a m eei A E tierce avid te en ERE E sas 52 307 s SAVE est tati Saa aaa a uyasapa 167 190 Save Compare function sse 164 181 Saving to a memory card 167 190 Saving to an external MIDI device sssssss 166 Saving to internal memory 164 180 Scale tune 173 Scale tune switch s 173 Select renidet ete b de ent eere rest e 158 Sens Keyboard sensitivity sse 171 Multi effects control sensitivity sse 116 SETTING GM Part Norra SS eee 196 Part SETUP gtOUp 4i reme ere eiie emiten
301. Rhythm Sets USER This is the group inside the XV 88 which can be rewritten Rhythm Sets you yourself create can be stored in this group The XV 88 includes four preset Rhythm Sets p 258 CD A H Memory Card A H This is the group to accessed when using Rhythm Sets stored on memory cards SmartMedia inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot You can also rewrite Rhythm Sets you create Each bank A H holds 4 Rhythm Sets meaning you can select from a maximum of 32 Rhythm Sets won Rhythm Sets in CD A H cannot be selected if no memory card SmartMedia is inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot PR A F Presets A F These are groups inside the XV 88 which cannot be rewritten However you can modify the settings of the currently selected Rhythm Set and then save the modified settings in User memory or a memory card Banks A F already contain 2 prepared Rhythm Sets each for a total of 12 Rhythm Sets p 258 PR H GM2 This is an internal group of Rhythm Sets compatible with General MIDI 2 a system of MIDI function specifications designed to transcend differences between makers and types of devices these Rhythm Sets cannot be overwritten Furthermore settings of currently selected Rhythm Sets from this group cannot be changed The XV 88 includes 9 preset Rhythm Sets 39 Chapter 2 Playing XP A B Wave Expansion Boards installed in EXP A B Slots These are the groups of Rhythm Sets from Wave Expansion Boards optional SR JV
302. Roland 1228 VOICE EXPANDABLE SYNTHESIZER 4x EXPANSION with 2x SRX OWNER S MANUAL Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland XV 88 128 Voice Expandable Synthesizer Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Owner s manual p 2 USING THE UNIT SAFELY Owner s manual p 3 and IMPORTANT NOTES Owner s manual p 5 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Quick start Owner s manual and Q amp A should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Apple is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc BM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation BM PC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation Roland Copyright 2000 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION CAUT
303. SB CC 0 0 127 I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Patch Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 I 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Patch Program Number PC 0 127 l m I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Part Level CC 7 0 127 I 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Part Pan CC 10 0 127 I I I L64 63R 282 MH MIDI Implementation O1 3 1 1 Patch Common l 00 32 OOaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Destination 4 0 33 l OFF I I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL Offset I I I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH l Address Description I l LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I l I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I 00 00 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 1 32 127 I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I I I 32 127 ASCII PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 2 32 127 I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I I I 32 127 ASCII I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME l 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 3 32 127 TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I I I 32 127 ASCII l 00 33 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Sens 4 1 127 l 00 03 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 4 32 127 I 63 63 I I I 32 127 ASCII I 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Patch Name 5 32 127 00 34 0aaa aaaa Matrix Control 2 Source 0 109 I I I
304. STORTION 2 Compressor Effects in w hich the loudness becomes difficult to change COMPRESSOR LIMITER STEREO COMPRESSOR STEREO LIMITER GATE SLICER Chorus Effects that broaden the sound HEXA CHORUS TREMOLO CHORUS SPACE D STEREO CHORUS STEREO FLANGER STEP FLANGER ENHANCERSCHORUS ENHANCERSFLANGER CHORUSSDELAY FLANGERSDELAY CHORUSSFLANGER CHORUS DELAY FLANGER DELAY CHORUS FLANGER 3D CHORUS 3D FLANGER Dimension Effects that control the location of the sound TREMOLO AUTO PAN Filter Effects that modify the sound character STEREO EQ SPECTRUM ENHANCER ISOLATOR Reverb Effects that reverberate the sound REVERB GATE REVERB 118 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 01 STEREO EQ Stereo Equalizer This is a four band stereo equalizer low mid x 2 high L in 4 Band EQ L out R in 4 Band EQ R out Low Freq Low Frequency Select the frequency of the low range 200 Hz 400 Hz LowGain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency Hi Freq High Frequency Select the frequency of the high range 4000 Hz 8000 Hz Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency Mid1 Freq Middle 1 Frequency Adjust the frequency of Middle 1 mid range Mid1 Q Middle 1 Q This parameter adjusts the width of the area around the Middle 1 Frequency that will be affected by the Gain setting Higher values of Q will result in a narrower a
305. SYS CTRL2 SYS CTRL3 SYS CTRL4 8 Refer to Multi Effects Types p 117 4 Refer to Chorus Parameters p 248 5 Refer to Reverb Parameters p 249 CONTROL Group p 97 Display Parameter Value CONTROL Bend Range Bend range 0 48 T Envelope Mode Envelope mode NO SUS SUSTAIN T Mute Group Mute group OFF 1 31 T Assign Type Assign type MULTI SINGLE T Rx MIDI Expression Receive expression switch OFF ON T Pan Receive pan mode CONTINUOUS KEY ON T Hold 1 Receive hold 1 switch OFF ON T WAVE Group p 98 Display Parameter Value TONE NAME efe Tone name ASCII Characters max 12 T WMT WAVE Group Wave group INT XP A XP B XP C XP D T Number Wave number L R 0001 1083 w Gain Wave gain 6 0 6 12 dB w Level Wave level 0 127 w Sw Wave switch OFF ON w Tempo Sync Wave tempo sync OFF ON w WMT VEL RANG L Fade Velocity fade width lower 0 127 w Lower Velocity range lower 1 127 w Upper Velocity range upper 1 127 w U Fade Velocity fade width upper 0 127 w VELO CONTROL WMT Velocity Control WMT velocity control switch OFF ON RANDOM T WMT PAN Pan Wave pan L64 0 63R w Random Random pan switch OFF ON w Alternate Alternate pan switch OFF ON w WMT TUNE Coarse Coarse tune 48 48 semitone w Fine Fine tune 50 50 cent w WMT FXM Switch FXM switch OFF ON w Color FXM color 1 4 w Depth FXM depth 1 17 w 238 Parameter List PITCH Group p 100 Display Parameter Value PITCH Coarse Coarse tune 48 48 s
306. Switch Color Gerth FRM 1 OFE 1 z FXM Frequency Cross Modulation uses a specified waveform to apply frequency modulation to the currently selected waveform creating complex overtones This can be useful when creating wilder sounds or sound effects Switch FXM Switch This sets whether FXM will be used ON or not OFF Color FXM Color Specifies how FXM will perform frequency modulation Higher settings result in a grainier sound while lower settings result in a more metallic sound Depth FXM Depth x Specifies the depth of the modulation produced by FXM 81 Chapter 5 Creating Patches TONE DELAY 1 TOHEf Made Time DELAY NORMAL B This produces a time delay between the moment a key is pressed or released and the moment the Tone actually begins to sound You can also make settings that shift the timing at which each Tone is sounded This differs from the Delay in the internal effects in that by changing the sound qualities of the delayed Tones and changing the pitch for each Tone you can also perform arpeggio like passages just by pressing one key In addition you can synchronize the tempo that specifies the Tone Delay time and the tempo set in a connected sequencer external tempo Oo vox you are not going to use Tone Delay set the Mode parameter discussed below to NORMAL and Time parameter to 0 When the Type parameter PATCH COMMON STRUCT has a setting of Type 2 10 the outputs of
307. T and pressing SOLO you can switch between SINGLE and LAYER Setting the Keyboard Range KEY RANGE Note When a Single Performance is selected this setting is disabled KEY RANG Key Range Z ME 1 Lower Li F r KEY RBHG C dl 3 These parameters set the key range that will be transmitted from the keyboard for each Zone Use this when you wish to play different Patches in different areas of the keyboard Lower Key Range Lower Specify the lower limit of the range Upper Key Range Upper Specify the upper limit of the range o Oe the Key Range p 73 is set for each individual Tone in a Patch sounds are produced in the range where the Key Range of each Tone and the Key Range for the Zone overlap Key range specified for Performance 1 vinnm ey range specified for Patch The range in which notes will play whe If you attempt to raise the lower key higher than the upper key or to lower the upper key below the lower key the other value will be automatically modified to the same setting Making Settings for Transmitting MIDI MIDI These parameters determine how each Zone will transmit MIDI messages she When a Single Performance is selected this setting is disabled MIDI lt OHE 1 Channel Tx Local MIDI I 1l OH H Channel MIDI Transmit Channel Specifies the MIDI transmit channel for each Zone Tx Transmit Switch Det
308. TED MULTI FULL MULTI l 40 1x 15 Oaaa aaaa Use for Rhythm Part U 2 l l l OFF MAP1 MAP2 290 FP RE ERES DN Bees ae fg ne er P 40 1x 16 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Key Shift 40 88 I I 24 424 semitone 40 1x 17 0000 aaaa 0000 bbbb Pitch Offset Fine 8 248 I I 12 0 412 0 Hz 40 1x 19 Oaaa aaaa Part Level CC 7 0 127 40 1x 1A Oaaa aaaa Velocity Sens Depth 0 127 I I 64 63 40 1x 1B Oaaa aaaa Velocity Sens Offset 0 127 I I 64 63 40 1x 1C 0aaa aaaa Part Panpot CC 10 0 127 I I RANDOM L63 63R 40 1x 1D 0aaa aaaa Keyboard Range Low 0 127 40 1x 1E 0aaa aaaa Keyboard Range High 0 127 40 1x 1F Oaaa aaaa CCl Controller Number 0 95 40 1x 20 Oaaa aaaa CC2 Controller Number 0 95 40 1x 21 0aaa aaaa Chorus Send Level CC 93 0 127 40 1x 22 0aaa aaaa Reverb Send Level CC 93 0 127 40 1x 23 0000 000a Rx Bank Select 0 1 OFF ON 40 1x 24 0000 000a Rx Bank Select LSB 0 1 i l OFF ON 40 1x 30 Oaaa aaaa Tone Modify 1 Vibrato Rate 0 127 I I 64 63 40 1x 31 0aaa aaaa Tone Modify 2 Vibrato Depth 0 127 I I 64 63 40 1x 32 0aaa aaaa Tone Modify 3 TVF Cutoff Freq 0 127 I I 64 63 40 1x 33 0aaa aaaa Tone Modify 4 TVF Resonance 0 127 I I 64 63 40 1x 34 Oaaa aaaa Tone Modify 5 TVF amp TVA Env Attack 0 127 I I 64 6
309. TO MIDI TRANSFER TO USBR a aaa aasawa rna d 186 Transmit bank select MSB LSB eet 178 TRANSMIT MIDI n aan sasa eed EE d s dee codecs Transmit MIDI channel Dr TRANSMITE P het tere De rete red Transmit program change number sssssssseee 178 TRANSMIT SONG SEL Nn Transmit song select number sss 178 Trarismit Switceli creen tene tepore pee tne Active sensing s Bank selecti csar ieas pee etm ree ee decens Edit dat 4e Oro tee ea ci en e i needs Program change TRANSPOSE Ia A a ete tete et FETAMS c M B Transpose switch 171 Transpose value 171 Transpose switch 171 Transpose value 171 TUNE groups kaa peq RED RTI NAE in Ai 173 TVA Rhiythim Tone eee dette edo Peces i die seeds 103 Tere saa aa ete ni asa hua IPIE TIN de Ld 90 TVA ENVELOPE Rhythm Tone uu sess netten 104 ga Me EP 92 TVA envelope level 1 3 Rhythm Tone a aa iu a nennen 104 Be al S eire tee UI ua wayaqa nai qaw aaa qa ua 92 TVA envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity Rhythim Tone oerte ee rendere ipid enemies 104 TT OMG aasawa asas 92 TVA envelope time 1 4 Rhythit Poa aaa tee ei ce Re ees 104 TOTO deos eis eerte eve bote ee desea dee W iot erat 92 TVA envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity Rhythm TONE eee c erre htt nni eina dere 104 TONE sci estadio Nine die savor edad Are rH D sana 92 TVA envelope time keyfollow
310. TRHDRHRED Sets the function of the pedal connected to the HOLD PEDAL jack Continuous Continuous Switch This setting determines whether the HOLD PEDAL jack will provide support for half pedaling ON or not OFF When this is set to support use of half pedaling techniques you can then connect an optional expression pedal EV 5 etc and employ pedal work to achieve even finer control in performances in which piano tones are used Output Pedal Output Selects the sound generator s the internal sound generator and or external sound generators connected to MIDI OUT connector to be controlled by the pedal OFF Neither will be controlled INT Only the internal sound generator will be controlled MIDI Only external sound generators will be controlled BOTH Both the internal sound generator and external sound generators will be controlled Polarity Pedal Polarity Select the polarity of the pedal On some pedals the electrical signal output by the pedal when it is pressed or released is the opposite of other pedals If your pedal has an effect opposite of what you expect set this parameter to REVERSE If you are using a Roland pedal that has no polarity switch set this parameter to STANDARD CONTROL PEDAL 1 2 CONTROL Hzsisn QutEut Polarity PEDAL 1 CCAT VOLUME BOTH STANDARD This specifies the function of each pedal connected to the CTL 1 CTL 2 PEDAL jacks Assign Pedal 1 2 Assign Specifies the
311. This dial is used to modify values If you hold down SHIFT as you turn the VALUE dial the value will change in greater increments p 27 CURSOR Buttons Press these to switch pages and to move the cursor the underline p 26 In the Play page of each mode pressing the CURSOR buttons while holding down SHIFT allows the remote control of external sequencers p 26 p 204 15 Front and Rear Panel 9 PHRASE PREVIEW DEMO PHRASE PREVIEW Press this when you wish to use phrases to audition a patch p 32 DEMO To hear the demo playback hold down SHIFT and press this button Quick Start p 21 PATCH FINDERJ FAVORITE LIST PATCH FINDER Selects a patch by using the Patch Finder function p 30 FAVORITE LIST When you press this button while holding down SHIFT you can register the favorite Patch to the list and choose the Patch from the list p 31 p 40 p 165 INC IDEC Use these buttons to modify values If you keep on holding down one button and pressing the other the value change accelerates If you press one of these buttons while holding down SHIFT the value will change in bigger increments p 27 0 9 Numeric Keys Use these buttons to modify values They can be used to enter numeric values as well as alphabetical characters p 27 p 28 When PATCH FINDER is on this becomes the button for choosing a category group using the Pat
312. Time Variant Filter Specifies how the frequency components of the sound will change TVA Time Variant Amplifier Specifies the volume changes and the sound s position in a stereo soundfield Envelope You use Envelope to initiate changes to occur to a sound over time There are separate envelopes for Pitch TVF filter and TVA volume For example if you wish to modify the way in which the sound attacks or decays over time you would adjust the TVA envelope LFO Low Frequency Oscillator Use the LFO to create cyclic changes modulation in a sound The XV 88 has two LFOs Either one or both can be applied to effect the WG pitch TVF filter and or TVA volume When an LFO is applied to the WG pitch a vibrato effect is produced When an LFO is applied to the TVF cutoff frequency a wah effect is produced When an LFO is applied to the TVA volume a tremolo effect is produced 65 Chapter 5 Creating Patches How to Make the Patch Settings Start with an existing Patch and edit it to create a new Patch Each Patch can contain up to four Tones you should listen to how the individual Tones sound before you edit Four Tips for Editing Patches Select a Patch that is similar to the sound you wish to create p 29 It s hard to create a new sound that s exactly what you want if you just select a Patch and modify its parameters at random It makes sense to start with a Patch whose sound is related to what you
313. VA ENV R TIME I 00 28 0000 000a TMT Control Switch 0 1 I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 l OFF ON 00 3F Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Sens 1 Qs 127 I 00 29 OOaa aaaa Pitch Bend Range Up 0 48 I I 63 63 I 00 2A 00aa aaaa Pitch Bend Range Down 0 48 00 40 OOaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Destination 2 0 33 I I I OFF I 00 2B Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Source 0 109 I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH l l l PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH I I I VELOCITY KEYFOLLOW TEMPO LFO1 LFO2 I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I I I PITCH ENV TVF ENV TVA ENV LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I 00 2C OOaa aaaa Matrix Control 1 Destination 1 0 33 l I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I I I OFF I I I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME I I L CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 l LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH 00 41 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 3 Sens 2 TS GET I I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I 63 63 l
314. WHTit Coarse Fine TLIHE 1 l B Coarse Coarse Tune Adjusts the pitch of the waveform s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves HINT The Coarse Tune of the entire Rhythm Tone is set by the Coarse parameter RHYTHM PITCH PITCRH p 100 Fine Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the waveform s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents M One cent is 1 100th of a semitone HINT The Fine Tune of the entire Rhythm Tone is set by the Fine parameter RHYTHM PITCH PITCH p 100 WMT FXM WMT Frequency Cross Modulation A WmTig Switch Color Derth Fal I OFE 1 z FXM Frequency Cross Modulation uses a specified waveform to apply frequency modulation to the currently selected waveform creating complex overtones This can be useful when creating wilder sounds or sound effects Switch FXM Switch This sets whether FXM will be used ON or not OFF Color FXM Color Specifies how FXM will perform frequency modulation Higher settings result in a grainier sound while lower settings result in a more metallic sound Depth FXM Depth Specifies the depth of the modulation produced by FXM Modifying Pitch of a Rhythm Tone PITCH You can set the Rhythm Tone pitch of each key PITCH A B I Coarse Fine Fandom FITCH 1 4l B B Coarse Coarse Tune Selects the pitch at which a Rhythm Tone sounds HINT Set the coarse tuning for Waves comprising the Rhythm Tones with the Coarse
315. Width Upper 0 127 I 0000 cccc 00 25 Oaaa aaaa TMT4 Velocity Range Lower 1 127 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 8 12768 52768 I I l 1 UPPER I I I 20000 20000 I 00 26 Oaaa aaaa TMT4 Velocity Range Upper 1 127 E 00 23 0000 aaaa I I LOWER 127 I 0000 bbbb I 00 27 Oaaa aaaa TMT4 Velocity Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 0000 cccc 00 28 Oaaa aaaa TMT4 Velocity Fade Width Upper 0 127 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 9 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 00 00 00 29 Total Size IE 00 27 0000 aaaa I 4 I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 10 12768 52768 I I I I 20000 20000 285 MIDI Implementation pa ES M AE yz ZZ Tu E E x EIER i SESA Z u E iu Ei a x ee O1 3 1 6 Patch Tone I 00 46 0aaa aaaa Pitch Env Level 3 1 127 63 63 e 00 47 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Level 4 t 3127 Offset l 63 63 I Address Description l l 00 48 0000 Oaaa TVF Filter Type 0 6 I 00 00 Oaaa aaaa Tone Level 0 127 I I I OFF LPF BPF HPF PKG LPF2 I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Tone Coarse Tune 16 112 I I LPF3 l l 48 48 00 49 Oaaa aaaa TVF Cutoff Frequency 0 127 I 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Tone Fine Tune 14 114 00 4A 00aa aaaa TVF Cutoff Keyfollow 44 84 l l l 50 4580 1J l 200 20
316. X CTRL SRC is set to SYS O Foot type Controller number 4 CTRLI SYS CTRL2 SYS CTRL3 or SYS CTRLA Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 04H vvH O Bank Select Controller number 0 32 n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte vv Control value 00H 7FH 0 127 BnH 00H mmH BnH 20H 1H OPortamento Time Controller number 5 n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte mm ll Bank number 00 00H 7F 7FH bank 1 bank 16384 BnH 05H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 Not received in Performance mode when the BankSelect PERFORM MIDI vv Portamento Time 00H 7FH 0 127 RxSWITCH is OFF In Performance mode the Portament Tm parameter PERFORM PART MONO POL will change O Data Entry Controller number 6 38 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 06H mmH BnH 26H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll the value of the parameter specified by RPN NRPN mm MSB ll LSB 270 MIDI Implementation O Volume Controller number 7 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 07H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Volume 00H 7FH 0 127 Not received in Performance mode when the Vol parameter PERFORM MIDI RxSWITCH is OFF In Performance mode the Level parameter PERFORM PART SETTING will change O Balance Controller number 8 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 08H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Balance 00
317. XV Pop Kit LAYER 29 Seq Orch SINGLE 29 Organ Lead LAYER 30 SlicedTrance LAYER 62 XV Jazz Kit LAYER 30 Seq Film SINGLE 30 Bass Lead LAYER 31 CrystalVoxXV LAYER 63 XV Rock Kit LAYER 31 Seq Chamber SINGLE 31 S amp H Pad LAYER 32 Pumping Ld LAYER 64 Seq Temp XV SINGLE 32 Seq Baroque SINGLE 32 Drone Pipe LAYER MEM The PR B groups contain split and layered Performances The PR A group contains Performances designed for use when creating songs In particular PR A 01 Seq Template has the following settings to make it easy for you to create your own desired settings Parts 1 3 9 11 16 PR A 001 128voicePno Part 2 PR B 013 Finger Bass Part 10 PR A 001 PopDrumSet1 252 USER User Group PR A Preset A Group No Name Voice Key Assign No Name Voice Key Assign No Name Voice Key Assign No Name Voice Key Assign 001 Y2K Concerto 8 POLY 065 Wurlie 2 POLY 001 128voicePno 1 POLY 065 Dual Profs 3 POLY 002 XVSteelGt 1 4 POLY 066 TB Squelch 2 POLY 002 BrightPiano 1 POLY 066 Saw Mass 4 POLY 003 Shapeshifter 4 POLY 067 TheGanges 3 POLY 003 Classique 2 POLY 067 Poly Split 4 POLY 004 Trance Fair 8 MONO 068 British B 4 POLY 004 Nice Piano 3 POLY 068 Poly Brass 3 POLY 005 MOVE 6 MONO 069 PowerStack 3 POLY 005 Piano Thang 3 POLY 069 Stackoid 4 POLY 006 VoyagerBrass 3 POLY 070 Predator 2 8 POLY 006 PowerGrand 3 POLY 070 Poly Rock 4 POLY 007 Rholitzer 3 POLY 071 Moonchimes 3 POLY 007 House Piano 2 POLY 071 D 50 Stack 4 POLY 008 Grand XV 4
318. Y 088 Chime Pad 3 POLY 025 MondoBass 3 MONO 089 PulseLead1 3 POLY 025 Vox Panner 2 POLY 089 Spin Pad 2 POLY 026 ClkAnalogBs 2 MONO 090 PulseLead2 4 MONO 026 Spaced Voxx 4 POLY 090 Rotary Pad 4 POLY 027 Bass In Face 2 POLY 091 Little Devil 4 MONO 027 Glass Voices 3 POLY 091 Dawn 2 Dusk 3 POLY 028 101 Bass 2 MONO 092 Loud SynLead 4 MONO 028 Tubular Vox 4 POLY 092 Aurora 4 POLY 029 Noiz Bass 2 MONO 093 Analog Lead 2 MONO 029 Velo Voxx 2 POLY 093 Strobe Mode 4 POLY 030 SuperJup Bs 2 POLY 094 5th Lead 2 MONO 030 Wavox 3 POLY 094 Albion 2 POLY 031 Occitan Bass 3 POLY 095 Flute 2 POLY 031 Doos 1 POLY 095 Running Pad 4 POLY 032 Hugo Bass 4 MONO 096 Piccolo 1 POLY 032 Synvox Comps 4 POLY 096 Stepped Pad 4 POLY 033 Multi Bass 2 POLY 097 VOX Flute 4 POLY 033 Vocal Oohz 3 POLY 097 RandomPad 4 POLY 034 Moist Bass 2 MONO 098 Air Lead 2 POLY 034 LFO Vox 1 POLY 098 SoundtrkDANC 4 POLY 035 BritelowBass 4 MONO 099 Pan Pipes 2 POLY 035 St Strings 2 POLY 099 Flying Waltz 4 POLY 036 Untamed Bass 3 MONO 100 Airplaaane 4 POLY 036 Warm Strings 4 POLY 100 Vanishing 1 POLY 037 RubberBass 3 MONO 101 Taj Mahal 1 POLY 037 Somber Str 4 POLY 101 5th Sweep 4 POLY 038 Stereoww Bs 3 MONO 102 RayaShaku 3 POLY 038 Marcato 2 POLY 102 Phazweep 4 POLY 039 WonderBass 3 MONO 103 Oboe mf 1 POLY 039 Bright Str 2 POLY 103 Big BPF 4 POLY 040 Deep Bass 2 POLY 104 Oboe Express 2 POLY 040 String Ens 4 POLY 104 MG Sweep 4 POLY 041 SuperJXBs 2 MONO 105 Clarinet mp 1 POLY 041 TremoloStmg 2 POLY 105 CeremonyTi
319. Zone and Part Although the XV 88 s keyboard controller section and sound generator section are connected internally using a MIDI connection in Layer Performance mode you can then make even more detailed settings affecting the way the connection works between the keyboard controller section and the sound generator section as well as with an external MIDI device At the factory settings shown below there is a one to one correspondence between the Zone the MIDI Transmit Receive channel and the Part Zone 16 MIDI transmit channel 16 Part 16 MIDI receive channel 16 Zone 1 MIDI transmit channel Patch Rhythm Set Under these conditions you could simply consider that each of the Zones from 1 to 16 is linked in a one to one relationship with its numerical counterpart among Parts 1 to 16 In other words you can use Zone 1 when controlling Part 1 Zone 2 is when controlling Part 2 and so on We recommend that under normal circumstances you use the default factory settings In advances uses where the factory settings would not be used the following examples of settings might be employed When recording to an external sequencer while playing the bass part in the left hand and the layered piano and string tones in the right hand the following is what results when the factory settings are used Sequencer DI transmit channel 3 III MNN EM Part 3 MIDI receive channel
320. a 43 Holding ari Arpeggio esee eet ple ertet ere He ee Preise e P ir celer ette re bees 43 Simulating a Rhythit Gullar s u npa ha bukak aaa tenente tenens 44 Playing an Arpeggio from an External MIDI Device a 44 Creating an Arpeggio Pattern ssssssssssssseseeeeeene nennen nennen entente tenens 44 Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Apply Effects D Beam Controller 45 Convenient Functions for Performance Q 47 Transposing the Keyboard in Octave Units Octave Shift sss 47 Transposing the Keyboard in Semitone Steps Transpose sss 48 It Stuck Notes Occur Panic n ertet e Ere etae breiter 48 Chapter 3 Creating Performancoes J J 49 How a Performance Is Organized sse nene 49 How to Make the Performance Settings nennen nens 49 Making Settings While Comparing Parts Palette Edit sss 50 Copying the Settings of Another Part Part Copy 50 Functions of Performance Parameters nennen nnne tenens 51 Settings Common to the Entire Performance COMMON nnn 51 Setting Effects for a Performance EFFECTS sse eee e rennen 52 Making Settings for Receiving MIDI MIDI sss 52 Making Settings for Each Part PART enne 53 Confirming MIDI Information for E
321. a Voice Reserve 1 0 24 l 40 01 11 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 2 0 24 40 01 12 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 3 0 24 l 40 01 13 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 4 0 24 l 40 01 14 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 5 0 24 40 01 15 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 6 0 24 40 01 16 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 7 Q 24 40 01 17 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 8 0 24 l 40 01 18 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 9 0 24 40 01 19 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 10 0 24 40 01 1A Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 11 0 24 40 01 1B Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 12 0 24 40 01 1C Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 13 0 24 l 40 01 1D Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 14 0 24 40 01 1E Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 15 0 24 l 40 01 1F Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 16 0 24 l I 40 01 30 Oaaa aaaa Reverb Macro 0 7 I 40 01 31 Oaaa aaaa Reverb Character 0 7 I 40 01 32 Oaaa aaaa Reverb Pre LPF 0 7 I 40 01 33 Oaaa aaaa Reverb Level 0 127 l 40 01 34 Oaaa aaaa Reverb Time 0 127 40 01 35 Oaaa aaaa Reverb Delay Feedback 0 127 l 40 01 36 0aaa aaaa Reverb Send Level to Chorus TO 93271 I l 40 01 38 Oaaa aaaa Chorus Macro sd 40 01 39 Oaaa aaaa Chorus Pre LPF t6 T 40 01 3A Oaaa aaaa Chorus Level 0 127 l 40 01 3B Oaaa aaaa Chorus Feedback O 3122 40 01 3C Oaaa aaaa Chorus Delay 0 127 l 40 01 3D Oaaa aaaa Chorus Rate 0 127 40 01 3E Oaaa aa
322. a aaaa Arpeggio Keyboard Velocity 0 127 I 0000 bbbb I I I I REAL 1 127 I 0000 cccc I I 00 08 0000 Oaaa Arpeggio Octave Range 61 67 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 20 12768 52768 I I I 3 8 I I I 20000 20000 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Beam Assign 0 103 00 00 00 53 Total Size I I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH OCT UP OCT DOWN I I I START STOP TAP TEMPO 00 OA 0000 00aa Beam Output Mode 0 3 O 1 2 5 Performance MIDI I I I OFF INT MIDI BOTH I 00 OB 0000 000a Beam Polarity 0 1 I STANDARD REVERSE Offset I 00 OC Oaaa aaaa Beam Range Lower 0 127 I Address Description I I 00 OD Oaaa aaaa Beam Range Upper 0 127 l T I 00 00 0000 000a Receive Program Change 0 1 00 00 00 OE Total Size I I I OFF ON 4 I 00 01 0000 000a Receive Bank Select 0 1 l li OFF ON I 00 02 0000 000a Receive Bender 0 1 O 1 2 8 Performance Zone l l l OFF ON I 00 03 0000 000a Receive Polyphonic Key Pressure 0 1 ie I I I OFF ON Offset I I 00 04 0000 000a Receive Channel Pressure 0 1 Address Description I I I OFF ON I 00 05 0000 000a Receive Modulation 0 1 00 00 0000 aaaa Transmit Channel 0 15 l l l OFF ON l Le 16 l 00 06 0000 000a Receive Volume 0 1 00 01 0000 000a Internal Switch 0 1 I I I OFF ON I I OFF ON I 0
323. a value of aa x 128 bb In the case of values which have a sign 00H 64 40H 0 and 7FH 63 so that the decimal expression would be 64 less than the value given in the above chart In the case of two types 00 00H 8192 40 00H 0 and 7F 7FH 8191 For example if aa bbH were expressed as decimal this would be aa bbH 40 00H aa x 128 bb 64 x 128 Data marked Use nibbled data is expressed in hexadecimal in 4 bit units A value expressed as a 2 byte nibble 0a ObH has the value of a x 16b Example 1 gt What is the decimal expression of 5AH From the preceding table 5AH 90 Example 2 gt What is the decimal expression of the value 12 34H given as hexadecimal for each 7 bits From the preceding table since 12H 18 and 34H 52 8 x 128452 2356 Example 3 What is the decimal expression of the nibbled value 0A 03 09 0D From the preceding table since 0AH 10 03H 3 09H 9 ODH 13 10 x 1643 x 1649 x 16413 41885 Example 4 gt What is the nibbled expression of the decimal value 1258 16 1258 16 TB 7 4 LO 16 4 14 0 uod Since from the preceding table 0 00H 4 04H 14 OEH 10 OAH the result is 00 04 OE OAH MExamples of Actual MIDI Messages lt Example 1 gt 92 3E 5F 9n is the Note on status and n is the MIDI channel number Since 2H 2 3EH 62 and 5FH 95 this is a Note on message with MIDI CH 3 note number 62 note name is D4 and ve
324. aa Chorus Depth 0 127 l 40 01 3F Oaaa aaaa Chorus Send Level to Reverb 0 127 OPart Parameter Je Start l I Address Description 1 40 1x 00 Oaaa aaaa Tone Number CC 00 Value 6 127 Oaaa aaaa Tone Number PC Value 9 227 l I 40 1x 02 Oaaa aaaa Rx Channel 0 16 i I I 1 16 OFF I 40 ix 03 0000 000a Rx Pitch Bend 0 1 OFF ON 40 1x 04 0000 000a Rx Channel Pressure 0 eT OFF ON 40 1x 05 0000 000a Rx Program Change 0 1 OFF ON 40 1x 06 0000 000a Rx Control Change 6 Xy OFF ON 40 1x 07 0000 000a Rx Poly Pressure Oo OFF ON 40 1x 08 0000 000a Rx Note Message 0 ky OFF ON 40 1x 09 0000 000a Rx RPN 0 1 OFF ON 40 1x OA 0000 000a Rx NRPN un ox OFF ON 40 1x OB 0000 000a Rx Modulation D 1j OFF ON 40 1x OC 0000 000a Rx Volume 0 1 OFF ON 40 1x OD 0000 000a Rx Panpot G XY OFF ON l 40 1x OE 0000 000a Rx Expression 0 31 OFF ON 40 1x OF 0000 000a Rx Hold 1 t kt OFF ON 40 1x 10 0000 000a Rx Portamento 0 3 OFF ON 40 1x 11 0000 000a Rx Sostenuto 6 723 OFF ON 40 1x 12 0000 000a Rx Soft ge XY OFF ON l 40 1x 13 Oaaa aaaa Mono Poly Mode 0 c1 MODE POLY 40 1x 14 Oaaa aaaa Assign Mode 0 2j SINGLE LIMI
325. aa I I 0000 bbbb I 0000 ccce I O1 3 2 5 Rhythm Tone I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 9 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 js p I 00 28 0000 aaaa Offset I l 0000 bbbb I Address Description I I 0000 cccc I I l 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 10 12768 52768 00 00 Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 1 32 TAr I I I 20000 20000 I I 32 127 ASCII II 00 2C 0000 aaaa I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 2 32 127 I 0000 bbbb I 32 127 ASCII l 0000 cccc I I 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 3 32 127 I 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 11 12768 52768 I I 32 127 ASCII l l l 20000 420000 00 03 Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 4 32 127 E 00 30 0000 aaaa I I I I 32 127 ASCII 0000 bbbb I 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 5 32 127 J 0000 cccc I 32 127 ASCII l 0000 dddd Chorus Parameter 12 12768 52768 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 6 32 127 I I I 20000 20000 I I 32 127 ASCII l 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 7 32 127 00 00 00 34 Total Size l I I 32 127 ASCII i I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 8 32 127 I I 32 127 ASCII I 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 9 32 127 O1 3 2 4 Rhythm Common Reverb I I I 32 127 ASCII I 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 10 32 127 I I 32 127 ASCII Offset I I I 00 0A Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 11 32 127 I Addre
326. aa MFX Control Assign 1 0 16 I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 8 32 127 I I I OFF 1 16 I I I 32 127 ASCII 00 OE 000a aaaa MFX Control Assign 2 0 16 I 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 9 32 127 I I OFF 1 16 I I I 32 127 ASCII I 00 OF OOOa aaaa MFX Control Assign 3 0 16 I 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 10 32 127 I I OFF 1 16 I I I 32 127 ASCII 00 10 OOOa aaaa MFX Control Assign 4 0 16 I 00 0A Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 11 32 127 I I OFF 1 16 I I I 32 127 ASCII 00 11 0000 aaaa I I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa Performance Name 12 32 127 I 0000 bbbb I I I 32 127 ASCII 0000 cccc 0000 dddd MEX Parameter 1 12768 52768 I I 20000 20000 280 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
327. aa Performance Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 I 00 OF Oaaa aaaa Performance Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 00 10 Oaaa aaaa Performance Program Number PC 0 127 O 1 1 System i I I 00 11 0000 aaaa Patch Receive Channel O 15 F l l 1 16 Offset I I 00 12 Oaaa aaaa Patch Bank Select MSB CC 0 0 127 I Address Description I 00 13 Oaaa aaaa Patch Bank Select LSB CC 32 0 127 I I 00 14 Oaaa aaaa Patch Program Number PC 0 127 I 00 00 00 System Common 1 1 1 ve I I 00 10 00 System Part Part 1 1 1 2 00 15 0000 000a System Clock Source O 1 l 00 11 00 System Part Part 2 l INT MIDI I IE 00 16 0000 aaaa 00 1F 00 System Part Part 16 I I 0000 bbbb System Tempo 20 250 l 00 20 00 System Part Part 17 lt XV 5080 gt I E I I 00 21 00 System Part Part 18 lt XV 5080 gt 00 18 Oaaa aaaa System Control 1 Source 0 97 l z lt Ul I l l OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 00 2F 00 System Part Part 32 lt XV 5080 gt I I I l PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH I 00 40 00 System Keyboard 1 1 3 00 19 Oaaa aaaa System Control 2 Source 0 97 I l OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH I 00 1A Oaaa aaaa System Control 3 Source 0 97 O 1 3 Temporary Patch Rhythm bo OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I l PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH _ 00 1B
328. aaa Slider 1 Assign 0 97 I I I 0 63 FULL l l l OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 00 18 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 9 0 64 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH I I 0 63 FULL I 00 0A 0000 00aa Slider 1 Output Mode 0 3 00 19 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 10 0 64 I I I OFF INT MIDI BOTH I I 0 63 FULL 00 OB Oaaa aaaa Slider 2 Assign 0 97 I 00 1A Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 11 0 64 I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I I 0 63 FULL l l PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH 00 1B Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 12 0 64 I 00 0C 0000 00aa Slider 2 Output Mode 0 3 I I 0 63 FULL OFF INT MIDI BOTH 00 1C 0aaa aaaa Voice Reserve 13 0 64 I 00 OD Oaaa aaaa Slider 3 Assign 0 97 I I 0 63 FULL l OFF CCO1 CC31 CC33 CC95 00 1D Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 14 0 64 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH I 0 63 FULL I 00 OE 0000 00aa Slider 3 Output Mode 0 3 I 00 1E Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 15 0 64 I I I OFF INT MIDI BOTH I I 0 63 FULL I 00 OF Oaaa aaaa Slider 4 Assign 0 97 I 00 1F Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 16 0 64 I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I I 0 63 FULL I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH I 00 20 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 17 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I 00 10 0000 00aa Slider 4 Output Mode 0 3 I I 0 63 FULL I I I OFF INT MIDI BOTH I 00 21 Oaaa aaaa Voic
329. aaaa CC2 LFOl Rate Control 0 127 I 10 0 10 0 Hz 40 2x 54 0aaa aaaa CC2 LFOl Pitch Control 0 127 I I 0 600 cent 40 2x 55 Oaaa aaaa CC2 LFO1 TVF Depth 0 127 l I 0 2400 cent 40 2x 56 0aaa aaaa CC2 LFO1 TVA Depth 0 127 l l 0 100 0 b 40 2x 57 0aaa aaaa CC2 LFO2 Rate Control 0 127 I I 10 0 10 0 Hz 40 2x 58 0aaa aaaa CC2 LFO2 Pitch Control 0 127 l l 0 600 cent 40 2x 59 Oaaa aaaa CC2 LFO2 TVF Depth 0 127 I I 0 2400 cent 40 2x 5A Oaaa aaaa CC2 LFO2 TVA Depth 0 127 I I I x BLOCK NUMBER 0 F Part 1 MIDI ch 1 x 1 Part 2 MIDI ch 2 x 2 Part 9 MIDI ch 29 x 9 Part10 MIDI ch 10 x 0 Partl1 MIDI ch 11 x A Part12 MIDI ch 12 x B Part16 MIDI ch 16 x F 291 MIDI Implementation E Arpeggio Parameter List Arpeggio Style value parameter value parameter value parameter ea a 0 1 4 I5 HEAVY SLAP 30 SWING WALTZ 1 1 6 16 LIGHT SLAP 31 REGGAE 2 1 8 17 WALK BASS 32 PERCUSSION 3 1 12 18 RHYTHM GTR 1 33 HARP 4 1 16 19 RHYTHM GTR 2 34 SHAMISEN 5 1 32 20 RHYTHM GTR 3 35 BOUND BALL 6 PORTAMENTO A 241 RHYTHM GTR 4 36 RANDOM Wi PORTAMENTO B 22 RHYTHM GTR 5 A BOSSA NOVA 8 GLISSANDO 23 3 FINGER 38 SALSA 9 SEQUENCE A 24 STRUM GTR UP 39 MAMBO 10 SEQUENCE B 25 STRUM GTR DOWN 40 LATIN PERCUSSION 11 SEQUENCE C 26 STRUM GTR UP amp DW 41 SAMBA 12 SEQUENCE D 27 PIANO
330. ach Part INFO sse 56 Changing the Settings of the Patch Rhythm Set Assigned to a Patrt a 56 Chapter 4 Zone Settings J J J 57 How to Make the Zone Seting Ssni e U Sa Sq nn S U S au nens 57 Making Settings While Comparing Zones Palette Edit sss 58 Functions of Zone Parameters sssssssssseeeeeeeenenenen tenente tenente ttn 58 Settings Common to the Entire Zone COMMON J a 58 Setting the Keyboard Range KEY RANGE sse nnns 59 Making Settings for Transmitting MIDI MIDI essere 59 Controlling External Sound Module EXT CONTROL enn 60 Arpeggiator Settings CARPEGGIO u u an ann niana e borio seisa iasant huan nennen 61 Setting the D Beam Controller D BEAM N 63 Confirming the Settings for Each Zone INFO sss 64 Chapter 5 Creating Patches cecus 65 How a Patch Is Organized uusha ham agina tenente nennen nenne 65 How a Tone Is Organized ss atasi ikan ui tenente entente tenens 65 How to Make the PatelrS ttipgsu u u eaea msosi inn eotea haee Eest sas tno nter nitentes 66 Making Settings While Comparing Tones Palette Edit sss 67 Copying the Settings of Another Tone Tone Copy sse 68 Cautions When Selecting a Wavefor
331. ack time move the ATTACK slider To change release time move the RELEASE slider Changing the Volume of Each Tone 1 Make sure that the PATCH PLAY page is displayed 2 Press LEVEL to light its indicator 3 Move the LEVEL slider as you play the keyboard to adjust volume as desired Sliders 1 2 3 and 4 are used to change the volume of Tones 1 2 3 and 4 respectively Playing in Performance Mode There are two types of performances Layer Performances and Single Performances The upper right of the display will indicate LAYER p is the Part number for a Layer Performance and part is the Part number for a Single Performance About the MIDI Connection Settings Zone and Part Although the XV 88 s keyboard controller section and sound generator section are connected internally using a MIDI connection in Layer Performance mode you can then make even more detailed settings affecting the way the connection works between the keyboard controller section and the sound generator section as well as with an external MIDI device At the factory settings shown below there is a one to one correspondence between the Zone the MIDI Transmit Receive channel and the Part Layer Performance Zone 16 MIDI transmit channel 16 Part 16 MIDI receive channel 16 Zone 1 MIDI transmi Patch Rhythm Set Under these conditions you could simply consider that each of
332. age groups The displays that appear will depend on the current mode The groups that can be selected in each mode are printed on the front panel above the buttons About the Cursor Buttons The Cursor buttons are pressed to switch pages and move the cursor and are used for remote control of external sequencers NEXT SONG RESET pa aly STOP CURSOR p PREV SONG Moving Between Display Pages The various pages are grouped by function button and each group contains several display pages Use the cursor buttons to move between these display pages and groups Moving Between pages An upward pointing arrow F shown in the display indicates that one or more pages exist before this page A downward pointing arrow shown in the page indicates that one or more pages exist after this page Press 4 amp to move to the previous page or W to move to the next page Press 4 amp while holding down SHIFT to jump to the first page Press W while holding down SHIFT to jump to the last page FHET 1 L Fade Lower Urrer l Fade KEY RANGES BI E 4l G a B Moving Between Groups In group pages that you select using the function buttons you can hold down SHIFT and press 4 to move to the group of the function button to the left or hold down SHIFT and press P to move to the group of the function button to the right Whenever you are in any group page you can move to another group even if EDIT indicator is ou
333. ages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Bank Sel Transmit Bank Select Switch Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF Active Sensing Transmit Active Sensing Switch Specifies whether Active Sensing messages will be transmitted ON or not OFF SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM f Ex GM Dri Fz GMZ OrF Fz GS Reset MIDI 1 OH DH OH MIDI OFF Specify how Exclusive messages will be transmitted and SYSTEM Device ID Ex Syus Excl Tx Edit I 17 OH received Rx GM On Receive General MIDI System On Switch Specifies whether General MIDI System On messages will be received ON or not OFF Rx GM2 On Receive General MIDI 2 System On Switch Specifies whether General MIDI 2 System On messages will be received ON or not OFF Rx GS Reset Receive GS Reset Switch Specifies whether GS Reset messages will be received ON or not OFF Device ID Device ID Number When you want to transmit or receive System Exclusive messages set this parameter to match the Device ID number of the other MIDI device Rx Sys Excl Receive System Exclusive Switch Specifies whether System Exclusive messages will be received ON or not OFF Tx Edit Transmit Edit Data Switch When Performance Patch or Rhythm Set settings are modified specify whether the modified settings will be transmitted as system exclusive messages ON or not OFF Keyboard and Controllers Settings CONTRO
334. ake the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave lower Motif Sets the order in which notes of the chord will sound won Some settings will not be available depending on the Style parameter setting For details on the possible values refer to Arpeggio Style List p 268 SINGLE UP Notes you press will be sounded individually beginning from low to high SINGLE DOWN Notes you press will be sounded individually from high to low SINGLE UP amp DOWN Notes you press will be sounded individually from low to high and then back down from high to low SINGLE RANDOM Notes you press will be sounded individually in random order DUAL UP Notes you press will be sounded two at a time beginning from low to high DUAL DOWN Notes you press will be sounded two at a time beginning from high to low DUAL UP amp DOWN Notes you press will be sounded two at a time from low to high and then back down from high to low DUAL RANDOM Notes you press will be sounded two at a time in random order TRIPLE UP Notes you press will sound three at a time from low to high TRIPLE DOWN Notes you press will sound three at a time from high to low TRIPLE UP amp DOWN Notes you press will sound three at a time from low to high and then back down from high to low TRIPLE RANDOM Notes you press will sound three at a time in random order NOTE ORDER Notes you press will be sounded in the order in which you pressed them
335. al Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo High Bongo Lo Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale High Timbale Low Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Agogo Agogo Cabasa Cabasa Maracas Maracas ShrtWhistle ShrtWhistle LongWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Short Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Claves Claves Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl MuteTriangl OpenTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Shaker Jingle Bell Jingle Bell Bell Tree Bell Tree Castanets Castanets Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Rhythm Set List 003 PC 17 GM2 POWER High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Mix Kick Power Kick1 Side Stick Dance Snare1 909 HandClap Elec Snare 3 Rock Tom 4 Close HiHat2 Rock Tom 4 Pedal HiHat2 Rock Tom 4 Cym 1 Rock Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo 004 PC 25 GM2 ELECTRIC High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Mix Kick
336. al switch OFF ON Remote Remote keyboard switch OFF ON GM MIDI Local Switch Local switch OFF ON Remote Remote keyboard switch OFF ON RECEIVE MIDI Program Change Receive program change switch OFF ON Bank Select Receive bank select switch OFF ON TRANSMIT MIDI Program Transmit program change switch OFF ON Bank Sel Transmit bank select switch OFF ON Active Sensing Transmit active sensing switch OFF ON SYSTEM MIDI Rx GM On Receive general MIDI system on switch OFF ON Rx GM2 On Receive general MIDI 2 system on switch OFF ON Rx GS Reset Receive GS reset switch OFF ON Device ID Device ID number 17 32 Rx Sys Excl Receive system exclusive switch OFF ON Tx Edit Transmit edit data switch OFF ON CONTROL Group p 171 Display Parameter Value KEYBOARD Transpose Transpose switch OFF ON Transpose value 5 G 6 F Sens Keyboard sensitivity LIGHT MEDIUM HEAVY FULL Vel Keyboard velocity REAL 1 127 Aft Aftertouch sensitivity 0 100 HOLD PEDAL Continuous Continuous switch OFF ON Output Pedal output OFF INT MIDI BOTH Polarity Pedal polarity STANDARD REVERSE CONTROL PEDAL 1 Assign Pedal 1 assign 1 Output Pedal 1 output OFF INT MIDI BOTH Polarity Pedal 1 polarity STANDARD REVERSE CONTROL PEDAL 2 Assign Pedal 2 assign 1 Output Pedal 2 output OFF INT MIDI BOTH Polarity Pedal 2 polarity STANDARD REVERSE C1 ASSIGN Assign C1 slider assign 2 Output C1 slider output OFF INT MIDI BOTH C2 ASSIGN Assign C2 slider assign 2 Out
337. ally played normally Chapter 10 181 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode Copying Sound Generator Settings COPY This function lets you copy data of any Performance Patch or Rhythm Set into the current Performance Patch or Rhythm Set You can use this feature to make the editing process faster and easier Copying a Performance To copy the settings of a Performance press UTILITY in Performance mode then perform Copy operation Performance Part Copy The Part settings of a Performance will be copied to the Part you specify of the current Performance PERFORM 5ource Part LEHTER PART CPYPUSER BLIP itUser Perform P 1 Copy source Performance group number Copy source Performance name Copy source Part Copy destination Part HINT To specify the currently selected Performance as the copy source set Source to TEMP When the Copy operation is executed an symbol will be displayed in front of the copy destination Part cS For more detailed information and instructions for this procedure refer to Copying the Settings of Another Part Part Copy p 50 182 Performance Effects Copy You can copy the effect settings from any Performance Patch or Rhythm Set into the currently selected Performance PERFORM f Source Humber k FR COPY PEFFD DFH LSER Bliclzer Perform Copy source Copy source Performance Patch Rhythm Set group number name Pre
338. ameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI p 170 In Performance Mode Local parameter SYSTEM MIDI PERFORM MIDI p 169 5 When playing the XV 88 s keyboard the external MIDI sound module will sound HINT When you want to connect two or more external MIDI devices use the MIDI THRU connector of the external MIDI devices i m MIDI Keyboard MIDI IN s l E MIDI OUT B Roland T m rm ale e B BRRH EE m SOME aa ca mc mne cojasa a mexeemeye ml XV 88 If you daisy chain three or more MIDI devices using INOTHRUSIN THRU the MIDI signal may become garbled and data errors may occur In such cases use a MIDI Thru Box MIDI Thru Boxes are devices that allow a single stream of MIDI data to be sent to a large number of MIDI devices without causing data errors Controlling an External MIDI Sequencer from the XV 88 1 Setthe COMPUTER switch on the XV 88 s rear panel to MIDI o ex new setting of the COMPUTER switch will take effect when the power is turned on Before changing the setting of the COMPUTER switch you must first turn off the power on the XV 88 2 Usea MIDI cable to connect the XV 88 s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of the exte
339. an also move to another display group by holding down SHIFT and using 4 or D Since this can be done even when the EDIT indicator is dark it is a faster way to get around because you don t have to turn on the EDIT indicator each time Repeat steps 3 8 to make settings for GM mode When you finish making settings press EXIT to return to the GM PLAY page HINT You can also use the Palette display in the same manner when you edit in Performance mode p 50 193 Chapter 11 Chapter 11 Using the XV 88 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode Making Effects Settings in GM Mode EFFECTS In GM mode a GM exclusive Chorus and Reverb can be used Chorus and Reverb can be set independently Chorus Adds depth and spaciousness to the sound Reverb Adds the reverberation characteristics of halls or auditoriums uds In GM mode you cannot use Multi effects u The XV 88 s onboard effects can be turned on off as a whole For details refer to Turning Effects On Off p 105 Basic Process of Making Effects Settings When applying effects in GM mode the following procedure is used to make the settings 1 Setting the Output Method of the Direct Sound Output Assign The settings made here determine for each Part whether or not the jack used to output the sound and the type of output stereo or mono p 194 2 Setting the Amount of Each Effect Applied Send Level Sets the level volume of each eff
340. an audition the Patch which currently occupies the save destination to make sure that it is one you don t mind overwriting This can help prevent important Patches from being accidentally overwritten and lost Mir When saving the Rhythm Set you can use the Compare function in the same way 1 Follow the procedure Saving to Internal Memory up to step 4 to select the save destination Chapter 8 Saving Sounds 2 Press UNDO COMPARE The PATCH COMPARE page appears making it possible to sound the save destination Patch PATCH Humb COMPARE J COMPARE Miser BOL User Patch S Writing destination 3 Play the keyboard to sound the save destination Patch then check whether you really want to overwrite it Note The Patch auditioned using the Compare function may sound slightly different than when it is played normally 4 If you want to change the save destination use the VALUE dial INC DEC or numeric keys to specify the save destination Patch number 5 Press UNDO COMPARE once again to return to the PATCH WRITE page 6 Press ENTER to execute the save operation Registering Favorite Patches Rhythm Sets in the Favorite List You can keep the Patches and Rhythm Sets that you like to use all in one place by registering them on the Favorite List This list allows you immediate access to your favorite Patches and Rhythm Sets whether they are stored internally on Wave Expansion Boards or
341. ance Patch or Rhythm Set Press UTILITY Select 3 INIT on the UTIL 1 page Select PRESET Press ENTER Restoring the XV 88 to the Factory Settings Press UTILITY Select 4 FACTORY RESET on the UTIL 2 page Med SEE S bey LEM Es Pa Press ENTER If a message of Internal Write Protect ON appears change it to OFF and press ENTER three times 229 Parameter List Performance Parameters Parameters that can be set independently for each Part are indicated by P COMMON Group p 51 Display Parameter Value PERFORM NAME Performance name ASCII Characters max 12 PART KEY RANG L Fade Key fade width lower 0 127 P Lower Key range lower C 1 G9 P Upper Key range upper C 1 G9 P U Fade Key fade width upper 0 127 P PERFORM MFX CH MFX Control Channel Multi effects control channel 1 16 OFF P EFFECTS Group p 52 Display Parameter Value OUTPUT Output Assign Output assign MFX OUTPUT A B INDIV 1 4 PATCH P Output level 0 127 P Chorus Chorus send level 0 127 P Reverb Reverb send level 0 127 P PERFORM MFX TYPE Type Multi effects type 1 Source Multi effects source PERFORM PART 1 16 PERFORM MFX PRM 1 Multi effects parameters PERFORM MFX CTRL Source Multi effects control source 1 2 3 4 2 Destination Multi effects control destination 1 2 3 4 3 Sens Multi effects control sensitivity 1 2 3 4 63 63 PERFORM MFX OUT Output Multi effects output assign
342. ance mode 111 Playing in Performance mode vs PHASE LOCK EP Phase lock witch eerte econtra nera PHONES jack Phrase lo0p ide tede etta eo painted PHRASE PREVIEW 2 cci centran een erectae tnn ertet Phrase Preview Using phrase preview to play Patches a 32 PITCH Patto nn ua Mt enr E sa apiu 54 Rhythm Tone 100 Tone 86 Pitch 5 85 Pitch bend Modulation lever a 16 Pitch envelope depth Rhythm Tone sessi 100 EKE o sss M 86 Pitch envelope level 0 Rhythm Tone 4 5 ettet ied e he Rr Res 101 TOR isset ent emt mac n terae 87 Pitch envelope level 1 4 Rhythm Tone sese tenente 101 Becr EE 87 Pitch envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity Rony thin Tone ua raisin tnmen mene o ets 101 ge pe M 87 Pitch envelope time 1 4 Rhythm Ton uu tete tede dec ele i nein edens 101 Hoc 87 Pitch envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tome n a u nennen 101 Tone Pitch envelope time keyfollow sse 87 Pitch envelope velocity sensitivity Rhythm one eee nayasa 101 gro 86 PITCH group Patch ions eese NUM een n mes HR 86 Rhythm Set 100 Pitch keyfollow 86 Pitch LFO depth 1 2 85 Ionia EE DEC 91 Polarity D Beam polarity System sss 46
343. and 63R is far right sound Level 1 Lin Adjust the output level of delay 1 Level 2 Adjust the output level of delay 2 Level 3 Adjust the output level of delay 3 Level 4 Adjust the output level of delay 4 Delay 1 Delay Time 1 Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 1 sound is heard Fbk Feedback Delay 2 Delay Time 2 Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is to be Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 2 returned to the input Positive settings will return the sound is heard signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase Delay 3 Delay Time 3 HF Dam Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 3 p sound is heard Adjust the frequency at which the high frequency range of Chapter 7 the delayed sound returned to the input will be cut Delay 4 Delay Time 4 If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 4 feedback set this parameter to BYPASS sound is heard LoG Low Gain MEMO Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Delay 1 4 parameters can be set as anote vyalueot a Positive settings will emphasize boost the low specified tempo In this case specify the value of the frequency range desired note HiG High Gain When Delay 1 4 are Setas a Note Value Adjust the high
344. and then use numeric keys to specify the Performance number When the cursor is located at Part you can also use 1 8 9 16 and ZONE PART SELECT 1 9 8 16 to select the Part 6 Press ENTER to execute the Copy operation When the Copy operation is executed an symbol will be displayed in front of the copy destination Part 7 Press UTILITY to return to the previous page Ul 0 Chapter 3 Creating Performances Functions of Performance Parameters This section explains the functions the different Performance parameters have as well as the composition of these parameters Settings Common to the Entire Performance COMMON Common settings include those used for naming Performances Key Range and so on PERFORM NAME Performance Name PERFORM JC Sea Template MAME 1 CSHIFTI You can assign a name to the Performance of up to 12 characters cS For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 28 KEY RANG Key Range PART 1 f L Fade Lower Urrer U Fade KEV RANGE BI E alll G a B Set the keyboard range in which each Part will sound Use this when you wish to play different Patches in different areas of the keyboard Lower Key Range Lower Upper Key Range Upper Specify the lower Lower and upper Upper limits in which each Part will sound o Oe the Key Range p 73 is set for each individual Tone in a Patch sounds are
345. ange the Multi effects parameters in realtime select the Multi effects controller p 115 5 Setting the Output Destination and Volume for the Sounds Passing Through the Multi Effects Select the output jack and set the output level volume of the sounds passing through the Multi effects You can also apply Chorus or Reverb to the sound that passes through Multi effects p 116 6 Making Chorus Settings Select the Chorus type to be used and set each of the parameters for the selected Chorus p 156 p 157 7 Setting the Output Destination and Volume for the Sounds Passing Through the Chorus Select the output jack and set the output level volume of the sounds passing through the Chorus You can also apply Reverb to the sound that passes through Chorus p 158 8 Making Reverb Settings Select the Reverb type to be used and set each of the parameters for the selected Reverb p 159 9 Setting the Output Destination and Volume for the Sounds Passing Through the Reverb Select the output jack and set the output level volume of the sounds passing through the Reverb p 160 111 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Audio Signal Flow The audio path of direct sounds or sounds that have been passed through the effects in Performance mode is shown in the figure below Performance w stereo signal mono signal Patch Rhythm Set The Outpu
346. ansmitted CTRL The status of Performances including Performance Bank Selects and Program Changes are not sent as Exclusive messages but rather as MIDI Channel messages Ss For more on the messages that are transmitted refer to MIDI Implementation p 270 Destination This is the Transmission destination It is set with MIDI 186 Transmitting Data to the XV 88 You can transmit Performance Patch or Rhythm Set settings to the user memory and System settings to the System memory By loading sound data from a memory card or Wave Expansion Boards to user memory you can bring new sounds into a Performance TERHSFEFT Ture Block LEHTEF 1 T USER ALLIPR A Laer Data type Destination Source block o vx the XV 88 internal memory already contains important data that you have created this operation will cause all of this data to be lost If you wish to keep the data you must save it on a memory card p 190 or on an external MIDI device p 185 f Internal Write Protect is turned ON the following display will appear and the Data Transfer operation will not be executed WRITE PROTECT Change the displayed ON to OFF and press ENTER to turn Internal Write Protect off Press ENTER once again Internal Write Protect H Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode You can specify the data to be transmitted by selecting the Type Data Type appropriate combination shown below Specifies th
347. arby Roland Service Station fa message appears during operation consult the following section Error Messages p 218 Cannot Turn the Power On Is the XV 88 s AC cord properly connected to the AC outlet and the XV 88 Quick Start p 16 No Sound Is the power turned on for the other devices connected to the this unit Is the volume level turned down Is the VOLUME slider turned all the way down Have connections been made correctly When using the XV 88 by itself connect audio cables or headphones Quick Start p 16 f using the XV 88 connected to a computer use a computer cable or MIDI cable to make the connection to the computer p 208 Then connect audio cables or headphones Quick Start p 16 Can you hear sound through headphones Tf there is sound in the headphones it is possible that the connection cables are broken or that the amp or mixer is malfunctioning Check the connection cables and other devices once again If you do not hear sound when you play the keyboard check whether the Local Switch is turned OFF Turn the Local Switch on by the following parameter In Patch Rhythm Set Mode Local parameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI p 170 In Performance Mode Local parameter SYSTEM MIDI PERFORM MIDI p 169 Local parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI p 60 214 In Layer Performance mode does the MIDI transmit channel match the MIDI receive channel Check that the MI
348. ard and the moment at which the reverb is first heard Time Reverb Time This sets the reverb length Size This adjusts the size of the simulated room or hall The size becomes bigger as the value increases High Cut High Cut Frequency This sets the frequency above which the high frequency content of the reverb will be reduced If you do not want to reduce the brightness of the reverb set this parameter to BYPASS Diffusion Reverb Diffusion This adjusts the change in the density of the reverb over time The higher the value the more the density increases with time The effect of this setting is most pronounced with long reverb times Density Reverb Density This adjusts the density of reverb Higher values result in greater density LF Damp LF Damp Frequency This specifies the frequency below which the low frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced or damped LF Gain LF Damp Gain This adjusts the amount of damping applied to the frequency range selected with LF Damp With a setting of 0 there will be no reduction of the reverb s low frequency content HF Damp HF Damp Frequency This specifies the frequency above which the high frequency content of the reverb sound will be reduced or damped HF Gain HF Damp Gain This adjusts the amount of damping applied to the frequency range selected with HF Damp With a setting of 0 there will be no reduction of the reverb s high frequ
349. area modify them and then store the modified data in rewritable memory except PR H Wave Expansion Boards optional SR J V80 SRX Series The XV 88 can be equipped with up to four Wave Expansion Boards two SR JV80 Series two SRX Series Wave Expansion Boards contain Wave data as well as Patches and Rhythm Sets that use this Wave data which can be called directly into the temporary area and played 163 Chapter 8 Chapter 8 Saving Sounds Saving to Internal Memory This function writes sound settings you ve modified into internal USER group user memory o e you perform the save procedure the data that previously occupied the save destination will be lost However the factory setting data can be recovered by performing the Initialization procedure p 185 1 Make sure the Performance Patch or Rhythm Set that you wish to save is selected 2 Press UTILITY getting its indicator to start blinking The UTIL 1 page will appear UTILI 2 3 4 3 IQWRITE COPY IMIT JaFER PROTECT HINT If the UTIL 2 page appears press to display the UTIL 1 page 3 Use 4 or P to get 1 WRITE to start blinking then press ENTER The WRITE page for each mode appears PERFORM Humber LEHTEF 1 WEITE PUser 8 User Perform Writing destination HINT By holding down SHIFT and pressing UTILITY you can move directly to the WRITE page Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or numeric keys
350. asized will vary depending on Cutoff Frequency setting Resonance Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound Excessively high settings can produce oscillation causing the sound to distort LPF BPF HPF PKG Level iah 4 4 is Frequency Cutoff frequency 4 4 A _ gt i s a aoa i gt 4 BRIAN LALLA I G 2 it at i z 4 A A WON LAL LACIE Low iA iA ie i TVF VELOCITY RB TUF SU Cotoff U Curwe U Resonance VELOCITY BI 1 7 B V Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when changing the cutoff frequency to be applied as a result of changes in playing velocity If you want strongly played notes to raise the cutoff frequency set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to lower the cutoff frequency use negative settings V Curve Cutoff Frequency Velocity Curve Selects one of the following seven curves that determine how keyboard playing dynamics velocity influence the cutoff frequency Set this to FIXED when the Cutoff frequency is not to be changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed ZC V Resonance Resonance Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard velocity to modify the amount of Resonance If you want strongly played notes to have a greater Resonance e
351. aspa enano etos 170 Receive pan mode Rhythm Tone sss netten HEN RI Receive SWitch L u a rte eter eins Bank select Part Bank select System sss 170 Channel aftertouch 55 nr teens 52 Expression Part E Expression Rhythm Tone sese 97 Expression Tone eso e a tee General MIDI 2 system on ie General MIDI system on sss GM Part 1 eoe antico decree decent cede ce eec GS reset Hold 1 Part Hold 1 Rhythm Tone Hold 1 Tone Modulation Patti Pitch Bend Part Pitch bend Tone Polyphonic aftertouch Program change Part Program change System System exclusive uska mde epe e OR der Volume R edamper ueni de eee asisqa R damper switch ineat iie tetendit REGISTRY e deret ete tre eee ete teet aede Rel Release time offset Part sse Release time offset Patch RELEASE esee u naa Release Release time offset GM Part sse 196 Release time offset GM Part se jp 54 cim 72 Remotea tinnen eere tee e pb au eee 204 44 170 Remote controlling an external MIDI sequencer 26 204 Remote keyboard switch a 44 170 RENAME eicere AU LEID MS LE 189 Res Resonance offset Part
352. atch In order to make best use of the available number of simultaneous voices unused Tones should be turned off HINT You can also set the Switch parameter on the PATCH PLAY page Press TONE SWITCH 1 4 to switch the setting to ON indicator lighted or OFF indicator extinguished p 32 Wave Tempo Sync When you wish to synchronize a Phrase Loop to the clock tempo set this to ON This is valid only when an optional Wave Expansion Board such as SR JV80 10 BASS amp DRUMS is installed and you have selected a Tone which uses a waveform that displays tempo BPM For details refer to Playing Phrase Loops in Sync with the System Tempo p 201 o m s the Wave Tempo Sync parameter is set to ON settings related to Pitch p 86 and FXM p 81 are disabled When the Wave Tempo Sync parameter is set to ON set the Time parameter PATCH WAVE TONE DELAY to 0 With other settings a delay effect will be applied and you will be not be able to play as you expect Whatis a Phrase Loop A Phrase Loop is a portion of a song that is excerpted with a sampler or by other means and then played back repeatedly One technique involving the use of Phrase Loops is the excerpting of a Phrase from a pre existing song in a certain genre for example dance music and then creating a new song with that Phrase used as the basic motif This is referred to as Break Beats FXM Frequency Cross Modulation t
353. atches corresponding to each Bank Select are as Date Feb 15 2000 follows Version 1 00 The SRX series corresponding to each Bank Select are to see the SRX series owner s manual H BANK SELECT PROGRAM GROUP NUMBER 1 Receive data E SUMBER u pp 000 001 128 GM Patch llChannel Voice Messages T MERE 085 000 001 064 User Performance 001 064 032 001 064 Card Perf A 001 064 Not received in Performance mode when the Rx Sw parameter PERFORM MIDI 033 001 064 Cara BEEE B 001 064 MIDI is OFF 064 001 032 Preset Performance A 001 032 065 001 032 Preset Performance B 001 032 Note off 086 000 001 004 User Rhythm 001 004 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 032 001 004 Card Rhythm A 001 004 033 001 004 Card Rhythm B 001 004 8nH kkH vvH ere E 9nH kkH 00H 064 001 002 Preset Rhythm A 001 002 065 001 002 P t Rhythm B 001 002 n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 3 TOME x kk note number 00H 7FH 0 127 087 000 001 128 User Patch 001 128 032 001 128 Card Patch A 001 128 vv note off velocity 00H 7FH 0 127 033 001 128 aes Bee oy B 001 128 064 001 128 Pr t Patch A 001 128 Notreceived when the Envelope Mode parameter PATCH CONTROL CTRL RxMIDI 065 001 128 P cra Ur ch B 001 128 and RHYTHM CONTROL CONTROL is NO SUS 088 000 001 001 128 SR JV80 01 Rhythm 001 256 002 003 001 128 SR JV80 02 Rhythm 001 256 Note on 089 000 001 001 128 SR JV80 01 Patch 001 2
354. ately after the sounds are played it can be effective to add the vibrato after the note is drawn out somewhat When the Delay Time parameter is set together with other parameters such as the Pitch parameter PATCH LFO LFO DEPTH1 2 and the Rate parameter PATCH LFO LFOI 2 WAVE vibrato is added automatically once a fixed time has elapsed after the key is pressed This effect is called Delay Vibrato Delay Keyfollow LFO Delay Time Keyfollow Adjusts the value for the Delay Time parameter depending on the key position relative to the C4 key center C To decrease the time that elapses before the LFO effect is applied the effect is continuous with each higher key that is pressed in the upper registers select a positive value to increase the elapsed time select a negative value Higher settings produce more change If you do not want the elapsed time before the LFO effect is applied the effect is continuous to change according to the key pressed set this to 0 How to Apply the LFO LFO is gradually added after the key is pressed high more A aay Fade Time Pitch Cutoff Frequency Level Pan Note on Depth low less Y Fade Mode ON IN Fade Time The time over which the LFO amplitude will reach the maximum after the Delay Time has elapsed Delay Time The time from when the keyboard is played until the LFO begins to be applied Chapter 5 Creating Patches
355. ato The effect produced by modulating the cutoff frequency is known as wah The effect produced by modulating the volume is known as tremolo note Two values are displayed for each parameter listed below The left one is for LFO1 and the right one is for LFO2 Pitch Pitch LFO Depth 1 2 x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect pitch TVF TVF LFO Depth 1 2 x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the cutoff frequency TVA TVA LFO Depth 1 2 x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the volume Pan Pan LFO Depth 1 2 x Specifies how deeply the LFO will affect the pan HINT Positive and negative settings for the Depth parameter result in differing kinds of change in pitch and volume For example if you set the Depth parameter to a positive value for one Tone and set another Tone to the same numerical value but make it negative the modulation phase for the two Tones will be the reverse of each other This allows you to shift back and forth between two different Tones or combine it with the Pan setting to cyclically change the location of the sound image o e any value from Type 2 10 is selected for the Type parameter PATCH COMMON STRUCT in the Pan parameter settings the output of Tones 1 and 2 are joined in Tone 2 and the output of Tones 3 and 4 are joined in Tone 4 For this reason the setting of Tone 1 will follow the setting of Tone 2 and the setting of Tone 3 will follo
356. ave Fine Tune 14 114 I I I 50 50 00 36 Oaaa aaaa WMT1 Wave Pan 0 127 I I 164 63R I 00 37 0000 000a WMT1 Wave Random Pan Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 00 38 0000 00aa WMT1 Wave Alternate Pan Switch 0 2 OFF ON REVERSE I 00 39 Oaaa aaaa WMT1 Wave Level 0 127 I 00 3A Oaaa aaaa WMT1 Velocity Range Lower 1 127 1 UPPER I 00 3B Oaaa aaaa WMT1 Velocity Range Upper 1 127 LOWER 127 I 00 3C Oaaa aaaa WMT1 Velocity Fade Width Lower 0 127 I 00 3D Oaaa aaaa WMT1 Velocity Fade Width Upper 0 127 I 00 3E 0000 000a WMT2 Wave Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 00 3F 0000 00aa WMT2 Wave Group Type 0 3 INT WAVE SRJV80 EXP SRX EXP SAMPLE lt XV 5080 gt 14 00 40 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT2 Wave Group ID 0 16384 I I I OFF 1 16384 nu 00 44 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT2 Wave Number L Mono 0 16384 I I OFF 1 16384 nu 00 48 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I 0000 cccc I 0000 dddd WMT2 Wave Number R 0 16384 I I I OFF 1 16384 I 00 4C 0000 OOaa WMT2 Wave Gain 0 3 I I I 6 0 6 12 dB 00 4D 0000 000a WMT2 Wave FXM Switch 0 1 OFF ON I 00 4E 0000 00aa WMT2 Wave FXM Color 0 3 I I I 1 4 I 00 4F 000a aaaa WMT2 Wave FXM Depth 0 16 I 00 50 0000 000a WMT2 Wave Tempo Sync 0 1 O
357. ax extreme timbral changes occur during the first few moments of each note This initial attack is what defines much of the instrument s character For such waveforms it is best to use the complex tonal changes of the attack portion of the waveform just as they are and to use the envelope only to modify the decay portion If you attempt to use the envelope to modify the attack portion as well the characteristics of the original waveform may prevent you from getting the sound that you intend Level Looped portion Tone change stored s with the wave Time Envelope for the TVF filter Resulting tone change 95 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets Functions of Rhythm Set Parameters This section explains the functions the different Rhythm Set parameters have as well as the composition of these parameters EDIT RHYTHM COMMON EFFECTS CONTROL WAVE PITCH TVF TVA m Le Le Settings Common to the Entire Rhythm Set COMMON You can assign a name to a Rhythm Set and set the volume of the entire Rhythm Set RHYTHM NAME Rhythm Set Name EHVTHM PCEorbrumset 11 HRHE 1 CSHIFT I You can assign a name of up to 12 characters to a Rhythm Set cS For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 28 RHYTHM COMMON Rhythm Set Common EHVTHM f Leuel Qutreut Assign COMMON 4 127 TOHE Level Rhythm Set Level Sets the volume of the Rhyt
358. ay the Patch normally 7 Set the Clock Source parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP to INT p 168 HINT When the Clock Source parameter is set to MIDI you can achieve synchronization with the tempo of an external MIDI device 8 Try playing the keyboard while you change the System Tempo parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP to various values p 169 The Phrase Loop speed will change in accordance to the system s tempo clock o ex Phrase Loop will sound with the system s tempo regardless of which key you press In this case the pitch setting p 86 and the FXM setting p 81 will be ignored Synchronizing the Timing at Which Tones Play to the System Tempo Setting back the time at which a Tone is played is referred to as Tone Delay The length of time for this Tone Delay can be synchronized to a specified tempo or to the System tempo Here let s synchronize the Tone Delay time to a specified System tempo 1 Select the Patch PR D 073 Cyber Swing on the PATCH PLAY page 2 Set the Clock Source parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH TEMPO to SYSTEM p 71 3 Set the Time parameter PATCH WAVE TONE DELAY of Tone 1 to the beat length for the tempo you are synchronizing p 83 4 Set the Clock Source parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP to INT p 168 HINT When the Clock Source parameter is set to MIDI you can achieve synchronization with the tempo of an external MIDI device 5 Try playing the keyboard wh
359. ay time from the direct sound until the right delay sound is heard M Delay C Delay L and Delay R parameters can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Delay C Delay L and Delay R are Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Fbk Feedback Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase Level C Level Center Adjust the volume of the center delay sound Level L Level Left Adjust the volume of the left delay sound Level R Level Right Adjust the volume of the right delay sound 146 HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Out Output Mode Adjust the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Lo G Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi G High Gain Adjust the high freque
360. ay will lower the pitch and shortening it will raise the pitch L in C L out Balance D J Balance W 0 0 Time Control Delay oS CY Balance W Feedback O R out Balance D Rin Delay Delay time Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when each delay sound is heard Accel Acceleration This parameter adjusts the time over which the Delay Time will change from the current setting to a newly specified setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Fbk Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the delay sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right LowGain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 22 2VOICE PITCH SHIFTER A Pitch Shifter shifts the
361. b is heard until when it B Time Reverb Time disappears Adjust the time length of reverberation LowGain Low Gain s HF Damp Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Adjust the frequency above which the reverberant sound will Hi Gain High Gain be cut As the frequency is set lower more of the high aa 9M frequencies will be cut resulting in a softer and more muted Just the gain of lae M LL a reverberance If you do not want the high frequencies to be Balance Effect Balance B bio parameter to Ee aS Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the LowGain Low Gain reverb sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct Adjust the gain of the low frequency range sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the reverb sound will be output Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Level Output Level Adjust the output level Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the reverb sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the reverb sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 133 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 26 OVERDRIVE CHORUS This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in series Balance D O y Balance W Lin L out Balance W Rin O R out Balance D OD Drive Adjust the degree of overdr
362. between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Adjust the output level 147 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 51 LOFI NOISE In addition to a Lo Fi effect this effect also generates various types of noise such as radio noise and disc noise Type LoFi Type Lowers the audio quality The audio quality will worsen as this setting is increased Post Fltr Post Filter Type Cutoff Frequency OFF A filter will not be used LPF The frequency region above the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut HPF The frequency region below the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut And adjust the frequency at which the filter will begin cutting Radio Detune Radio Detune Radio Noise Level Simulates the tuning noise of a radio As this value is raised the tuning will drift further And adjust the volume of the radio noise Disc LPF Lev Disc Noise Type Disc Noise LPF Disc Noise Level Disc Selects the type of record noise The frequency at which the noise is heard will depend on the selected type LPF Adjust the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter that is applied to the record noise Level Adjust the volume of the record noise
363. board name B Expansion C Wave expansion board name C Expansion D Wave expansion board name D Tem BATTERY CHECK Internal Battery Battery check 1 16 TRANSMIT P C Ch Transmit MIDI channel LOW OK P C Transmit program change number 1 128 Bank Select MSB LSB Transmit bank select MSB LSB 0 127 TRANSMIT SONG SEL Song Number Transmit song select number 0 127 251 Appendices Performance List USER PR A PR B User Group Preset A Group Preset B Group No Name Key Mode No Name Key Mode No Name Key Mode No Name Key Mode 01 Andreas Cave LAYER 33 BellPad 88 LAYER 01 Seq Template SINGLE 01 Dulcimar amp Gtr LAYER 02 XV Piano amp Bs LAYER 34 Chamber Str LAYER 02 Seq Pop SINGLE 02 DulcitarStk LAYER 03 BigOrchestra LAYER 35 Slicing Saws LAYER 03 Seq LABallad SINGLE 03 Tekno Loop 2 LAYER 04 SlicingSvox LAYER 36 Orcstrl Brs LAYER 04 Seq Fusion SINGLE 04 Rave Attack LAYER 05 Arp BellsPad LAYER 37 Lo Fi Lead LAYER 05 Seq FunkRock SINGLE 05 SpaceCarrier LAYER 06 Soaring Saws LAYER 38 Jet Flanger LAYER 06 Seq HardRock SINGLE 06 Terminator LAYER 07 Heirborne XV LAYER 39 SabbathDay LAYER 07 Seq H Metal SINGLE 07 Symphony JV LAYER 08 BrassBand 1 LAYER 40 OrganSplit 1 LAYER 08 Seq Blues SINGLE 08 Nebular Vox LAYER 09 MIDI Rhodes1 LAYER 41 Orc Ensemble LAYER 09 Seq Cont Jz SINGLE 09 Humming Vox LAYER 10 SweepPad 88 LAYER 42 Blue Sky 88 LAYER 10 Seq Ac Jazz SINGLE 10 Cosmic Dawn LAYER 11 Humanizer LAYER 43 MIDI Rhodes2 LAYER 11 Seq Country SIN
364. by holding down PATCH FINDER and pressing the numeric keys In this page you can select the desired Category from a list of Categories belonging to each Category group CHTEGOR IP iano K SELECT 1 PH0 2 EP Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a category and then press ENTER to confirm the AC Fiano selection You can also select a category directly by pressing the corresponding numeric key Chapter 2 Playing The following categories can be selected Category Group Category Contents NO ASSIGN No assign Piano PNO AC PIANO Acoustic Piano EP EL PIANO Electric Piano Keys amp Organ KEY KEYBOARDS Other Keyboards Clav Harpsichord etc BEL BELL Bell Bell Pad MLT MALLET Mallet ORG ORGAN Electric and Church Organ ACD ACCORDION Accordion HRM HARMONICA Harmonica Blues Harp Guitar AGT AC GUITAR Acoustic Guitar EGT EL GUITAR Electric Guitar DGT DIST GUITAR Distortion Guitar Bass BS BASS Acoustic amp Electric Bass SBS SYNTH BASS Synth Bass Orchestral STR STRINGS Strings ORC ORCHESTRA Orchestra Ensemble HIT HIT amp STAB Orchestra Hit Hit WND WIND Winds Oboe Clarinet etc FLT FLUTE Flute Piccolo Brass BRS AC BRASS Acoustic Brass SBR SYNTH BRASS Synth Brass SAX SAX Sax Synth HLD HARDLEAD Hard Synth Lead SLD SOFT LEAD Soft Synth Lead TEK TECHNO SYNTH Techno Synth PLS PU
365. c keys to choose the number Chapter 7 6 Press P to move to the next display and then select the contents of the effect that you wish to copy PHTCH 4TsFe LCOMPHEE 14 LEEHTEF 1 Fe COPY JELL Copy type 7 Either by rotating the VALUE dial or by pressing INC DEC set the value ALL Multi effects Chorus and Reverb settings MFX Multi effects settings CHORUS Chorus settings REVERB Reverb settings CHO amp REV Chorus and Reverb settings 8 Press ENTER to execute the Copy operation 9 Press UTILITY to return to the previous page 161 Chapter 8 Saving Sounds Modifications you make to a sound are temporary and will be lost when the power is turned off or when another Performance Patch or Rhythm Set is selected If you wish to keep the modified Tones perform the Save operation If the settings of a Performance Patch or Rhythm Set have been modified a symbol will appear at the left of the group in the corresponding PLAY page indicating that the data has been modified After you save the data to the XV 88 user memory the symbol will disappear PERFORM R B 01 Sea Template Fart 1 PLAY kbd C 4 There are three methods for saving Tones Saving to Internal Memory p 164 Saving to an External MIDI Device p 166 Saving a Group of Tones to a Memory Card p 167 162 About Memory Patch and Performance settings are stored in what is referred to as memory
366. cal Light amp Sound Center Khaled Ebn Al Walid St Bldg No 47 P O BOX 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 223 5384 TURKEY Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat ve ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler Pasaji No 74 20 Taksim Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 2499324 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor Dubai U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd Toronto Office 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL 905 362 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of May 1 2002 Roland 02019189 02 5 C2 71K
367. ce Patch or Rhythm Set into the currently selected Rhythm Set EHVTHM t Source Humber k FR COPY RHYTHHI USER icUser Rhuthm 3 in an Copy source Copy source Performance Patch Rhythm Set group number name Press P to move to the next display and then select the contents of the effect that you wish to copy RHYTHM 4TsrFe CCOMPARE CEHTER 1 Fe COPY 6LL Copy type ALL Multi effects Chorus and Reverb settings MFX Multi effects settings CHORUS Chorus settings REVERB Reverb settings CHO amp REV Chorus and Reverb settings 184 I For more detailed information and instructions for this procedure refer to Copying Another Effect Setting Effects Copy p 161 The Compare Function For the Rhythm Tone Copy and Rhythm Set Effect Copy operations you can use the Compare function The Compare function allows you to play the copy source Rhythm Set To play the Rhythm Set of the copy source press UNDO COMPARE to access the RHYTHM COMPARE page The new Rhythm Set can also be selected from this page however it is not possible to select patches from CD A H or XP A D After selecting the Rhythm Set return to the previous page by pressing UNDO COMPARE or EXIT RHYTHM Humber CCOMPARE J COMPARE User hej cUser REhethm 3 Copy source Rhythm Set group number name Note The Compare function cannot be used with Rhythm Tone Copy if either TEMP a CD A H XP A D Rhythm Set
368. cents Convert these values to hexadecimal and transmit them as Exclusive data For example to set the tune C B of the Part 1 Arabian Scale send the following data FO 41 10 42 12 40 11 40 3A 6D 3E 34 0D 38 6B 3C 6F 40 36 OF 76 F7 295 MIDI Implementation eoueuoseH uomeueA punog PIOH U91IMS 100 01e69 yos olnu lsos olu uleliOqd L PIOH be y Ja o4JU0D asodind e1euec g JejoJjuoo esodind eJeuar Z JejoJjuoo esodind eJeuar 49 04 U00 esodund eJeuec uoisseJdx3 L jodued Ls eouejeg euin oA be Anua geq euin OJUSWEOd ed 1004 ad yag uolle npoN o9jes yueg OOOOQOQOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO TT O jooo0oo0000x00xxxx000000XO0O 2 0 2 0 EEEE FIOR E EEE E E AlOd ouo N PON L W DO N PON N 00 UOISISA 0002 S qe eieq eyg uonejueuirejdui AIN O X OEC HAHAH EK 2 0 p znow W 91 1 91 L 91 L 91 L jeziseuiuAS ejqepuedxa 210A 8Z L A 0Z 69 89 19 99 S9 v9 6l 8l Ll 9I LE Ol 8 9 GN TWO ebueyy Ze 0 OUOD pueg Yd s jauueyD s Aey HO SION y90 89A UO 9 0N 90I0A NIL JequinwN oN p 1 1lV soDesso N ynejeq p BueuoS jeuueuj uynejeq oISeg uonounJ 88 AX I8poIN 296 MIDI Implementation x ON X ONON 430 ININO 7 Spo A10d 440 ININO 9poIN S9A O ONON NO INO Z 9POIN 410d NO INNO luo BPOW INO v
369. ch Finder function p 30 Press 0 while holding down SHIFT to turn the Digit Hold function on off With the Digit Hold on the 100 s place and 10 s place will be fixed and only the 1 s place will change This means that you can select Patches simply by pressing the numeric key for the 1 s place without having to press ENTER The same applies when selecting Performances or Rhythm sets p 30 SHIFT This is used in combination with other buttons Some buttons on the front panel include black printed characters They indicate the button s function when SHIFT is held down EN TER REGISTRY ENTER Use this button to finalize a value or execute an operation REGISTRY When you press this button while holding down SHIFT you can directly register the favorite Patch or Rhythm Set to the Favorite List p 165 GROUP Section Selects sound groups p 29 p 35 p 39 USER Selects a sound from the user group CARD Selects a sound from a memory card PRESET Selects a sound from the preset group EXP Selects a sound from a Wave Expansion Board sold separately 11 BANK Section Selects a bank for sounds p 29 p 35 p 39 A H Press these buttons to select tones from Preset Groups A F and H Memory Cards A H and Wave Expansion Boards A D Pitch Bend Modulation Lever This allows you to control pitch bend or apply vibrato Quick Start p 65 D
370. change the jacks used to output the sounds for each of the Tones and Rhythm Tones individually For example when playing a Rhythm Set you can output the snare drum in stereo from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks the bass drum in mono from the INDIVIDUAL 3 jack and the hi hat in mono from the INDIVIDUAL 4 jack With this arrangement you can process each of the Rhythm Tones with a different effect 1 After confirming that you are in Patch Rhythm Set mode select the desired Patch Rhythm Set p 29 p 39 2 After pressing EDIT to make the indicator light up press the COMMON function button and press 4 or W to display the PATCH COMMON page PATCH COMMON 4 MEMO When a Rhythm Set is selected display the RHYTHM COMMON page Prigrita Outrut Assign LDLIDEST TOHE w Press 4 or gt to move the cursor to Output Assign P Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to specify how the direct sound will be output 108 Output Assign Specifies for each Patch Rhythm Set how the direct sound will be output MFX Output in stereo through Multi effects You can also apply Chorus or Reverb to the sound that passes through Multi effects OUTPUT A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo without passing through Multi effects OUTPUT B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo without passing through Multi effects INDIV 1 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack in mono without passing through Multi effec
371. ching of the Performance is given priority Local Local Switch The Local Switch determines whether the internal sound generator is disconnected OFF from the keyboard controller section keyboard pitch bend modulation lever sliders D Beam controller pedal and so on or not disconnected ON Normally this is left ON but if you wish to use the XV 88 s keyboard and controllers to control only external sound generators set it to OFF MEMO When a Layer Performance is selected if you want the keyboard controller section to be disconnected only from a specific Part or Parts use the Local parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI p 60 169 Chapter 9 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions Remote Remote Keyboard Switch Set this parameter ON when you want to use an external MIDI keyboard instead of the XV 88 s keyboard In this case the MIDI transmit channel of the external MIDI keyboard can be set to any channel Normally you will leave this parameter OFF HINT Set this parameter ON if you want performance using the Arpeggiator to be controlled by an external MIDI device p 44 PATCH MIDI FATCH Fx Chl Tx Ch Local Remate MIDI 1 l Rx Chi OH OFF Make MIDI settings for Patch Rhythm Set mode To make these settings press SYSTEM when you are in Patch Rhythm Set mode and then press MIDI located in the row of function buttons Rx Ch Patch Rhythm Set Receive Channel Spe
372. cifies the receive channel of MIDI messages in Patch Rhythm Set mode Tx Ch Patch Rhythm Set Transmit Channel Specifies the transmit channel of MIDI messages in Patch Rhythm Set mode If you do not want to transmit MIDI messages to external MIDI devices turn this parameter OFF If you want the transmit channel to always match the Patch Receive Channel set this parameter to Rx Ch Local Local Switch The Local Switch determines whether the internal sound generator is disconnected OFF from the keyboard controller section keyboard pitch bend modulation lever sliders D Beam controller pedal and so on or not disconnected ON Normally this is left ON but if you wish to use the XV 88 s keyboard and controllers to control only external sound generators set it to OFF Remote Remote Keyboard Switch Set this parameter ON when you want to use an external MIDI keyboard instead of the XV 88 s keyboard In this case the MIDI transmit channel of the external MIDI keyboard can be set to any channel Normally you will leave this parameter OFF HINT Set this parameter ON if you want performance using the Arpeggiator to be controlled by an external MIDI device p 44 GM MIDI rn I Local Switch Remote MIDI 1 OH OFF Make MIDI settings for GM mode To make these settings press SYSTEM when you are in GM mode and then press MIDI located in the row of function buttons Local Switch The Local Switch determines
373. cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Low Gain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the modulation delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the modulation delay sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 128 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 19 TRIPLE TAP DELAY The Triple Tap Delay produces three delay sounds center left and right L in Tipe Tap Dei ser n camel Feedback Rin Balance D Delay C Delay Time Center Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the center delay sound is heard Delay L Delay Time Left Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay R Delay Time Right Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard MEMO Delay C Delay L and Delay R parameters can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Delay C Delay Land Delay R are Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Fbk Feedback Level Adjust th
374. d Kick2 909 Kick 1 Hybrid Kick2 Pop Voice gra Old Kick Old Kick Old Kick Old Kick Old Kick Wind Agogo 91 Pop Voice Pop Voice Pop Voice 808 Kick Pop Voice Pop Voice o2 Wind Agogo Wind Agogo Wind Agogo 909 SN 2 Wind Agogo Wind Agogo 93 Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 909 SN 1 Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 EE Anklungs Anklungs Anklungs 808 SN Anklungs Anklungs 95 Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 Dance Kick Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 cdo Metronome2 Metronome 2 Metronome 2 REVTimp3 Metronome2 Metronome2 777 K R8 Click R8 Click R8 Click R8 Click R8 Click R8 Click 98 Metronome 1 Metronome 1 Metronome 1 Metronome 2 Metronome 1 Metronome 1 EE Finger Snaps Finger Snaps Finger Snaps Finger Snaps eee oaa 258 e s N oo oO N f e C2 o i oo A o i Q3 s Az a ES NX C3 A 8 a o B mm O or O i a 7 a 9 C4 D z 0 Oo N o i D D N el u D 9 i N BN C5 M N z N ona oo e C6 oo BR i co o rir e a C7 oO D T PR B Preset B Group 001 PowerDrumSet 002 RaveDrumSet Rhythm Set List PR C Preset C Group 001 JazzDrumSet2 PR D Preset D Group Round Kick Dry Stick 2 Piccolo SN 808 Claps Natural SN2 Verb Tom Lo CI HiHat 4 Verb Tom Lo Pedal HiHat2 Verb Tom Lo Op HiHat
375. d will be sustained at that level If you want to sustain the sound set this ON When using this function also set the Hold 1 parameter ON This function is effective for piano sounds Envelope Mode When a loop type waveform p 68 is selected it will normally continue to sound as long as a key is pressed If you want a note to decay naturally even when the key remains pressed set this to NO SUSTAIN won If a one shot type Wave p 68 is selected it will not sustain even if this parameter is set to SUSTAIN TMT CTRL amp BEN DER TMT Control amp Bender THT CTELt TMT Ctrl Sul Bend Rana3e amp BEHDER 4 OFE i 2 TMT Ctrl Sw TMT Control Switch Use the Matrix Controller to enable ON or disable OFF sounding of different tones o m can also cause different tones to sound in response to notes played at different strengths velocity on the keyboard However the Matrix Controller and the keyboard velocity cannot be used simultaneously to make different Tones to sound When you want to make the different Tones to sound set the TMT Velocity Control parameter PATCH COMMON TMT VELO CONTROL to OFF Bend Range Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones that will occur when the Pitch Bend Lever is moved 4 4 octaves The left value specifies the pitch change that will occur when the lever is moved fully left The right value specifies the pitch change that will occur when the lever is moved fully
376. dal Switch DP 2 6 Foot Switch FS 5U Expression Pedal EV 5 won In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice 298 Computer Cable Wiring Diagrams For Apple Macintosh For PC 9 pin HL JR For PC 25 pin fT JH mini DIN 8 pin male 678 mini DIN 8 pin male 678 mini DIN 8 pin male 678 mini DIN 8 pin male mini DIN 8 pin male HSKo 1 T HSKo HSKi 2 2 HSKi TXD 3 3 TXD GND 4 gt 4 GND RXD 5 5 RXD TXD 6 6 TXD GPi de GPi RXD 8 mini DIN 8 pin male 8 RXD D sub 9 pin female HSKo1 7 RTS HSKi 2 8 CTS mini DIN 8 pin male TXD 3 3 TXD GND 35 GND RXD 5 2 RXD D sub 25 pin female HSKo1 RTS HSKi 2 5 CTS TXD 3 2 TXD GND GND RXD 5 3 RXD mini DIN 8 pin male 678 D sub 9 pin female 5 1 oq 9 6 D sub 25 pin female 13 1 2 25 14 299 Appendices Symbols 6 4 d iis T a Es sup RD 14 47 O GT coU eO One UOTE aaa se 14 47 Numerics 0 9 Numeric Keys retten 16 27 1 879216 u asna eme eere preteen engines 15 25 A AHA oett ee rea et eee etae 16 AC Inlet sau uqata a Sau sd a asqa tenons 17 Accent Accert Rate System c tete 42 Accent Rate Zone ede senoesen ondes ieeoni indes 42 Accent Rate SY SEU 42 176 Zone 42 62 Ac
377. ddd Reverb Parameter 14 12768 52768 I 7 XV 5080 8 lt XV 5080 gt PATCH I I I 20000 20000 I 00 20 0000 00aa Part Output MEX Select XV 5080 0 2 E 00 3B 0000 aaaa I I MFX1 MFX2 MFX3 I 0000 bbbb I SH I 0000 cccc 00 00 00 21 Total Size I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 15 12768 52768 4 I I 20000 20000 E 00 3F 0000 aaaa I 0000 bbbb I O1 2 7 Performance Keyboard 0000 ccce I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 16 12768 52768 E I I I 20000 20000 Offset I E 00 43 0000 aaaa I I Address Description I 0000 bbbb I t I 0000 cccc l 00 00 0000 000a Keyboard Mode 0 1 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 17 12768 52768 I I LAYER SINGLE I I I 20000 20000 I 00 01 0000 aaaa Arpeggio Zone Number 0 15 E 00 47 0000 aaaa l I I ZONEl ZONE16 I 0000 bbbb I zh I 0000 cccc I I 00 02 00aa aaaa Arpeggio Style 0 44 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 18 12768 52768 I I I 45 I I I 20000 20000 00 03 00aa aaaa Arpeggio Motif 0 37 00 4B 0000 aaaa I I I 1 38 I 0000 bbbb I 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Beat Pattern 0 114 I 0000 cccc I I I I 1 115 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 19 12768 52768 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Accent Rate 0 100 I I I 20000 20000 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Arpeggio Shuffle Rate 50 90 E 00 4F 0000 aaaa I I 00 07 Oaa
378. des 4 POLY 088 Pretty Bells 2 POLY 025 SoaringHrns 6 POLY 089 SquareBounce 3 POLY 025 MK 80 Rhodes 1 POLY 089 Pulse Key 3 POLY 026 XV Ac Bass 4 POLY 090 8 str F less 2 POLY 026 MK 80 Phaser 1 POLY 090 Wide Tubular 4 POLY 027 GroundedBs 2 MONO 091 Big Bubbles 3 POLY 027 Delicate EP 2 POLY 091 AmbienceVibe 4 POLY 028 Severe Ow Bs 4 MONO 092 SampleThe80s 2 POLY 028 Octa Rhodes 4 POLY 092 Warm Vibes 2 POLY 029 Celtic Harp 2 POLY 093 BOG 3 MONO 029 Octa Rhodes2 4 POLY 093 Dyna Marimba 1 POLY 030 XV Strings 3 POLY 094 96 Years 1 POLY 030 JV Rhodes 4 POLY 094 Bass Marimba 4 POLY 031 Air Pad 3 POLY 095 LookMaNoFret 3 MONO 031 EP ModPad 4 POLY 095 NomadPerc 3 POLY 032 Hit Rhodes 3 POLY 096 X modReso 1 POLY 032 Mr Mellow 4 POLY 096 Ethno Metals 4 POLY 033 The Beast 6 POLY 097 SkinnyBounce 2 POLY 033 Comp Clav 1 POLY 097 Islands Mit 4 POLY 034 SteppingPhsr 3 POLY 098 Tap Bass 1 POLY 034 Klavinet 4 POLY 098 Steelin Keys 3 POLY 035 LivinglnSync 2 MONO 099 Brite Vox 1 4 POLY 035 WingerClav 4 POLY 099 Steel Drums 1 POLY 036 PhazeWahClav 6 POLY 100 Brass Tubes 4 POLY 036 PhazeClav1 2 POLY 100 Voicey Pizz 3 POLY 037 Rippling 1 POLY 101 80s Retrosyn 2 POLY 037 PhazeClav2 1 POLY 101 Sitar 2 POLY 038 Rhodes Trem 2 POLY 102 MountainFolk 2 POLY 038 Phuzz Clav 2 POLY 102 Drone Split 4 POLY 039 Rocker Org 6 POLY 103 Soaring Sync 4 MONO 039 Chorus Clav 1 POLY 103 Ethnopluck 4 POLY 040 Cutter gt ModWh 2 POLY 104 Analogical 4 POLY 040 Claviduck 2 POLY 104 Jamisen 2 POLY 041 Queen V
379. dividual Patch from the keyboard or modify Patch settings If you re using an external MIDI device to control the XV 88 in this mode it will function as a single patch sound generator Performance Mode In this mode the XV 88 functions as a multi timbral sound generator and Performance settings can be modified If you re using an external MIDI device to control the XV 88 in this mode it will function as a multi timbral sound generator To modify the settings of a Patch or Rhythm Set that s assigned to a Part hold down PERFORM and press PATCH At this time if a Patch is assigned to the Part the PERFORM and Patch indicators will light If a Rhythm Set is assigned to the Part the PERFORM and RHYTHM indicators will light Zone Mode This mode is used for a number of settings such as those determining the way the sound generator produces sounds in response to the keyboard when played in a Performance and the way MIDI messages are sent and for the Arpeggiator and D Beam Controller functions To switch to Zone mode press ZONE while in Performance mode Rhythm Set Mode This is how you can play a Rhythm Set from the keyboard and modify the Rhythm Set settings In this mode you can play percussion instruments Rhythm Tones on the keyboard The XV 88 can also be used in this mode as a sound module for managing individual Rhythm Sets when controlled from an external MIDI device GM Mode This special mode makes the
380. e iiid li Part 1 Stings BENEENNEEEEERNEEENEHEEEEENHEEERERERHERHRR ERN HH HERREN NNI Part 1 Part 2 Part 2 Piano Strings Piano Ifa Patch key range is set in the KEY RANG page PATCH COMMON sounds are produced in the overlapping sections between the key ranges specified for the Patch and Performance Key range specified for Performance r wa a T DN 7 range Key range specified for Pa for Patch Although you can set the key range of each Part in the KEY RANG page PERFORM COMMON p 51 when performing with the XV 88 s keyboard we recommend setting the key range of each Zone as explained here rather than setting the key range for each Part 1 Make sure the PERFORM PLAY page is displayed 2 Make sure that the upper right of the display indicates LAYER p is the Part number If the display indicates part is the Part number the performance is a Single Performance so hold down SHIFT and press SOLO to change to a Layer Performance M The setting here is linked to the Key Mode parameter ZONE COMMON ZONE COMMON p 58 Chapter 2 Playing 3 Confirm that the EDIT and LOCAL TX indicators are extinguished and press a Function button to select the Zone linked to the Part you want played lighting the button s indicator When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is out zones 1 8 can be selected and
381. e power is turned on once again it will be reset to ON Saving a Performance The settings of the current Performance will be written into user memory Press UTILITY in Performance mode and perform Write operation PERFORM Humber WEITE PUser 8 User Perform LEHTEF 1 Writing destination Performance group number name HINT By holding down SHIFT and pressing UTILITY you can move directly to the PERFORM WRITE page Ss For more detailed information and instructions for this procedure refer to Saving to Internal Memory p 164 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode Saving a Patch Saving a Rhythm Set The settings of the current Patch will be written into user The settings of the current Rhythm Set will be written into memory Press UTILITY in Patch mode then perform Write user memory Press UTILITY in Rhythm Set mode then operation perform Write operation FATCH Humber CCOMPARE CENTERI RHYTHM Humber CCOMPARE CEHTERI WRITE WseribaitUser Patch 3 WRITE seri b6itUser Rhuthm 3 Writing destination Patch group number name Writing destination Rhythm Set group number name HINT HINT By holding down SHIFT and pressing UTILITY you By holding down SHIFT and pressing UTILITY you can move directly to the PATCH WRITE page can move directly to the RHYTHM WRITE page D D For more detailed information and instructions for this For more detailed information and instructions for this
382. e 2 A 0436 Fantasynth B 0486 Xylophone 0287 Flute Tone 0337 T Sax mf A 0387 Trombone 2 B 0437 Fantasynth C 0487 Vibes 0288 Piccolo A 0338 T Sax mf B 0388 Trombone 2 C 0438 D 50 HeavenA 0488 Bottle Hit 0289 Piccolo B 0339 T Sax mf C 0389 Tuba A 0439 D 50 HeavenB 0489 Glockenspiel 0290 Piccolo C 0340 Bari Sax f A 0390 Tuba B 0440 D 50 HeavenC 0490 Tubular 0291 Blow Pipe 0341 Bari Sax f B 0391 Tuba C 0441 Fine Wine 0491 Steel Drums 0292 Pan Pipe 0342 Bari Sax f G 0392 French 1A 0442 D 50 Brass A 0492 Pole Ip 0293 BottleBlow 0343 Bari Sax A 0393 French 1C 0443 D 50 Brass B 0493 Fanta Bell A 0294 Rad Hose 0344 Bari Sax B 0394 F Horns A 0444 D 50 Brass C 0494 Fanta Bell B 0295 Shakuhachi 0345 Bari SaxC 0395 F Horns B 0445 D 50 BrassA 0495 Fanta Bell C 0296 Shaku Atk 0346 Syn Sax 0396 F Horns C 0446 Doo 0496 FantaBell A 0297 Flute Push 0347 Chanter 0397 Violin A 0447 Pop Voice 0497 Org Bell 0298 Clarinet A 0348 Harmonica A 0398 Violin B 0448 Syn Vox 1 0498 X AgogoBells 0299 Clarinet B 0349 Harmonica B 0399 Violin C 0449 Syn Vox 2 0499 FingerBell 0300 Clarinet C 0350 Harmonica C 0400 Violin 2 A 0450 Voice Aahs A 0500 DIGI Bell 1 264 Wave Name DIGI Bell 1 JD Cowbell Bell Wave Chime Crystal 2 2 Bellwave 2 2 Vibwave Digiwave DIGI Chime JD DIGIChime BrightDigi Can Wave 1 Can Wave 2 Vocal Wave Wally Wave Brusky Ip Wave Scan Wire String Nasty Wave Table Klack Wave Spark VOX JD Spark VOX Cutters EML 5th MMM VOX Lead Wave
383. e Reserve 18 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I I I 0 63 FULL I 00 11 0000 00aa Hold Pedal Output Mode 0 3 l 00 22 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 19 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I I I OFF INT MIDI BOTH I I I 0 63 FULL I 00 12 0000 000a Hold Pedal Polarity 0 1 l 00 23 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 20 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I I I STANDARD REVERSE I I I 0 63 FULL I 00 13 0000 000a Continuous Hold Pedal 0 1 00 24 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 21 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I I I OFF ON I I 0 63 FULL l 00 25 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 22 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I 00 14 Oaaa aaaa Pedal 1 Assign 0 103 I I 0 63 FULL I I I OFF CCOl CC31 CC33 CC95 00 26 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 23 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH OCT UP OCT DOWN I I 0 63 FULL I I I START STOP TAP TEMPO PROG UP PROG DOWN 00 27 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 24 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I 00 15 0000 OOaa Pedal 1 Output Mode 0 3 I I 0 63 FULL l l l OFF INT MIDI BOTH 00 28 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 25 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I 00 16 0000 000a Pedal 1 Polarity 0 1 I I I 0 63 FULL I I I STANDARD REVERSE 00 29 Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 26 lt XV 5080 gt 0 64 I 00 17 Oaaa aaaa Pedal 2 Assign 0 103 I I I 0 63 FULL I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 00 2A Oaaa aaaa Voice Reserve 27 lt XV 5080
384. e Sounds of an External MIDI Device Simultaneously 202 Changing Sounds with a Pedal Switch U 203 Controlling an External MIDI Sequencer with the D Beam Controller 203 Using External MIDI Devices teann e eea tenente ertet tentent tenente tenens 203 Playing an External MIDI Sound Module from the XV 88 u 203 Controlling an External MIDI Sequencer from the XV 88 sss 204 Playing the XV 88 s Sound Generator from an External MIDI Device 205 Changing the Tone Settings from an External MIDI Device in Realtime 205 Changing the Multi Effects Settings From an External MIDI Device in Realtime 206 Selecting XV 88 Sounds from an External MIDI Device sess 206 Enjoying Desktop MUSIC eee eon eet eerte tee tes ore esa eiit 208 Connecting to Your Computer sse sS g nennen nennen 208 Disconnecting the Keyboard from the Internal Sound Generator Local OFF 211 How MIDI Messages Are Exchanged with a Computer sss 212 11 Appendices 213 12 Troubleshooting ccce oic us ace conducente eee cu ze ees 214 Error EET Te m 218 Quick Reference of Procedures nnmnnn 220 Parameter Listu 230 Performance List u J J J J J 252 Pa
385. e TRANSFER TO USER page appears press 4 amp to display the TRANSFER TO MIDI page 3 Press 4 or gt to move the cursor to the item for which you wish to make settings and either rotate the VALUE dial or use INC DEC to set the value as follows When Saving a Performance TRANSFER Tare Black LEHTEF 1 TO MIDI RPEFF FPFPIITEMF PATCH MIDI HINT If you have modified the settings of a Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part select PATCH When Saving a Patch TERHSFEF I Ture Black LEHTEF1 TO MIDI PRTCH TEMP 3MIDI When Saving a Rhythm Set TRANSFER Ture Elack LEHTEF1 TO MIDI RHYTHM TEMP 3MIDI E TEMP indicates the temporary area meaning that the currently selected data will be transmitted gt Get the external MIDI device ready for the reception of data then press ENTER to initiate the data transmission While the data is being transmitted the display will indicate Executing When COMPLETED is displayed the transmission has been completed HINT To halt during transmission press EXIT Before data that was saved on an external MIDI device can be transmitted back to the XV 88 the Device ID parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI must be set to the value that it had when the data was saved and the Rx Sys Excl parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI must be turned ON p 171 At the factory settings the Device ID parameter is set to 17 and the Rx Sys Excl parame
386. e er eene e eer en hee i crear 188 EXIT EXP Exp Expression information GM Part sese 197 Expression information Part Receive expression switch Part Expression Receive expression switch Rhythm Tone 97 Receive expression switch Tone IT EXT CONTROL group 60 EXT CTRL 60 EXTA GSe asna AEE a S atiy a aku Sas as 60 External bank select MSB LSB aa 60 External MIDI device External pan lt a sya nasaq iti eec o TRI rt n External program change number sss 60 External vol ifie us uu eese RE E a aaa et e tente 60 F EACTORY RESET susan doch Seah Sawa ssh 191 Fade Mode ere IER Ae RN T Lech ce A Se ea ete 84 Fade Time 84 FAVORITE LIST sees nennen 16 FAVORITE LIST eere eoi tiit nnt re res 31 40 165 Favorite list Registering Patches Rhythm Sets in the favorite list 165 Selecting Patches from the favorite list lt Selecting Rhythm Sets from the favorite list 40 FILE GORY Zaa asha to tete beetle 189 Filter type Rhythm Tone s anqa yasa guna netten 101 TONE dti nee Oe ahay ants S unan asas 87 302 FIEL TERZENYV l itr toro veter ta retta mee deer 14 34 Fine Fine tune GM Part nne trm t etm ee ti er etis er cue 196 Fine tune Part eee eee eene etuer 55 F
387. e high frequency content of the repeated feedback delays frequencies above the selected value will be damped If you do not wish to damp the high frequency content of the feedback delays set this parameter to BYPASS 157 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects CHO OUT Chorus Output PERFORM f Quteut Hzsisn Level Select CHO OUT 4 Al 127 MAIH Output Assign Chorus Output Assign Selects the pair of OUTPUT jacks to which the Chorus sound is routed when Chorus Output Select is set to MAIN or MAIN REV A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo won When Chorus Output Select is set to REV this setting will have no effect Mb If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 169 Level Chorus Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through chorus Select Chorus Output Select Specifies how the sound routed through Chorus will be output MAIN Output to the OUTPUT jacks in stereo REV Output to Reverb in mono MAIN REV Output to the OUTPUT jacks in stereo and to Reverb in mono HINT When set to MAIN or MAIN REV the OUTPUT jack from which the sound is output is set in Chorus Output Assign 158 Making Reverb Settings You can make the settings for Reverb used by Patches Rhythm Sets Performances Setting Procedure 1 After confirming t
388. e instrument HARP A style simulating harp playing 174 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions SHAMISEN The playing style of a Shamisen BOUND BALL A style suggestive of a bouncing ball RANDOM A style in which the notes sound in random order BOSSA NOVA A style with bossanova rhythm guitar Hold 3 4 notes for best results You can increase the tempo and use this as a Samba SALSA Typical salsa style Hold 3 4 notes for best results MAMBO Typical mambo style Hold 3 4 notes for best results LATIN PERCUSSION A rhythm style with Latin percussion instruments such as Clave Cowbell Clap Bongo Conga Agogo etc SAMBA Typical samba style Use for rhythm patterns or bass lines TANGO Typical tango rhythm style Hold the root 3rd and 5th of a triad etc for best results HOUSE A style for house piano backing Hold 3 4 notes for best results LIMITLESS The settings of all parameters can be freely combined without restriction Ss Choices can be set for the Motif Beat Pattern Shuffle Rate and Accent Rate parameters for each style Refer to the Arpeggio Style List p 268 Octave Range Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place If you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you actually play set this parameter to 0 To have the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave higher set this parameter to 1 A setting of 1 will m
389. e mime utens at s s ins A EE au ass Voice priority I Voice ETE EE ua TA u asam atus Voice reserve 2n s P eti e e P uuu d MOICOS sayanan PHI OETORSHAUR GE REICH HEROS HCM SE SAARESSA Vol Receive volume switch Part sss Volume information GM Part a Volume information Part sess Volume External volume sse 60 Part volume GM 196 Volume slid r nes tette depen tette au s 14 V Resonance Resonance velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 102 Resonance velocity sensitivity Tone a 89 V Sens Pitch envelope velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 101 Pitch envelope velocity sensitivity Tone 86 TVA envelope velocity sensitivity Tone 90 TVF envelope velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 102 TVF envelope velocity sensitivity Tone a 89 V T1 Pitch envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 101 Pitch envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity Tone 87 TVA envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 104 TVA envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity Tone 92 TVF envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 103 TVF envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity Tone 89 V T4 Pitch envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 101 Pitch envelope time 4 velocity sen
390. e proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Level C Center Level Adjust the volume of the center delay sound Level L Left Level Adjust the volume of the left delay sound Level R Right Level Adjust the volume of the right delay sound HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS LowGain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 129 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 20 QUADRUPLE TAP DELAY The Quadruple Tap Delay has four delays Balance D L in Balance D The stereo location of each delay sound is as follows Delay 1 Delay Time 1 Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when delay 1 sound is heard Delay 2 Delay Time 2 Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when delay 2 sound is heard Delay 3 Delay Time 3 Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when delay 3 sound is heard Delay 4 Dela
391. e sound Lin O L out Balance D J Balance W b R in O R out Balance D Pre Dly Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard Rate Adjust the rate of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Diy Dev Pre Delay Deviation Pre Delay determines the time from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard Pre Delay Deviation adjusts the differences in Pre Delay between each chorus sound Dpt Dev Depth Deviation Adjust the difference in modulation depth between each chorus sound Pan Dev Pan Deviation Adjust the difference in stereo location between each chorus sound With a setting of 0 all chorus sounds will be in the center With a setting of 20 each chorus sound will be spaced at 60 degree intervals relative to the center Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 124 12 TREMOLO CHORUS Tremolo Chorus is a chorus effect with added Tremolo cyclic modulation of volume Lin L out Balance D Tremolo Chorus 3 O Balance D Balance W R out Pre Dly Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chor
392. e time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard FigRate Flanger Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect Flg Dpt Hanger Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect Flg Fbk Flanger Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flg Bal Flanger Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will be output DlyTime Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard Dly Fbk Delay Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input Negative settings will invert the phase HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the delay feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance Adjust the volume balance between the flanger sound that is sent through the delay and the flanger sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the flanger sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level
393. e type of data to be transmitted For example if you wish to transmit only the PR A group ALL Performance Patch and Rhythm Set Patch 001 specify PATCH PR A 001 001 PERFORM Performance Note PATCH Patch If the selected data is too large to fit completely into the RHYTHM Rhythm Set transmission destination as much of the data as will fit SYSTEM System will be transmitted starting at the first number of the F LIST Favorite List specified transmission destination Block Source Block Example Type PATCH Specifies the source of the data to be transmitted Block PR A 001 005 USER Data from user memory will be transmitted Destination User 127 PR A F Preset A F data will be transmitted If the above settings are made and transmission is XP A D Data from an Wave Expansion Board will be executed only the two PR A group Patches 01 and 02 transmitted will be transmitted to USER group Patches 127 and 128 Note Type Block XP A D can be selected only if the corresponding Wave ALL PR A B 1 Expansion Board is installed PERFORM USER 01 64 2 CARD Performance Patch Rhythm Set Favorite List data PR A B 01 32 1 stored on memory card will be transmitted CARD uid 3 TEHHSFEFf Ture Block k PATCH USER 001 128 2 TO USER HFEFFDFE CARE mi SOLIHD dB SUD PR A F 001 128 4 T XP A D 001 45 File number File name CARD ii 3 Destination RHYTHM USER 001 004 2 This is the Transmission destination It i
394. ect signal to be sent for each Part p 194 3 Making Chorus Settings Select the Chorus type to be used and set each of the parameters for the selected Chorus p 195 4 Setting the Output Destination for the Sounds Passing Through the Chorus Select the output jack from which the sounds passing through the Chorus will be output You can also apply Reverb to the sound that passes through Chorus p 195 5 Making Reverb Settings Select the Reverb type to be used and set each of the parameters for the selected Reverb p 195 6 Setting the Output Destination for the Sounds Passing Through the Reverb Select the output jack from which the sounds passing through the Reverb will be output p 195 194 OUTPUT PART 1 Quteut Assign Chorus Reverb OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT B 127 B B Output Assign Output Assign Output Level Sets the direct sound s output method and volume for each Part OUTPUT A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo OUTPUT B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo The value on the right sets the Part volume MED If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 169 HINT Chorus and Reverb are output in mono at all times Theoutput destination of the signal after passing through the Chorus is set with the Out parameter GM EFFECTS GM CHORUS p 195 Theoutput desti
395. ected Tones by the same amount Chapter 5 Creating Patches HINT If you ve made a mistake in setting a parameter value or you have second thoughts about the changes press UNDO COMPARE to restore the value to what it was 8 If you wish to move to another display group press EDIT to make the indicator light and use the function buttons HINT You can also move to another display group by holding down SHIFT and using or jP Since this can be done even when the EDIT indicator is dark it is a faster way to get around because you don t have to turn on the EDIT indicator each time 9 Repeat steps 3 8 to complete a Patch 10 When you finish making settings press EXIT or PATCH to return to the PATCH PLAY page An asterisk will be displayed at the left of the Patch group This shows patch settings have been modified Note If you select another Patch in the group with an asterisk the modified Patch settings will be lost To keep these modified settings perform the save operation p 164 PATCH hR BW 001 128unicePno PLAY Lone 2 kbd C 4 Making Settings While Comparing Tones Palette Edit When modifying Tone settings for a Patch the values for four Tones will be displayed together on a single display This is called the Palette page Use it when you want to modify parameter values as you compare the settings of the four Tones 1 When modifying a Tone use 4 or b to move the cursor t
396. ected display group begins blinking EDIT PERFORM COMMON EFFECTS MIDI PART INFO EH E E 996 900 900 900 900 988 988 988 988 988 988 988 988 98 98 98 98 998 988 88 88 4 Use 4 or W to select a display page 5 Ifyou have selected a parameter display that can be set independently for each Part the number of the Part selected for editing will be shown in the upper left of the display To edit a different Part press EDIT to temporarily turn off the indicator and use ZONE PART SELECT 1 9 8 16 to select a Part When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is extinguished Parts 1 8 are selected and when the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit Parts 9 16 are selected Ex Su Mute Sw OH OFF Channel 6 Use 4 or P to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 7 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to modify the parameter value HINT If you ve made a mistake in setting a parameter value or you have second thoughts about the changes press UNDO COMPARE to restore the value to what it was 8 If you wish to move to another display group press EDIT to make the indicator light and use the function buttons HINT You can also move to another display group by holding down SHIFT and using 4 or gt Since this can be done even when the EDIT indicator is dark it is a faster way to get around because you don t have to turn on the EDIT indicator each time 9
397. ectrum is a type of filter which modifies the timbre by The Enhancer controls the overtone structure of the high boosting or cutting the level at specific frequencies It is frequencies adding sparkle and tightness to the sound similar to an equalizer but has 8 frequency points fixed at locations most suitable for adding character to the sound Lin Errira E ont Mix Lin gt L out E y Pan L Ri ban R y Pan R Ri TC EHE Sens Sensitivity Band 1 Band 1 Gain Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer J y Adjust the 250 Hz level n N Mix Mix Level Band 2 Band 2 Gain Adjust the ratio with which the overtones generated by the Adjust the 500 Hz level enhancer are combined with the direct sound Band 3 Band 3 Gain Low Gain Low Gain Adjust the 1000 Hz level Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Band 4 Band 4 Gain Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the 1250 Hz level Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Band 5 Band 5 Gain Level Output Level Adjust the 2000 Hz level Adjust the output level Band 6 Band 6 Gain Adjust the 3150 Hz level Chapter 7 Band 7 Band 7 Gain Adjust the 4000 Hz level Band 8 Band 8 Gain Adjust the 8000 Hz level Q Simultaneously adjust the width of the adjusted areas for all the frequency bands Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level Output Level Adjust the output level
398. ed SINGLE Only one sound can be played at a time when the same key is pressed With continuous sounds where the sound plays for an extended time the previous sound is stopped when the following sound is played Rx MIDI Receive MIDI These parameters determine how each Rhythm Tone will respond to received Expression Pan Hold 1 MIDI messages A B qExrression Fan Hald 1 Ex MIDI 0H COHT IHLIDLIS OH Expression Receive Expression Switch Specifies whether Expression messages will be received ON or not OFF Pan Receive Pan Mode Specifies how Pan messages will be received CONTINUOUS Pan messages will be responded to immediately instantly changing the stereo position of the Tone KEY ON The stereo location of the Rhythm Tone will be changed only when the next note is played If a Pan message is received while a note is sounding its stereo location will not change Note The channels cannot be set so as not to receive Pan messages Hold 1 Receive Hold 1 Switch Specifies whether Hold 1 messages will be received ON or not OFF 97 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets Note If NO SUSTAIN is selected for Envelope Mode parameter RHYTHM CONTROL CONTROL this setting will have no effect Modifying Waveform of a Rhythm Tone WAVE This set of parameters allows you to select the waveform that serves as the basis for the currently selected Rhythm Tone percussion instrument apply effects to t
399. ed when Multi effects are not applied this sets the volume of the direct sound o m the Output Assign parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH COMMON RHYTHM COMMON RHYTHM COMMON is set to anything but TONE the setting made here has no effect p 108 When the Type parameter PATCH COMMON STRUCT has a setting of Type 2 10 the outputs of Tones 1 and 2 will be combined with Tone 2 and the outputs of Tones 3 and 4 will be combined with Tone 4 For this reason the setting of Tone 1 will follow the setting of Tone 2 and the setting of Tone 3 will follow the setting of Tone 4 p 73 When outputting in mono the Pan setting is disabled When the settings are such that signals are split and output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack and no plug is inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack the sounds from INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together then output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack This sound comprises the sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks Mb If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 169 HINT When setting the MFX set the output destination with the Output parameter PATCH EFFECTS PATCH MFX OUT RHYTHM EFFECTS RHYTHM MFX OUT for the sound after it has passed through the Multi effects p 116 Chorus and Reverb are output in mono at all times Theoutput destination of the signal after passi
400. eing applied this sets the amount of the effect that is applied when Multi effects are not applied this sets the volume of the direct sound Chapter 7 Adding Effects os When outputting in mono the Pan setting is disabled When the settings are such that signals are split and output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack and no plug is inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack the sounds from INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together then output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack This sound comprises the sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks Mb If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 169 HINT When setting the MFX set the output destination with the Output parameter PERFORM EFFECTS MFX OUT for the sound after it has passed through the Multi effects p 116 Chorus and Reverb are output in mono at all times Theoutput destination of the signal after passing through the Chorus is set with the Output Assign parameter and the Select parameter PERFORM EFFECTS CHO OUT p 158 Theoutput destination of the signal after passing through the Reverb is set with the Output Assign parameter PERFORM EFFECTS REV OUT p 160 D For more on how to set each effect refer to the pages shown below Multi effects p 114 e Chorus gt p 156 Reverb p 158 Chorus Chorus Send Level
401. eived if the Clock Source parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is MIDI Active Sensing Status FEH When Active Sensing is received the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of all further messages While monitoring if the interval between messages exceeds 420 ms the same processing will be carried out as when All Sounds Off All Notes Off and Reset All Controllers are received and message interval monitoring will be halted i System Exclusive Message Status Data byte Status FOH HH ddH eeH F7H FOH System Exclusive Message status ii ID number an ID number manufacturer ID to indicate the manufacturer whose Exclusive message this is Roland s manufacturer ID is 41H ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard Universal Non realtime Messages 7EH and Universal Realtime Messages 7FH dd ee data 00H 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive Of the System Exclusive messages received by this device the Universal Non realtime messages and the Universal Realtime messages and the Data Request RQ1 messages and the Data Set DT1 messages will be set automatically Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Messages Oldentity Request Message Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH dev 06H 01H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message dev Device ID dev 00H 1FH 1 32 the initial value is 10H 17 06H Sub ID 1 General Info
402. el 0 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 01 1E Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Level 1 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 01 1F Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Level 2 429 I I I 63 63 I 01 20 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Level 3 Tow 441221 I I I 63 63 I 01 21 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Level 4 1 127 I I I 63 63 b I 01 22 0000 Oaaa TVF Filter Type 0 6 I I l OFF LPF BPF HPF PKG LPF2 I I I LPF3 I 01 23 Oaaa aaaa TVF Cutoff Frequency 0 127 I 01 24 0000 0aaa TVF Cutoff Velocity Curve 0 75 FIXED 1 7 I 01 25 Oaaa aaaa TVF Cutoff Velocity Sens 1 127 I I 63 63 I 01 26 Oaaa aaaa TVF Resonance 0 127 I 01 27 Oaaa aaaa TVF Resonance Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 01 28 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Depth 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 01 29 0000 0aaa TVF Env Velocity Curve Type 0 7 I FIXED 1 7 I 01 2A Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Velocity Sens 1 127 I I I 63 63 I 01 2B Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 1 Velocity Sens 427 I I I 63 63 I 01 2C Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 4 Velocity Sens 1 127 I I 63 63 I 01 2D Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 1 0 127 I 01 2E Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 2 0 127 I 01 2F Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 3 0 127 I 01 30 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Time 4 0 127 I 01 31 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Level 0 0 127 I 01 32 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Level 1 0 127 I 01 33 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Level 2 0 127 I 01 34 Oaaa aaaa TVF Env Level 3 0 12
403. el aftertouch switch OFF ON P Paf Receive polyphonic aftertouch switch OFF ON P VELO CRV Velocity Curve Velocity curve OFF 1 2 3 4 P Phase Lock Phase lock switch OFF ON P PART Group p 53 Display Parameter Value PATCH Type type PAT RHY P Group Patch Rhythm Set group USER CD A CD B CD C CD D CD E CD F P CD G CD H PR A PR B PR C PR D PR E PR F GM XP A XP B XP C XP D Number Patch Rhythm Set number 001 P SETTING Level Part level 0 127 P Pan Part pan L64 0 63R P Voice Reserve Voice reserve 0 63 FULL P MODIFY Cut Part cutoff frequency offset 64 63 P Res Part resonance offset 64 63 P Atk Part attack time offset 64 63 P Rel Part release time offset 64 63 P Velocity Sens Part velocity sensitivity offset 63 63 P PITCH Octave Part octave shift 8 3 P Coarse Part coarse tune 48 448 semitone P Fine Part fine tune 50 50 cent P BendRng Bend range 0 24 PATCH P MONO POL Mno Pol Part mono poly MONO POLY PATCH P Legato Legato switch OFF ON PATCH P Portament Sw Tm Portamento switch time OFF ON 0 127 PATCH P INFORMATION Group p 56 Display Parameter Value INFO Mod Modulation information 0 127 P Breath Breath information 0 127 P Foot Foot information 0 127 P Vol Volume information 0 127 P Pan Pan information L64 0 63R P Exp Expression information 0 127 P Hid Hold 1 information 0 127 P Bnd Pitch bend information 128 127 P Aft Aftertouch information 0 127 P Sy1 Syst
404. elative change In Performance mode the Atk parameter P O Cutoff Controller number 74 Status 2nd byte BnH 4AH vvH n MIDI channel number vv Cutoff value relative change 3rd byte 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 64 0 63 ERFORM PART MODIFY will change 3rd byte 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 64 0 63 In Performance mode the Cut parameter PERFORM PART MODIFY will change O Decay Time Controller number 75 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4BH vvH n MIDI channel number vv Decay Time value relative change The decay time will change in GM mode 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 64 0 63 O Vibrato Rate Controller number 76 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4CH vvH n MIDI channel number vv Vibrato Rate value relative change The vibrato rate will change in GM mode 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 64 0 63 O Vibrato Depth Controller number 77 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4DH vvH n MIDI channel number vv Vibrato Depth Value relative change OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 64 0 63 The vibrato depth will change in GM mode 271 MIDI Implementation O Vibrato Delay Controller number 78 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 4EH vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Vibrato Delay value relative change 00H 7FH 64 0 63 Thevibrato delay will change in GM mode O General Purpose Controller
405. em as MIDI messages p 198 1 Hold down SHIFT and press PERFORM to call up the GM PLAY page N Press EDIT to make the indicator light w Use the function buttons to select a display group The indicator for the button of the selected display group begins blinking EDIT HINT In GM mode you can press the function buttons 2 10 EFFECTS 3 11 MIDD 4 12 PART and 8 16 INFO 4 Use 4 or W to select a display page If you have selected a parameter display that can be set independently for each Part the number of the Part selected for editing will be shown in the upper left of the display To edit a different Part press EDIT to temporarily turn off the indicator and use ZONE PART SELECT 1 9 8 16 to select a Part When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is extinguished Parts 1 8 are selected and when the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit Parts 9 16 are selected Channel Ex 5w Mutse Su 1l OH OFF Use 4 or P to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to modify the parameter value HINT If you ve made a mistake in setting a parameter value or you have second thoughts about the changes press UNDO COMPARE to restore the value to what it was If you wish to move to another display group press EDIT to make the indicator light and use the function buttons HINT 10 You c
406. em control 1 information 0 127 128 127 P Sy2 System control 2 information 0 127 128 127 P Sy3 System control 3 information 0 127 128 127 P Sy4 System control 4 information 0 127 128 127 P Vo Voice information 0 128 P 231 Appendices Parameter List Zone Parameters Parameters that can be set independently for each Tone are indicated by Z COMMON Group p 58 Display Parameter Value ZONE COMMON Key Mode Key mode KEY RANGE Group p 59 LAYER SINGLE Display Parameter Value KEY RANG Lower Key range lower C 1 G9 Z Upper Key range upper C 1 G9 Z MIDI Group p 59 Display Parameter Value MIDI Channel MIDI transmit channel 1 16 Z TX Transmit switch OFF ON Z Local Local switch OFF ON Z EXT CONTROL Group p 60 Display Parameter Value EXT P C P C External program change number 1 128 NO SEND Z Bank Select MSB External bank select MSB 0 127 Z Bank Select LSB External bank select LSB 0 127 Z EXT CTRL Volume External volume 0 127 NO SEND Z Pan External pan 0 127 NO SEND Z ARPEGGIO Group p 61 Display Parameter Value ARPEGGIO Style Arpeggio style 1 Octave Range Octave range 3 3 Motif Motif 2 Beat Pattern Beat pattern 3 Accent Rate Accent rate 0 100 Shuffle Rate Shuffle rate 50 90 Key Velocity Key velocity REAL 1 127 Zone Arpeggio zone 1 16 Tempo Arpeggio tempo 20 250 4 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 32 PORTAMENTO A PORTAMENTO B GLISSANDO SE
407. emitone T Fine Fine tune 50 50 cent 2 Random Random pitch depth 0 1200 cent 1 T PCH ENVELOPE Depth Pitch envelope depth 12 412 jT V Sens Pitch envelope velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V T1 Pitch envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V T4 Pitch envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T LO Pitch envelope level 0 63 463 T T1 T2 T3 T4 Pitch envelope time 1 2 3 4 0 127 T L1 L2 L3 L4 Pitch envelope level 1 2 3 4 63 63 T 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 TVF Group p 101 Display Parameter Value TVF FILTER Type Filter type OFF LPF BPF HPF PKG LPF2 LPF3 T Cutoff Cutoff frequency 0 127 T Resonance Resonance 0 127 T TVF VELOCITY V Cutoff Cutoff frequency velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V Curve Cutoff frequency velocity curve FIXED 1 7 T V Resonance Resonance velocity sensitivity 63 63 T TVF ENVELOPE Depth TVF Envelope depth 63 63 T V Sens TVF envelope velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V Curve TVF envelope velocity curve FIXED 1 7 T V T1 TVF envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V T4 TVF envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T LO TVF envelope level 0 0 127 T T1 T2 T3 T4 TVF envelope time 1 2 3 4 0 127 T L1 L2 L3 L4 TVF envelope level 1 2 3 4 0 127 T TVA Group p 103 Display Parameter Value TVA Level Rhythm tone level 0 127 T Pan Rhythm tone pan L64 0
408. ency content 160 REV OUT REV Output Fart 1 f utrut Assign Level REU OUT I B s Output Assign Reverb Output Assign Specifies how the sound routed through Reverb will be output A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo Mb If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 169 Level Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the sound that has passed through Reverb Chapter 7 Adding Effects Copying Another Effect Setting Effects Copy This function lets you copy data of any Performance Patch or Rhythm Set into the currently selected Performance Patch or Rhythm Set This function can help you save time 1 Make sure that a Patch Rhythm Set or Performance is selected N Press UTILITY getting its indicator to start blinking w Press the numeric key 2 then 4 amp or W to call up the PATCH RHYTHM PERFORM FX COPY page FATCH f Source Humber k Fx COP 1 PATCHIUSER 61 User Patch 3 a Copy source Copy source Performance Patch Rhythm Set group number name 4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to set 5 Either rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set the value When the cursor is located at Number you can also use USER PRESET and A F to select a group and then use the numeri
409. enete A 192 H Hild HOLD PEDAL HOLD PEDAL jack Hold 1 Receive hold 1 switch Rhythm Tone Receive hold 1 switch Tone l PING ilenan Ena 16 27 INDIVIDUAL 1 4 jacks 18 INFO GM Patt xor atcp ee ii ae DARE egeta 197 M miory iio M 190 Partus Zone INFO EXP INFO group env 197 Performance eene pasear one m auem ieds 56 System 178 Z ORO 64 Information Aftertouch GM Part a asass 197 Aftertouch Part uu aaa an a Asas 56 Breath GM Part 197 Breath Part 5x node aote n aS u ee nu Des roves 56 Expression GM Part 197 Expression Part ua aaa paha eun cabins 56 Foot GM Part eene ettet credent 197 Foot Part Hold 1 GM P tt eee eee eee 197 Hold T Part ine a e rere de re eate ps 56 Modulation GM Part us Modulation Part ann SS aaa Pan GM Part n 197 Pan Part Pitch bend GM Part sse 197 Pitch bend Partia iens oso nne sone ponemos 56 System control 1 4 sappian an En AAR RREAN A R 56 Voice GM Part 1 197 VOICE Part sc a aa aaa Sa aan ana 56 Volume GM Part 197 Volume Part aan sasaqa n au aa asas 56 INIT we 185 Initialize we 185 GM mode 198 Patch 185 Performance we 185 Rhythm Set we 185 Initialize mode eee te Ore i ere ei
410. ensitivity parameter ZONE D BEAM D BEAM SENS p 64 8 You operate the D Beam Controller by moving your hand over it as you produce sounds by playing the keyboard 9 To turn off the D Beam Controller press D BEAM CONTROLLER ON once again extinguishing the indicator HINT By holding down SHIFT and pressing D BEAM CONTROLLER ON you can display each of the settings pages without having to hold down ON To return to the original window press EXIT Chapter 2 Playing The effective range of the D Beam Controller The effective range of the D Beam Controller is as shown in the following diagram Hand movement outside of this area will have no effect mA The effective range of the D Beam controller will idis decrease in locations of strong direct sunlight Be aware of this when using the D Beam controller outdoors Convenient Functions for Performance Transposing the Keyboard in Octave Units Octave Shift The Octave Shift function transposes the pitch of the keyboard in 1 octave units 3 3 octaves For playing a bass part more easily using your right hand transpose the keyboard down by 1 or 2 octaves 1 Press OCT or OCT and its indicator will light Pressing OCT once will raise the keyboard 1 octave Pressing OCT once will lower the keyboard 1 octave The specified Octave Shift setting will be shown in the kbd C 4 indication of each PLAY page For example if you press
411. ents above the Cutoff frequency Cutoff parameter are cut the sensitivity of this filter is half that of the LPF This makes ita comparatively warmer low pass filter This filter is good for use with simulated instrument sounds such as the acoustic piano LPF3 Low Pass Filter 3 Although frequency components above the Cutoff frequency Cutoff parameter are cut the sensitivity of this filter changes according to the Cutoff frequency While this filter is also good for use with simulated acoustic instrument sounds the nuance it exhibits differs from that of the LPF2 even with the same TVF Envelope settings we If you set LPF2 or LPF3 the setting for the Resonance parameter will be ignored 101 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Selects the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on the waveform s frequency components With LPF LPF2 LPF3 selected for the Type parameter lower cutoff frequency settings reduce a Tone s upper harmonics for a more rounded warmer sound Higher settings make it sound brighter When the Type parameter is BPF the cutoff frequency setting determines the range of frequencies within the Tone that will be heard This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds When the Type parameter is HPF higher settings of the cutoff frequency decrease the level of the Tone s low frequencies preserving its brighter qualities With PKG selected the harmonics to be emph
412. epending on the settings other specified parameters can also be controlled p 78 p 115 p 173 Front and Rear Panel Rear Panel g I i 58 Roland XxXV 88 i Pow er Switch Press to turn the power on off Quick Start p 18 AC Inlet Connect the included power cord to this inlet Quick Start p 16 won With units rated for 117V operation the AC cable is already connected to the unit MEMORY CARD PLEASE INSERT THE CARD WITH THE GOLD CONTACTS UPWARD MEMORY CARD Slot A memory card SmartMedia can be inserted here p 167 p 179 MIDI Connectors IN OUT THRU These connectors can be connected to other MIDI devices to receive and transmit MIDI messages gt p 208 p 269 Quick Start p 16 COMPUTER Switch Sets this switch depending on the type of computer connected to COMPUTER connector or the software you are using Turn the power off before changing the setting of this switch If you wish to use the MIDI connectors set this switch to MIDI p 208 p 209 COMPUTER Connector A special Computer cable can be connected here The type of cable required will depend on your computer When the COMPUTER switch is set to MIDI this connector cannot be used p 209 CTL 1 CTL 2 PEDAL Jack You can connect optional expression pedals EV 5 etc
413. epth Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Cho Bal Chorus Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output DlyTime Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the delay sound is heard Dly Fbk Delay Feedback Level Adjust the proportion 76 of the delay sound that is fed back into the delay input Negative settings will invert the phase Delay HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance Adjust the volume balance between the chorus sound that is sent through the delay and the chorus sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the chorus sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 137 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 36 FLANGERDELAY This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series Balance D O L out P J Balance W D Q Flanger Balance W 4 GiIDeisy Feedback z O R out Balance D Balance D Lin Fig Dly Flanger Pre Delay Time Adjust th
414. er mic BUILT IN 5 open back enclosure 12x2 condenser mic BGSTACK 1 sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic BG STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic MS STACK 1 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic MS STACK 2 large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic METAL STACK large double stack 12x4 condenser mic 2 STACK large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic 3 STACK large sealed enclosure 12x4 condenser mic Mic Set Mic Setting Adjust the location of the mic that is recording the sound of the speaker This can be adjusted in three steps with the mic becoming more distant in the order of 1 2 and 3 Mic Dir Mic Level Direct Level Mic Adjust the volume of the microphone Dir Adjust the volume of the direct sound 148 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Level Output Level 54 DISTORTION 2 Adjust the output level This is a distortion effect that provides heavy distortion 53 OVERDRIVE 2 EU gt L out I Amp Pan L This is an overdrive that provides heavy distortion gt Distortion Simulator an Rin gt R out Lin gt L out Pan L i Y Pan R Adjust the amount of distortion The volume will change Rin gt s Rout together with the degree of distortion Drive Adjust the amount of distortion The volume will change Level Output Level together with the degree of distortion Adjust thedutput level Low Gain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Level
415. er number setting and the value setting be done in the proper order On some sequencers events occurring in the same or consecutive clock may be transmitted in an order different than the order in which they were received For this reason it is a good idea to slightly skew the time of each event about 1 tick for TPQN 96 and about 5 ticks for TPQN 480 TPQN Ticks Per Quarter Note 293 MIDI Implementation ilExample of an Exclusive Message and Calculating a Checksum Roland Exclusive messages RQ1 DT1 are transmitted with a checksum at the end before F7 to make sure that the message was correctly received The value of the checksum is determined by the address and data or size of the transmitted Exclusive message How to calculate the checksum hexadecimal numbers are indicated by H The checksum is a value derived by adding the address size and checksum itself and inverting the lower 7 bits Here s an example of how the checksum is calculated We will assume that in the Exclusive message we are transmitting the address is aa bb cc ddH and the data or size is ee ffH aa bb cc dd ee ff sum sum 128 quotient remainder 128 remainder checksum lt Example 1 gt Setting CHORUS TYPE of PERFORMANCE COMMON to DELAY DT1 According to the Parameter Address Map p 279 the start address of Temporary Performance is 10 00 00 00H the offset address of CHORUS at PERFORMANCE COMMON is 0
416. er will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 138 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 38 CHORUS DELAY 41 STEREO PHASER This effect connects a chorus and a delay in parallel The This is a stereo phaser With the Step effects you can also parameters are the same as for 35 CHORUS DELA Y make stepped changes in the pitch of sounds to which the However the Delay Balance parameter adjusts the volume Phaser effect is applied balance between the direct sound and the delay sound Balance D Lin O Balance W Feedback O Balance D R out Type Phaser Type Selects the type of Phaser 39 FLANGER DELAY This effect connects a flanger and a delay in parallel The than Type 1 parameters are the same as for 36 FLANGER DELAY Type 2 adds more of the Phaser effect to the high frequencies However the Delay Balance parameter adjusts the volume Mode balance between the direct sound and the delay sound Selects the number of stages in the phaser 4 8 Balance D Pol Polarity Lin v L out Selects whether the left and right phase of the modulation O Lange O Balance W will be the same or the opposite M Feedback INVERSE The left and right phase will be opposite When F Feedback using a mono source this spreads the sound 8 SH Delay H Q Balance W SYNCHRO The left and right phase will be the same Select 9 Rin Ado x X R out this when inputting a stereo source Balance D Man Manua
417. erent Zone parameters How to Make the Zone Settings 1l Press PERFORM to display the PERFORM PLAY page and select the Performance with Zone settings you want to change p 35 2 Press ZONE to make the indicator light The EDIT indicator lights simultaneously and the XV 88 is put into Zone mode If the EDIT indicator is not lit press EDIT to get the indicator to light 3 Use the function buttons to select a display group The indicator for the button of the selected display group begins blinking EDIT ZONE COMMON _ KEY RANGE MIDI EXT CONTROL ARPEGGIO D BEAM INFO 900 200 200 290 990 990 900 990 880 880 998 988 988 988 988 988 996 888 998 998 998 998 885 936 4 Use 4 or W to select a display page 5 Ifyou have selected a parameter display that can be set independently for each Zone the number of the Zone selected for editing will be shown in the upper left of the display To edit a different Zone press EDIT to temporarily turn off the indicator and use ZONE PART SELECT 1 9 8 16 to select a Zone When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is extinguished Zones 1 8 are selected and when the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit Zones 9 16 are selected Channel 1 6 Use d or P to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 7 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to modify the parameter value HINT If you ve made a mistake in setting a parameter value press UND
418. ermines for each Zone whether or not data generated by the keyboard controller section is sent as MIDI messages from the MIDI OUT connector Normally you will leave this ON but you can turn it OFF when you do not want the XV 88 to control external sound generators 59 Chapter 4 Chapter 4 Zone Settings HINT You can also set the transmit switch settings on the PERFORM PLAY page When the EDIT indicator is extinguished and the LOCAL TX indicator is lit press ZONE PART SELECT 1 9 8 16 to make settings A Layer Performance is on when the indicator is lit and off when the indicator is extinguished When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is extinguished Zones 1 8 are switched on and off and when the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit Zones 9 16 are switched on and off Local Local Switch Specifies for each Zone whether or not the keyboard controller section will be connected to the internal sound generator Normally you will leave this ON but you can turn it OFF when you want to use the XV 88 only to control an external sound generator HINT You can also set the Local switch setting on the PERFORM PLAY page When the EDIT indicator and the LOCAL TX indicator is extinguished press ZONE PART SELECT 1 9 8 16 to make settings A Layer Performance is on when the indicator is lit and off when the indicator is extinguished When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is extinguished Zones 1 8 are switched on and off and when the
419. ess PERFORM to call up the PERFORM PLAY page N If you have selected a Single Performance set the Key Mode parameter ZONE COMMON ZONE COMMON to LAYER p 58 w Set the Local switch of the Zone linked to the Part you want played to ON p 36 gt After pressing ZONE to make the indicator light up press the ARPEGGIO function button followed by W todisplay the ARPEGGIO page like the one shown below HEPEGGIU gKes lUelocits Zone Temrotzsy52 I FEAL 1l l1zB 5 Usethe cursor buttons to move the cursor to Zone Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select the Zone linked to the Part for which arpeggios are to be played N Press KEY RANGE in the Function buttons to display the KEY RANG page ZOHE 1 Lower Ll F r KEY FRH65I C dl B9 8 Setthe key range expression range for the Zone Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to Lower and set the lowest note of the range Move the cursor to Upper and set the highest note of the range d Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to specify the range of notes 0 Turn off the EDIT indicator and press a Function button to select a Zone linked to a Part other than the one for which arpeggios are played When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is out you can select zones 1 8 When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit you can select zones 9 16 11 Set the key range of the Zones linked to the Parts other than the Part for w
420. etermines the cycle for one measure MEMO Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Rate is Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Attack Sets the speed at which the volume changes between beats The higher the value the faster the volume changes Reset Selects the input of the sound that acts as the trigger resetting the one measure pattern When set to OFF the pattern is not reset even if the input is present When set to SRC the pattern is reset by the sound input to the multi effects Thre Reset Threshold Sets the volume level at which the reset begins Mon Reset Monitor Switch Determines whether the sound used as the reset trigger is output ON or not OFF This parameter is disabled when Reset parameter is set to OFF or SRC 151 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Mode Sets the manner in which the volume changes as one beat progresses to the next LEGATO The change in volume from one beat s level to the next remains unaltered If the level of a following beat is the same as the one preceding it then there is no change in volume SLASH The level is momentarily set to 0 before progressing to the level for the next beat This change in volume occurs even if the level of a following beat is the same as t
421. eters This section explains what the different System parameters do and also how these parameters are organized EDIT SYSTEM SETUP MIDI CONTROL TUNE ARPEGGIO D BEAM PREVIEW INFO 200 900 200 E EH 900 E E 988 988 988 988 988 988 988 988 998 838 838 889 998 98 95 880 Display Screen Contrast and Clock Settings SETUP SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM ILCD Fower Ur Model Master Level SETUP 1 l LAST SET 127 SYSTEM T Clock Source System Tempo SETUP 1 IHII 128 SYSTEM T Mix Paral lel Patch Remain SETUP I HIZI OFF LCD LCD Contrast Adjusts the contrast brightness of the display Increasing this value will increase the contrast of the display Power Up Mode Specifies the condition that the XV 88 will be in when the power is turned on LAST SET Reinstates the Patch and Performance selected at the time the XV 88 was last turned off DEFAULT The XV 88 will be ready to play Patch USER 001 Master Level Adjusts the volume of the entire XV 88 Clock Source System Clock Source The LFO cycle Multi effects changes Phrase Loop and Tone Delay time can be synchronized to a clock tempo When synchronizing these to the System s Tempo Clock either synchronize to the internal clock INT or to an external clock MIDI TS For details on using clock tempo refer to p 200 168 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions System Tempo System Tempo sets the tempo value w
422. ettings of all parameters can be freely combined without restriction EJ Choices can be set for the Motif Beat Pattern Shuffle Rate and Accent Rate parameters for each style Refer to the Arpeggio Style List p 268 Octave Range Sets the key range in octaves over which arpeggio will take place If you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you actually play set this parameter to 0 To have the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave higher set this parameter to 1 A setting of 1 will make the arpeggio sound using the notes you play and notes 1 octave lower 61 Chapter 4 Chapter 4 Zone Settings Motif Sets the order in which notes of the chord will sound Oo e 8 settings will not be available depending on the Style parameter setting For details on the possible values refer to Arpeggio Style List p 268 SINGLE UP Notes you press will be sounded individually beginning from low to high SINGLE DOWN Notes you press will be sounded individually from high to low SINGLE UP amp DOWN Notes you press will be sounded individually from low to high and then back down from high to low SINGLE RANDOM Notes you press will be sounded individually in random order DUAL UP Notes you press will be sounded two at a time beginning from low to high DUAL DOWN Notes you press will be sounded two at a time beginning from high to low DUAL UP amp DOWN Notes yo
423. evel Adjust whether Low Booster will be used ON or not OFF This emphasizes the bottom to create a heavy bass sound And adjust the level Increasing this value gives you a heavier low end Depending on the Isolator and filter settings this effect may be hard to distinguish Level Output Level Adjust the output level 60 3D CHORUS This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound The chorus sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Pre Dly Pre Delay Time Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until when the chorus sound is heard Rate LFO Rate Adjust the modulation frequency of the chorus sound MEMO Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Rate is Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Depth LFO Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus sound Phase Adjust the spaciousness of the chorus sound Chapter 7 Adding Effects Filter Type OFF A filter will not be used LPF The frequency region above the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut HPF The frequency region below the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Sets the cutoff frequency when a specific frequency band is cut off by a filter Out Output Mode Adjust the method that will be used to hear
424. evice to record data and press ENTER u For more on GM mode settings to be transmitted refer to MIDI Implementation p 270 HINT If you do not want the settings of a specific Part to be transmitted turn off the Receive Switch for that Part p 196 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 This section discusses various techniques for effectively SN If you hold down CONTROLLER and move the C1 slider in the PATCH PLAY page you can go to the C1 ASSIGN page directly There you can make settings for using the XV 88 for specific applications The more you use the XV 88 the faster you ll appreciate the real power of this unit the Assign parameter Tech n iq ues for Usi ng Pa tches 4 Move the C1 slider while you play the keyboard You ll notice that sound will pan right and left Reinforcing Filter Characteristics HINT If the result is difficult to hear turn off each effect unit If you want to reinforce filter characteristics set Structure Multi effects Chorus Reverb p 105 Type to 2 and series connect the TVFs of Tones 1 and 2 This example shows how to boost the effectiveness of the filter for the Patch PR C 014 MKS 80 Brass Using a Pedal Switch to Modify 1 Select the Patch PR C 014 MKS 80 Brass on the the Speed of the Rotary Effect PATCH PLAY page The function that allows you use MIDI messages to make 2 Press FILTER ENV getting its indicator to light these changes in realt
425. ey Mode parameter determines how the XV 88 keyboard will play the internal sound generator It has no effect on how the XV 88 sound generator is played from an external MIDI device HINT You can toggle between SINGLE and LAYER directly from the PERFORM PLAY page by pressing SOLO while holding down SHIFT Selecting a Performance The XV 88 has three Performance groups including the User group and Preset Groups A B with 64 Performances in the User group and 32 each in Presets A and B for a total of 128 Performances In addition to these you can also select Performances stored on memory cards SmartMedia USER This is the group inside the XV 88 which can be rewritten Performances you yourself create can be stored in this group The XV 88 contains 64 preset Performances p 252 CD A H Memory Card A H This is the group to accessed when using Performances stored on memory cards SmartMedia inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot You can also rewrite Performances you create Each bank A H holds 64 Performances meaning Chapter 2 you can select from a maximum of 512 Performances won Performances in CD A H cannot be selected if no memory card SmartMedia is inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot PR A B Preset A B These are groups inside the XV 88 which cannot be rewritten However you can modify the settings of the currently selected Performance and then save the modified settings in User memory or a memor
426. f Cutoff Frequency Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when changing the cutoff frequency to be applied as a result of changes in playing velocity If you want strongly played notes to raise the cutoff frequency set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to lower the cutoff frequency use negative settings HINT To edit the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences in the Cutoff Frequency Velocity Sensitivity values set for each Tone set the Velocity Sens parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH MODIFY p 72 However this setting is shared by the V Sens parameter PATCH TVA TV A p 90 V Curve Cutoff Frequency Velocity Curve Selects one of the following seven curves that determine how keyboard playing dynamics velocity influence the cutoff frequency Set this to FIXED when the Cutoff frequency is not to be changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed zc V Resonance Resonance Velocity Sensitivity This allows keyboard velocity to modify the amount of Resonance If you want strongly played notes to have a greater Resonance effect set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to have less Resonance use negative settings TVF ENVELOPE 1 TUFf Derth U Sens U Curve Time KF EHUELOFER 46 37 as 44 l wl U T1 U TA La EMWELOPE gl B B 1 TUF Til T2 T3 T4 Lil L2 L3 L4 EHUELOFE B 64 92 127
427. f D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Shuffle Shuffle Rate E Sets the ratio as a percentage of the time that elapses before Level Output Level the sound plays in Delay B relative to the time that elapses Adjust the output level before the sound plays in Delay A When set to 100 the delay times are the same Accel Acceleration Adjust the time over which the Delay Time will change from the current setting to a newly specified setting The rate of change for the Delay Time directly affects the rate of pitch change Fbk Feedback Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS 145 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 48 3D DELAY This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound The delay sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right 3D Delay L 3D Delay R Delay C Delay Time Center Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the center delay sound is heard Delay L Delay Time Left Adjust the delay time from the direct sound until the left delay sound is heard Delay R Delay Time Right Adjust the del
428. fect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Specifies the output volume 50 LOFI COMPRESS This is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound quality L in gt L out J Pan L Q Pan R R in gt R out Type LoFi Type Lowers the audio quality The audio quality will worsen as this setting is increased Pre Filter Pre Filter Type Adjust the type of filter that will be applied before the sound passes through the Lo Fi effect Post Filter 1 Post Filter 1 Type Adjust the type of filter that will be applied after the sound passes through the Lo Fi effect Post Filter 2 Post Filter 2 Type Cutoff Frequency OFF A post filter 2 will not be used LPF The frequency region above the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut HPF The frequency region below the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut Sets the cutoff frequency when a specific frequency band is cut off by a filter Low Gain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance
429. ffect set this parameter to positive settings If you want strongly played notes to have less Resonance use negative settings TVF ENVELOPE RB TUFt Derth lU 5ens U Curue EHUELOFER BI B 1 Aa TUFT U T1 U TA La EMWELOPE gl gl B Ha TUFf Til T2 T3 T4 Lil L2 LS L4 EHUELOFE l 16l 18 amp 4 127 127 127 8 This is used for setting TVF envelope how cutoff frequency changes over time Depth TVF Envelope Depth Specifies the depth of the TVF envelope Higher settings will cause the TVF envelope to produce greater change Negative settings will invert the shape of the envelope V Sens TVF Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Specifies how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the depth of the TVF envelope Positive settings will cause the TVF envelope to have a greater effect for strongly played notes and negative settings will cause the effect to be less V Curve TVF Envelope Velocity Curve Selects one of the following 7 curves that will determine how keyboard playing dynamics will affect the TVF envelope Set this to FIXED when the amount of TVF Envelope applied is not to be changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed AVIS 102 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets V T1 TVF Envelope Time 1 Velocity Sensitivity Use this parameter when you want velocity to affect T1 Time 1 of the TVF envelope If you want T1 time to be speeded up for strongly played notes set this pa
430. fied the data will be reset to the value of the correspondingly numbered user memory Initializing a Performance To initialize Performance settings press UTILITY in Performance mode and execute initialization PERFORM Made IHIT IDEFRULT LEHTEF 1 Initializing a Patch To initialize Patch settings press UTILITY in Patch mode and execute initialization PHTCH I Made IHIT IDEFRULT LEHTEF 1 Initializing a Rhythm Set To initialize Rhythm Set settings press UTILITY in Rhythm Set mode and execute initialization The Rhythm Set Initialize operation can also be used to initialize the settings of only an individual Rhythm Tone percussion instrument sound that you specify In this case move the cursor to Key and select the Rhythm Tone that you wish to initialize You can specify the key Rhythm Tone to be initialized via the keyboard or by pressing TONE SELECT 1 4 When Initializing a Rhythm Tone RHYTHM I Mode Ke LEHTER 1 KEV IHITAIDEFRULTIB 1 When Initializing a Rhythm Set RHYTHM t Mode LEHTEF 1 IHIT IDEFRULT Transmitting Sound Settings XFER You can transmit sound generator or System settings that are in the XV 88 s memory or are stored on a memory card to an external MIDI device or to the XV 88 s user memory Transmitting Data to an External MIDI Device The process of transmitting Performance Patch Rhythm Set or System data to an external MIDI device is called a bulk dump
431. for the envelope controlling the modulation When set to SRC the frequency is modulated according to the envelope of the sound input to the multi effects Mon Modulator Monitor Determines whether the input sound used as the modulator is output ON or not OFF Sens Sensitivity Sets the amount of frequency modulation applied Pol Polarity Determines whether the frequency modulation moves towards higher frequencies UD or lower frequencies DOWN LowGain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level Chapter 7 Adding Effects 45 MULTI TAP DELA Y setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right The Multi Tap Delay has four delays Each of the Delay Time Pan 4 O utput Pan 4 parameters can be specified as a note length of the selected Sets the stereo position of the delay sound Delay 4 A ens You can also set the panning and level ofeach delay setting of L64 is far left 0 is center
432. frequency regardless of the force with which the keys are played won Patches also contain a Velocity Sensitivity Offset setting p 72 The ultimate Velocity Sensitivity Offset value is the sum of the part s and the Patch s Velocity Sensitivity Offsets Accordingly if the Patch s Velocity Sensitivity Offset T1 parameter is set to 127 maximum there will be no change in the part s Velocity Sensitivity Offset even when this is set to a positive value PITCH PART 1 f Octave Coarszse Fine BendkEna FITCH 1 BI B B PATCH Octave Part Octave Shift Adjusts the pitch of the Part s sound up or down in units of an octave 3 octaves Chapter 3 Creating Performances Coarse Part Coarse Tune Adjusts the pitch of the Part s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves Fine Part Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the Part s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents M One cent is 1 100th of a semitone Coarse Tune and Octave Shift The Coarse and Fine parameters along with the Octave parameter can all be seen as doing the same thing to the sound i e changing the pitch of the sound For example if C4 Middle C is played with the Coarse parameter set to 12 the note produced is C5 one octave above C4 However if C4 Middle C is played with the Octave parameter set to 1 again the note produced is C5 one octave above C4 However internally these function very differently When the Coarse
433. frequency range Hi G High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will be output Lev Output Level Adjust the output level 62 TREMOLO Tremolo cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound Lin 2 Band EQ L out Rin 2 Band EQ R out Mod Wave Modulation Wave TRI The sound will be modulated like a triangle wave SQR The sound will be modulated like a square wave SIN The sound will be modulated like a sine wave SAW1 2 The sound will be modulated like a sawtooth wave The teeth in SAW1 and SAW 2 point at opposite directions SAW1 SAW2 Rate Adjust the frequency speed of the change M Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Rate is Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Depth Sets the depth to which the effect is applied LowGain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust t
434. ft A and Pitch Shift B sounds Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the pitch shift sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the pitch shift sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 23 FBK PITCH SHIFTER Feedback Pitch Shifter This pitch shifter allows the pitch shifted sound to be fed back into the effect L in O CO L out Balance D y Balance W OO Pitch Shifter lt P Balance W Feedback O Balance D Coarse Coarse Pitch 1 Adjust the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in semitone steps 2 1 octaves Fine Fine Pitch 1 Make fine adjustments to the pitch of the pitch shifted sound in 2 cent steps 2 1 octaves Fbk Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the processed sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Pre Dly Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the pitch shifted sound is heard Mode Pitch Shifter Mode Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the pitch shifted sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Low Gain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Balance Effect
435. function or operation PALETTE EDIT LOCAL TX PALETTE EDIT Press this when you want to make changes to Patch or Performance settings using the Palette page p 50 p 58 p 67 p 94 LOCAL TX When the indicator for this button is extinguished the Local switch can be switched on off When the indicator is lit the Transmit switch can be switched on off Functions buttons are employed for this purpose gt p 25 EDIT Press this button when you wish to adjust various settings Use the function buttons to select the display screen for the parameter you wish to modify Function Buttons The function of these buttons will depend on the operational mode and the status of the EDIT indicator p 25 1 8 9 16 Use this button to select the group 1 8 9 16 of Parts or Zones to be selected by the function buttons p 25 EXIT PANIC EXIT Press this button when you wish to return to the Play page of each mode or to cancel an operation without executing PANIC If for some reason notes are stuck and continue sounding hold down SHIFT and press this button to clear the stuck notes p 48 UNDO COMPARE UNDO Press this button to restore a modified value to the original value p 27 p 49 p 57 p 67 p 94 COMPARE When saving or copying Tone settings press this to check the sound at the save destination or at the copy source p 164 p 181 p 183 p 184 VALUE Dial
436. g parameters that can be set individually in each Zone press 4 amp or to move the cursor to the parameter to be edited 2 Press PALETTE EDIT to call up the Palette page Z ME 1 Channel Tx Local MIDI I 1l OH H PALETTE EDIT MIDI zone 1 rio lt CHHHHEL 1 1 2 3 4 51 41 3 Press 4 or W tochoose the Zone to modify When the Zone number is displayed and that Zone s Local Switch is set to ON you can check which Parts are linked Parts 1 16 are shown in order from left to right and Parts for which the Zone s MIDI transmit channel and the Part s MIDI receive channel are matched are indicated by a o for the Part HINT To switch between the palette page for Zones 1 8 and the palette page for Zones 9 16 press 1 8 9 16 4 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to change the parameter value HINT If you ve made a mistake in setting the parameter value press UNDO COMPARE to restore the value to what it was 5 Ifyou wish to edit other parameters press 4 or W to select the parameter that you wish to edit 6 Repeat steps 3 5 to make the settings for the Zone N To exit the Palette page press PALETTE EDIT thus extinguishing the button s indicator Functions of Zone Parameters This section explains the functions the different Zone parameters have as well as the composition of these parameters EDIT ZONE COMMON _ KEY RANGE MIDI EXT CONTROL ARPEGGIO D BEA
437. g the Modulation lever to the left and right 1 Select a Patch on the PATCH PLAY page 2 Onthe WAVE page PATCH WAVE select the waveforms for the two Tones Tone 1 and Tone 2 you want to have played p 81 3 Setthe TMT Velocity Control parameter PATCH COMMON TMT VELO CONTROL to OFF p 72 4 Call up the TMT VEL RANG page PATCH COMMON then set the parameters for Tone 1 and Tone 2 as follows p 72 Tone 1 Tone 2 Lower 1 64 Upper 63 127 HINT When you want to switch between Tones more smoothly set the L Fade or U Fade parameters The higher the values set the smoother the switch is between the Tones 5 Set the TMT Ctrl Sw parameter PATCH CONTROL CONTROL amp BENDER to ON p 78 6 Set the Control 1 parameter PATCH CONTROL MATRIX CTRL SRC to CC01 MODULATION p 78 7 Call up the MATRIX CONTROLI page PATCH CONTROL then set the parameters as follows p 79 Dest TMT e Sns 63 Tone oo applied to Tone 1 and 2 8 While playing the keyboard move the Modulation lever By moving the Modulation lever to the other side you can switch from Tone 1 to Tone 2 Syncing the LFO Cycle to System Tempo You can synchronize the LFO cycle to a specified tempo or an external MIDI device In the following example we will synchronize the LFO cycle to the system tempo 1 Select the Patch PR B 052 Blade Racer on the PATCH PLAY page 2 Set the Clock Source parameter PATCH COMMON
438. ge at each point Positive settings will cause the pitch to be higher than the standard pitch and negative settings will cause it to be lower n T1 T2 T3 T4 Pitch Changing the Tone Filter of a Rhythm Tone TVF Here you can make settings for the TVF Time Variant Filter This allows you to change a Rhythm Tone s timbral content by altering its brightness or thickness TVF FILTER Hua Tur Tae Cutoff Resonance FILTER 4 OFE 127 B Type Filter Type Selects the filter type A filter is a function that cuts off a specific frequency band to change a sounds brightness thickness and other qualities OFF No filter is used LPF A Low Pass Filter reduces the volume of frequencies above the Cutoff frequency Cutoff parameter in order to round off or un brighten the sound This is the most common filter used in synthesizers BPF A Band pass filter reduces the volume of frequencies below and above the cutoff frequency range This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds HPF A High Pass Filter reduces the volume of the frequencies below the cutoff frequency This is suitable for creating percussive sounds emphasizing their higher ones PKG A Peaking Filter emphasizes frequencies around the cutoff frequency by raising their level You can use this to create wah wah effects by employing an LFO to change the cutoff frequency cyclically LPF2 Low Pass Filter 2 Although frequency compon
439. gn parameter Rhythm To ne or Select parameter PATCH EFFECTS PATCH CHO OUT RHYTHM EFFECTS RHYTHM CHO OUT p You can set the direct sound s output method and the 158 amount of effect applied for each Tone or Rhythm Tone The output destination of the signal after passing individually through the Reverb is set with the Output Assign 1 After confirming you are in Patch Rhythm Set mode parameter PATCH EFFECTS PATCH REV OUT select the desired Patch or Rhythm Set p 29 p 39 RHYTHM EFFECTS RHYTHM REV OUT p 160 2 Press EDIT to make the indicator light up press the D EFFECTS function button and press A or W to For more on how to set each effect refer to the pages display the OUTPUT page shown below Multi effects p 114 Looe Outrut Assign Chorus Reverb OUTPUT 4 HFS 127 B B e Chorus p 156 Reverb p 158 3 Choose the Tone Rhythm Tone for which you want to make settings 5 Press EXIT to return to the PATCH PLAY RHYTHM PLAY page When Selecting a Tone An asterisk will be displayed at the left of the Patch After turning off the EDIT indicator use TONE SELECT Rhythm Set group This indicates that the Patch Rhythm 1 4 to select the tone Set settings have been modified When Selecting a Rhythm Tone Note Press the key that accesses the Rhythm Tone you wish to set in If you select another Patch Rhythm Set in the group After turning off the EDIT indicator you can also
440. gned to a part confirm that any MIDI messages used for the Matrix Controller will be received If the XV 88 is set up such that reception of MIDI messages is disabled then the Matrix Controller will not function MATRIX CONTROL 1 4 MATRIX f 100 5Y5 CTEL3 cDezt is5nesTone COHTFEDL18LDEST11 CUTOFE 5 _0o_0 Dest Matrix Control Destination Matrix Control Destination selects the Tone parameter that is to be controlled when using the Matrix Controller The following parameters can be controlled When not controlling parameters with the Matrix Controller set this to OFF Up to four parameters DEST1 4 can be specified for each Matrix Controller and controlled simultaneously MEMO In this manual Parameters that can be controlled using the Matrix Controller are marked with a x Opening and Closing the Filter CUTOFF Changes the cutoff frequency RESONANCE Emphasizes the overtones in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound Changing the Volume Pan and Pitch LEVEL Changes the volume level PAN Changes the pan PITCH Changes the pitch 79 Chapter 5 Creating Patches Changing How the Effects Are Applied DRY LEVEL Changes the volume of dry sounds CHORUS SEND Changes the amount of Chorus REVERB SEND Changes the amount of Reverb Applying LFO to Modulate Sounds LFO1 LFO2 PCH DEPTH Changes the vibrato depth LFO1 LFO2 TVF DEPTH Changes the wah depth LFO1 LFO2 TVA DEPTH C
441. h C4 sliders are assigned to the functions described below C1 slider AFTERTOUCH C2 slider BREATH C3 slider PORTA TIME Portamento time C4 slider MODULATION 1 Selecta Patch on the PATCH PLAY page 2 Press CONTROLLER getting the indicator to light 3 Set the Assign parameter SYSTEM CONTROL C1 ASSIGN to CC10 PANPOT p 172 199 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 Changing the Speed of the Rotary Effect to Synchronize It to the LFO Cycle Instead of using an effects controller you can use the Matrix Controller p 78 to change Multi effect parameters Here try changing the speed of the rotary effect to synchronize it to the LFO cycle 1 Select the Patch PR A 054 Rocker Spin on the PATCH PLAY page This Patch uses ROTARY as the Multi effects type 2 Call up the PATCH MFX CTRL page PATCH EFFECTS then set the parameters as follows p 115 Source OFF Destination SPEED Sens 0 3 Set the Control 1 parameter PATCH CONTROL MATRIX CTRL SRC to 105 LFOI p 78 4 Call up the MATRIX CONTROL page PATCH CONTROL then set the parameters as follows p 79 Dest MFX CTRL1 Sns 63 Tone ooo_ applied to Tone 1 3 5 Play the keyboard The speed of the rotary effect is synchronized to the LFO cycle Changing the Tone Produced with the Modulation Lever While using the Matrix Controller check out how you can get sounds of two different Tones by movin
442. h rises and the pitch falls when the tempo is decreased To give an example if a record is spun faster than normal the pitch is higher than when normally played and if spun more slowly than normal the pitch is lower than when played normally Such adjustments in pitch when playing a Phrase Loop at a changed tempo consumes a lot of time and effort Certain Patches on SR JV80 10 BASS amp DRUMS and other commercially available Wave Expansion Boards use Waves Phrase Loops for which the tempo BPM is indicated With the XV 88 you can synchronize performances to a designated tempo in a Phrase Loop or the tempo set by an external MIDI device merely with a simple setting Here let s synchronize a Phrase Loop to the System tempo 201 Chapter 12 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 1 On the PATCH PLAY page select a Patch that uses a Phrase Loop 2 Setthe Clock Source parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH TEMPO to SYSTEM p 71 W Call up the WAVE page PATCH WAVE p 81 P gt Press a TONE SELECT 1 4 button and choose the Tone that uses Phrase Loops The Phrase Loop is the Wave indicated by the Wave name along with the tempo BPM to the right of the Wave number 5 Setthe Wave Tempo Sync parameter PATCH WAVE WAVE to ON p 81 6 Setthe Time parameter PATCH WAVE TONE DELAY to 0 p 83 Note If you select a value other than 0 a delay will be applied and you will not be able to pl
443. hange in semitones 2 octaves that will occur when the Pitch Bend Lever is moved The amount of change when the lever is tilted is set to the same value for both left and right sides Mno Poly Part Mono Poly Set Mno Pol to MONO when the GM Patch assigned to the Part is to be played monophonically or to MONO when the GM Patch is to be played polyphonically won For the Part to which the GM Rhythm Set is assigned this setting will be ignored Porta Sw Time Part Portamento Switch Time Portamento makes a smooth pitch transition from one note to the next note played Also when playing monophonically you can apply portamento to simulate the slide performance technique sometimes used on instruments such as violin You can determine whether the Portamento effect will be applied or not using Portamento switch Sw Turn this parameter ON when you want to apply Portamento and OFF when you don t The Portamento Time Time setting adjusts the time over which the pitch will change Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time won For the Part to which the GM Rhythm Set is assigned this setting is ignored Confirming MIDI Information for Each Part INFO INFO Part Information FART 1 Hod Breath Foot Voll Pan Exe IHF 1 B B B 166 B iz FART 1 f Hold Bend Aftertouch Uoices IMFO I B B B B The displays allow you to check various settings such as MIDI message reception
444. hanges the tremolo depth LFO1 LFO2 PAN DEPTH Changes the effect that the LFO will have on pan LFO1 LFO2 RATE Changes the speed of the LFO cycles Changing the Pitch Envelope PIT ENV A TIME Changes the T1 parameter of the pitch envelope PIT ENV D TIME Changes the T2 and T3 parameters of the pitch envelope PIT ENV R TIME Changes the T4 parameter of the pitch envelope Changing the TVF Envelope TVF ENV A TIME Changes the T1 parameter of the TVF envelope TVF ENV D TIME Changes the T2 and T3 parameters of the TVF envelope TVF ENV R TIME Changes the T4 parameter of the TVF envelope Changing the TVA Envelope TVA ENV A TIME Changes the T1 parameter of the TVA envelope TVA ENV D TIME Changes the T2 and T3 parameters of the TVA envelope TVA ENV R TIME Changes the T4 parameter of the TVA envelope Splitting Tones That Are Played TMT HINT Ifthe Matrix Controller is used to split Tones set the TMT Velocity Control parameter PATCH COMMON TMT VELO CONTROL to OFF and the TMT Ctrl Sw parameter PATCH CONTROL CONTROL amp BENDER to ON p 72 p 78 Ifthe Matrix Controller is used to split Tones we recommend setting the Sns to 63 Selecting a lower value may prevent switching of the Tones Furthermore if you want to reverse the effect set the value to 63 When you want to use the Matrix Controller to make the switch between Tones more smoothly set the L Fade and U Fade parameters P
445. hat you are in Patch Rhythm Set Performance mode select the desired Patch Rhythm Set Performance p 29 p 35 p 39 2 Press EDIT getting the indicator to light and then press the EFFECTS function button 3 Press 4 or W to display the desired Edit page 4 Press or P to move the cursor to the parameter you re going to modify 5 Usethe VALUE dial IINC DEC or the numeric keys to change the parameter value 6 When you finish making settings press EXIT to return to the previous PLAY page An asterisk will be displayed at the left of the Patch Rhythm Set Performance group This indicates that the Patch Rhythm Set Performance settings have been modified o roe you select another Patch Rhythm Set Performance in the group with an asterisk the modified Patch Rhythm Set Performance settings will be lost To keep these modified settings perform the save operation p 164 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Functions of Parameters The functions of Reverb parameters are explained according to the display arrangement REV TYPE PERFORM Ture Source FEW TYPE 1 REVERB FERFORM Type Reverb Type Selects the type of Reverb OFF Reverb is not used REVERB Normal Reverb SRV ROOM This reverb simulates typical room acoustic reflections SRV HALL This reverb simulates typical concert hall acoustic reflections SRV PLATE This reverb simulates a reverb plate a popular type of artificial reve
446. have in mind Decide which Tones will sound p 32 p 81 When creating a Patch it is important to decide which Tones you are going to use For each Tone use the TONE SWITCH 1 4 to decide whether to turn it on have it sound or off It is also important to turn off unused Tones to avoid wasting voices unnecessarily reducing the number of simultaneous notes you can play A Tone switches on off each time its respective button is pressed When a Tone s indicator lights it ll sound Check the Structure setting p 73 The important Type parameter PATCH COMMON STRUCT determines how the four Tones combine Before you select new Tones make sure you understand how the currently selected Tones are affecting each other Turn Effects off p 105 Since the XV 88 effects have such a profound impact on its sounds Turn them off to listen to the sound itself so you can better evaluate the changes you re making Since you will hear the original sound of the Patch itself when the effects are turned off the results of your modifications will be easier to hear Actually sometimes just changing effects settings can give you the sound you want 1l Press PATCH to access the PATCH PLAY page and select the Patch whose settings you wish to modify p 29 he You cannot edit the Patches in the PR H GM2 group HINT If you want to create all your Patches from the ground up rather than the Patches that have already bee
447. he Tones For example with a Patch combining four tones each of which uses two Waves the actual number of sounds being played comes to 16 If you are using the XV 88 in Performance mode to play an ensemble count the total number of Tones used by all the Parts using the following formula How a Patch Sounds When the XV 88 is requested to play more than 128 voices simultaneously currently sounding notes will be turned off to make room for newly requested notes The note with the lowest priority will be turned off first The order of priority is determined by the Voice Priority setting Voice Priority can be set either to LAST or LOUDEST When LAST is selected a newly requested note that exceeds the 128 voice limit will cause the first played of the currently sounding notes to be turned off When LOUDEST is selected the quietest of the currently sounding notes will be turned off Normally you will set Voice Priority to LAST Note Priority in Performance Mode Since Performance mode is usually used to play an ensemble consisting of several Patches it is important to decide which Parts take priority Priority is specified by the Voice Reserve settings When a note within a Patch needs to be turned off to make room for a new note the Voice Priority setting of the Patch will apply Voice Reserve The XV 88 has a Voice Reserve function that lets you reserve a minimum number of notes that will always be available for each Part For e
448. he VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to change the parameter value HINT If you ve made a mistake in setting a parameter value or you have second thoughts about the changes press UNDO COMPARE to restore the value to what it was 5 If you wish to edit other parameters press 4 or W to select the parameter that you wish to edit 6 Repeat steps 3 5 to complete a Performance 7 Toexit the Palette page press PALETTE EDIT thus extinguishing the button s indicator Copying the Settings of Another Part Part Copy Part settings from any desired Performance can be copied to any desired Part of the currently selected Performance This function can help you save time 1 Make sure a Performance is selected 2 Press UTILITY getting its indicator to start blinking 3 Press the numeric key 2 then 4 or W tocall up the PERFORM PART CPY page PERFORM 5ource Part LEHTER 1 PART CPYPUSER BLIP i tUser Performa P 1 Copy source Performance group number Copy source Performance name Copy source Part Copy destination Part 4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to set 5 Either rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set the value HINT To specify the currently selected Performance as the copy source set Source to TEMP When the cursor is located at Source you can also use USER PRESET A and B to select a Performance group
449. he XV 88 CARD I LEHTEF 1 FORMAT I P Please be aware that formatting will erase all the data currently stored on the memory card Renaming a File RENAME This operation allows you to change the name of a file already stored on the memory card Original file name REMAME 2 SDLUHD Bis SUD R gt LEHTEF 1 CSOUHD da SUD New file name 4 You can assign the file a name of up to eight characters For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 28 Nove The file name extension SVD cannot be changed Deleting Unwanted Files DELETE Use this operation to delete unwanted files from a memory card DELETE E SOUND Bia SUD R gt LEHTER1 Copying Files Betw een Memory Cards FILE COPY Use FILE COPY to copy files stored on one memory card to another memory card gt The copy destination memory card must already be formatted p 189 Insert and remove memory cards used in the FILE COPY procedure only as directed by the on display instructions Using other procedures can damage the memory cards rendering them unusable 1 Select 4 FILE COPY in the CARD page to display a screen like the following FILE Please Insert Source Card COPY I CENTER I 2 Insert the memory card containing the file you want to copy in the MEMORY CARD slot and press ENTER 3 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or numeric keys to select the file you want to copy then press ENTER
450. he display When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements Asmall amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night When you need to transport the unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials Useonly the specified expression pedal EV 5 sold separately By connecting any other expression pedals you risk causing malfunction and or damage to the unit Before Using Memory Cards Using Memory Cards Carefully insert the DATA card all the way in until it is firmly in place MEMORY CARD FN PLEASE It HE CARD WITH THE GOLI ACTS UPWARD ili Insert with the surface with the gold connector facing up Never touch the terminals of the DATA card Also avoid getting the terminals dirty How to Use This Manual This owner s manual is organized as follows But before you start reading it we d like to suggest going through the Quick Start manual The separate volume Q amp A contains frequently asked questions about
451. he effect is applied Tone parameter Control 1 4 Matrix Control Source 1 4 Sets the MIDI message used to change the Tone parameter with the Matrix Controller Set this to OFF when the Matrix Controller is not being used The following are MIDI messages that can be used as Matrix Controllers Controller Numbers 01 31 33 95 CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 IS For more information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 270 Pitch Bend PITCH BEND e Aftertouch AFTERTOUCH System Controller 1 4 SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRLA MIDI messages used as global Matrix Controllers Chapter 5 Creating Patches Velocity VELOCITY Pressure you press a key with Keyfollow KEYFOLLOW Keyboard position with C4 as 0 Tempo TEMPO The specified tempo Patch Tempo System Tempo or MIDI sequencer s tempo external tempo e LFO 1 LFO1 LFO 1 cycle rate LFO 2 LFO2 LFO 2 cycle rate Pitch Envelope PITCH ENV TVF Envelope TVF ENV TVA Envelope TVA ENV MEMO Velocity and Keyfollow correspond to Note messages HINT You can use the tempo as a Matrix Controller This lets you change the Tone settings in realtime according to changes in the Tempo When synchronizing to the Patch tempo set the Clock Source parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH TEMPO to PATCH and specify the Patch tempo with the TEMPO parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH TEMPO When synchronizing to the System tempo
452. he high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Level Output Level Adjust the output level 154 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 63 AUTO PAN The Auto Pan effect cyclically modulates the stereo location When Using 3D Effects S hE gonta The following three 3D effects utilize RSS Roland Sound Space technology to create a spaciousness that cannot be Auto Fan 2 Band EQ produced by delay reverb chorus etc 48 3D DELAY Mod Wave Modulation Wave oF SD FLANGER Wh ing thi ffect d that 1 TRI The sound will be modulated like a triangle wave i arc freee eng RES S yo P ac 8 your speakers as follows Also make sure that the SQR The sound will be modulated like a square wave E speakers are at a sufficient distance from the walls on SIN The sound will be modulated like a sine wave either side SAW1 2 The sound will be modulated like a sawtooth wave The teeth in SAW1 and SAW 2 point at opposite directions SAW1 SAW2 Rate Adjust the frequency speed of the change NM vie Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified If the left and right speakers are too far apart or if there 2 tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note is too much reverberation the full 3D effect may not appear Each of these effects has an Out Output Mode When Rate is Set as a Note Value parameter If the sound from the OUTPUT jacks
453. he one preceding it Shuffle Sets the timing of volume changes in levels for even numbered Beats Beat 1 2 Beat 1 4 Beat 2 2 The higher the value selected the later the timing with which the beat progresses Level Output Level Adjust the output level 59 ISOLATOR An equalizer which cuts the volume greatly allowing you to add a special effect to the sound by cutting the volume in varying ranges High Level High Middle Level Middle Low Level Low These boost and cut each of the High Middle and Low frequency ranges At 60 dB the sound becomes inaudible 0 dB is equivalent to the input level of the sound Anti Phase Mid Anti Phase Middle Switch Level This turns the Anti Phase function on and off and sets the level settings for the Middle frequency ranges When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal Adjusting these levels for certain frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source 152 Anti Phase Low Anti Phase Low Switch Level This turns the Anti Phase function on and off and sets the level settings for the Low frequency ranges When turned on the counter channel of stereo sound is inverted and added to the signal Adjusting these levels for certain frequencies allows you to lend emphasis to specific parts This is effective only for stereo source Low Boost Low Booster Switch L
454. he save operation Insert with the surface with the gold connector facing up MEMO The number of files that can be saved on a card will Before a memory card can be used it must be formatted I m p 189 depend on the memory capacity of the card itself s g 1 Make sure that the write protect seal has been removed Note 2 from the memory card being inserted into the MEMORY If you attempt to save to a memory card that still has the 9 CARD slot write protect seal affixed to it the message Memory Card Write Protected appears in the display First turn Nore off the XV 88 s power then after peeling off the write You cannot save data to a memory card to which the protect seal try saving the data once more write protect seal is still affixed 2 Press UTILITY getting its indicator to start blinking Memory Card Write Protected The UTIL 1 page will appear HINT Load data saved to memory cards back to the XV 88 in the LOAD page p 190 or the TRANSFER TO USER ACTORY RESET page p 186 3 Press W to call up the UTIL 2 page UTIL 1 z 3 4 zZICHED LOAD SALE IF 4 Press or P to get 3 SAVE to start blinking then press ENTER The SAVE page will appear File name File number Bank SALE ep CSOUHD_ 06 SUD CAS LEHTEF 1 167 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions Functions related to the XV 88 s overall operating environment including the display c
455. he settings of the desired parameter the Pitch Bend Expression and Hold1 settings also change simultaneously If you want to change the targeted parameters only then set these to OFF There are parameters that determine whether or not specific MIDI messages are received for each MIDI channel p 52 When using the Multi effects Controller confirm that any MIDI messages used for the Multi effects Controller will be received If the XV 88 is set up such that reception of MIDI messages is disabled then the Multi effects Controller will not function 116 Destination Multi Effects Control Destination Sets the Multi effects parameters to be controlled with the Multi effects Controller The Multi effects parameters available for control will depend on the Multi effects type For details refer to Multi Effects Types p 117 Sens Multi Effects Control Sensitivity Sets the amount of the Multi effects Controller s effect that is applied To make an increase in the currently selected value to get higher values move to the right increase rates and so on select a positive value to make a decrease in the currently selected value to get lower values move to the left decrease rates and so on select a negative value When both positive and negative are selected the changes are greater as the value increases To have no effect applied select 0 MFX OUT MFX Output PERFORM f Outeut Dra Chorus Reverb MFA OUT 1 B
456. he volume of the part that is not heard p 53 Is the instrument set to receive MIDI messages Set the Rx Sw parameter PERFORM MIDI MIDI to ON p 52 Does the MIDI Receive channel of the Part match the MIDI Transmit channel of the connected MIDI device Set the Channel parameter PERFORM MIDI MIDI to specify the MIDI receive channel of the Part p 52 No Sound from Connected MIDI Device Is the instrument set to transmit MIDI messages n the Patch Rhythm Set mode set the Tx Ch parameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI p 170 n the Performance mode set the Tx parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI to ON p 59 Does the MIDI transmit channel for the XV 88 s keyboard controller section match the MIDI receive channel for the connected MIDI device n the Patch Rhythm Set mode set the Tx Ch parameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI p 170 n the Performance mode set the MIDI transmit channel with the Channel parameter Zone MIDI MIDI p 59 A Specific Keyboard Area Does Not Sound Has a restricted range of notes been set Ifa specific range of notes does not sound check the Key Range settings for the Patch Tone the Performance Part and the Zone in the following KEY RANG pages Tone Key Range TMT KEY RANG page PATCH COMMON p 73 Part Key Range KEY RANG page PERFORM COMMON p 51 Zone Key Range KEY RANG page ZONE KEY RANGE p 59 Troubleshooting Sound Is Distorted san effec
457. he waveform and set its pitch With Rhythm Tones sounds are created by combining up to four Waves eight for stereo Tips on Creating a Rhythm Tone The Waves for the bass drum snare hi hat toms and other percussion instruments are each assigned to one Rhythm Tone When adding 3D effects to the sound make the Pan settings for each Rhythm Tone individually TONE NAME Rhythm Tone Name A amp TOWEIC_ HRHE 1 CSHIFTI You can assign a name to the Rhythm Tone of up to 12 characters IEJ For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 28 WMT WAVE A OWATI Grour Humber Heabrid Kick IHL 734 RUE 1 R B WmTig Gain Level Su Temrao Syne WAVE 1 B 127 OFF OFF Group Wave Group Select the groups containing the Waves comprising the Rhythm Tone INT Waveforms stored in internal memory XP A D Waveform stored in a Wave Expansion Board installed in EXP A D slots Note You cannot select a waveform group of a Wave Expansion Board that is not installed Number Wave Number This selects the Waves comprising the Rhythm Tone Along with the Wave number the Wave name appears at the right of the display When in monaural mode only the left side L is specified When in stereo the right side R is also specified HINT The Wave numbers can be divided and set in the first two and last two digits Gain Wave Gain Specifies the gain amplitude of the waveform
458. hen the XV 88 is not functioning as expected There is also a list of error messages that you can refer to if an error message appears on the display A list of parameters and a MIDI implementation chart are also provided Notation Used in This Owner s M anua l The display screens printed in this owner s manual are How to Use This Manual Nore To make operation procedures easy to understand the based on the factory settings However please be aware following notation system is adopted that in some cases they may differ from the actual Characters and numbers in square brackets indicate Factory Serene buttons on the front panel For example PATCH represents the PATCH button and ENTER stands for the ENTER button In addition A B indicates press B while holding down A A B means press B after first pressing and releasing A p refers to pages within the manual In this manual when any particular parameter is referred to the name of the parameter is given and this is then followed in parenthesis by information detailing its mode display group and display For example Output Assign parameter PERFORM EFFECTS OUTPUT Below are the meanings of the symbols preceding certain sentences in the text won These alert you to cautions or similar important information Be sure to read these MEMO These are reference memos Read as needed HINT These are hints for ope
459. hen the System Tempo Clock is set to the internal clock INT von When Clock Source System Clock Source is set to MIDI the tempo will synchronize to the clock messages received from an external MIDI device so this setting is disabled Mix Parallel Specifies how the sound of the entire XV 88 will be output MIX Set this to have the collective output of all sounds output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks When you want to check the final overall sound being output set to MIX MEMO Sounds which are set in the respective Output Assign to be output from the INDIVIDUAL 3 jack are output from the left OUTPUT A MIX jack sounds which are set to be output from the INDIVIDUAL 4 jack are output from the right OUTPUT A MIX jack HINT Sounds output from the PHONES jack are the same as those output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks Therefore any sounds set with Output Assign to be output from the OUTPUT B jacks is not output from the PHONES jack Be sure to have any sound you want to hear through the headphones set to MIX PARALLEL Output according to each Output Assign settings Patch Remain Patch Remain Switch Specifies whether currently sounding notes will continue sounding when another Patch or Rhythm Set is selected ON or not OFF In addition when ON is selected the Volume and Pan data and the Key Mode and other settings received via MIDI CC 5 7 10 65 68 71 74 RPN 0 1 2 MONO ON POLY ON and the sound cha
460. hen the unit s power is turned off This Internal Battery Ok display allows you to check the battery voltage If the display says OK there is sufficient voltage If the display says LOW the battery s voltage is getting low Contact the nearest Roland Service Center as soon as possible and have the battery replaced TRANSMIT P C Transmit Program Change TRHHSMIT f Ch P C4 Bank Select MSB LSB Fo E A 1l 1 Patch Bn B B When you want to transmit MIDI messages Program Change and Bank Select to select sounds on an external MIDI device make settings in this display and then press ENTER Ch Transmit MIDI Channel Selects the channel on which the MIDI message will be transmitted P C Transmit Program Change Number Selects the Program Change number you wish to transmit Bank Select MSB LSB Transmit Bank Select MSB LSB Selects the Bank Select number MSB Controller number 0 and LSB Controller number 32 you want to transmit MEMO Information on the XV 88 Tone Group Bank corresponding to the Bank Select message sent is displayed in parentheses 178 TRANSMIT SONG SEL Transmit Song Select TERHSHITTf SOHG SEL This transmits a MIDI message Song Select to the external Sond DER MIDI device in order to change the song Song Number Transmit Song Select Number Selects the Song Select number you wish to transmit MEMO Holding down SHIFT while pressing 4 amp or W
461. hich arpeggios are played so that this range does not overlap with the key range over which the arpeggios are played Chapter 2 12 When you are finished making settings press EXIT to return to the PERFORM PLAY page and begin playing Oo zi you play arpeggios using a Layer Performance without setting the key range then with Parts other than the Part linked to the Zone specified by the Zone parameter ZONE ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO only the sound for the key being pressed is played Holding an Arpeggio If you hold down ARPEGGIO and press TRANSPOSE and get the indicator to start blinking the arpeggio will continue to be played even if you release the chord 1 Hold down ARPEGGIO and press TRANSPOSE to make the indicator blink 2 Play a chord 3 If you play a different chord or notes while the arpeggio is being held the arpeggio will change accordingly 4 Tocancel Arpeggio Hold hold down ARPEGGIO and press TRANSPOSE simultaneously once again When Using a Hold Pedal If you play an arpeggio while pressing the hold pedal the arpeggio will continue to be played even if you release the chord 1 Connect an optional pedal switch DP 2 DP 6 etc to the HOLD PEDAL jack 2 Press ARPEGGIO to turn the Arpeggiator on 3 Playa chord while pressing the hold pedal 4 Toplay another chord release the pedal press it again as you play the next chord 43 Chapter 2 Playing Simulating a Rhythm G
462. hm Set HINT The volume level of the overall Rhythm Tone is set with the Level parameter RHYTHM TVA TVA p 103 the volume levels of the Waves from which the Rhythm Tone is composed is set with the Level parameter RHYTHM WAVE WMT WAVE p 98 Output Assign Specifies for each Rhythm Set how the direct sound will be output MFX Output in stereo through Multi effects You can also apply Chorus or Reverb to the sound that passes through Multi effects OUTPUT A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo without passing through Multi effects OUTPUT B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo without passing through Multi effects INDIV 1 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 2 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 3 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 3 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 4 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 4 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects TONE Outputs according to the settings for each Rhythm Tone o e s outputting in mono the Pan setting is disabled When the settings are such that signals are split and output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack and no plug is inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack the sounds from INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together then output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack This sound comprises the sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2
463. hythm Name 12 32 127 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 15 12768 52768 I I I 32 127 ASCII I I I 20000 20000 H I IE 00 4D 0000 aaaa I 00 OC Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Level 0 127 0000 bbbb I I 00 OD 0000 000a Rhythm Clock Source 0 1 I 0000 cccc I RHYTHM SYSTEM 0000 dddd MEX Parameter 16 12768 52768 E 00 OE 0000 aaaa I I I I 20000 20000 I 0000 bbbb Rhythm Tempo 20 250 1 00 51 0000 aaaa I I 00 10 0000 000a One Shot Mode XV 5080 0 1 I 0000 bbbb I I I I OFF ON I 0000 cccc I I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 17 12768 52768 I 00 11 0000 aaaa Rhythm Output Assign 0 13 I I I 20000 20000 I I I MFX A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt 1 00 55 0000 aaaa I I I I 1 2 3 4 5 lt XV 3080 5080 gt 6 lt XV 3080 5080 gt I 0000 bbbb I 7 lt XV 5080 gt 8 lt XV 5080 gt TONE 0000 cccc I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 18 12768 52768 00 00 00 12 Total Size I I I I 20000 20000 1 00 59 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I I 0000 cccc I O 1 3 2 2 Rhythm Common MFX I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 19 12768 52768 I I I 20000 20000 4 00 5D 0000 aaaa I Offset I I I 0000 bbbb I I Address Description I I 0000 cccc I I I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 20 12768 52768 I 00 00 Oaaa aaaa MFX Type 0 127 I I I 20000 20000 I I
464. i Piccolo SN Scratch 3 Tin Wave Spectrum REV Steel DR REV Tin Wave REV PiccloSN REV Crash 1 R8 Click Metronome 1 Shakuhachi Pizz Syn Vox 1 Voice Aahs A Voice Oohs2A Pop Voice Male Ooh A Voice Breath Org Vox C Vox Noise Vox Noise R8 Click Metronome 2 Wind Chimes Wood Block Cga Slap Dry Tom Lo Lite Kick Hybrid Kick2 Old Kick Natural SN2 Natural SN1 Brush Swish Brush Roll Brush Slap R8 Click Metronome 1 002 001 002 OrchDrumSet PowerDrmSet2 PowerRaveSet Old Kick Verb Kick Verb Kick Round Kick Round Kick Round Kick Side Stick Dry Stick 2 Dry Stick 2 Ballad SN Piccolo SN Piccolo SN 808 Claps 808 Claps 808 Claps SN Roll SN Roll Natural SN2 Timpani Verb Tom Lo Verb Tom Lo Timpani CI HiHat 4 CI HiHat 4 Timpani Verb Tom Lo Verb Tom Lo Timpani Pedal HiHat2 Pedal HiHat2 Timpani Verb Tom Lo Verb Tom Lo Timpani Op HiHat 2 Op HiHat 2 Timpani Verb Tom Lo Verb Tom Lo Timpani VeibTomHi Verb Tom Hi Timpani Crash 1 Crash 1 Timpani Verb Tom Hi Verb Tom Hi Timpani Ride 1 Ride 1 Timpani China Cym China Cym Timpani Ride Bell Ride Bell Tambourine 1 Tambourine 1 Tambourine 1 Crash 1 Crash 1 Crash 1 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Crash 1 Crash 1 Crash 1 Ride 1 Vibraslap Vibraslap Ride 2 Ride 1 Ride 1 Bongo Hi Bongo Hi Bongo Hi Bongo Lo Bongo Lo Bongo Lo Cga Mute Hi Cga Mute Hi Cga Mute Hi Cga Open Hi Cga Open Hi Cga Open Hi Cga Open Lo Cga Open Lo Cga Open Lo Timbale Timbale Timbale Timbale Timbale Timbale AgogoBe
465. ick 1 1 029 Vibraphonew 2 1 093 Attack Pulse 1 3 157 MG Square 1 1 221 Seashore 1 0 123 030 Marimba 1 0 13 094 Violin 1 0 41 158 2600 Sine 1 2 222 Rain 1 1 031 Marimba w 1 1 095 Slow Violin 1 1 159 Saw Wave 2 0 82 223 Thunder 1 2 032 Xylophone 1 0 14 096 Viola 1 0 42 160 OB2Saw 1 1 224 Wind 1 3 033 Tubular bell 1 0 15 097 Cello 1 0 43 161 Doctor Solo 2 2 225 Stream 2 4 034 Church Bell 1 1 098 Contrabass 1 0 44 162 Naturallead 2 3 226 Bubble 2 5 035 Carillon 1 2 099 Tremolo Str 1 0 45 163 SequencedSaw 2 4 227 Bird 2 0 124 036 Santur 1 0 16 100 PizzicatoStr 1 0 46 164 Syn Calliope 2 0 83 228 Dog 1 1 037 Organ 1 2 0 17 101 Harp 1 0 47 165 Chiffer Lead 2 0 84 229 Horse Gallop 1 2 038 Trem Organ 2 1 102 Yang Qin 2 1 166 Charang 2 0 85 230 Bird2 1 3 039 60 s Organ 1 1 2 103 Timpani 1 0 48 167 Wire Lead 2 1 231 Telephone 1 1 0 125 040 70 sE Organ 2 3 104 Strings 2 0 49 168 Solo Vox 2 0 86 232 Telephone2 1 1 041 Organ2 2 0 18 105 Orchestra 3 1 169 5th Saw Wave 2 0 87 233 DoorCreaking 1 2 042 Chorus Or 2 2 1 106 60s Strings 2 2 170 Bass amp Lead 2 0 88 234 Door 1 3 043 Perc Organ 2 2 107 Slow Strings 1 0 50 171 DelayedLead 2 1 235 Scratch 2 4 044 Organ 3 2 0 19 108 Syn Strings1 2 0 51 172 Fantasia 2 0 89 236 Wind Chimes 2 5 045 Church Org 1 1 0 20 109 Syn Strings8 2 1 173 Warm Pad 1 0 90 237 Helicopter 2 0 126 046 Church Org 2 2 1 110 Syn Strings2 2 0 52 174 Sine Pad 2 1 238 Car Engine 1 1 047 Church Org 3 2 2 111 Choir Aahs 2 0 53 175 Polysynth 2 0 91 239 Car Stop
466. ied by Note 1 4 will sound successively one by one CHORD The notes specified by Note 1 4 will sound simultaneously PHRASE The Phrase associated with the Patch s type category is played PREVIEW KEY PREVIEW Hote 1 Hote 2 Hate 3 Hote 4 KEY 4 E gm 4 E Sl C6 Note 1 4 Preview Note Set 1 4 Specify the pitch C 1 C9 of the four notes that will sound when the Preview Mode parameter is set to either SINGLE or CHORD gt If PHRASE is selected for the Preview Mode parameter these settings will have no effect PREVIEW VELOCITY PREVIEW Hote 1 Hote 2 Note 3 Hote 4 VELOCITY 127 1271 1271 127 Note 1 4 Preview Velocity Specify the velocity 0 127 of the four notes that will sound when the Preview Mode parameter is set to either SINGLE or CHORD gt If PHRASE is selected for the Preview Mode parameter these settings will have no effect 1 N N Chapter 9 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions Checking the Installation of the Wave Expansion Board and Controlling External MIDI Devices INFO INFO EXP Information Expansion Board IMFO JExrFansion R SE TIU88 89 Sessn EXP AExFansion B The display shows the names of Wave Expansion Boards installed in slots EXP A D Slots without any boards installed are shown as 5 BATTERY CHECK BATTERY f CHECK 4 The XV 88 contains a battery that retains the data in its internal memory w
467. ighting system Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Placement This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit To avoid possible breakdown do not use the unit in a wet area such as an area exposed to rain or other moisture Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Repairs and Data Please be aware that all data contained in the unit s memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs Important data should always be backed up memory card or written down on paper when possible During repairs due care is taken to avoid the loss of data However in certain cases such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order we regret that it
468. ile you change the System Tempo parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP to various values p 169 The Tone Delay time will change in accordance to the system s tempo clock Using the XV 88 to Play Live Changing Multiple Sounds of an External MIDI Device Simultaneously When a different Performance is selected the sound corresponding to the Bank Select number and Program Change number of the selected Performance will usually be chosen on the external MIDI device With the XV 88 you can set the Bank Select and Program Change number for each individual Zone so as to match the Tones of the desired external MIDI device This way you can switch Tones on multiple external MIDI devices all at once just by switching the Performance 1 Select the Zone to be used to control the external MIDI device 2 Set the receive channel on the external MIDI device to match the transmit channel for the Zone to be used Set the transmit channel of the Zone with the Channel parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI p 59 3 Set the Tx parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI of the Zone to be used to ON p 59 4 Call up the EXT P C page ZONE EXT CONTROL p 60 5 Setthe Bank Select MSB LSB parameter to match the Bank Select of the external MIDI device 202 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 6 Setthe P C parameter to match the Program Change number for the Tone you want the external MIDI device to select 7 Savethe Performance p 164
469. im M Jazz Fim M Tom M Verb Tom Hi Verb Tom Hi calamus Maple tomi RokTonH _ JazzTomH TomHi CS Verb TomHi E Crash Cymbal Rock CrCym1 Jazz CrCym Rock CrCym1 Crash 1 Crash 1 50 Rock Flm H Rock Flm H Jazz Flm H Elec Tom H Verb Tom Hi Verb Tom Hi E Rock RdCym1 Rock RdCym1 Jazz RdCym Rock RdCym1 Ride 2 Ride 1 52 Crash 1 Rock China Rock RdCym1 Rock CrCym2 China Cym China Cym Rock RdCym2 Rock RdCym2 Rock RdCym2 Rock RdCym2 Ride Bell Ride Bell 54 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 1 Tambourine 1 Tambourine 1 Tambourine 1 55 Rock CrCym2 Rock CrCym2 Crash 1 Rock Splash Crash 1 Crash 1 E Cowbell Lo Cowbell Lo Cowbell Lo Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell 57 Crash 1 Crash 1 Crash 2 China Cym Crash 1 Crash 1 EN Cowbell Hi Cowbell Hi Cowbell Hi Vibraslap Cowbell Cowbell B Ja Ride Bell 0 Ride Bell a Ride Bell a 70s Kick 2 sl Ride Bell lu Ride Bell caleo Cga Mute Hi Cga Mute Hi Cga Mute Hi 70s Kick 1 Cga Mute Hi Cga Mute Hi S ei Cga Mute Lo Cga Mute Lo Cga Mute Lo Dry Stick Cga Mute Lo Cga Mute Lo 62 Cga Slap Cga Slap Cga Slap 70s SN Cga Slap Cga Slap EE Cga Open Hi Cga Open Hi Cga Open Hi Finger Snaps Cga Open Hi Cga Open Hi 64 Cga Open Lo Cga Open Lo Cga Open Lo HumanClapsEQ Cga Open Lo Cga Open Lo Timbale Hi Timbale Hi Timbale Hi JD Cowbell Timbale Timbale Wi cc Timbale Lo Timbale Lo Timbale Lo 70s CI HiHat Timbale Timbale 67 AgogoBellsHi AgogoBellsHi AgogoBellsHi AgogoBells AgogoBells AgogoBells m os AgogoBellsLo AgogoBellsLo AgogoBellsLo 70
470. ime to the Multi effects parameters is called the Multi effects Controller p 115 Here using an 3 Move the CUTOFF and RESONANCE sliders while you effects controller try using a pedal switch to switch the play notes and hear how sound changes speed of the rotary effect 4 Setthe Type parameter PATCH COMMON STRUCT 1l Connectanoptional pedal switch DP 2 DP 6 etc to the to 2 p 73 CTL 1 PEDAL jack 5 Again move the CUTOFF and RESONANCE sliders and 2 Select the Patch PR A 054 Rocker Spin on the PATCH hear how the sound changes PLAY page Notice the effectiveness of the filter has changed This Patch uses ROTARY as the Multi effects type HINT 3 Set the Assign parameter SYSTEM CONTROL If the result is difficult to hear turn off each effect unit CONTROL PEDAL 1 to CC04 FOOT TYPE p 172 Multi effects Chorus Reverb p 105 4 Call up the PATCH MEX CTRL page PATCH EFFECTS then set the parameters as follows p 115 Using the Slider to Change the Source FOOT TYPE Pan in Realtime Destination SPEED Sens 63 You can assign the C1 C4 sliders to a variety of the functions to change sounds in realtime In this example the pan stereo 5 Press the pedal switch while you play the keyboard location will change by moving the C1 slider up or down This will speed up the rotary effect Releasing the pedal MEMD switch will slow down the rotary effect At the factory default settings the C1 throug
471. in 31 DISTORTION DELAY This effect connects distortion and delay in series The parameters are essentially the same as in 28 OVERDRIVE DELA Y with the exception of the following two OD Drive Dist Drive Specify the amount of distortion OD Pan Dist Pan Specify the stereo location of the distortion sound L in Balance D J Balance W T E Balance W Feedback O R out Balance D Rin 135 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 32 ENHANCER CHORUS This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series UT o L in O Balance D L out Balance W y Balance W R out Mix Balance D Enhancer Sens Enhancer Sensitivity 4 Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Enhancer Mix Level Adjust the ratio with which the overtones generated by the enhancer are combined with the direct sound Cho Diy Chorus Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard ChoRate Chorus Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect Chorus Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Chorus Balance Adjust the volume balance between the enhancer sound that is sent through the chorus and the enhancer sound that is not sent through the chorus With a setting of D100 0W only the enhancer sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the enhancer sou
472. in a PLAY page selects the song before or after the Song Number set with the Song Number parameter Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode The Utility mode allows you to store Performance Patch Rhythm Set settings Write and transmit data Data Transfer as well as other global XV 88 memory settings About Utility Mode The XV 88 goes into Utility mode if you press UTILITY The indicator will blink Utility mode offers nine functions categorized into two groups UTIL 1 and UTIL 2 UTIL 1 Utility 1 UTILI1 3 4 S IBWRITE COPY IHIT IsFER PROTECT WRITE This function writes Performance Patch or Rhythm Set settings you ve modified into internal memory user memory p 180 COPY This function copies data from a Performance Patch or Rhythm Set into the current Performance Patch or Rhythm Set p 182 INIT Initialize This resets parameters of the current Performance Patch or Rhythm Set to default factory settings p 185 XFER Data Transfer This function transmits Performance Patch Rhythm Set or System settings to an external MIDI device p 185 PROTECT User Memory Protect This function prevents internal memory user memory from being accidentally rewritten p 188 UTIL 2 Utility 2 UuTILTI1 2 3 4 ZEICARD LOAD SAVE IFACTORY RESET CARD Here you can make settings related to memory cards p 188 LOAD This function load
473. in High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO0 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz BYPASS 22 2VOICE PITCH SHIFTER p 131 Parameter Value CoarseA Coarse pitch A 24 12 semitone Fine A Fine pitch A 100 100 cent Pan A Output pan A L64 0 63R PreDlyA Pre delay time A 0 0 500 0 ms CoarseB Coarse pitch B 24 12 semitone Fine B Fine pitch B 100 100 cent Pan B Output pan B L64 0 63R PreDlyB Pre delay time B 0 0 500 0 ms Mode Pitch shifter mode 1 2 3 4 5 Lvl Bal Level balance A100 0B A0 100B Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 23 FBK PITCH SHIFTER p 132 Parameter Value Coarse Coarse pitch 24 12 semitone Fine Fine pitch 100 100 cent Fbk Feedback level 98 98 Pre Dly Pre delay time 0 0 500 0 ms Mode Pitch shifter mode 1 2 3 4 5 Pan Output pan L64 0 63R LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W DO0 100W Level Output level 0 127 24 REVERB p 133 Parameter Value Type Reverb type ROOM1 ROOM2 STAGE1 STAGE2 HALL1 HALL2 Pre Dly Pre delay time 0 0 100 0 ms Time Reverb time 0 127 HF Damp HF damp 200 8000 Hz BYPASS 1 LowGain Low gain 15 415 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 15 dB Balance Effect balance D100 0W D0 100W Level Output level 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 80
474. in stereo p 169 GM REVERB nn t Tare Time Out REVERE Jf LARGE HALL 64 A Type Reverb Type Selects the type of Reverb SMALL ROOM Reverb resembling that obtained in a small room MEDIUM ROOM Reverb resembling that obtained in a somewhat larger room LARGE ROOM Reverb resembling that obtained in a large room MEDIUM HALL Reverb resembling that obtained in a medium sized concert hall LARGE HALL Reverb resembling that obtained in a large concert hall PLATE Plate type reverb effect Time Reverb Time Adjusts the length of the Reverb time Out Reverb Output Assign Specifies how the sound routed through Reverb will be output A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo nied If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 169 Making Settings for Receiving MIDI MIDI These parameters determine how each Part will transmit and receive MIDI messages MIDI FART 1 Channel Fx Su Mute Su MIDI I 1l OH OFF Channel MIDI Receive Channel Sets the MIDI receive channel for each Part If you do not want to receive MIDI messages turn this parameter OFF 195 Chapter 11 Chapter 11 Using the XV 88 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode Rx Sw Receive Switch Specifies whether each Part will receive Note messages ON or not OFF HINT You ca
475. ine t ne Patch eee entere teer 70 Fine tune Rhythm Tone Fine tune Rhythm Wave 100 Fine tune Tone Zaa a a hu a Tape cae 86 Fine tune GM Patto eno a ene neo IRE ass 196 Mri 55 Path eM 70 Rhythm Tone 100 Rhythm Wave 100 POMC uscite codon eed essetis Mose ud acaba cect 86 Foot Foot information GM Part essent 197 Foot information Part sss 56 FO Sess Ses dos one una UII TUM saa w ante FORMAT Re Function b tton 5 tnter eee trecenta dn ee 15 25 PXM s deditos etie SH D ET NU sasana qaa hasa 81 FXM color Rhythm Wave usan aeee aa asas 100 HOT ERR MER EUIS AUR wishi m 81 FXM depth Rhythm Wave sareni ienn aaa n R N R netten 100 TONE A ee ES E ES EA 81 FXM switch Rhythm Wave TOME sap PN G Gain Wave gain Rhythm Wave a 98 Wave gain Tone General MIDI Sus a nne nei hieme miei eim General MIDE2 reni nip rt ore En dU Hie ne General MIDI General MIDI 2 system on message x eng ES GM CHORUSQ Sua aa aaa qasa aspayay asss aaa tubes GM INIT GM MIDI GM mode GM mode parameters GM mode settings GM Patch Rhythm Set number GM PLAY anoa Nisaa GM score GM utility xs oeste ecl TM LL EI ELTE Group Patch Rhythm Set group sese 53 Wave group Rhythm Wave sess 98 Wave group Tone u 81 GS format EEE ROERE O A entente t
476. into the MEMORY CARD slot e XP A B Patches Rhythm Sets can be selected only if a Wave Expansion Board SR JV80 Series is installed in the corresponding slot e XP C D Patches Rhythm Sets can be selected only if a Wave Expansion Board SRX Series is installed in the corresponding slot Number Patch Rhythm Set Number Selects the desired Patch or Rhythm Set by its number The name of the selected Patch Rhythm Set appears in parentheses SETTING FART 1 f Level Fan Woice Reserve SETTIHG iH B FRest 645 B Level Part Level Adjusts the volume of an individual Part This setting s main purpose is to adjust the volume balance between Parts Pan Part Pan Adjusts the pan of each Part L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Nore When the Pan is set for each Patch or Rhythm Set this Pan setting moves the position only in reference to those settings values made in the respective Patch or Rhythm Set Voice Reserve This setting specifies the number of voices that will be reserved for each Part when more than 128 voices are played simultaneously we Itis not possible for the settings of all Parts to total an amount greater than 64 The remaining number of available voices will be displayed at rest Pay attention to this readout as you make set the Voice Reserve parameter 53 Chapter 3 Creating Performances Calculating the Number of Voices Being Used The XV 88 is able t
477. is called the Palette page Use it when you want to modify parameter values as you compare the settings of the four Waves 1 When modifying a Wave use or P to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 2 Press PALETTE EDIT to call up the Palette page A B WATI Grour Humber Hsbrid Kick IHI m734 PALETTE EDIT IHT my 34cHsbrid Eick 2 B B WAVESWMT 1 GROUP 4 IHII IHT IHT IHT 3 Press TONE SELECT 1 4 or P to choose the Wave to modify RUE 1 The Wave number and Wave name appear in the display 4 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to change the parameter value HINT If you ve made a mistake in setting a parameter value or you have second thoughts about the changes press UNDO COMPARE to restore the value to what it was 5 If you wish to edit other parameters press 4 or W to select the parameter that you wish to edit 6 Repeat steps 3 5 to complete a Rhythm Tone 7 Toexit the Palette page press PALETTE EDIT thus extinguishing the button s indicator Copying the Settings of Another Rhythm Tone Rhythm Tone Copy Rhythm Tone percussion instrument settings from any desired Rhythm Set can be copied to any desired key of the currently selected Rhythm Set This function can help you save time 1 Make sure a Rhythm Set is selected Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets 2 Press UTILITY getting its indicator to start blinking 3
478. is linked with the Assign parameter In Patch Rhythm Set GM Mode Assign parameter SYSTEM D BEAM D BEAM CONTROL p 176 In Performance Mode Assign parameter ZONE D BEAM D BEAM CONTROL p 63 I For more detailed information on the functions that can be controlled refer to p 63 p 176 45 Chapter 2 Playing 4 When changing the sound generator to be controlled with the D Beam Controller hold down ON to display the D BEAM CONTROL page move the cursor to Output then make the setting D BEAM Hzsia3n Quteut Polarites COHTROL CCHS BREATH BOTH STAHDARE Set the output to INT when controlling only the internal sound generator to MIDI when controlling an external sound generator or BOTH when you want to control both internal and external sound generators When controlling neither the internal nor any external sound generator set this to OFF Min g This setting is linked with the Output parameter In Patch Rhythm Set GM Mode Output parameter SYSTEM D BEAM D BEAM CONTROL p 176 In Performance Mode Output parameter ZONE D BEAM D BEAM CONTROL p 63 When changing the D Beam Controller s polarity hold down ON to display the D BEAM CONTROL page move the cursor to Polarity then make the setting D BEAM Hzsisn QutEut Polarity COHTROL CCH2 BREATH BOTH STANDARD With a setting of REVERSE the direction of control for the D Beam controller will be inverted Nem Thi
479. is selected as the copy source Rhythm Set The Compare function cannot be used with Rhythm Set Effect Copy if PERFORM is selected as the copy source The Rhythm Set auditioned using the Compare function may sound slightly different than when it is played normally Rhythm Set Name Copy You can copy the name of a Rhythm Set to the current Rhythm Set RHYTHM fHumber LEHTEF 1 HAME CP IUSER BBlIcUser Rhesthm Copy source Rhythm Set group number name Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode Initializing Sound Generator Settings INIT This function resets settings of the current Performance Patch or Rhythm Set to a standard value or to factory default settings The Initialize operation affects only the currently selected data no data stored in the user memory is initialized If you wish to restore all of the XV 88 s settings to their factory values perform a Factory Reset p 191 Mode Initialize Mode There are two initialize methods Select either of them depending on the application DEFAULT Resets the current data to the standard values called Initial data INIT PATCH INIT PERFORM or INIT RHYTHM Use this setting when you wish to create a sound from scratch PRESET Resets the current data in user memory to the factory settings gt If the current data is a Performance Patch or Rhythm Set in preset memory PR A F and initialization is performed with PRESET speci
480. it and output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack and no plug is inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack the sounds from INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together then output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack This sound comprises the sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks Mb If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 169 PATCH TEMPO FATCH t Clock Source TemrFa TEMPO 1 FATCHI 1a Clock Source Patch Clock Source The LFO cycle Multi effects changes Phrase Loop and Tone Delay time can be synchronized to a clock tempo When this is used by the Patch this Clock Source setting determines the clock which will be used PATCH Synchronize to the Patch Tempo setting SYSTEM The global System Tempo or clock messages received from an external sequencer will be used IS For details on using clock tempo refer to p 200 Tempo Patch Tempo When Clock Source Patch Clock Source is set to PATCH this setting value is effective MEMO The Patch Tempo Clock does not transmit clock messages from the MIDI OUT connector PATCH MODIFY FATCH Cut kes Atk Fkel Velocita Sens MODIFY l Bl Bl Gl B Cut Cutoff Frequency Offset Cutoff Frequency Offset alters the cutoff frequency of the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences between the cutoff frequency values set for each Tone in the Cut
481. ith velocity and channel aftertouch Part 16 Maximum Polyphony 128 voices Wave Memory 64 M bytes 16 bit linear equivalent Expansion Slot Wave Expansion Board SR JV80 Series 2 slots Wave Expansion Board SRX Series 2 slots Preset Memory Patches 768 128 x 6 banks 256 General MIDI 2 Patches Performances 64 32 x 2 banks Rhythm Sets 12 2 x 6 banks 9 General MIDI 2 Rhythm Sets User Memory Patches 128 Performances 64 Rhythm Sets 4 External Memory SmartMedia Card 1 slot Effects Multi Effects 63 types Reverb 4 types Chorus 2 types Arpeggiator 45 styles Controllers D Beam Controller Pitch Bend Modulation Lever Control Sliders C1 C2 C3 C4 Channel Aftertouch External Sequencer Controller Display 40 characters 2 lines Backlit LCD Connectors A MIX Output Jacks L MONO R B Output Jacks L R Individual Jacks 1 4 Headphones Jack MIDI Connectors IN OUT THRU Computer Connector Mac PC MIDI Hold Pedal Jack Control Pedal Jacks 1 2 Power Supply AC 117 V AC 230 V AC 240 V Power Consumption 16W Dimensions 1 408 W x 415 D x 142 H mm 55 7 16 W x 16 3 8 D x 5 5 8 H inches Weight 26 kg 57 Ibs 6 oz Accessories Quick Start Owner s Manual Q amp A Power Cable Not included with XV 88 designed for 117 V power supply Options Wave Expansion Board SRX Series SR JV80 Series Pe
482. iting destination press UNDO COMPARE Press it once again to return to the previous page Saving Rhythm Set Settings Dove Ue E In Rhythm Set mode press UTILITY Select 1 WRITE on the UTIL 1 page Specify the writing destination Press ENTER If a message of Internal Write Protect ON appears change it to OFF and press ENTER twice If you wish to hear the sound of the Rhythm Set in the selected writing destination press UNDO COMPARE Press it once again to return to the previous page Saving Patches and Rhythm Sets You Like on the Favorite List Select the Patch or Rhythm Set you wish to save Hold down SHIFT and press PATCH FINDER Specify the number of saving destination Press SHIFT ENTER Formatting a Memory Card Press UTILITY Select 1 CARD on the UTIL 2 page Select 1 FORMAT Press ENTER Saving User Memory Settings and System Settings to Memory Card as a Unit Press UTILITY Select 3 SAVE on the UTIL 2 page Assign a file name Press ENTER Loading a File from Memory Card into the XV 88 Pa E E cal SE ae Ee E EE SL E P E Press UTILITY Select 2 LOAD on the UTIL 2 page Select the file you want to load Press ENTER Quick Reference of Procedures Deleting a File from Memory Card Press UTILITY Select 1 CARD on the UTIL 2 page Select 3 DELETE Select the file that you wi
483. ive distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion OD Pan Overdrive Pan Adjust the stereo location of the overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Cho Diy Chorus Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the chorus sound is heard ChoRate Chorus Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect Chorus Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Chorus Balance Adjust the volume balance between the overdrive sound that is sent through the chorus and the overdrive sound that is not sent through the chorus With a setting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the overdrive sound that is sent through the chorus will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 134 27 OVERDRIVESFLANGER This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in series Balance D L out O Feedback gre cmm Y Balance W O R out Balance D Lin Rin OD Drive Adjust the degree of overdrive distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion OD Pan Overdrive Pan Adjust the stereo location of the overdrive sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Fig Diy Flanger Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard FlgRate Flanger
484. k 2 Jazz Kick 1 Side Stick Standard SN1 909 HandClap Elec Snare 3 Real Tom 6 Close HiHat2 Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat2 Real Tom 4 Open HiHat2 Crash Cym 1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Bank Select MSB is all 120 LSB is all 0 261 Rhythm Set List PR H GM2 Group s NO oo O m wk DO i i a C2 oO i 6 K i 3 K a K N C3 ES i 8 a z a N mm o ao w i a N i a o C4 D z Oo N D R o o CO a D 9 C5 N N i E Az i E D TyTN c N a C6 R D 8 262 007 PC 41 GM2 BRUSH High Q Slap ScratchPush ScratchPul Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bel Jazz Kick 2 008 PC 49 GM2 ORCHSTRA Close HiHat2 Pedal HiHat2 Open HiHat2 Ride Cymbal Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell Concert BD 009 PC 57 GM2 SFX Jaz
485. keys will only change the 1 s position and you won t have to press ENTER for each selection The same applies to selecting Performances and Rhythm Sets 1 Hold down SHIFT and press 0 numeric key The Digit Hold function is now turned on FHTCH 128voicePna PLAY Lone Z2 kbd C 4 The numbers in the 100 s position and 10 s position will be displayed in a smaller size to indicate Digit Hold is on When you enter a numeric key number the 1 s position will change immediately without having to press ENTER To turn off Digit Hold hold down SHIFT and press 0 once again Selecting Patches by Category Patch Finder The XV 88 provides a Patch Search function Patch Finder which allows you to specify a type category of Patch so that you can quickly find the desired Patch There are a total of 38 categories 1 Press PATCH to call up the PATCH PLAY page 2 Press PATCH FINDER to turn the Patch Finder function on The patch number display will change to the category display PATCH PLAY 3 Press 4 or W to select the desired category HINT Here you can change the Category group by pressing the numeric keys 4 Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC 4 DEC to choose a Patch in the currently selected category 5 Press PATCH FINDER to turn the Patch Search function off You will return to the normal PATCH PLAY page HINT In Step 3 the CATEGORY SELECT page is displayed
486. l 40 CHORU S FLANGER Adjusts the center frequency to which the phase effect is This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in parallel The applied parameters are the same as for 37 CHORUS FLANGER Rate Phaser Rate However the Flanger Balance parameter adjusts the volume Adjust the frequency of modulation M Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified Lin O L out L3 tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note O Balance W Feedback balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound Balance D T Fanger H Q Balance W When Rate is Set as a Note Value R in lem R out As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Balance D Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Depth Phaser Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Res Phaser Resonance Adjust the amount of feedback for the phaser Higher settings will give the sound a stronger character 139 Chapter 7 Adding Effects X Fbk Cross Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the phaser sound that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase Step Rate Step Rate Switch Step Rate Adjust the frequency of pitch change This setting determines whether the pitch is changed in a stepped fashion ON or not OFF Mb Step Rate parameter
487. l Lz L3 EHJELOFE 16 18 18 127 127 12z T1 T4 TVA Envelope Time 1 4 Specify the TVA envelope times T1 T4 Larger values result in longer times until the next volume is reached for instance T2 controls the time from L1 until L2 is reached L1 L3 TVA Envelope Level 1 3 Specify the TVA envelope levels L1 L3 These settings specify how the volume will change at each point relative to the standard volume the Rhythm Tone Level value specified in the TVA page Level gt Time Note on Note off Chapter 7 Adding Effects This chapter explains how effects are applied in Patch Rhythm Set mode or Performance mode u For information about the application of effects in GM mode refer to Making Effects Settings in GM Mode EFFECTS p 194 About the Onboard Effects Effect Types The XV 88 has the following three onboard effect processors and settings can be made independently for each Multi Effects The Multi effects are multi purpose effects that completely change the sound type by changing the sound itself Contained are 63 different effects types select and use the type that suits your aims In addition to effects types composed of simple effects such as Distortion Flanger and other such effects you can also set up a wide variety of other effects even connecting effects in series or in parallel Furthermore while chorus and reverb can be found among the Multi effects types the f
488. lav D6 3 POLY 089 Dual Flutes 3 POLY 026 Wire Pad 3 POLY 090 Adrenaline 4 POLY 026 PhazeWahClav 6 POLY 090 JazzerFlute 2 POLY 027 PhaseBlipper 2 POLY 091 Enlighten 4 POLY 027 St Harpsichd 4 POLY 091 LegatoBamboo 4 MONO 028 Sweep Clav 3 POLY 092 Glass Blower 3 POLY 028 3Partinventn 4 POLY 092 Ambience Fit 4 POLY 029 Glider 2 POLY 093 Earth Blow 2 POLY 029 Soft Perky 5 POLY 093 The Andes 1 POLY 030 Solo Steel 4 POLY 094 JX SqrCarpet 2 POLY 030 Fullness 5 POLY 094 Deja Vlute 4 MONO 031 DesertCrystl 4 POLY 095 Dimensional 2 POLY 031 Paleface 1 2 POLY 095 Simply Brass 2 POLY 032 Clear Guitar 3 POLY 096 Jupiterings 2 POLY 032 Paleface 2 4 POLY 096 FullSt Brass 5 POLY 033 Solo Strat 3 POLY 097 Analog Drama 3 POLY 033 Soft B 2 POLY 097 Dragnet 4 POLY 034 Feed Me 4 POLY 098 Rich Dynapad 4 POLY 034 British B 4 POLY 098 NewR amp RBrass 8 POLY 035 Tube Smoke 2 POLY 099 Silky Way 2 POLY 035 Rocker Org 6 POLY 099 Tower Trumps 5 POLY 036 Creamy 2 POLY 100 Gluey Pad 3 POLY 036 Split B 6 POLY 100 BigBrassBand 5 POLY 037 Blusey OD 2 POLY 101 BandPass Mod 2 POLY 037 Percinterval 8 POLY 101 Lil BigHornz 6 POLY 038 Grindstone 2 POLY 102 Soundtraque 2 POLY 038 Happy 60s 2 POLY 102 VoyagerBrass 3 POLY 039 OD 5ths 3 POLY 103 Translucence 4 POLY 039 96 Years 1 POLY 103 Symph Horns 3 POLY 040 EastEurope 2 POLY 104 Darkshine 4 POLY 040 Glory Us Rok 2 POLY 104 Trombone Atm 3 POLY 041 Dulcitar 4 POLY 105 D light 2 POLY 041 Church Harmn 4 POLY 105 XV Trombone 2 POLY 042 Atmos Harp 4 POLY
489. laying a Keyboard Instrument PIANO BACKING CLAVI CHORD Playing a Waltz WALTZ SWING WALTZ Playing in Reggae Style REGGAE Playing Percussion Instruments PERCUSSION cS There are also other styles besides the above including those used for random play and for creating your own styles For details regarding each style refer to Arpeggiator Settings ARPEGGIO p 61 p 174 4 Tochange the groove feel of the arpeggio hold down ARPEGGIO to access the ARP SELECT page move the cursor to Accent and change the setting ARF I Style Accent Oct Tema SELECT I 1716 zs m 128 A setting of 100 will produce the most pronounced groove feel Mb This setting is linked with the Accent Rate parameter In Patch Rhythm Set GM Mode Accent Rate parameter SYSTEM ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO p 176 In Performance Mode Accent Rate parameter ZONE ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO p 62 5 Tochange the range in which the arpeggio is played hold down ARPEGGIO to access the ARP SELECT page move the cursor to Oct and change the setting HEP I Style Accent Oct Tema SELECT I 1716 zHz Gl 1268 If you want the arpeggio to sound using only the notes that you actually play set this to 0 With a 1 setting arpeggio will take place over a range up to 1 octave higher than the notes you play A 1 setting will result in arpeggio occurring over the range down to 1 octave lower than the notes you play M This set
490. le nsert memory cards completely and securely with the side showing the gold contacts facing upward Do not touch the contacts of the memory card or allow them to become soiled Never remove the memory card or turn off the power while any operation involving the memory card such as loading or saving data or formatting is in process Doing so can destroy the data on the memory card and or render the memory card itself unusable Ifyou affix the write protect seal to the write protect area of the memory card you will not be able to format the card or save data to it If you wish to format the card or save data to it do so without the seal affixed For details on the write protect seal refer to the instructions included with your memory card If you attempt to format a card or save data to it when the write protect seal is affixed the Memory Card Write Protected message will appear Memory Card Write Protected Vine ey AAA LL L _ _ _ gt _ i _ _ _ _ LL _ _ _ gt gt gt E gt E gt E gt E gt gt gt E gt EEE gt E E gt gt EE gt EEE E LEE EL gt gt __L_ _ SSS 188 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode Formatting the Memory Card for the XV 88 FORMAT This function initializes formats a memory card so that XV 88 data can be saved to it Before a new memory card or a memory card used on another device can be used on the XV 88 it must be formatted on t
491. le Tom 4 808 Tom Verb Tom Hi Verb Tom Lo Dry Tom Hi Dry Tom Lo Rock CIHH1 p Rock CIHH1 mf Rock CIHH1 f Rock CIHH2 p Rock CIHH2mf Rock CIHH2 f Jazz CIHH1 p Jazz CIHH1mf Jazz CIHH1 f Jazz CIHH2 p Jazz CIHH2mf Jazz CIHH2 f CI HiHat 1 CI HiHat 2 CI HiHat 3 CI HiHat 4 CI HiHat 5 Rock OpHH p Rock OpHH f Jazz OpHH p Jazz OpHH mf Jazz OpHH f Op HiHat Op HiHat 2 Rock PdHH p Rock PdHH f Wave Name Jazz PdHH p Jazz PdHH f Pedal HiHat Pedal HiHat2 Dance CI HH 909 NZ HiHat 70s Cl HiHat 70s Op HiHat 606 CI HiHat 606 Op HiHat 909 CI HiHat 909 Op HiHat 808 Claps HumanClapsEQ Tight Claps Hand Claps Finger Snaps Rock RdCym1p Rock RdCym1f Rock RdCym2p Rock RdCym2f Jazz RdCym p Jazz RdCymmf Jazz RdCym f Ride 1 Ride 2 Ride Bell Rock CrCym1p Rock CrCym1f Rock CrCym2p Rock CrCym2f Rock Splash Jazz CrCym p Jazz CrOym f Crash Cymbal Crash 1 Rock China China Cym Cowbell Wood Block Claves Bongo Hi Bongo Lo Cga Open Hi Cga Open Lo Cga Mute Hi Cga Mute Lo Cga Slap Timbale Cabasa Up Wave Name Cabasa Down Cabasa Cut Maracas Long Guiro Tambourine 1 Tambourine 2 Open Triangl Cuica Vibraslap Timpani Timp3 pp Timp3 mp Applause Syn FX Loop Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4 Loop 5 Loop 6 Loop 7 R8 Click Metronome 1 Metronome 2 MC500 Beep 1 MC500 Beep 2 Low Saw Low Saw inv Low P5 Saw Low Pulse 1 Low Pulse 2 Low Square Low Sine Low Triangle Low White NZ Low Pink NZ DC REV
492. lected cutoff frequency value are eliminated Cutoff Cutoff Frequency This sets the cutoff frequency at which the LPF or HPF begin to work For Type DELAY Delay C Delay Center This sets the delay time for the delay located at the center of the stereo field Delay L Delay Left This sets the delay time for the delay located at the left side of the stereo field Delay R Delay Right This sets the delay time for the delay located at the right side of the stereo field M Delay C Delay L and Delay R parameters can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Delay C Delay L and Delay R are Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Fbk Feedback This adjusts the amount of delay feedback controlling the number of times the delay repeats Higher values result in more repeats With negative values the phase of the repeated delays is inverted Level C Delay Center Level This sets the volume level of the delay located at the center of the stereo field Level L Delay Left Level This sets the volume level of the delay located at the left side of the stereo field Level R Delay Right Level This sets the volume level of the delay located at the right side of the stereo field HF Damp This allows you to reduce or damp th
493. level 0 Tone L1 L3 TVA envelope level 1 3 Rhythm Tone sss 104 TVA envelope level 1 3 Tone 92 L1 L4 Pitch envelope level 1 4 Rhythm Tone sss 101 Pitch envelope level 1 4 Tone sse 87 TVF envelope level 1 4 Rhythm Tone 103 TVF envelope level 1 4 Tone see 90 LCD cedet tiers 168 LCD contrast Cuna etre ete e Susa eres 168 Legato Part legato switch Solo legato switch aa Legato Retrigger onderaan tann aiir aeaoe ira inerea ettet Legato retrigger switch LEVEL 2 idle necare e petiere Level Chorus level tete detenti ets 158 Part level e ona a a a ea A A E SE 53 Patehleyel ua eaa a EER EE E 70 Reverb level 160 Rhythm Set level ette reb aiiin 96 Rhythm Tone level 103 dTonelevel eosam but tet etie te ee 90 Wave level 98 LFO delay time 84 LFO delay time keyfollow 84 LFO DEPTH 1 2 85 LFO fade mode LFO fade time 84 LFO group 83 SHO KEYS YING s eot ueber ener iet eee 83 IFO level offset aiieieo teet ND neret roetine 83 LFO rate LEO rat detune inire eet ertet LFO Waveform Lncret ce encre Qayna eet RII awqay uN LFO1 LFO2 DELAY EFOU EFO2 BADE u au dedecore pen eco eec LFO1 LFO2 WAVE DOA eM TET Local Local s
494. lizing a Performances u ede eet e reden Hi eei te uk oe Beet 185 Initializing a bataie nanoen a a E a o s 185 Initializing a KhythnvSet siste pied ane e ette SaR ASEA e agii ipte n pri pb 185 Transmitting Sound Settings XFER sse nete nennen ntes 185 Transmitting Data to an External MIDI Device u 185 Transmitting Data to the XV 88 su a ua SSS naa aku 186 Protecting the Internal Memory PROTECT Nu 188 Memory Card Related Settings CARD na nanpa nete nennen tenentes 188 Formatting the Memory Card for the XV 88 FORMAT u 189 Renaming a File RENAMDE 5 e eee tete met drerit aeter te ee te tete 189 Deleting Unwanted Files DELETE nnne nennen ai 189 Copying Files Between Memory Cards FILE COPY 189 Checking the Contents of a Memory Card INFO a 190 Loading a File from Memory Card into the XV 88 LOAD a 190 Saving Data to Memory Card SAVE treten tenente nennen nens 190 Recalling Factory Default Settings FACTORY RESET u 191 Chapter 11 Using the XV 88 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode 192 Entering GM Mode i ie de eret ee dh reir e testet e fee pr ced 192 Initializing the Sound Generator for General MIDI System Basic Settings 192 Playing Back GM Sc0r6S 4 sioe ttti adi o nET EAEN EE EESO eere ed ation ahs 192 Modifying GM Mode S ttings is eere ie ecd
495. lls AgogoBells AgogoBells AgogoBells AgogoBells AgogoBells Cabasa Up Cabasa Up AgogoBells Maracas Maracas Maracas Soft Pad A Soft Pad A 606 CI HiHat Soft Pad B Soft Pad B 606 CI HiHat Long Guiro Long Guiro 606 Op HiHat Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Claves Claves Claves Wood Block Wood Block Wood Block Wood Block Wood Block Wood Block Cuica Cuica Pizz Cuica Cuica Syn Vox 1 Open Triangl Open Triangl Voice Aahs A Open Triangl Open Triangl Voice Oohs2A Cabasa Cut Maracas Male Ooh A Spectrum Ice Rain Ice Rain Wind Chimes Wind Chimes 808 SN Wood Block Claves 808 SN Cga Slap 808 SN 808 SN Dry Tom Lo Verb Tom Hi Hand Claps Applause Piccolo SN Voice Breath Hybrid Kick2 Scratch 3 Scratch 3 CI HiHat 4 Tin Wave Tin Wave Round Kick Spectrum Crash 1 Pedal HiHat2 REV Steel DR Ride Bell Natural SN2 REV Tin Wave REV Tin Wave Op HiHat 2 REV PiccloSN DIGI Bell 1 Brush Slap REV Crash 1 Metal Wind leironome2 TTT Brush Swish A Metronome2 Applause Brush Roll R8 Click R8 Click SN Roll Metronome 1 Metronome 1 259 Rhythm Set List PR E Preset E Group PR F Preset F Group 001 002 001 002 Note No XV Pop Kit XV Rock Kit XV Jazz Kit XV Rust Kit 28 Dance Kick Dance Kick JazzDry Kick 70s Kick 2 bo Dry Kick Round Kick Pillow Kick Old Kick EN Rock Roll Rock Roll Jazz Swish Rock Roll 31 Hybrid Kick Jazz Kick Hybrid Kick2 909 Kick 2 E snare Ghost Rock Gst Snare Ghost Rock Gst 33 Round Kick Verb Kick MplLmt
496. locity 95 lt Example 2 gt CE 49 CnH is the Program Change status and n is the MIDI channel number Since EH 14 and 49H 73 this is a Program Change message with MIDI CH 15 program number 74 Flute in GS lt Example 3 gt EA 00 28 EnH is the Pitch Bend Change status and n is the MIDI channel number The 2nd byte 00H 0 is the LSB and the 3rd byte 28H 40 is the MSB but Pitch Bend Value is a signed number in which 40 00H 64 x 12 80 8192 is 0 so this Pitch Bend Value is 28 00H 40 00H 40 x 1280 64 x 12480 5120 8192 3072 If the Pitch Bend Sensitivity is set to 2 semitones 8192 00 00H will cause the pitch to change 200 cents so in this case 200 x 3072 8192 75 cents of Pitch Bend is being applied to MIDI channel 11 Example 4 gt B3 64 00 65 00 06 OC 26 00 64 7F 65 7F BnH is the Control Change status and n is the MIDI channel number For Control Changes the 2nd byte is the control number and the 3rd byte is the value In a case in which two or more messages consecutive messages have the same status MIDI has a provision called running status which allows the status byte of the second and following messages to be omitted Thus the above messages have the following meaning B3 6400 MIDI ch 4 lower byte of RPN parameter number 00H B3 6500 MIDI ch 4 upper byte of RPN parameter number 00H B3 06 0C MIDI ch 4 upper byte of parameter value 0CH B3 26 00 MIDI ch 4 lo
497. long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should consult an audiologist The product should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation The product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators heat registers or other products that produce heat The product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the product N Co c1 o N 8 The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time 9 Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings 10 The product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when A The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or B Objects have fallen or liquid has been spilled into the product or C The product has been exposed to rain or D The product does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance or E The product has been dropped or the enclosure damaged 11 Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user maintenance instructions All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel For the USA This product may be equipped with a polarized
498. lt gt PON This type passes the filtered sound of each tone through a ring modulator to create new overtones The TVA for Tone 1 or 3 controls the volume balance between the two Tones and adjusts ring modulation depth PR J vJ This type passes the filtered sound of each tone through a ring modulator to create new overtones and also mixes in the sound of tone 2 4 Since the ring modulated sound can be mixed with Tone 2 4 Tone 1 8 TVA can adjust the amount of the ring modulated sound note Ifyou select a Tone while on the STRUCT page the Tone paired with the selected Tone will also be selected When TYPE 2 10 is selected and one Tone of a pair is turned off the other Tone will be sounded as TYPE 1 regardless of the displayed setting If you limit the keyboard area in which a Tone will sound Key Range p 73 or limit the range of velocities for which it will sound Velocity Range p 72 the result in areas or ranges where the Tone does not sound is just as if the Tone had been turned off This means that if TYPE 2 10 is selected and you create a keyboard area or velocity range in which one Tone of a pair does not sound notes played in that area or range will be sounded by the other Tone as TYPE 1 regardless of the displayed setting Chapter 5 Creating Patches Booster Booster Gain When a Structure Type of TYPE 3 or TYPE 4 is selected you Whatis a Ring Modulator can adjust the depth
499. lti effects Chorus or Reverb to each of the Parts comprising the Performance When adding effects in Performance mode the settings for the Patches or Rhythm Sets assigned to the Parts are disabled and the effect settings for the Performance go into effect Thus the effects for the same Patch or Rhythm Set may differ when played in Patch Rhythm Set mode and in Performance mode However depending on the settings you can have effect settings for a Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part applied to the entire Performance p 114 Basic Process of Making Effects Settings When applying effects in Performance mode the following procedure is used to make the settings 1 Setting the Output Method Used by the Direct Sound Output Assign Settings determining whether or not the signal passes through the Multi effects the jack used to output the sound and the type of output stereo or mono for each Part You can also settings for a Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part p 113 2 Setting the Amount of Each Effect Applied Send Level Sets the level volume of each effect signal to be sent for each Part p 113 3 Making Multi Effects Settings Select the type of Multi effects to be used and set the parameters for the selected Multi effect You can also Multi effects settings for a Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part p 114 p 115 4 Setting the Multi Effects Controller When using MIDI messages to ch
500. lume message Vol and Expression message Exp parameters and make the appropriate settings p 56 Troubleshooting Is the rear panel COMPUTER switch set to the correct position If you are using the XV 88 while connected to a computer make settings as appropriate for the connection method the type of computer and the settings of the driver p 208 Before changing the setting of the Computer switch you must first turn off the power on the XV 88 Song Data Does Not Play Back Correctly When playing back a GM score is the sound generator set to GM mode Switch to GM mode p 192 Has the Receive General MIDI General MIDI 2 System On Switch been turned ON Set the Rx GM On Rx GM2 On parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI to ON p 171 Are you playing back from the middle of the song The beginning of a GM score song contains a General MIDI General MIDI 2 System On message In some cases a GM Score cannot be played back correctly unless this message is received Are you playing back GS format song data When the XV 88 receives a GS Reset message the XV 88 is enabled for the GS format This permits playback of music data bearing the GS logo GS music data However data created exclusively for the Sound Canvas Series may not play back properly on the XV 88 A Specific Part Does Not Sound Has the volume level of the part been lowered Adjust the Level parameter PERFORM PART SETTING to raise t
501. m U Qa 68 Functions of Patch Parameters ission sein ieena einet kaeaea paes Ease nene tenente tnter nennen 69 Settings Common to the Entire Patch COMMON nene nennen 69 Setting Effects for a Patch EFFECTS N 75 Using Controllers to Change How Sounds Are Played CONTROL 76 Modifying Waveforms WAVE M N nennt tenente tenes 81 Modulating Sounds LFO N n nnne 83 Mogdityitis Pitch CP IT CEA assis u usasapa sunqassauqa ushika rl de nahua QR UR maqa 86 Modifying the Brightness of a Sound with a Filter TVF aaa 87 Adjusting the Volume and Pan TVA nene 90 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets eeuuss 93 How a Rhythm Set Is Organized nete nenne tenens 93 How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings sse nennen nene 93 Making Settings While Comparing Waveforms Palette Edit a 94 Copying the Settings of Another Rhythm Tone Rhythm Tone Copy 94 Cautions When Selecting a Waveform ua 95 Functions of Rhythm Set Parameters sse nete nne 96 Settings Common to the Entire Rhythm Set COMMON 96 Setting Effects for a Rhythm Set EFFECTS ua 97 Controlling How a Rhythm Tone will Sound with Controllers CONTROL 97
502. mit any control change message O Bank Select Controller number 0 32 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 00H mmH BnH 20H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm ll Bank number 00 00H 7F 7FH bank 1 bank 16384 These messages are transmitted when Performance Patch or Rhythm set is selected But not transmitted when Program or Bank Sel parameter SYSTEM MIDI TRANSMIT MIDI is OFF In Performance Zone mode these messages are not transmitted when Bank Select MSB or P C parameter ZONE EXT CONTROL EXT P C is NO SEND Although with the XV 88 you can select the Bank Select messages to be transmitted be T sure to refer to the Program Change Map on p 270 for the Bank Select messages transmitted when the XV 88 is select a Performance Patch or Rhythm Set The Bank Select Numbers corresponding to SRX series should be referred to the SRX series owner s manual O Modulation Controller number 1 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 01H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Modulation depth 00H 7FH 0 127 O Breath type Controller number 2 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 02H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 vv Control value O Portamento Time Controller number 5 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 05H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 vv Portamento Time 00H 7FH 0 127 O Data Entry Controller number 6
503. mp 3 POLY 042 W RED Bass 4 POLY 106 ClariExpress 2 POLY 042 Chambers 3 POLY 106 Dyno Toms 4 POLY 043 HI RingBass 3 POLY 107 Mitzva Split 4 POLY 043 ViolinCello 4 POLY 107 Sands ofTime 4 POLY 044 Euro Bass 2 MONO 108 ChamberWinds 4 POLY 044 Symphonique 4 POLY 108 Inertia 4 POLY 045 SinusoidRave 1 MONO 109 ChamberWoods3 POLY 045 Film Octaves 4 POLY 109 Vektogram 4 POLY 046 Alternative 2 MONO 110 Film Orch 4 POLY 046 Film Layers 4 POLY 110 Crash Pad 4 POLY 047 Acid Line 1 MONO 111 Sop Sax mf 2 POLY 047 Bass Pizz 4 POLY 111 Feedback VOX 4 POLY 048 Auto TB 303 3 MONO 112 Alto Sax 3 POLY 048 Real Pizz 3 POLY 112 Cascade 1 POLY 049 Hihat Tekno 2 POLY 113 AltoLead Sax 3 POLY 049 Harp On It 3 POLY 113 Shattered 2 POLY 050 VeloTekno1 3 MONO 114 Tenor Sax 3 POLY 050 Harp 2 POLY 114 NextFrontier 2 POLY 051 Raggatronic 4 POLY 115 Baritone Sax 3 POLY 051 JP 8 Str 1 2 POLY 115 Pure Tibet 1 POLY 052 Blade Racer 4 POLY 116 Take A Tenor 4 POLY 052 JP 8Str2 3 POLY 116 Chime Wash 4 POLY 053 S amp H Pad 1 POLY 117 SaxSection 4 POLY 053 E Motion Pad 4 POLY 117 NightShade 4 POLY 054 Syncrosonix 3 POLY 118 BigbandSax 4 POLY 054 JP 8 Str 3 4 POLY 118 Tortured 4 POLY 055 Fooled Again 1 POLY 119 Harmonica 2 POLY 055 Vintage Orch 4 POLY 119 Dissimilate 4 POLY 056 Alive 3 POLY 120 Harmo Blues 2 POLY 056 JUNO Strings 3 POLY 120 Dunes 4 POLY 057 VeloTekno2 2 POLY 121 BluesHarp 1 POLY 057 Gigantalog 4 POLY 121 OceanFloor 1 POLY 058 Rezoid 4 POLY 122 Hillbillys 4 POLY 058 PWM Strings 3 PO
504. n Effect balance Output level 13 SPACE D p 125 Parameter Pre Dly Rate Depth Phase LowGain Hi Gain Balance Level Pre delay time Rate Depth Phase Low gain High gain Effect balance Output level Value 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 0 180 degree 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 Value 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 0 180 degree 15 415 dB 15 415 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 14 STEREO CHORUS p 125 Parameter Pre Dly Rate Depth Phase Filter Type Cutoff LowGain Hi Gain Balance Level 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 Pre delay time Rate Depth Phase Filter type Cutoff frequency Low gain High gain Effect balance Output level 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 242 Value 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 0 180 degree OFF LPF HPF 200 8000 Hz 1 15 415 dB 15 415 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 15 STEREO FLANGER p 126 Parameter Pre Dly Rate Depth Fbk Phase Filter Type Cutoff LowGain Hi Gain Balance Level Pre delay time Rate Depth Feedback level Phase Filter type Cutoff frequency Low gain High gain Effect balance Output level Value 0 0 100 0 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz 0 127 98 98 0 180 degree OFF LPF HPF 200 8000 Hz 1 15 415 dB 15 415 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000
505. n prepared carry out the Initialize operation p 185 2 Press EDIT to make the indicator light 3 Use the function buttons to select a display group The indicator for the button of the selected display group begins blinking EDIT PATCH COMMON EFFECTS CONTROL WAVE LFO PITCH TVF TVA 990 900 900 900 990 900 990 Qoo 998 988 988 988 938 936 939 988 998 998 996 996 996 coo coo 96 4 Use 4 or W to select a display page 5 Ifyou have selected a parameter display that can be set independently for each Tone the number of the Tone selected for editing will be shown in the upper left of the display To edit a different Tone press EDIT to temporarily turn off the indicator and use TONE SELECT 1 4 to select a Tone TMTE L Fade Lower UrFrer U Fade DEU RANGE D 1 127 B HINT For simultaneously modifying the same parameter for two or more Tones hold down one of the TONE SELECT 1 4 buttons and press another TONE SELECT 1 4 button then another if so desired Tone numbers other than the first specified one will be indicated by an symbol To switch Tones on off turn off the EDIT indicator and then press TONE SWITCH 1 4 6 Use 4 or P to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 7 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to modify the parameter value If you ve selected two or more Tones your editing will modify the parameter values for all sel
506. n 8 POLY 052 P BsChorus 4 MONO 116 Predator 2 8 POLY 053 TremChoBs 2 POLY 117 Dark Side 8 POLY 054 Creamy Bass 2 MONO 118 The Beast 6 POLY 055 BusterBass 2 MONO 119 X mod Reso 1 POLY 056 TB Squelch 2 POLY 120 Planet Meta 7 POLY 057 Ticker Bass 4 MONO 121 Nexus 8 POLY 058 MuscleBass 2 MONO 122 Halographix 2 POLY 059 GroundedBs 2 MONO 123 Moon Rise 8 POLY 060 WestEndBs 5 MONO 124 Gruvacious 5 POLY 061 Snap Bass 2 MONO 125 Windy Dunes 4 POLY 062 700Bassboy 3 MONO 126 Ice Blasts 4 POLY 063 8VCO MonoSyn8 MONO 127 Ringy Thingy 8 MONO 064 ResoMoist Bs 4 MONO 128 Atmospherics 4 POLY Voice number of voice 256 PR H GM2 Group No Name Voice LSB PC No Name Voice LSB PC No Name Voice LSB PC No Name Voice LSB PC 001 Piano 1 4 0 1 065 Chorus Gt 2 1 129 French Horns 2 0 61 193 Sitar 1 0 105 002 Piano 1w 2 1 066 Mid Tone GTR 1 2 130 Fr Horn 2 2 1 194 Sitar2 2 1 003 European Pf 1 2 067 Muted Gt 1 0 29 131 Brass 3 0 62 195 Banjo 1 0 106 004 Piano2 4 0 2 068 Funk Pop 1 1 132 Brass 2 2 1 196 Shamisen 1 0 107 005 Piano 2w 1 1 069 Funk Gt 2 2 2 133 Synth Brassi 2 0 63 197 Koto 2 0 108 006 Piano 3 1 0 3 070 Jazz Man 2 3 134 Pro Brass 2 1 198 Taisho Koto 1 1 007 Piano 3w 1 1 071 OverdriveGt 2 0 30 135 OctSynBras 2 2 199 Kalimba 1 0 109 008 Honky tonk 2 0 4 072 Guitar Pinch 2 1 136 Jump Brass 3 3 200 Bagpipe 2 0 110 009 Honky tonk2 2 1 073 DistortionGt 2 0 31 137 Synth Brass2 2 0 64 201 Fiddle 1 0 111 010 E Piano 1 2 0 5 074 Feedback Gt 2 1 138 SynBrass sfz
507. n I I I I 20000 20000 I IE 00 39 0000 aaaa I 00 00 Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 1 32 127 0000 bbbb I I I I 32 127 ASCII I 0000 cccc I I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 2 32 127 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 11 12768 52768 I I I 32 127 ASCII I I I 20000 20000 I 00 02 Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 3 32 127 b 00 3D 0000 aaaa I I I I 32 127 ASCII I 0000 bbbb I 00 03 Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 4 32 127 0000 cccc l I I I 32 127 ASCII I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 12 12768 52768 I 00 04 Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 5 32 127 I I I 20000 20000 I I I 32 127 ASCII IE 00 41 0000 aaaa I I 00 05 Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 6 32 127 I 0000 bbbb I I I I 32 127 ASCII I 0000 cccc I I 00 06 Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 7 32 127 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 13 12768 52768 I I I 32 127 ASCII I I I 20000 20000 I 00 07 Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 8 32 127 4 00 45 0000 aaaa I I I I 32 127 ASCII I 0000 bbbb I I 00 08 Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 9 32 127 0000 cccc I I I 32 127 ASCII I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 14 12768 52768 I 00 09 Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 10 32 127 I I I 20000 20000 I I I 32 127 ASCII D 00 49 0000 aaaa I I 00 0A Oaaa aaaa Rhythm Name 11 32 127 0000 bbbb I I I I 32 127 ASCII I 0000 cccc I I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa R
508. n also set the Rx Sw parameter on the GM PLAY page Press ZONE PART SELECT 1 9 8 16 to switch the setting to ON indicator lighted or OFF indicator extinguished When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is extinguished Parts 1 8 are switched on and off and when the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit Parts 9 16 are switched on and off p 25 Mute Sw Mute Switch Mute Sw temporarily mutes ON or releases the mute OFF for the performance of each Part Use this setting when for example you want to use the instrument for karaoke by muting the Part playing the melody or when you want to play something using a separate sound module Nei The Mute Sw parameter does not turn the Part off but rather mutes the sound by setting the volume to 0 Therefore MIDI messages are still received Making Settings for Each Part PART Here you can select the GM Patch Rhythm Set assigned to each Part and set the volume pan and pitch of each Part PATCH PART 1 JT sFe Humber FHTCH 4 FRHI BB1cPiano 1 Type Part Type Sets the assignment of a GM Patch PAT or GM Rhythm Set RHY to each of the Parts Number GM Patch Rhythm Set Number Selects the desired GM Patch or Rhythm Set by its number The name of the selected GM Patch Rhythm Set appears in parentheses Oo 2 GM mode Patches or Rhythm Sets other than the GM Patches and Rhythm Sets in PR H cannot be selected Furthermore GM Patches and Rhythm Sets cannot be edited SETTING
509. n off CHORUS Switches Chorus on off REVERB Switches Reverb on off ote Since the Multi effects cannot be used in GM mode nothing happens when MULTI is pressed in this mode 105 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Applying Effects in Patch Mode or Rhythm Set Mode Only one Multi effect Chorus or Reverb effect can be set for each Patch or Rhythm Set You cannot apply differing types of Multi effects Chorus or Reverb to each of the Tones or Rhythm Tones comprising the Patch or Rhythm Set Basic Process of Making Effects Settings When applying effects in Patch Rhythm Set mode the following procedure is used to make the settings 1 Setting the Output Method of the Direct Sound Output Assign Settings determining whether or not the signal passes through the Multi effects the jack used to output the sound and the type of output stereo or mono are made for each individual Patch or Rhythm Set or each Tone or Rhythm Tone p 108 p 109 2 Setting the Amount of Each Effect Applied Send Level Set the level volume of each effect signal to be sent for each Tone or Rhythm Tone p 110 3 Making Multi Effects Settings Select the type of Multi effects to be used and set the parameters for the selected Multi effect p 114 p 115 4 Setting the Multi Effects Controller When using MIDI messages to change the Multi effects parameters in realtime select the
510. n performing legato This is normally set to ON When OFF when one key is held down and another key is then pressed only the pitch changes without the attack of the latter key being played Set this to OFF when performing wind and string phrases or when using modulation with the mono synth keyboard sound PATCH PORTAMNT Patch Portamento FATCH f Su Time Mode T9Fe Start P RTRHMHTEOFE i8 LEGATO FATE FITCH What is Portamento Portamento is a function that causes the Patch s pitch to change smoothly from one note to the next note played With the Assign parameter set to MONO portamento is especially effective when simulating playing techniques such as a violin glissandos Portamento can also be applied when Key Assign is polyphonic POLY Sw Portamento Switch Specifies whether the portamento effect will be applied ON or not OFF Note When the Sw parameter is set to OFF all of the following Portamento settings are disabled Time Portamento Time When portamento is used this specifies the time over which the pitch will change Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time Mode Portamento Mode Specifies the performance conditions for which portamento will be applied NORMAL Portamento will always be applied LEGATO Portamento will be applied only for notes played legato i e when you press a second key before releasing the first Type Portamento Type
511. nFolk 2 POLY 019 Blistering 2 MONO 083 Byzantine 4 POLY 020 Guttural 8 MONO 084 AsiaPlectrum 8 POLY 021 Flyin High 3 MONO 085 VelHarp Harm 3 POLY 022 Soft Tooth 2 MONO 086 Pluckaphone 4 POLY 023 SoaringSqr 4 MONO 087 Slap Timps 4 POLY 024 SoaringSync 4 MONO 088 Suite Combo 6 POLY 025 NasalSpray 2 MONO 089 Jet Voxs 3 POLY 026 Lamb Lead 2 MONO 090 Dirty Hit 4 POLY 027 Creamer 2 MONO 091 MOVE 6 MONO 028 Sine System 4 MONO 092 Reel Slam 4 POLY 029 Soft Nylon 4 POLY 093 OfffheRecord 4 POLY 030 Nylozzicato 3 POLY 094 2ndRateChord 4 MONO 031 Mutezzicato 3 POLY 095 RagelnYouth 3 POLY 032 HybridNylon 3 POLY 096 Minorlncidnt 4 MONO 033 XVSteelGt 1 4 POLY 097 Phunky DC 2 MONO 034 XVSteelGt2 4 POLY 098 Agent X 7 POLY 035 Comp Steel 4 POLY 099 Winky 8 POLY 036 Double Steel 8 POLY 100 Looney 2nz 8 POLY 037 Folk Guitar 4 POLY 101 Shortrave 2 POLY 038 SpanishNight 5 POLY 102 DeeperBeeper 2 MONO 039 Plug n Play 2 POLY 103 Percolator 4 POLY 040 Fab4 Guitar 4 POLY 104 Filter Morph 4 POLY 041 SearingLead 3 MONO 105 Choir Bounce 4 POLY 042 Punker 2 POLY 106 Rippling 1 POLY 043 LouderPlease 3 POLY 107 SteppingPhsr 3 POLY 044 XV Upright 1 POLY 108 Trance Fair 8 MONO 045 XV Ac Bass 4 POLY 109 GermanBounce 4 POLY 046 LookMaNoFret 3 MONO 110 Acid JaZZ 5 MONO 047 XV Fretless 1 POLY 111 Cutter ModWh 2 POLY 048 Basic F less 1 MONO 112 Blades 4 POLY 049 8 str F less 2 POLY 113 MadBender 6 POLY 050 Tap Bass 1 POLY 114 Shapeshifter 4 POLY 051 Pop Bass 1 POLY 115 ForestMoo
512. nation of the signal after passing through the Reverb is set with the Out parameter GM EFFECTS GM REVERB p 195 Chorus Chorus Send Level Adjusts the amount of Chorus for each Part If you don t want to add the Chorus effect set it to 0 Reverb Reverb Send Level Adjusts the amount of Reverb for each Part If you don t want to add the Reverb effect set it to 0 Chapter 11 Using the XV 88 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode GM CHORUS nn t Tare Rate Drth Fbk Ren Duit CHORUS CHORUS 3 3 15 S l A Type Chorus Type Selects the type of Chorus CHORUS 1 4 Chorus 1 4 FB CHORUS Feedback Chorus FLANGER Flanger Rate Chorus Rate Specifies the modulation frequency of the Chorus sound Dpth Chorus Depth Sets the depth of the undulations of the Chorus sound Fbk Chorus Feedback Level Adjusts the amount of Chorus sound that is returned fed back to the Chorus Higher settings will create a more complex Chorus effect Rev Chorus Reverb Send Level Adjusts the amount of Reverb to be applied to the sound routed through Chorus If you don t want to add the Reverb effect set it to 0 Out Chorus Output Assign Specifies how the sound routed through Chorus will be output A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo Mb If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks
513. ncy gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Sets the volume balance between the direct sound and the effect sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the effect sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level Chapter 7 Adding Effects 49 PITCH SHIFTER A Pitch Shifter shifts the pitch of the direct sound This 3 voice pitch shifter has three pitch shifters and can add three pitch shifted sounds to the direct sound k qim 1 mes i Pine H 2 scm p L Pich3 H 3 Coarse 1 2 3 Coarse Pitch 1 2 3 Specify the pitch in semitones for pitch shift 1 3 Fine 1 2 3 Fine Pitch 1 2 3 Make fine adjustments to the pitch of the pitch shift 1 3 in 2 cent steps Pre Delay 1 2 3 Pre Delay Time 1 2 3 Specify the time delay from the direct sound until the pitch shift 1 3 sound is heard Fbk 1 2 3 Feedback Level 1 2 3 Adjust the proportion of the pitch shift 1 3 sound that is fed back into the effect Pan 1 2 3 Output Pan 1 2 3 Specify the stereo location of the pitch shift 1 3 sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level 1 2 3 Level 1 2 3 Specify the volume of the pitch shift 1 3 Mode Pitch Shifter Mode Higher settings of this parameter will result in slower response but steadier pitch Balance Ef
514. nd ws uw 5 up Envelope Envelope Envelope Percussion instrument Rhythm Tone consists of the following four elements For details refer to the explanations for Tones WG Wave Generator TVF Time Variant Filter TVA Time Variant Amplifier Envelope Chapter 1 Performances A Performance is a collective set of assignments of the sixteen different Patches and Rhythm Sets Since a Performance can simultaneously handle 16 different sounds it allows you to play multiple Patches simultaneously layer or to play different Patches in different areas of the keyboard split and to create ensembles Because the XV 88 sound generator can control multiple sounds instruments it is called a Multi timbral sound generator Performance Part 1 Patch Rhythm Set Parts Parts are the sites to which the Patches and Rhythm Sets used by the XV 88 as sound material are assigned A single Performance comprises sixteen Parts with a Patch or Rhythm Set being assigned to each Part In the relationship between Performances and Parts the Performance is like an orchestra the Parts the performers and the Patches and Rhythm Sets the instruments 21 Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 Setting the MIDI Connection
515. nd Seashore Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause PC Program Change Number Bank Select MSB is all 120 LSB is all 0 No Wave Name No Wave Name No Wave Name No Wave Name No Wave Name 0001 StGrand pA L 0051 E Piano 1C 0101 RockOrg1 A R 0151 Jazz Gtr B 0201 Syn Gtr B 0002 StGrand pA R 0052 E Piano 2A 0102 RockOrg1 B L 0152 Jazz Gtr C 0202 SynGtrC 0003 StGrand pB L 0053 E Piano 2B 0103 RockOrg1BR 0153 LPRearA 0203 Harp 1A 0004 StGrandpBR 0054 E Piano 2C 0104 RockOrg1 C L 0154 LP Rear B 0204 Harp 1B 005 StGrand pC L 0055 E Piano 3A 0105 RockOrg1 C R 0155 LP Rear C 0205 Harp 1C 0006 StGrand pC R 0056 E Piano 3B 0106 RockOrg2 AL 0156 Rock lead 1 0206 Harp Harm 0007 StGrandfAL 0057 E Piano 3C 0107 RockOrg2 AR 0157 Rock lead 2 0207 Pluck Harp 0008 StGrandfAR 0058 MK 80 EP A 0108 RockOrg2 BL 0158 Comp Gtr A 0208 Banjo A 0009 StGrand fB L 0059 MK 80 EP B 0109 RockOrg2 BR 0159 Comp Gtr B 0209 Banjo B 0010 StGrand fB R 0060 MK 80 EPC 0110 RockOrg2 CL 0160 Comp Gtr C 0210 Banjo C 0011 StGrand fC L 0061 EP Hard 0111 RockOrg2 C R 0161 Comp Gtr A 0211 Sitar A 0012 StGrand fC R 0062 EP Distone 0112 RockOrg3 AL 0162 Mute Gtr 1 0212 Sitar B 0013 Ac Piano2 pA 0063 Clear Keys 0113 RockOrg3 A R 0163 Mute Gtr 2A 0213 Sitar C 0014 Ac Piano2 pB 0064 D 50 EP A 0114 RockOrg3 B L 0164 Mute Gtr 2B 0214 E Sitar A 0015 Ac Piano2 pC 0065 D 50 EP B 0115 RockOrg3 B R 0165 M
516. nd generator It is not possible to save individual Patches or Performances to a memory card Nem The number of files that can be saved on a card will depend on the memory capacity of the card itself cS For more detailed information and instructions for this procedure refer to Saving a Group of Tones to a Memory Card p 167 190 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode Recalling Factory Default Settings FACTORY RESET You can restore all settings stored in the XV 88 to their factory values Factory Reset FACTORY LEHTEF 1 RESET I gt Ifthe XV 88 internal memory already contains important data that you have created this operation will cause all of this data to be lost If you wish to keep the data you must save it on a memory card p 190 or on an external MIDI device p 185 If Internal Write Protect is turned ON the following display will appear and the Factory Reset operation will not be executed WEITE I Internal Write Protect OH FROTECT Change the displayed ON to OFF and press ENTER to turn Internal Write Protect off Are You Sure will be displayed press ENTER Chapter 10 191 Chapter 11 Using the XV 88 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode The XV 88 features a GM mode a convenient way to play back or create GM score data music files for General MIDI sound module You re able to play back commercial GM score data releases and even modify various parameter
517. nd pan of the Rhythm Tone TVA A B BI Level Fan Fandom Alternate TUR 1 l1z1l B B B Level Rhythm Tone Level Sets the volume of the Rhythm Tone Use this parameter to adjust the volume balance between Rhythm Tones HINT The volume level of the overall Rhythm Set is set with the Level parameter RHYTHM COMMON RHYTHM COMMON p 96 the volume levels of the Waves from which the Rhythm Tone is composed is set with the Level parameter RHYTHM WAVE WMT WAVE p 98 Pan Rhythm Tone Pan Sets the pan for the Rhythm Tone A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right HINT Set the Pan for Waves comprising the Rhythm Tones with the Pan parameter RHYTHM WAVE WMT PAN p 99 Random Random Pan Depth Use this parameter when you want the stereo location to change randomly each time you press a key Higher values will result in a greater width of change Alternate Alternate Pan Depth This setting causes panning to be alternated between left and right each time a key is pressed Higher values will result in a greater width of change This can be set either to L or R which will invert the order in which the panning is moved between left and right For example if two Rhythm Tones are set to L and R respectively the panning of the two Rhythm Tones will alternate each time they are played 103 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets TVA VELOCITY Ae TUAG Velocita Sens Velocita Curve UELOCITVA 32
518. nd that is sent through the chorus will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 136 33 ENHANCER FLANGER This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in series Balance D L in L out R out Mix Balance D Enhancer Sens Enhancer Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity of the enhancer Enhancer Mix Enhancer Mix Level Adjust the ratio with which the overtones generated by the enhancer are combined with the direct sound Fig Diy Flanger Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard FigRate Flanger Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger effect Fig Dpt Flanger Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger effect Fig Fbk Flanger Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the flanger sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Flanger Balance Adjust the volume balance between the enhancer sound that is sent through the flanger and the enhancer sound that is not sent through the flanger With a setting of D100 0W only the enhancer sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the enhancer sound that is sent through the flanger will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level Chapter 7 Adding Effects 34 ENHANCER DELAY This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in series gt O ET D x O R out Mix Balance
519. ndicated by a IEN For instructions on how to connect up and set the MIDI receive channel in Patch Rhythm Set mode refer to Playing the XV 88 s Sound Generator from an External MIDI Device p 205 1 Selectthe Patch Rhythm Set or Performance you wish to use 2 When a Performance is selected and the Source parameter PERFORM EFFECTS MFX TYPE p 114 is set to PERFORM the MIDI receive channel is set with the MEX Control Channel parameter PERFORM COMMON PERFORM MEX CH p 51 3 Call up the MFX CTRL page PATCH RHYTHM PERFORM EFFECTS then set the following parameters p 115 Source Specifies the MIDI message which is used for control Destination Sets which parameter is controlled Sens Specifies how deeply the parameter is to be controlled 4 When the MIDI message set by the Source parameter is sent from the external MIDI device to the XV 88 the Multi Effects parameter set with the Destination parameter changes at the level set in the Sns parameter 206 Selecting XV 88 Sounds from an External MIDI Device By transmitting Bank Select messages controller number 0 and 32 and Program Change messages from the external MIDI device to the XV 88 you can select Performances Patches or Rhythm Sets In other words when you select sounds on an external MIDI device the corresponding MIDI message will be transmitted to the XV 88 causing the XV 88 to select the appropriate Patch etc
520. ndicated by a circle o for the setting Tones to which no effects are applied are indicated by an underline With a setting of R the effect will be inverted Chapter 5 Creating Patches Modifying Waveforms WAVE Select the PCM waveform that is to be the basis of the Tone and apply effects to the waveform WAVE j B Grour Humber MES 26 PS C WAVE 1 IHI BGm27 t Gain Suitch hlaue TemrPo Syne WAVE 1 BI OFF OFF Group Wave Group Selects the group for the waveform that is to be the basis of the Tone INT Waveforms stored in internal memory XP A D Waveform stored in a Wave Expansion Board installed in EXP A D slots note You cannot select a waveform group of a Wave Expansion Board that is not installed Number Wave Number Selects the basic waveform for a Tone Along with the Wave number the Wave name appears at the right of the display When in monaural mode only the left side L is specified When in stereo the right side R is also specified HINT The Wave numbers can be divided and set in the first two and last two digits Gain Wave Gain Specifies the gain amplitude of the waveform The value changes in 6 dB decibel steps an increase of 6 dB doubles the waveform s gain If you intend to use the Booster to distort the waveform s sound set this parameter to its maximum value p 75 Switch Tone Switch Determines whether or not the Tone will be heard in the P
521. ng through the chorus is set with Output Assign parameter or Select parameter PATCH EFFECTS PATCH CHO OUT RHYTHM EFFECTS RHYTHM CHO OUT p 158 Theoutput destination of the signal after passing through the reverb is set with Output Assign parameter PATCH EFFECTS PATCH REV OUT RHYTHM EFFECTS RHYTHM REV OUT p 160 IEJ For more on how to set each effect refer to the pages shown below Multi effects p 114 Chorus gt p 156 Reverb p 158 Chorus Chorus Send Level x Sets the chorus depth for individual Tone Rhythm Tone If you don t want to add the Chorus effect set it to 0 Reverb Reverb Send Level x Sets the reverb depth for individual Tone Rhythm Tone If you don t want to add the Reverb effect set it to 0 5 Either rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to set the value 6 Press EXIT to return to the PATCH PLAY RHYTHM PLAY page An asterisk will be displayed at the left of the Patch Rhythm Set group This indicates that the Patch Rhythm Set settings have been modified won If you select another Patch Rhythm Set in the group with an asterisk the modified Patch Rhythm Set settings will be lost To keep these modified settings perform the save operation p 164 110 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Applying Effects in Performance Mode Only one Multi effect Chorus or Reverb effect can be set for each Performance You cannot apply differing types of Mu
522. ng address of the transmitted data bbH Address middle byte of the starting address of the transmitted data ccH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the transmitted data ddH Data the actual data to be transmitted Multiple bytes of data are transmitted starting from the address eeH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX End Of Exclusive The amount of data that can be transmitted at one time depends on the type of data and data will be transmitted from the specified starting address and size Refer to the address and size given in Parameter Address Map p 279 Data larger than 256 bytes will be divided into packets of 256 bytes or less and each packet will be sent at an interval of about 20 ms Regarding the checksum please refer to p 294 Not received when the Rx Sys Excl parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI is OFF 276 2 Data Transmission Channel Voice Messages Note off Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 8nH kkH vvH 9nH kkH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 00H 7FH 0 127 kk note number vv note off velocity Note on Status 2nd byte 3rd byte 9nH kkH vvH n MIDI channel number OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 01H 7FH 1 127 kk note number vv note on velocity Control Change By selecting a controller number that corresponds to the setting of parameters of controllers C1 C4 Assign and so on the XV 88 can trans
523. nk corresponding to the button pressed Press SHIFT to display the following page CARD 181 S0UHD_88 5Ub p 62KB IMFO 4s DEF GH acha EHT EH3 EUHDO When changing the Bank assignment select that file then hold down SHIFT and press one of the buttons AJH To delete the Bank assignment select that file hold down SHIFT and press UNDO COMPARE E The assigned bank will be indicated by an symbol Loading a File from Memory Card into the XV 88 LOAD This function loads data files from memory card into the XV 88 s memory A data file contains a set of data for Performances Patches Rhythm Sets System and Favorite List settings LOAD Js SOUND Bi SUD LEHTEF 1 o zd the XV 88 internal memory already contains important data that you have created this operation will cause all of this data to be lost If you wish to keep the data you must save it on a memory card p 190 or on an external MIDI device p 185 If you wish to load only a specific portion of the data file refer to Transmitting Data to the XV 88 p 186 Saving Data to Memory Card SAVE The Performances Patches Rhythm Sets System and Favorite List settings in internal memory can be saved as a single file onto a memory card To overwrite a previously saved file on the memory card select its file number SALE L SOUND 06 SUD CAS LEHTEF 1 nore Data files contain an entire set of parameter settings for the sou
524. ns a General MIDI General MIDI 2 System On message When the XV 88 s power is turned on When you execute the GM GM2 Initialize function p 198 General MIDI General MIDI 2 System On Message The General MIDI General MIDI 2 System On messages put the unit in a state that conforms to the General MIDI System and initializes a General MIDI compatible sound generator won If the Rx GM On Rx GM2 On parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI is set OFF General MIDI General MIDI 2 System On messages cannot be received Playing Back GM Scores When the XV 88 is in GM mode it plays back GM scores correctly But beyond this the XV 88 provides extended features not defined in General MIDI specifications and if you create music files using these extended features your song may not play back correctly on other General MIDI compatible sound modules o DE a MIDI General MIDI 2 System On messages are normally placed at the beginning of a GM score This means that if a GM score is played back from the middle of the song the XV 88 will not switch to GM mode and playback may not be correct So to be safe it s recommended to manually set the XV 88 to GM mode before playing back a GM score Mb When the XV 88 receives a GS Reset message the XV 88 is enabled for the GS format a shared set of specifications proposed by Roland for standardization of multi timbral sound modules This permits playback of music data bearing the GS logo
525. nt Tones played set the range within which the Tone is to be sounded according to the value of the MIDI message used Lower Velocity Range Lower Upper Velocity Range Upper For each Tone specify the lower Lower and upper Upper limit of the key velocities that will sound the Tone When a key is played more softly than the lower limit or more strongly than the upper limit the sound will either not be heard at all or will be extremely weak note If you attempt to set the Lower velocity limit above the Upper or the Upper below the Lower the other value will automatically be adjusted to the same setting nem When using the Matrix Controller to have different Tones played set the lowest value Lower and highest value Upper of the value of the MIDI message used 72 Chapter 5 Creating Patches LFade Velocity Fade Width Lower U Fade Velocity Fade Width Upper L Fade and U Fade set the range within which the volume gradually fades as the velocity approaches the limits of the Velocity Range as set by the Lower and Upper parameters Use this setting when for example you want to have adjacent Tones in Split mode switched smoothly Velocity Crossfade The higher the values set the smoother the switch is between the Tones When you want the Tones to be switched instantly set these to 0 Level Ne L Fade Lower Upper U Fade TMT KEY RANG TMT Key Range 1 THTf L Fade Lower Urrer Ll Faqe KEV RA
526. o play up to 128 notes simultaneously The polyphony or the number of voices sounds does not refer only to the number of sounds actually being played but changes according to the number of tones used in the Patches and the number of Waves used in the tones The following method is used to calculate the number of sounds used for one Patch being played Number of Sounds Being Played x Number of Tones Used by Patches Being Played x Number of Waves Used in the Tones MODIFY PART 1 Cut Rez Htk Rel Velocita Sens MODIFY J l Bl Bl Bl B Cut Part Cutoff Frequency Offset Adjusts the cutoff frequency for the Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part o w a also have a Cutoff Frequency Offset setting p 71 The final Cutoff frequency value is the sum of the Tone Cutoff Frequency value and the Patch and Part Cutoff Frequency Offset values If the Tone s cutoff frequency is already set to 127 maximum there will be no change produced by setting the Cutoff Frequency Offset to a positive value Res Part Resonance Offset Adjusts the Resonance for the Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part Nore Patches also have a Resonance Offset setting p 71 The final Resonance value is the sum of the Tone Resonance value and the Patch and Part Resonance Offset values If the Tone s resonance is already set to 127 maximum there will be no change produced by setting the resonance offset to a positive value Atk Part Attack
527. o that its indicator goes off The Transpose setting you make will be maintained Nem The Transpose setting you make here will also change the Transpose parameter SYSTEM CONTROL KEYBOARD won The setting you make will be maintained even if you select a different Patch Performance or Rhythm Set or turn the power off If Stuck Notes Occur Panic If some operation causes sounds from the XV 88 or sounds from an external sound generator connected with a MIDI cable to fail to stop playing use the Panic function When Sounds from the XV 88 Do Not Stop Playing 1 Hold down SHIFT and press EXIT Sounds from the XV 88 stop playing 2 The display will indicate Panic Now Muting while the Panic function is being executed When this message goes off you can start playing What to Do When an External Sound Generator Fails to Stop Sounding 1 Hold down SHIFT and press EXIT for more than a second MIDI messages for All Sounds Off Reset All Controllers Hold 1 0 Hold 2 0 and Sostenuto 0 will be transmitted to all MIDI channels Parts 2 The display will indicate Panic Now Transmitting while the Panic function is being executed When this message goes away you can start playing Chapter 3 Creating Performances With the XV 88 you have total control over a wide variety of settings Each item that can be set is known as a parameter When you change the values of parameters you are d
528. o the parameter you wish to modify 2 Press PALETTE EDIT to call up the Palette page 1 THTf L Fadae Lower Urrer l Fade UEL RANGE B 1 1271 B PALETTE EDIT nr WELOCITY tone 1 IHT 8D27 lt MES 28 P3 C FADE L URg 0 B B D B B B B 3 Press TONE SELECT 1 4 or P to choose the Tone to modify The button indicator for the selected Tone will light and the Tone number and Wave name appear in the display HINT For modifying the same parameter of two or more Tones simultaneously hold down one of the TONE SELECT 1 4 buttons and press another 4 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to change the parameter value If you ve selected two or more Tones your editing will modify the parameter values for all selected Tones by the same amount If you want to set all selected Tones to the same value select the Tone having that value by pressing qd or D and while holding down SHIFT press ENTER HINT If you ve made a mistake in setting a parameter value or you have second thoughts about the changes press UNDO COMPARE to restore the value to what it was 5 If you wish to edit other parameters press 4 or W to select the parameter that you wish to edit 6 Repeat steps 3 5 to complete a Patch 7 Toexit the Palette page press PALETTE EDIT thus extinguishing the button s indicator 67 Chapter 5 Creating Patches Copying the Settings of Another Tone Tone Copy
529. o use MIDI messages to change Multi effects settings in realtime is called the Multi effects Controller p 115 Normally the Matrix Controller is used for making Patch settings and the Multi effects Controller for making settings to Performances Patches and Rhythm Sets However if the MIDI messages used as Matrix Controllers or Multi effects Controllers need not be changed for each individual Performance Patch or Rhythm Set or if you want to use specific MIDI messages for Matrix Controllers or Multi effects Controllers make the settings for the System Controller In other words you could call the System Controllers global Matrix Controllers Multi effects Controllers for the entire XV 88 You can use up to four System Controllers Control 1 4 System Control Assign 1 4 System Control Assign selects the MIDI message used as the System Controller CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 IE For more detailed information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 270 PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch Adjusting Tuning TUNE Parameters in this group adjust the tuning of the internal sound generator or change the temperament of the keyboard SYSTEM TUNE SYSTEM Master Kes Shift Scale Tune TUHE 1 44B D B OFF Master Master Tune Adjusts the overall tuning of the XV 88 The display shows the frequency of the A4 note center A Key Shift Master Key
530. odulator With this type Tones 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 are independent Use this type when you want to preserve PCM sounds or create and combine sounds for each Tone This type stacks the two filters together to intensify the characteristics of the filters The TVA for Tone 1 or 3 controls the volume balance between the two Tones This type mixes the sound of tone 1 3 and tone 2 4 applies a filter and then applies a booster to distort the waveform 73 Chapter 5 Creating Patches an This type applies a booster to distort the waveform and then combines the two filters The TVA for Tone 1 or 3 controls the volume balance between the two Tones and adjusts booster level This type uses a ring modulator to create new overtones and combines the two filters The Tone 1 3 TVA will control the volume balance of the two Tones adjusting the depth of ring modulator This type uses a ring modulator to create new overtones and in addition mixes in the sound of tone 2 4 and stacks the two filters Since the ring modulated sound can be mixed with Tone 2 4 Tone 1 3 TVA can adjust the amount of the ring modulated sound NI Z This type applies a filter to tone 1 3 and ring modulates it with tone 2 4 to create new overtones y al ve This type sends the filtered Tone 1 3 and Tone 2 4 through a ring modulator and then mixes in the sound of Tone 2 4 and applies a filter to the resu
531. of the booster The booster increases the A ring modulator multiplies the waveforms of two input signal in order to distort the sound This creates the 8 Tones with each other generating many new overtones distortion effect frequently used with electric guitars Higher brit 1 y 8 8 inharmonic partials which were not present in either settings will produce more distortion h P waveform Unless one of the waveforms is a sine wave evenly spaced frequency components will not usually be What is a Booster generated The Booster is used to distort the incoming signal As the pitch difference between the two waveforms changes the harmonic structure the result will be an Booster level unpitched metallic sound This function is suitable for creating metallic sounds such as bells In addition to using this to create distortion you can use the waveform WG1 of one of the Tones as an LFO which shifts the other waveform WG2 upward or downward to create modulation similar to PWM pulse Chapter 5 width modulation This parameter works best when you use it in conjunction with the Gain parameter Setti ng Effects for a Patch PATCH WAVE WAVE p 81 EFFECTS Uses WG1 as LFO Adjusts WG1 output IEN For details regarding effect settings refer to the pages shown below Applying Effects in Patch Mode or Rhythm Set Mode p 106 e Making Multi Effects Settings p 114 Making Chorus Settings p
532. of the function 4 When parameters in the different function page are to be set you can use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to make the settings HINT To cancel the operation press EXIT 5 Press ENTER to execute the function When the operation is completed the display will briefly indicate COMPLETED MEMO When certain functions are executed you are then returned to the original mode page 6 To return to the UTIL 1 page press EXIT To return to the GM PLAY page press UTILITY to make the indicator go dark 198 Initnializing GM Mode INIT GM I Made LEHTER1 IHIT I az o ex GM Initialize operation affects only GM mode data no data stored in the user memory is initialized If you wish to restore all of the XV 88 s settings to their factory values perform a Factory Reset p 191 Mode Initialize Mode There are two initialize methods Select either of them depending on the application GM Makes the basic General MIDI system settings using a General MIDI System On message GM2 Makes the basic General MIDI 2 system settings using a General MIDI 2 System On message Transmitting GM Mode Settings X FER TRAHSFER Tare Black LEHTEF 1 TO MIDI I BMICtr1 MIDI You cannot store GM mode settings in internal memory user memory If you wish to keep your GM mode settings you can transmit them as a MIDI message to an external MIDI device Prepare the external MIDI d
533. off parameters PATCH TVF TVF FILTER p 88 Cutoff Frequency the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on the waveform s frequency components won Since the values for the Cutoff parameters for each Tone are added to the values made in this setting if the Cutoff parameters are set to 127 maximum then no further changes are made even when a positive value is used for this setting Res Resonance Offset Resonance Offset alters the resonance of the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences between the resonance values set for each Tone in the Resonance parameter PATCH TVF TVF FILTER p 88 Resonance emphasizes the overtones in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound weh Since the values for the Resonance parameters for each Tone are added to the values made in this setting if the Resonance parameters are set to 127 maximum then no further changes are made even when a positive value is used for this setting Atk Attack Time Offset Attack Time Offset alters the attack time of the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences between the attack time values set for each Tone in the T1 parameters PATCH TVA TVA ENVELOPE p 92 Attack Time The time it takes for a sound to reach maximum volume after the key is pressed and sound begun Note Since the values for the T1 parameters for each Tone are added to the values made in this
534. oing what is referred to as Editing This chapter explains the procedures used in creating Performances and the functions of the Performance parameters How a Performance Is Organized A Performance is a collective set of assignments of the sixteen different Patches and Rhythm Sets Since a Performance can simultaneously handle 16 different sounds it allows you to play multiple Patches simultaneously layer or to play different Patches in different areas of the keyboard split and to create ensembles Performance Part 16 p Patch Rhythm Set How to Make the Performance Settings Start with an existing Performance and edit it to create a new Performance But before you do try to envision what the entire Performance will sound like and decide which Patch or Rhythm Set to assign to each of 16 Parts 1 Press PERFORM to access the PERFORM PLAY page and select the Performance whose settings you wish to modify p 35 HINT If you want to create all your Performances from the ground up rather than the Performances that have already been prepared carry out the Initialize operation p 185 2 Press EDIT to make the indicator light 3 Use the function buttons to select a display group The indicator for the button of the sel
535. oing what is referred to as Editing This chapter explains the procedures used in creating Rhythm Sets and the functions of the Rhythm Set parameters How a Rhythm Set Is Organized A Rhythm Set is a grouping of percussion instruments Rhythm Tones Rhythm Set Rhythm Tone Percussion instrument sound s mp xr mp 2 zm pom EU zm pom EU A percussion instrument Rhythm Tones consists of the following four elements WG Wave Generator Specifies the PCM waveform wave that is the basis of the sound and determines how the pitch of the sound will change The XV 88 has 1 083 different waveforms p 263 All Rhythm Sets built into the XV 88 consist of combinations of Rhythm Tones based on these waveforms Nore A Rhythm Tone percussion instrument has four wave generators TVF Time Variant Filter Specifies how the frequency components of the sound will change TVA Time Variant Amplifier Specifies the volume changes and the sound s position in a stereo soundfield Envelope You use Envelope to initiate changes to occur to a sound over time There are separate envelopes for Pitch TVF filter and TVA volume For example if you wish to modify the way in which the sound attacks or decays over time you would adjust the TVA envelope How to Make the Rhythm Set Settings Start with an existing Rhythm Set and edit it to create a new Rhythm Set Rhythm Se
536. ollowing chorus and reverb are handled with a different system wore In GM mode you cannot use Multi effects Chorus Chorus adds depth and spaciousness to the sound You can select whether to use this as a chorus effect or a delay effect he A GM exclusive Chorus can be used in GM mode Reverb Reverb adds the reverberation characteristics of halls or auditoriums Four different types are offered so you can select and use the type that suits your purpose uds A GM exclusive Reverb is used in GM mode Turning Effects On Off The XV 88 s onboard effects can be turned on off as a whole Turn these settings OFF when you wish to listen to the unprocessed sound as you create a sound or when you wish to use external effects processors instead of the built in effects Note When the XV 88 is put in a status wherein the internal effects are not in use then no effects are applied even when effects settings are made In this case an X mark appears to the right of the settings screen for the effect set to OFF i i3 Dutrut Assign Chorus Reverb OUTPUT J OUTPUT B 1271 B B Effect ON OFF settings are global XV 88 settings These settings cannot be made for each Patch or Performance individually 1 Press MULTI CHORUS REVERB to turn the effects processor on indicator lighted or off indicator extinguished EFFECTS MULTI CHORUS REVERB E3IE3IES MULTI Switches the Multi effects o
537. olor Depth Mode Time 1 It can also be set in terms of notes P Sixty fourth note triplet 2 Sixty fourth note Thirty second note triplet Thirty second note Sixteenth note triplet Dotted thirty second note Wave group Wave number L R Wave gain Tone switch Wave tempo sync FXM switch FXM color FXM depth Tone delay mode Tone delay time Value INT XP A XP B XP C XP D 0001 1083 6 0 6 12 dB OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1 4 1 17 NORMAL HOLD KEY OFF NORMAL KEY OFF DECAY 0 127 1 HAA AAAS 44 Sixteenth note ds Eighth note triplet A Dotted sixteenth note Eighth note ds Quarter note triplet D Dotted eighth note J Quarter note d Half note triplet dJ Dotted quarter note J Half note es Whole note triplet d Dotted half note Whole note es Double note triplet Dotted whole note e Double note 235 Parameter List LFO Group p 83 Display Parameter Value LFO1 WAVE Form LFO waveform SIN TRI SAW UP SAW DW SQR RND UP DW TRP S amp H CHS T Ofset LFO Level offset 100 50 0 50 100 T Rate LFO rate 0 127 1 T Detune LFO rate detune 0 127 T KeySync LFO key sync OFF ON T LFO1 FADE Fade Mode LFO fade mode ON IN ON OUT OFF IN OFF OUT T Fade Time LFO fade time 0 127 T LFO1 DELAY Delay Time LFO delay time 0 127 T Delay Keyfollow LFO delay time keyfollow 100 100 2 T LFO2 3 T LFO D
538. on memory cards Up to a total of 64 Patches and Rhythm Sets can be registered on the Favorite List 1 Make sure that the Patch or Rhythm Set you wish to register is selected 2 Hold down SHIFT and press PATCH FINDER The FAVORITE LIST page will appear LSHIFT1 LIST 3 FAVORITE Select lal 3 Usethe VALUE dial IINC DEC or numeric keys and specify the save destination number Mi No data is registered at the factory settings HINT By holding down SHIFT and pressing UNDO COMPARE you can cancel the registration of the Patch and Rhythm Set that is registered to the currently specified number You can press 4 amp or W to search for a registered number By holding down SHIFT and pressing A or W you can find the empty number to which no data is registered If no empty number can be found Favorite List Full appears in the display 4 Continue holding down SHIFT and the following display will appear FAVORITE PRegister to LIST Paice B LEHTEF 1 1 EUHDCO 5 Hold down SHIFT and press ENTER to execute the registration Registering Data Without Displaying the Favorite List You can register data to the Favorite List directly from the PATCH PLAY and RHYTHM PLAY pages This makes it simple to register data without having to bring up the FAVORITE LIST page or specify a destination number for the registration 1 Make sure that the Patch or Rhythm Set you wish
539. ontrast tuning the way MIDI messages are received and so on are called System functions This section explains how to make settings for the System functions and describes the functions of the different System parameters How to Make the System Function Settings 1 Press SYSTEM to make the indicator light The EDIT indicator lights simultaneously and the XV 88 is put into System mode 2 Use the function buttons to select a display group The indicator for the button of the selected display group begins blinking SYSTE M SETUP MIDI CONTROL TUNE ARPEGGIO D BEAM PREVIEW INFO 900 200 200 200 206 900 900 ooo 888 880 988 988 988 988 988 988 985 880 98 98 838 998 998 98 Use 4 or W to select a display page P oW Use 4 or gt to move the cursor to the parameter you wish to modify 5 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to modify the parameter value HINT If you ve made a mistake in setting the parameter value press UNDO COMPARE to restore the value to what it was 6 Repeat steps 2 5 to make the settings for the System function 7 When you finish making settings press EXIT or SYSTEM to return to the previous page Note System function settings are saved the instant a change is made in any of the parameter values Therefore no changes to the settings are lost even when the power is turned off and no other save procedures are necessary Functions of System Param
540. or is lit and off when the indicator is extinguished When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is extinguished Parts 1 8 are switched on and off and when the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit Parts 9 16 are switched on and off p 38 Mute Sw Mute Switch Mute Sw temporarily mutes MUTE or releases the mute OFF for the performance of each Part Use this setting when for example you want to use the instrument for karaoke by muting the Part playing the melody or when you want to play something using a separate sound module Mb The Mute Sw parameter does not turn the Part off but rather mutes the sound by setting the volume to 0 Therefore MIDI messages are still received Rx SWITCH Receive Switch CH 1 t Bank Select Program Change Fx SWITCHES OW OH CH 1 Wal Pan Exe H1d Bnd Mod Caf Pat RxSWITCHS OH OM OM OM ON OHI OH OH RxSWITCH determines whether MIDI messages for the following parameters in each MIDI channel are received ON or not received OFF Bank Select Receive Bank Select Sw itch Program Change Receive Program Change Switch Vol Receive Volume Switch Pan Receive Pan Switch Exp Receive Expression Switch Hid Receive Hold 1 Switch Bnd Receive Pitch Bend Switch Mod Receive Modulation Switch Caf Receive Channel Aftertouch Switch Paf Receive Polyphonic Aftertouch Switch Chapter 3 Creating Performances VELO CRV Velocity Curve CH 1 f Velocity Curua Phase Lock
541. ormation When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9 EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street ARD E1 Golf Heliopolis Cairo 11341 EGYPT TEL 20 2 417 1828 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 0262 218 429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 1 Melle St Braamfontein Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA P O Box 32918 Braamfontein 2017 Johannesbourg SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd 7 Werdmuller Centre Main Road Claremont 7708 SOUTH AFRICA P O BOX 23032 Claremont 7735 SOUTH AFRICA TEL 021 674 4030 CHINA Beijing Xinghai Musical Instruments Co Ltd 6 Huangmuchang Chao Yang District Beijing CHINA TEL 010 6774 7491 Shanghai Xingtong Acoustics Equipment CO Ltd 5F No 1500 Pingliang Road New East Club Plaza Shanghai CHINA TEL 021 5580 0800 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Co
542. ote Be aware that if Exclusive Protect is set to OFF User memory can be overwritten by System Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device even if Internal Write Protect is set to ON To prevent inadvertent overwriting of User memory it is recommended that both Internal Write Protect and Exclusive Protect be set to ON Exclusive Exclusive Protect The Exclusive Protect setting prevents System Exclusive messages received from an external MIDI device from rewriting user memory settings When this setting is ON the data cannot be rewritten Memory Card Related Settings CARD The XV 88 can use memory cards SmartMedia Use memory cards when you wish to save data for which there is no more room in the internal USER group or so that the data can be loaded into another XV 88 When you select 1 CARD in the UTIL 2 group the following CARD page will appear Select the function you wish to execute CARDI 1 2 3 4 3 IFOEHRT REHRME DELETEIFILE COFY INFO Before Using a Memory Card The XV 88 can use either the 3 3 or 5 V memory cards SmartMedia SmartMedia can be purchased at computer stores and vendors handling digital cameras Except while performing the File Copy operation p 189 be sure to turn off the power before inserting or removing a card If a memory card is inserted when the power is turned on the data in the memory card may be destroyed or the memory card may become unusab
543. otential of the XV 88 Selecting Patches The MIDI messages transmitted by the external MIDI device will be received by the XV 88 to select Patches as shown in the following table Group Number Bank Select Program Change MSB LSB Number USER 001 128 87 00 001 128 CD A 001 128 87 32 001 128 CD H 001 128 87 39 001 128 PR A 001 128 87 64 001 128 PR B 001 128 87 65 001 128 PR C 001 128 87 66 001 128 PR D 001 128 87 67 001 128 PR E 001 128 87 68 001 128 PR F 001 128 87 69 001 128 XP A 1 2 1 XP D 1 2 1 Depends on the Wave Expansion Board installed 2 Fixed Bank Select numbers are assigned to the Wave Expansion Board itself SR JV80 Number Bank Select Program Change Series MSB LSB Number SR JV80 01 001 128 89 00 001 128 SR JV80 01 129 256 89 O 001 128 SR JV80 02 001 128 8 02 001 128 SR JV80 02 129 256 8 03 001 128 SR JV80 65 001 128 91 00 001 128 SR JV80 65 129 256 91 01 001 128 SR JV80 99 001 128 91 68 001 128 SR JV80 99 129 256 91 69 001 128 D For details on the SRX Series refer to the owner s manual for the SRX Series Wave Expansion Board Example Selecting PR B Patch number 10 from an external MIDI device Transmit data to the XV 88 in the following order Numbers are given in decimal Controller number 0 Bank Select MSB value 87 Controller number 32 Bank Select LSB value 65 Program Change number 10 Selecting Rhythm Sets The MIDI messages transmitted by the external MIDI device will be
544. ou ve selected any of Parts 1 4 sliders 1 2 3 and 4 adjust Parts 1 2 3 and 4 respectively If you ve selected any of Parts 5 8 sliders 1 2 3 and 4 adjust Parts 5 6 7 and 8 respectively If you ve selected any of Parts 9 12 sliders 1 2 8 and 4 adjust Parts 9 10 11 and 12 respectively If you ve selected any of Parts 13 16 sliders 1 2 3 and 4 adjust Parts 13 14 15 and 16 respectively 4 Move the slider as you play to adjust the level volume of each Part as desired won If the MIDI Receive channels for multiple Parts are set to the same value the volume levels of several Parts could change at the same time Playing in Rhythm Set Mode In Rhythm Set mode you can play percussion instruments Rhythm Tones on the keyboard As the Rhythm Tone assigned to each key varies by the Rhythm Set selected you Chapter 2 can play a wide range of percussion instruments Selecting a Rhythm Set The XV 88 has eight Rhythm Set groups including the User group and Preset Groups A F and H with 4 Rhythm Sets in the User group 2 each in Presets A F and 9 Rhythm Sets in Preset H for a total of 25 Rhythm Sets In addition to these you can also select Rhythm Sets stored on memory cards SmartMedia What s more you can further expand your options by installing up to four optional Wave Expansion boards two SR JV80 two SRX Series enabling you to select from a large selection of
545. ource parameter PERFORM PATCH RHYTHM EFFECTS MFX CTRL 1 4 If you do not need to set different control sources for each Performance Patch Rhythm Set select SYS CTRL 1 4 and use the Control 1 4 parameters SYSTEM CONTROL SYS CTRL ASSIGN 1 4 to choose the MIDI messages that you wish to use for control 4 Specify the control destination the parameter to be controlled Destination parameter PERFORM PATCH RHYTHM EFFECTS MFX CTRL 1 4 5 Set the Control Sensitivity the amount of the effect that is applied Sens parameter PERFORM PATCH RHYTHM EFFECTS MFX CTRL 1 4 Adjusting the Keyboard Sens parameter SYSTEM CONTROL KEYBOARD Response Set the Keyboard to Vel parameter SYSTEM CONTROL KEYBOARD Produce a Fixed Velocity Saving and Loading Data Saving Performance Settings In Performance mode press UTILITY Select 1 WRITE on the UTIL 1 page Specify the writing destination ES WCIN Ut Press ENTER If a message of Internal Write Protect ON appears change it to OFF and press ENTER twice 225 Quick Reference of Procedures 226 Saving Patch Settings pow Me dp In Patch mode press UTILITY Select 1 WRITE on the UTIL 1 page Specify the writing destination Press ENTER If a message of Internal Write Protect ON appears change it to OFF and press ENTER twice If you wish to hear the sound of the Patch in the selected wr
546. ove the VALUE dial increases value increments so you can make large value changes faster INC and DEC Pressing INC increases the value and DEC decreases it Keep the button pressed for continuous adjustment For faster value increases keep INC pressed down and press DEC For decreasing value faster keep DEC pressed down and press INC If you press INC or DEC while holding down SHIFT the value increments will get bigger 0 9 Numeric Keys 0 9 Numeric Keys lets you directly specify a numerical value When you enter the number the value will blink This indicates that the value has not yet been finalized To finalize the value press the ENTER button To reverse the sign of the number hold down SHIFT and press 0 Nore Some parameters do not require you to press ENTER to finalize the value Chapter 1 lt Example 1 To enter a value of 38 gt Press 3 press 8 press ENTER lt Example 2 To enter a value of 60 gt While holding down SHIFT press 0 press 6 press 0 press ENTER HINT You can switch from a positive to negative numerical value anytime before you press ENTER Restoring a Previous Value Undo If after you change a value you decide that you want to go back to its original value before you made the change press UNDO COMPARE You can also put your change back in again by pressing the button once mo
547. p is the Part number If the display indicates part is the Part number the performance is a Single Performance so hold down SHIFT and press SOLO to change to a Layer Performance Mi The setting here is linked to the Key Mode parameter ZONE COMMON ZONE COMMON p 58 3 Confirm that the EDIT and LOCAL TX indicators are extinguished and press a Function button to select the Zone linked to the Part you want played lighting the button s indicator When the 1 8 9 16 indicator is out zones 1 8 can be selected and when the 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit zones 9 16 can be selected The Local Switch for the selected zone will be turned ON HINT At the factory settings there is a one to one correspondence between each of the Zones 1 16 and Parts 1 16 MEMO The setting here is linked to the setting at the Local parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI p 60 4 Repeat Step 3 to set the Local switch to ON for all Zones linked to the Parts you want to have play Splitting the Keyboard to Play Separate Patches in Different Sections Split If you ve selected a Layer Performance you can split the keyboard to play separate Patches with different sections of the keyboard As the note range that plays each Zone can be specified individually you can split the keyboard into a maximum of 16 sections For instance you can play strings in the lower range piano in the upper range and both sounds in the middle rang
548. p Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Delay Balance Delay Balance Adjust the volume balance between the overdrive sound that is sent through the delay and the overdrive sound that is not sent through the delay With a setting of D100 0W only the overdrive sound will be output With a setting of D0 100W only the overdrive sound that is sent through the delay will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 29 DISTORTION CHORUS This effect connects distortion and chorus in series The parameters are essentially the same as 26 OVERDRIVE CHORUS with the exception of the following two OD Drive Dist Drive Specify the amount of distortion OD Pan Dist Pan Specify the stereo location of the distortion sound Balance D O O R out Balance D Lin L out Balance W Distortion Rin 30 DISTO RTION FLANGER This effect connects distortion and flanger in series The parameters are essentially the same as in 27 OVERDRIVE FLANGER with the exception of the following two OD Drive Dist Drive Specify the amount of distortion OD Pan Dist Pan Specify the stereo location of the distortion sound Balance D L in O L out Feedback Distortion FI anger 23 O R out Balance D R
549. parameter RHYTHM WAVE WMT TUNE p 100 Fine Fine Tune Adjusts the pitch of the Rhythm Tone s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents Mb One cent is 1 100th of a semitone HINT Set the fine tuning for Waves comprising the Rhythm Tones with the Fine parameter RHYTHM WAVE WMT TUNE p 100 Random Random Pitch Depth Specifies the width of random pitch deviation that will occur each time a key is pressed If you do not want the pitch to change randomly set this to 0 The setting is adjustable in units of 1 cent 1 100th of a semitone PCH ENVELOPE Pitch Envelope Ha PCHf Derth l 5en s V Ti U T4 LB EHUELUOPEAR al al B B a B PCHE Til T2 T3 T3 Lil Le L3 L4 EHUELDFEI amp 4B 56 48 38 38 B B Here you can make pitch envelope settings changes in pitch over time Depth Pitch Envelope Depth Adjusts the effect of the pitch envelope Higher settings will cause the pitch envelope to produce greater change Negative settings will invert the shape of the envelope 100 Chapter 6 Creating Rhythm Sets V Sens Pitch Envelope Velocity Sensitivity Keyboard playing dynamics can be used to control the depth of the pitch envelope If you want the pitch envelope to have more effect for strongly played notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want the pitch envelope to have less effect for strongly played notes set this to a negative value V T1
550. parameter SYSTEM TUNE SYSTEM TUNE will change Global Parameter Control Not received in Performance mode and Patch mode O Reverb Parameters Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 05H 01H 01H F7H 01H 01H 01H ppH vvH Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 05H Sub ID 2 Global Parameter Control 01H Slot path length 01H Parameter ID width 01H Value width 01H Slot path MSB 01H Slot path LSB Effect 0101 Reverb ppH Parameter to be controlled vvH Value for the parameter pp 0 Reverb Type vv 00H Small Room vv 01H Medium Room vv 02H Large Room vv 03H Medium Hall vv 04H Large Hall vv 08H Plate pp 1 Reverb Time vv 00H 7FH 0 127 F7H EOX End Of Exclusive O Chorus Parameters Status Data byte Status FOH 7FH 7FH 04H 05H 01H 01H F7H 01H 01H 02H ppH vvH Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7FH ID number universal realtime message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 04H Sub ID 1 Device Control 05H Sub ID 2 Global Parameter Control 01H Slot path length 01H Parameter ID width 01H Value width 01H Slot path MSB 02H Slot path LSB Effect 0102 Chorus ppH Parameter to be controlled vvH Value for the parameter pp 0 Chorus Type vv 0 Chorus1 vv 1 Chorus2 vv 2 Chorus3 vv 3 Chorus4 vv 4 FB Chorus vv 5 Flanger pp 1 Mod Rate vv 00H 7FH 0 127 pp
551. peggios from the XV 88 keyboard Oo zi you press ARPEGGIO to turn this function on when a Single Performance is selected the single specified Part current Part will play arpeggios When a Layer Performance is selected an arpeggio will sound for the Zone specified by the Zone parameter ZONE ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO Mb The arpeggios played by the arpeggiator can be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector to external MIDI devices p 59 1 Make sure that the PLAY page of the sound generator mode PERFORM PATCH RHYTHM or GM is displayed N Press ARPEGGIO to turn the Arpeggiator on w If you wish to change how the arpeggio is played hold down ARPEGGIO to access the ARP SELECT page move the cursor to Style and change the setting HEP I Style Accent Oct Teneo SELECT I 1 16 2H4 m 128 Mb This setting is linked with the Style parameter In Patch Rhythm Set GM Mode Style parameter SYSTEM ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO p 174 In Performance Mode Style parameter ZONE ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO p 61 41 Chapter 2 Chapter 2 Playing There are 45 arpeggio styles available For selection refer to the following guideline Playing an Arpeggio According to the Timing Interval of a Note 1 4 1 32 Playing a Glissando GLISSANDO Playing a Bass Part SYNTH BASS HEAVY SLAP LIGHT SLAP WALK BASS Playing a Guitar RHYTHM GTR 1 5 3 FINGER STRUM GTR DOWN STRUM GTR UP STRUM GTR UP amp DN P
552. pending on Cutoff Frequency setting HINT To edit the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences in the Cutoff Frequency values set for each Tone set the Cut parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH MODIFY p 71 Resonance x Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region of the cutoff frequency adding character to the sound Excessively high settings can produce oscillation causing the sound to distort HINT To edit the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences in the Resonance values set for each Tone set the Res parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH MODIFY p 71 LPF BPF HPF PKG Level iah 4 4 A A n _ nA Frequency i Cutoff frequency B 9 4 s a gt i 5 i gt L3 i gt E 4 S i x x x E 4 N TN f i Low i i i ca i Keyfollow Cutoff Frequency Keyfollow Use this parameter if you want the cutoff frequency to change according to the key that is pressed Relative to the cutoff frequency at the C4 key center C positive settings will cause the cutoff frequency to rise for notes higher than C4 and negative settings will cause the cutoff frequency to fall for notes higher than C4 Higher settings produce more change Cutoff frequency Octave Chapter 5 Creating Patches TVF VELOCITY 1 TUF gU Cuotoff U Curve U Resonance VELOCITY l FIRED B V Cutof
553. portamento 3 Tochange the portamento settings press EDIT to make the indicator light Then press the CONTROL function button and press 4 amp or W to access the PATCH PORTAMNT page FATCH f Su Time Mode T9Fe Start PORTRMHTEOFE i8 LEGATO FATE FITCH 4 Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor over to Time Mode Type or Start I See p 76 for each parameter s functions 5 Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to get the value you want 6 Press EXIT to return to the PATCH PLAY page and play weh During Layer Performance the PORTAMENTO indicator goes out each time you change the Performance Also the PORTAMENTO indicator does not reflect Portamento on off switching information received from an external MIDI device 33 Chapter 2 Playing Using the Sliders to Modify the Sound in Realtime With the four sliders Palette Slider in the PALETTE section you can create sound variations or volume changes in realtime Memb The sound character and volume changes created using the sliders can be transmitted to the external MIDI devices p 170 Changing Sound Characters 1 Make sure that the PATCH PLAY page is displayed 2 Press FILTER ENV to light its indicator 3 Move the sliders while you play the XV 88 s keyboard to vary the sound To modify the brightness move the CUTOFF slider To change resonance move the RESONANCE slider To change att
554. produced in the range where the Key Range of each Tone and the Key Range for the Part overlap Key range specified for Performance r viciniam ey range specified for Patch The range in which notes will play whe If you attempt to raise the lower key higher than the upper key or to lower the upper key below the lower key the other value will be automatically modified to the same setting LFade Key Fade Width Lower U Fade Key Fade Width Upper L Fade and U Fade set the range within which the volume gradually fades as the velocity approaches the limits of the Key Range set in the Lower and Upper parameters Use this setting when for example you want to have adjacent Parts in Split mode switched smoothly The higher the values set the smoother the switch is between the Tones When you want the Tones to be switched instantly set these to 0 Level L Fade Lower Upper U Fade PERFORM MFX CH Performance MFX Channel FERF RM T MFR Control Channel MFA CH OFE MFX Control Channel Multi effects Control Channel This determines the channel that will be used for reception when using the Multi effects Controller to modify multi effects parameters in real time when the multi effects Source parameter PERFORM EFFECTS MFX TYPE p 114 is set to PERFORM I For details on the Multi effects Controller refer to p 115
555. put C2 slider output OFF INT MIDI BOTH C3 ASSIGN Assign C3 slider assign 2 Output C3 slider output OFF INT MIDI BOTH C4 ASSIGN Assign C4 slider assign 2 Output C4 slider output OFF INT MIDI BOTH SYS CTRL ASSIGN 1 Control 1 2 System control assign 1 2 2 SYS CTRL ASSIGN 2 Control 3 4 System control assign 3 4 2 1 OFF CC01 95 except 32 PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH OCT UP OCT DOWN START STOP TAP TEMPO PROG UP PROG DOWN 2 OFF CC01 95 except 32 PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH 250 Parameter List TUNE Group p 173 Display Parameter Value SYSTEM TUNE Master Master tune 415 3 466 2 Hz Key Shift Master key shift 24 24 semitone Scale Tune Scale tune switch OFF ON PATCH SCALE C B Scale tune C B 64 63 cent KEY SCALE C B Scale tune C B 64 63 cent ARPEGGIO Group p 174 Display Parameter Value ARPEGGIO Style Arpeggio style 1 Octave Range Octave range 3 3 Motif Motif 2 Beat Pattern Beat pattern 3 Accent Rate Accent rate 0 100 Shuffle Rate Shuffle rate 50 90 Key Velocity Key velocity REAL 1 127 Tempo Arpeggio tempo 20 250 1 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 32 PORTAMENTO A PORTAMENTO B GLISSANDO SEQUENCE A SEQUENCE B SEQUENCE C SEQUENCE D ECHO SYNTH BASS HEAVY SLAP LIGHT SLAP WALK BASS RHYTHM GTR 1 RHYTHM GTR 2 RHYTHM GTR 3 RHYTHM GTR 4 RHYTHM GTR 5 3 FINGER STRUM GTR UP STRUM GTR DOWN STRUM GTR UP amp DW PIANO BACKING CLAVI CHORD WALTZ SWING WALTZ REGGAE
556. r you can modify the settings of the currently selected Patch and then save the modified settings in User memory or a memory card The number of onboard Patches depends on the specific Wave Expansion Boards installed Nore XP C D Patches can be selected only if a Wave Expansion Board SRX Series is installed in the corresponding slot 1 Press PATCH to call up the PATCH PLAY page Patch number Patch group Patch name PATCH PR A 001 128vo0icePna PLAY Lone 2 kbd C 4 2 Select a Patch group or a bank USER Press USER to make the indicator light CD A H Press CARD and then press A H to make the indicator light PR A F Press PRESET and then press A F to make the indicator light PR H GM2 Press PRESET and then press H to make the indicator light XP A D Press EXP and then press A D to make the indicator light 29 Chapter 2 Playing 3 Selectthe Patch number Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to select a Patch HINT You can also select the Patch number by using the numeric keys In this case after specifying the number using the numeric keys press ENTER Also Using the Digit Hold function a Patch number can be selected simply by specifying the 1 s place number Express Patch Select Digit Hold With the Digit Hold function turned on the 100 s position and 10 s position will be fixed when the numeric keys are used to select a Patch This means that the numeric
557. r Kick 909 Kick 1 EE Rock PdHH Rock PdHH Jazz PdHH Rock PdHH HypidKick2 Maple Kick a JazzDry Kiek 808 Kick n C236 Old Kick Rock Kick Jazz Kick Dance Kick E Side Stick RockStick Dry Stick 2 RockStick 38 Wet SN Rock SN Jazz SN Old Fill SN EE Sere Ghost Rock Gst Snare Ghost Rock Gst 40 AmbientSN Rock Rim Jazz Rim Rock SN Fre Maple Tom 3 Rock TomL2 Jazz Tom L Elec Tom L2 EE Rock CIHH2 Rock CIHH2 Jazz CIHH1 Rock CIHH1 43 Rock Flm L2 Rock Flm L2 Jazz Flm L Elec Tom L1 EZE nockCiHH Rock CIHH1 Jazz CIHH2 Rock CIHH2 45 Maple Tom 2 Rock Tom M Jazz Tom M Elec Tom M EN Rock OpHH Rock OpHH Jazz OpHH Rock OpHH LE Pee Rock Fim Mo ROCK Fim M ua Jazz FIMM _ 0 EecTomM C348 Maple Tom 1 Rock Tom H Jazz Tom H Elec Tom H E Crash Cymbal Rock CrCym1 Jazz CrCym Rock CrCym1 50 Rock Flm H Rock Flm H Jazz Flm H Elec Tom H E Rock RdCym1 Rock RdCym1 Jazz RdCym Rock RdCym1 52 Crash 1 Rock China Rock RdCym1 Rock CrCym2 LL Rock RdCym2 Rock RdCym2 Rock RdCym2 Rock RdCym2 M 54 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 2 Tambourine 1 Tambourine 1 55 Rock CrCym2 Rock CrCym2 Crash 1 Rock Splash E Cowbell Lo Cowbell Lo Cowbell Lo Cowbell 57 Crash 1 Crash 1 Crash 2 China Cym ENE Cowbell Hi Cowbell Hi Cowbell Hi Vibraslap m et Ride Bell Ride Bell Ride Bell i 70s Kick 2 caleo Cga Mute Hi Cga Mute Hi Cga Mute Hi 70s Kick 1 S e1 Cga Mute Lo Cga Mute Lo Cga Mute Lo Dry Stick 62 Cga Slap Cga Slap Cga Slap 70s SN E Cga Open Hi Cga Open Hi Cga Open Hi Finger Snaps
558. r Zones 10 Move the cursor to Tempo and specify the speed of an arpeggio 11 After you finish making settings press EXIT Moving Your Hand Above the D Beam Controller to Apply Effects D Beam Controller The D Beam Controller is an easy to use controller you can Chapter 2 operate just by moving your hand over it By changing the function assigned to the controller you can add a variety of different effects to the sound The controller lets you add effects such as instantaneous changes in tone that are impossible to do with knobs and sliders MEMO The D Beam Controller is provided under license from Interactive Light Inc Note When selecting a Single Performance the effect is applied to the single specified Part current Part When a Layer Performance is selected the effect is applied to all Zones with Local switches set to ON and their linked Parts MEMO Tone changes made with the D Beam controller can also be sent to an external MIDI device p 59 1 Make sure that the PLAY page of the sound generator mode PERFORM PATCH RHYTHM or GM is displayed 2 Press D BEAM CONTROLLER ON to turn on the D Beam Controller 3 When changing the function to be controlled with the D Beam Controller hold down ON to display the D BEAM CONTROL page move the cursor to Assign then make the setting D BEAM Hzsisn QutEut Polarity CONTROL RCCBZ EFERTH B TH STHHDBHED EM us setting
559. r is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the flanged sound Balance D 2 Band O Balance W Feedback Feedback SH Fanger H Q Balance W pin Loe Sy PBT n aa Balance D Pre Dly Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the flanger sound is heard Rate Adjust the rate of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Fbk Feedback Level Adjust the amount of the processed sound that is returned fed back into the input Positive settings will return the sound in phase and negative settings will return the sound in reverse phase Phase Adjust the spatial spread of the sound Filter Type Select the type of filter OFF a filter will not be used LPF cut the frequency range above the cutoff frequency HPF cut the frequency range below the cutoff frequency Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Adjust the basic frequency of the filter LowGain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range 126 Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 16 STEP FLANGER The Step Flanger effect is a flanger in which the flanger pitch changes in
560. r number 83 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 53H vvH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 vv Control value O Portamento control Controller number 84 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 54H kkH OH FH ch 1 16 00H 7FH 0 127 n MIDI channel number kk source note number O RPN MSBI LSB Controller number 100 101 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 65H mmH BnH 64H 1H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm upper byte MSB of parameter number specified by RPN Il lower byte LSB of parameter number specified by RPN lt lt lt RPN gt gt gt When execute the GM Data Transfer Program Change Data Entry and following RPN messages will transmit Control Changes include RPN Registered Parameter Numbers which are extended When using RPNs first RPN Controller numbers 100 and 101 they can be sent in any order should be sent in order to select the parameter then Data Entry Controller numbers 6 and 38 should be sent to set the value Once RPN messages are received Data Entry messages that is received at the same MIDI channel after that are recognized as changing toward the value of the RPN messages In order not to make any mistakes transmitting RPN Null is recommended after setting parameters you need This device transmits the following RPNs RPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB LSB Notes 00H 00H mmH IIH Pitch Bend Sensitivity mm 00H 18H 0
561. racter and volume changes created using the Palette Sliders are passed on we Effects settings change as soon as you switch to a new Patch or Rhythm Set without being influenced by the Patch Remain setting Because of this certain effects settings can cause notes that were until then sounding to no longer be heard even though Patch Remain has been set to on MIDI Settings MIDI These parameters determine the MIDI channel settings and how exclusive messages are handled von The first display of the MIDI group will be different depending on the mode you were in when you pressed SYSTEM Performance mode Patch Rhythm Set mode or GM mode PERFORM MIDI Performance MIDI Local Remate OH OFF Make MIDI settings for Performance mode To make these PERFORM JControl Channel MIDI 1 15 settings press SYSTEM when you are in Performance mode and then press MIDI located in the row of function buttons Control Channel Performance Control Channel Performance Control Channel selects the MIDI receive channel used during switching of Performances when MIDI messages Program Change Bank Select are sent from an external MIDI device Set this to OFF if Performances are not to be switched from an external MIDI device For more details refer to Selecting XV 88 Sounds from an External MIDI Device p 206 note If the Control Channel parameter settings overlap with a Part s MIDI receive channel swit
562. racters max 12 RHYTHM COMMON Level Rhythm set level 0 127 Output Assign Output assign MFX OUTPUT A B INDIV 1 4 TONE RHYTHM TEMPO Clock Source Rhythm set clock source RHYTHM SYSTEM Tempo Rhythm set tempo 20 250 Appendices 237 Parameter List EFFECTS Group p 97 Display Parameter Value OUTPUT Output Assign Output assign MFX OUTPUT A B INDIV 1 4 T Output level 0 127 T Chorus Chorus send level 0 127 T Reverb Reverb send level 0 127 T RHYTHM MFX TYPE Type Multi effects type 1 RHYTHM MFX PRM 1 Multi effects parameters RHYTHM MFX CTRL Source Multi effects control source 1 2 3 4 2 Destination Multi effects control destination 1 2 3 4 3 Sens Multi effects control sensitivity 1 2 3 4 63 63 RHYTHM MFX OUT Output Multi effects output assign A B Dry Multi effects dry send level 0 127 Chorus Multi effects chorus send level 0 127 Reverb Multi effects reverb send level 0 127 RHYTHM CHO TYPE Type Chorus type OFF CHORUS DELAY RHYTHM CHO PRM 4 Chorus parameters RHYTHM CHO OUT Output Assign Chorus output assign A B Level Chorus level 0 127 Select Chorus output select MAIN REV MAIN REV RHYTHM REV TYPE Type Reverb type OFF REVERB SRV ROOM SRV HALL SRV PLATE RHYTHM REV PRM 5 Reverb parameters RHYTHM REV OUT Output Assign Reverb output assign A B Level Reverb level 0 127 1 Refer to Multi Effects Parameters p 241 2 OFF CC01 95 except 32 PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1
563. rameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value V T4 TVF Envelope Time 4 Velocity Sensitivity The parameter to use when you want key release speed to control the T4 Time 4 value of the TVF envelope If you want T4 time to be speeded up for quickly released notes set this parameter to a positive value If you want it to be slowed down set this to a negative value LO TVF Envelope Level 0 Sets the TVF envelope level L0 TVF Envelope Level 0 determines the degree to which the Cutoff frequency for the sound at the instant the key is pressed is altered relative to the reference Cutoff frequency the Cutoff frequency value set in the TVF FILTER page T1 T4 TVF Envelope Time 1 4 Specify the TVF envelope times T1 T4 Larger values result in longer times until the next cutoff frequency is reached for instance T2 controls the time from L1 until L2 is reached L1 L4 TVF Envelope Level 1 4 Specify the TVF envelope levels L1 L4 These settings specify how the cutoff frequency will change at each point relative to the standard cutoff frequency the cutoff frequency value specified in the TVF FILTER page T1 T2 T3 T4 Cutoff Frequenc D q y L0 Y Y Y Time Au le L3 k M Note on Note off Adjusting the Volume and Pan of a Rhythm Tone TVA Here you can make settings for the TVA Time Variant Amplifier This sets the volume change a
564. rash 1 REV RkChina REV China REV Cowbell REV WooGBlck REV Claves REV Conga REV Timbale REV Maracas REV Guiro REV Tamb 1 REV Tamb 2 REV Cuica REV Timpani REV Timp3 pp REV Timp3 mp REV Metro 267 Appendices Arpeggio Style List Style 1 4 1 6 1 8 1 12 1 16 1 32 PORTAMENTO A PORTAMENTO B GLISSANDO SEQUENCE A SEQUENCE B SEQUENCE C SEQUENCE D ECHO SYNTH BASS HEAVY SLAP LIGHT SLAP WALK BASS RHYTHM GTR 1 RHYTHM GTR 2 RHYTHM GTR 3 RHYTHM GTR 4 RHYTHM GTR 5 3 FINGER GTR STRUM GTR UP STRUM GTR DOWN STRUM GTR UP amp DW PIANO BACKING CLAVI CHORD WALTZ SWING WALTZ REGGAE PERCUSSION HARP SHAMISEN BOUND BALL RANDOM BOSSA NOVA SALSA MAMBO LATIN PERCUSSION SAMBA TANGO HOUSE LIMITLESS Motif all all all all all SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO BASS UP 1 8 BASS RND 1 3 TOP UP 1 6 all all GLISSANDO all all SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO BASS UP 1 8 BASS RND 1 3 TOP UP 1 6 all SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM DUAL UP DUAL DOWN DUAL UP amp DOWN DUAL RANDOM NOTE ORDER BASS UP 2 BASS UP 5 TOP UP 5 BASS UP 5 TOP UP 5 SINGLE UP SINGLE DOWN SINGLE UP amp DOWN SINGLE RANDOM NOTE ORDER GLISSANDO SINGLE UP SINGL
565. rating the XV 88 Read as needed IEJ These provide information from related reference pages Read as needed Contents Main Features uui d necon tuskuasasaqgaswassus pies asa enne n tnnt natn deat 13 Front and Rear Panel eere eeeeee nennen 14 Front Panel saion eet ien RR P iret eerie ee e P e toe 14 Rear Panel ote asm tetegetus iine Ennii detti ne Ee e ue veriti emi ege teste de dU 17 Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 eseueuuse 19 How the XV 88 Is Organized u n na eeo han oane a EEE oee tenente tenente entente teneret 19 Basic Str ctute etse te fee Ben n AER UIROS RATER as 19 Classification of XV 88 Sound Types U ua 20 Number Of Voices i ete teme rte tneri ule ep o easier Peter t leet aid beat 23 Basic Operations on the XV 88 eteni neeo aea ena aaeeea ea Erea o N riae nter nenne tenens 24 Switching Modes ss SS u u uu u uama 24 About the Function Buttons eeii etesen iiaia Kenia Seriate eie riike nnne 25 About the Cursor Buttons ra orea ER EEKE pE Re Snae tenete nnne nennes 26 Moditying a Value eee uhan e FU ten me aeter Dun aaa sah hinas aspas 27 ASSISTING a Nam ss E 28 Chapter 2 PLA Yi un u u uu uiw sce seco Danese 29 Playing in Patch M de e Z eere quan apa anna aane aa ew 29 Selecting a Patehi ss sa u s epe ERU P OE Diete des eE EEEE REE N E SEER 29 Selecting Favorite Patches from the Favorite List
566. rb unit that derives its sound from the vibration of a metallic plate You can also achieve unusual metallic sounding reverbs using SRV PLATE Source Reverb Source Selects the Reverb parameter settings that will be used by the Performance If you wish to use the Performance settings select PERFORM If you wish to use the settings of the Patch Rhythm Set assigned to one of the Parts select the Part number Nem If you have selected the Part number here the Part number will be displayed in the upper left of the REV parameter setting display of Performances Source Part la TsEe m IPRET 1 REG ide This parameter is not available when a Patch or Rhythm Set is being selected When Patch or Rhythm Set Settings Are Selected When the Patch or Rhythm Set s Reverb settings are selected those settings are shown in each of the Performance s REV settings pages and the settings can be then be changed as well Changes to Patch or Rhythm Set Reverb parameter settings are lost when another Patch or Rhythm Set is selected To keep the modified settings save the Patch Rhythm Set settings p 164 REV PRM REV Parameter rart 1 f Tre Time HF Dame Fbk FEN PFH STAGE 84 Saa B Sets the parameter for the Reverb selected by the Reverb type The parameters that can be set depend on Reverb you ve selected Note When the Type parameter in the REV TYPE page is set to 00 OFF the REV PRM page
567. re The Undo function can be used when making changes to settings in the sound generator section This is convenient when you want to undo changes or when you want to compare the sound before and after a change is made 27 Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 Assigning a Name The XV 88 lets you assign names to Patches Performances and Rhythm Sets The procedure is the same for any type of data To assign a name use 4 P to move the cursor to the location where you wish to input a character Then use the VALUE dial or INC DEC or the Numeric Keys to input a character Available characters symbols space A Z a z 0 9 amp lt gt dos copy Using the Numeric Keys The numeric keys are used to input the numerals printed on each key as well as the characters assigned to each key see the table below Each time you press a numeric key the display will cycle through the numeral and characters printed above the key To specify a lowercase character hold down SHIFT as you press the numeric key Numeric Key Character 1 ABC 2 DEF 3 GHI 4 JKL 5 MNO 6 POR 7 STU 8 V WX 9 YZ 0 space Convenient Functions While you are holding down SHIFT the screen will show three functions that are convenient when entering a name To use each function hold down SHIFT and press the appropriate function button PERFORM JC Sea Teme late HANE 4 CSHIFTI SHIFT Bal IHS I
568. re to program such an envelope you would be attempting to shape a portion of the sound that simply doesn t exist and the envelope would have no effect Cautions When Using a Loop Waveform With many acoustic instruments such as piano and sax extreme timbral changes occur during the first few moments of each note This initial attack is what defines much of the instruments character For such waveforms it is best to use the complex tonal changes of the attack portion of the waveform just as they are and to use the envelope only to modify the decay portion If you attempt to use the envelope to modify the attack portion as well the characteristics of the original waveform may prevent you from getting the sound that you intend Level Looped portion Tone change stored with the wave Time Envelope for the TVF filter Resulting tone change Functions of Patch Parameters This section explains the functions the different Patch parameters have as well as the composition of these parameters EDIT PATCH COMMON EFFECTS CONTROL WAVE LFO PITCH TVF TVA M Parameters marked with a can be controlled using specified MIDI messages Matrix Controller Settings in the Matrix Control page will determine how these parameters are controlled p 78 p 79 Settings Common to the Entire Patch COMMON On this display you can assign a name to a Patch and set the
569. rea being affected Mid1 Gain Middlel Gain Adjust the gain for the area specified by the Middle 1 Frequency and Q settings Mid2 Freq Middle 2 Frequency Adjust the frequency of Middle 2 mid range Mid2 Q Middle 2 Q This parameter adjusts the width of the area around the Middle 2 Frequency that will be affected by the Gain setting Higher values of Q will result in a narrower area being affected Mid2 Gain Middle 2 Gain Adjust the gain for the area specified by the Middle 2 Frequency and Q settings Lev Output Level Adjust the output level 02 OVERDRIVE This effect creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers gt L out gt R out Drive Adjust the degree of distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion Level Output Level Adjust the output level Low Gain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Amp Type Amp Simulator Type Select the type of guitar amp SMALL small amp BUILT IN single unit type amp 2 STACK large double stack amp 3 STACK large triple stack amp Pan Output Pan Adjust the stereo location of the output sound L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right 119 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 03 DISTORTION This effect produces a more intense distortion than Overdrive Lin
570. rmances Source PT sre T YPE S1 STEREO E PART 1 This parameter is not available when a Patch or Rhythm Set is being selected When Patch or Rhythm Set Settings Are Selected When the Patch or Rhythm Set s Multi effects settings are selected those settings are shown in each of the Performance s MFX settings pages and the settings can be then be changed as well Changes to Patch or Rhythm Set Multi effects parameter settings are lost when another Patch or Rhythm Set is selected To keep the modified settings save the Patch Rhythm Set settings p 164 Chapter 7 Adding Effects MFX PRM MFX Parameter PERFORM LowFrea Lowsain Hi Fre4 Hi Gain HF PREM 1 za 4686 4 MEX Parameter sets the parameters for the Multi effects selected by the Multi effects type For more detailed information on the parameters that can be set in each Multi effect please refer to Multi Effects Types p 117 yon When the Type parameter in the MFX TYPE page is set to 00 ITHROUGH the MFX PRM page will not be displayed MFX CTRL MFX Control PERFORM 1 Source Destination Sens HF CTELA OFE OFF B Use this when you want to change the Multi effects parameters in realtime using the specified MIDI messages the Type parameter in the MFX TYPE page is set to 00 THROUGH the MFX CTRL page will not be displayed n Performance mode when the Source parameter in the MFX TYPE page is set to PERFORM yo
571. rmation 01H Sub ID 2 Identity Request F7H EOX End Of Exclusive When this message is received Identity Reply message p 278 will be transmitted OGM1 System On Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7FH 09H 01H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 01H Sub ID 2 General MIDI 1 On F7H EOX End Of Exclusive When this messages is received this instrument will turn to the GM1 mode Not received when the Rx GM On parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI is OFF 273 MIDI Implementation O GM2 System On Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7FH 09H 03H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 03H Sub ID 2 General MIDI 2 On F7H EOX End Of Exclusive When this messages is received this instrument will turn to the GM2 mode Not received when the Rx GM2 On parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI is OFF OGM System Off Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH 7F 09H 02H F7H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH ID number Universal Non realtime Message 7FH Device ID Broadcast 09H Sub ID 1 General MIDI Message 02H Sub ID 2 General MIDI Off F7H EOX End Of Exclusive When this messages is received this instrument will return to the Performance mode
572. rmine how each Rhythm Tone is controlled Bend mend Envelore Mode HH COHTROL 1 SUSTRIH A B t Mute Grour Assign Tare COHTROL 1 OFE MULTI Bend Range Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones 4 octaves that will occur when the Pitch Bend Lever is moved The amount of change when the lever is tilted is set to the same value for both left and right sides Envelope Mode Usually when a looped Wave p 95 is selected sound will continue as long as a key remains pressed Select NO SUSTAIN if you want sound to decay naturally even if the key is not released gt If a one shot waveform p 95 is selected it will not sustain even if this parameter is set to SUSTAIN Mute Group On an actual acoustic drum set an open hi hat and a closed hi hat sound can never occur simultaneously To reproduce the reality of this situation you can set up a Mute Group The Mute Group function allows you to designate two or more Rhythm Tones that are not allowed to sound simultaneously Up to 31 Mute Groups can be used Rhythm Tones that are not belong to any such group should be set to OFF Assign Type Assign Type sets the way sounds are played when the same key is pressed a number of times MULTI The sounds produced by pressing the same key are layered Even with continuous sounds where the sound plays for an extended time such as with crash cymbals the sounds are layered without previously played sounds being eliminat
573. rnal MIDI sequencer MIDI OUT B Roland E O oJ a reum m o EI B BBB Ss j s s s exec XWV BB s earn XV 88 3 Call up the PLAY page of the sound generator mode PERFORM PATCH RHYTHM GM 4 Pressing the following buttons allows the remote control of external sequencers SHIFT 4 NEXT SONG Selects the next song SHIFT W PREV SONG Selects the previous song SHIFT 4 RESET Returns to the beginning of the song SHIFT START STOP Starts and stops performance of the song Nem Holding down SHIFT while pressing 4 amp or W in a PLAY page selects the song before or after the Song Number set with the Song Number parameter p 178 Note Some sequencers cannot be started or stopped without receiving the MIDI Clock F8h and settings on certain sequencers also cannot be changed Please use a sequencer able to perform START STOP without requiring reception of the MIDI Clock F8h For more detailed information refer to the owner s manual for your sequencer 204 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 Playing the XV 88 s Sound Generator from an External MIDI Device 1 Setthe COMPUTER switch on the XV 88 s rear panel to MIDI won The new setting of the COMPUTER switch will take effect when the power is turned on Before changing the setting of the CO
574. rom the OUTPUT and PHONES jacks About the Local Switch The switch that connects and disconnects the MIDI connection between the keyboard controller section and the sound generator section is called the Local switch Since essential information describing what is being played on the keyboard won t reach the sound generator if the Local switch is set to OFF the Local switch should normally be left ON However if while performing you want to send that performance data to an external sequencer as MIDI messages to be recorded you then perform with the externally connected MIDI sequencer set to MIDI Thru whereby data received from MIDI IN is then output from the MIDI OUT with no changes made to the data the XV 88 s Local switch to OFF and the MIDI Transmit switch and MIDI Receive switch to ON Sequencer Recording MIDI Thru On MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN Transmit Receive Switch On Switch On Sound Generator X Section Local Switch Off Keyboard Controller Section In this case the data sent over two paths i e the data sent directly from the keyboard controller section and the data sent from the keyboard controller section via the external sequencer ends up being sent to the sound generator section simultaneously Thus for example even when you play a C key only once the note C cannot be sounded correctly as the sound is played by the sound generator section
575. rporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD 140 amp 142 Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur MALAYSIA TEL 03 2144 3333 PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 6846 3676 CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014 Bedok Industrial Park E 02 2148 SINGAPORE 489980 TEL 6243 9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Verng NakornKasem Soi 2 Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music 138 Tran Quang Khai St District 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL 08 844 4068 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL 02 9982 8266 NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Ltd 32 Shaddock Street Mount Eden Auckland NEW ZEALAND TEL 09 3098 715 CENTRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Av Santa Fe 2055 1123 Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL 011 4508 2700 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach In
576. ry Settings in the temporary area are temporary and will be lost when the power is turned off or when you select another Performance Patch Rhythm Set To keep the settings you have modified you must write them into rewritable memory Rewritable Memory System Memory System memory stores system parameter settings that determine how the XV 88 functions Any time you make changes in the system parameters such changes are automatically stored in system memory you don t need to perform a save These settings are non volatile so they are retained even while the power is turned off User Memory User memory is where you normally store the data you need User memory is capable of storing the data for 64 Performances 128 Patches and four Rhythm Sets Memory Card SmartMedia Memory cards are read write cards that allow you to save the Patch Performance Rhythm Set System and Favorite List settings stored in the internal memory as one file Save and return them as needed to the XV 88 Load You can use memory cards to store data for which there is no room in internal user memory or data which you wish to use on another XV 88 won Memory cards are not included They are available from your retailer Non Rewritable Memory Preset Memory Data in Preset memory Patch PR A F H Performance PR A B Rhythm Set PR A F H cannot be rewritten However you can call up settings from preset memory into the temporary
577. rying out changes in the one to one connections between the Zones MIDI Transmit and Receive channels and Parts you can obtain even more advanced use of the instrument However you must remain aware at all times of the MIDI channel to which each Zone is set and the channel each Part is using to receive MIDI messages lest you run into problems such as tones other than the intended tones being played or absence of sound even when the keys are played ra In this manual the expression the Zone and Part are linked refers to the condition whereby a Zone s MIDI transmit channel and a Part s MIDI receive channel are matched in this one to one relationship Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 Number of Voices The XV 88 is able to play up to 128 notes simultaneously The following paragraphs discuss what this means and what will happen when more than 128 simultaneous voices are requested from the XV 88 Calculating the Number of Voices Being Used The XV 88 is able to play up to 128 notes simultaneously The polyphony or the number of voices sounds does not refer only to the number of sounds actually being played but changes according to the number of tones used in the Patches and the number of Waves used in the tones The following method is used to calculate the number of sounds used for one Patch being played Number of Sounds Being Played x Number of Tones Used by Patches Being Played x Number of Waves Used in t
578. s 4 POLY 059 Breathy Brs 3 POLY 123 Shadows 4 POLY 059 Brite Vox 1 4 POLY 123 BPFsweep Mod3 POLY 060 3OscBrass 3 POLY 124 Helium Queen 4 MONO 060 Brite Vox 2 4 POLY 124 Queen V 6 POLY 061 P5Polymod 2 POLY 125 Sci FiFXx4 1 POLY 061 Ooh Aah Mod 4 POLY 125 SkinnyBounce 2 POLY 062 Triumph Brs 3 POLY 126 Perky Noize 3 POLY 062 Vocals Ooh 4 POLY 126 SquareBounce 3 POLY 063 Techno Dream 3 POLY 127 Droplet 3 POLY 063 Vocals Scat 6 POLY 127 Galactic 8 POLY 064 Organizer 3 POLY 128 Rain Forest 4 POLY 064 Vocals Boys 6 POLY 128 Powerwiggle 3 POLY Voice number of voice Appendices 255 PR F Preset F Group No Name Voice Key Assign No Name Voice Key Assign 001 80s Retrosyn 2 POLY 065 Kickin Bass 2 MONO 002 PowerStack 3 POLY 066 Sub Zero 4 MONO 003 Don t Jump 8 POLY 067 Liquid Bass 2 MONO 004 Big Bubbles 3 POLY 068 Hefty Bass 2 MONO 005 X mod Sweep 1 POLY 069 SevereOwBs 4 MONO 006 Bag O Bones 6 POLY 070 Chime Bells 4 POLY 007 AirSoThin 2 POLY 071 Celestabox 1 POLY 008 Analogical 4 POLY 072 Brass Tubes 4 POLY 009 Waspy Pulse 2 POLY 073 Dreams East 3 POLY 010 Soaring Saws 6 MONO 074 Synergistic 2 POLY 011 Square Roots 2 MONO 075 Andreas Cave 4 POLY 012 BOG 3 MONO 076 AmbiPizza 5 POLY 013 Talking Box 3 MONO 077 Voxy Nylon 3 POLY 014 Retro Lead 2 MONO 078 EastrnEurope 3 POLY 015 LivinglnSync 2 MONO 079 Celtic Harp 2 POLY 016 Leads United 4 MONO 080 Reso Sitar 2 POLY 017 Dirty Sync 2 MONO 081 TheGanges 3 POLY 018 DistortaSync 1 MONO 082 Mountai
579. s CI HiHat AgogoBells AgogoBells 69 Cabasa Up Cabasa Up Cabasa Up 909 NZ HiHat Cabasa Up Cabasa Up um Maracas Maracas Maracas 70s Op HiHat Maracas Maracas 71 ShortWhistle ShortWhistle ShortWhistle Cabasa Up Soft Pad A Cabasa Down co 1 Long Whistle Long Whistle 1 Long Whistle Long Whistle Soft Pad BU Cabasa Cut Ec Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro REV RkOpHH f Long Guiro 808 Kick 74 Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Tambourine 2 Long Guiro 808 SN E Claves Claves Claves REV JzOpHH f Claves DIGI Bell 1 76 WoodBlock Hi WoodBlock Hi WoodBlock Hi Scratch 2 Wood Block 808 SN WoodBlock Lo WoodBlock Lo WoodBlock Lo Mute Triangl Wood Block 808 Kick M 7s Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica 909 CI HiHat Cuica Spectrum 79 Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Triangl Cuica 808 Kick S so Mute Triangl Mute Triangl Mute Triangl 909 CI HiHat Open Triangl Spectrum 81 Open Triangl Open Triangl Open Triangl Cabasa Open Triangl 808 Kick E Cabasa Cut Cabasa Cut Cabasa Cut 909 Op HiHat Cabasa Cut Spectrum 83 Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum Spectrum 808 Kick caa Wind Chimes Wind Chimes 1 Wind Chimes Maple Kick Wind Chimes 808 Kick mss Wood Block Wood Block Wood Block Woody Stick Wood Block Feedbackwave 86 Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Maple SN Cga Slap 808 Kick e7 Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo SN Roll Dry Tom Lo Feedbackwave 88 Lite Kick Lite Kick Lite Kick Maple Tom 3 Lite Kick Pop Voice Hybrid Kick2 Hybrid Kick2 Hybri
580. s data from memory card into the XV 88 s memory p 190 SAVE This function saves data to memory card p 190 FACTORY RESET This function resets all the XV 88 s settings to their factory default values p 191 Basic Procedure in Utility Mode won In order to use a memory card you must first turn off the power and then insert a memory card into the MEMORY CARD slot as follows MEMORY CARD Insert with the surface with the gold connector facing up 1 Press UTILITY getting its indicator to start blinking The XV 88 will switch to Utility mode won The data handled in the Save Copy and Initialize procedures differs depending on the sound generator mode Press UTILITY from within the desired sound generator mode 2 Press A or W to select the group UTIL 1 UTIL 2 containing the function you want 179 Chapter 10 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode 3 Use 4 or toselect the desired function the function name will blink and press ENTER The display for the desired function will appear HINT Youcan also access the desired function page by using the numeric keys or function buttons to specify the number of the function Ifyou selected the UTIL 2 group function 1 CARD the CARD page will appear Here you can once again select the desired function 4 When parameters in the different function page are
581. s set with User PR A F 001 002 4 Note XP A D 001 5 If the Type parameter has been set to PERFORM CARD i 3 I PATCH or RHYTHM you must specify the first SYSTEM Card t 6 memory location number of the transmission F LIST Card 6 destination 1 There are no Performances except in PR A and B no selection is available Chapter 10 2 Data is moved within the User Memory as a block and Performances Patches and Rhythm Sets are overwritten 3 After specifying a file number set the range of the block to be transmitted 4 Data in PR H is GM data and so cannot be transmitted 5 Depends on the Wave Expansion Board installed 6 Specify a file number 187 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode Protecting the Internal Memory PROTECT This feature helps prevent the accidental overwriting of user memory to ensure that Performance Patch or Rhythm Set data is not accidentally erased WEITE I Internal Exclusive FROTECT OW OFF Internal Internal Write Protect The Internal Write Protect setting prevents the Write operation from accidentally overwriting user memory locations When this is set to ON the data cannot be rewritten Data can be rewritten when it is at OFF When the XV 88 s power is turned on this setting is automatically turned on You will need to turn it off before writing data to the user memory It is also possible to turn this setting off during the Write procedure N
582. s setting is linked with the Polarity parameter In Patch Rhythm Set GM Mode Polarity parameter SYSTEM D BEAM D BEAM CONTROL p 177 In Performance Mode Polarity parameter ZONE D BEAM D BEAM CONTROL p 63 6 When changing the range to be controlled by the D Beam Controller hold down ON and press W to display the D BEAM RANGE page move the cursor to Lower or Upper then make the setting D BEAM Lower UPrer FAHGE 1 B 127 46 Set the lower limit for the range with the Lower parameter and the upper limit for the range with the Upper parameter note It is not possible to set the lower limit value above the upper limit nor can you set the upper limit value below the lower limit MED This setting is linked with the Lower Upper parameter In Patch Rhythm Set GM Mode Lower Upper parameter SYSTEM D BEAM D BEAM RANGE p 177 In Performance Mode Lower Upper parameter ZONE D BEAM D BEAM RANGE p 64 7 When changing the sensitivity of the D Beam Controller hold down ON and press W to display the D BEAM SENS page then make the setting D BEAM T D Beam Sensitivity SEHS I 2 The higher the value set the more readily the D Beam Controller goes into effect Ordinarily this is set to 5 MEMO This setting is linked with the D Beam Sensitivity parameter In Patch Rhythm Set GM Mode D Beam Sensitivity parameter SYSTEM D BEAM D BEAM SENS p 177 In Performance Mode D Beam S
583. se 185 Initialize mode GM senes 198 Internal Internal write protect sess 180 186 188 191 J Just temperament s ennierniain ieii n a a a tae ea 174 K Key Ira aaa au NEEE 76 Key fade width lower Pat eene his cete a kusa apu m kun huy ai ese Hx Moa e 51 Tenes coectetuer tlc beetle eet breed ees 73 Key fade width upper Parton UA TS Saha eats Tone Key Mode KEY RANG Parte NIE i a e tl reete age tre 51 ZONE rinse 59 KEY RANGE group terieri a 59 Key range lower Patbol2cnxs ek nc NES dU Dade ode EENE de 51 Part Tone Zone KEY SCALE EEEE 174 ieat i IENE E E E E E ie RITU 173 Key Velocity SYSECI PE 176 LION pesce PD R MEE EUH 63 KEYBOARD 4 25 enero deter d tete esie i eed teen 171 Keyboard controller section sse 19 Keyboard sensitivity sss 171 Keyboard velocity sireenit sie ereta aE 171 Keyfollow Cutoff frequency keyfollow 88 Pan keyfollow 91 Pitch keyfollow 86 Key SYAO aka HT ARR HERI REO EATER t e Ht 83 L L Fade Key fade width lower Part Key fade width lower Tone Velocity fade width lower Rhythm Wave 99 Velocity fade width lower Tone see 73 LO Pitch envelope level 0 Rhythm Tone Pitch envelope level 0 Tone sse TVF envelope level 0 Rhythm Tone T TVF envelope
584. se the XV 88 as a standalone keyboard instrument you may really not need to know much at all about MIDI However the following MIDI related information is provided so you can play the XV 88 using an external MIDI device or master other advanced techniques About MIDI Connectors The XV 88 is equipped with the three types of MIDI connectors each which works differently MIDI IN Connector This connector receives MIDI messages that are transmitted from external MIDI devices The XV 88 can receive these messages to play notes or select sounds etc MIDI OUT Connector This connector transmits MIDI messages to external MIDI devices The XV 88 s MIDI OUT connector is used for sending the performance data of the keyboard controller section as well as data used for saving various settings and patterns Bulk Dump p 185 MIDI THRU Connector MIDI messages received at MIDI IN are re transmitted without change from this connector to an external MIDI device Use this in situations such as when you use multiple MIDI devices simultaneously MIDI Channels and Multi mbral Sound Generators MIDI transmits many types of data over a single MIDI cable This is made possible by the concept of MIDI channels MIDI channels allow messages intended for a given instrument to be distinguished from messages intended for another instrument In some ways MIDI channels are similar to television channels By changing the channel on a television
585. sed for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly N CAUTION Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets sec ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING A Before using this unit make sure to read the instructions below and the Owner s Manual on the unit The only exception would be where this manual provides specific instructions which should be followed in order to put in place user installable options see Quick Start p 4 p 10 Do not open or perform any internal modifications Q When using the unit with a rack or stand recom mended by Roland the rack or stand must be carefully placed so it is level and sure to remain stable If not using a rack or stand you still need to make sure that any location you choose for placing the unit provides a level surface that will properly support the unit and keep it from wobbling Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage S the cord producing severed elements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards n households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of AN following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit Protect the unit from
586. setting if the T1 parameters are set to 127 maximum then no further changes are made even when a positive value is used for this setting 71 Chapter 5 Creating Patches Rel Release Time Offset Release Time Offset alters the release time of the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences between the release time values set for each Tone in the T4 parameters PATCH TVA TVA ENVELOPE p 92 Release Time The time from when you take your finger off the key until the sound disappears y Since the values for the T4 parameters for each Tone are added to the values made in this setting if the T4 parameters are set to 127 maximum then no further changes are made even when a positive value is used for this setting Velocity Sens Velocity Sensitivity Offset Velocity Sensitivity Offset alters the Velocity Sensitivity of the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences between the Velocity Sensitivity values set for each Tone in the parameters below e V Cutoff parameter PATCH TVF TVF VELOCITY p 89 e V Sens parameter PATCH TVA TV A p 90 Velocity Pressure with which the key is pressed won Since this settings value is added to the V Cutoff and V Sens parameter values for each Tone if the V Cutoff and V Sens parameter values are set to 63 maximum then no further changes are made even when a positive value is used for this setting TMT VELO CONTROL TMT Velocity Control
587. sh to delete Press ENTER Checking the Free Area of a Memory Card etc Press UTILITY Select 1 CARD on the UTIL 2 page i BEEN MU cp PS gn Sp Select 5 INFO Controlling External MIDI Devices Setting the MIDI Transmit Channel for Performance Mode for each Zone Channel parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI Turning the MIDI Transmit Switch On Off for Performance Mode for each Zone Tx parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI Setting the MIDI Transmit Channel for Patch Rhythm Set Mode Tx Ch parameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI Turning On Off the Transmit Switch of Program Change Message Program parameter SYSTEM MIDI TRANSMIT MIDI Turning On Off the Transmit Switch of Bank Select Messages Bank Sel parameter SYSTEM MIDI TRANSMIT MIDT Switching Multiple Tones on External MIDI Devices at Once When Switching the Performance 1 Set the Tx parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI of the Zone to be used to ON 2 Setthe Bank Select MSB LSB parameter ZONE EXT CONTROL EXT PC to match the Bank Select of the external MIDI device 3 Setthe P C parameter ZONE EXT CONTROL EXT P C to match the Program Change number for the Tone you want the external MIDI device to select 4 Savethe Performance 5 Switch to the saved Performance from other Performances 227 Quick Reference of Procedures 228 Controlling the XV 88 from an External MIDI Device
588. sitivity Tone 87 TVA envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 104 TVA envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity Tone 92 TVF envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity Rhythm Tone 103 TVF envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity Tone 90 w WAVES ede er e ERR RUNE et e e ets 81 Wave expansion board SR JV80 series eret eere re er Ep Es 29 40 SRX seri s i isi ce et ede iie eere 40 Wave expansion board installation slot l 18 Wave gain Rhythm Waye u A E A S 98 Tener as sam an EEEN EERE ET 81 WAVE group Patches dicebat Etc tees it 81 Rhythm Set s rereana rneer aaae rere AR eaen EAN SEEE TEn 98 Wave group Rhythm Wave esiosan dii ua a EENE 98 Tone Wave level 99 Wave number Rhythm Wave ccccsccsccsesscssesessesseseeeseesessessesesneseeseseeseassseeseaneseenesees 98 Tone Wave pan Wave switch Wave Tempo Sync Rhythm Wave Tone Waveform list WMT TUNE uy WMT VEL RANG upyasha nennen WMT Velocity Control sse WMT velocity control switch 7 WMT WANE 5a tdt edt has aaa fd e E WRITE cef ote t PRU UTERE RENDERE GIAI TNR rer 164 180 WRITE PROTECT 164 180 186 188 191 Write protect seal seseorg enni aei E eter eden 167 188 Zone parameters Zo esetinesl uuu u ua awa aa uuu a 83 ZONE COMMON u seen Zone mode
589. smit switch is turned off will not be transmitted Pan External Pan If you want Pan messages to also be transmitted when you select a Performance specify the desired value 0 127 for the Zone Turn this parameter NO SEND if you do not want this data to be transmitted Note The data of the Zone for which the Transmit switch is turned off will not be transmitted 60 Chapter 4 Zone Settings Arpeggiator Settings ARPEGGIO This is where the settings used in performing arpeggios in Performance mode are made EM When arpeggios are performed in Patch Rhythm Set GM mode the arpeggio settings are made in System mode p 174 ARPEGGIO RFFEGGIOI Styl e Octave kange 4 LATIH FERCUSSIOHI B ARPEGGIO Motif Beat Pattern 1 SINGLE UPEDOWH AGOGO AE PEGGIOF Accent Rate Shuffle Fate 1 HAS SB HEPEGGIUgKes lUselocits Zone Temrotzs 523 I REAL 1l l1zB Style Arpeggio Style Specifies the basic way in which the arpeggio will be played Select one of the following 45 types 1 4 The rhythm will be divided in quarter notes 1 6 The rhythm will be divided in quarter note triplets 1 8 The rhythm will be divided in eighth notes 1 12 The rhythm will be divided in eighth note triplets 1 16 The rhythm will be divided in 16th notes 1 32 The rhythm will be divided in 32nd notes PORTAMENTO A B A style using the portamento effect GLISSANDO A glissando style SEQUENCE A D Styles for sequenced pa
590. sound that is to be returned to the input Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase Higher settings will produce a more distinctive sound Phase Adjust the spaciousness of the flanger sound Filter Filter Type OFF No filter is used LPF The frequency region above the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut HPF The frequency region below the Cutoff Freq setting will be cut Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Sets the cutoff frequency when a specific frequency band is cut off by a filter 153 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Step Rate Step Rate Switch Step Rate Determines whether the pitch is changed in a stepped fashion ON or not OFF And adjust the rate at which the pitch will change Mb Step Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Step Rate is Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Out Output Mode Adjust the method that will be used to hear the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Lo G Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low
591. ss Description I I I 32 127 ASCII I I I 00 OB Oaaa aaaa Tone Name 12 32 127 I 00 00 0000 aaaa Reverb Type 0 4 I l l 32 127 ASCII I 00 01 Oaaa aaaa Reverb Level 0 127 I I I 00 02 0000 00aa Reverb Output Assign 0 3 I 00 OC 0000 000a Assign Type 0 1 l I A B C lt XV 3080 5080 gt D lt XV 5080 gt I l l MULTI SINGLE I 00 OD 000a aaaa Mute Group 0 31 1 00 03 0000 aaaa I I l l OFF 1 31 I 0000 bbbb I t I I 0000 cccc I I 00 OE Oaaa aaaa Tone Level 0 127 i 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 1 12768 52768 l 00 OF Oaaa aaaa Tone Coarse Tune 0 127 l l l 20000 20000 l C 1 G9 00 07 0000 aaaa 00 10 0aaa aaaa Tone Fine Tune 14 114 I 0000 bbbb I I 50 50 I 0000 cccc I I 00 11 000a aaaa Tone Random Pitch Depth 0 30 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 2 12768 52768 I l l 0 1 2 Bp 4 Sy 67 7 785 9 I 20000 20000 I I 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 00 OB 0000 aaaa I I 90 100 200 300 400 500 I 0000 bbbb I I I 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 I 0000 cccc I I I I 1200 I 0000 dddd Reverb Parameter 3 12768 52768 I 00 12 Oaaa aaaa Tone Pan 0 127 20000 20000 I I L64 63R 00 OF 0000 aaaa I 00 13 00aa aaaa Tone Random Pan Depth 0 63 I 0000 bbbb 00 14 0aaa aaaa Tone
592. ss P to move to the next display and then select the contents of the effect that you wish to copy PERFORM 4Tyre Fe COPY JELL Copy type ALL Multi effects Chorus and Reverb settings MFX Multi effects settings CHORUS Chorus settings REVERB Reverb settings CHO amp REV Chorus and Reverb settings cs For more detailed information and instructions for this procedure refer to Copying Another Effect Setting Effects Copy p 161 LEHTEF 1 Performance Name Copy You can copy the name from a Performance to the current Performance PERFORM Humber HAME CPYYUSER icUser Perform E CE Copy source Performance group number name LEHTEF 1 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode Copying a Patch To copy the settings of a Patch press UTILITY in Patch mode then perform Copy operation Patch Tone Copy Tone settings of a Patch will be copied to the Tone you specify of the current Patch PATCH Source Tone CCOMPARE CEHTERI TOHE CPY USER B81 TitUser Patch 3 Ti ee a Copy source Patch Copy source Patch name group number Copy destination Tone Copy source Tone HINT To specify the currently selected Patch as the copy source set Source to TEMP When the Copy operation is executed an symbol will be displayed in front of the copy destination Tone 3 For more detailed information and instructions for this procedure refer to Copying the Settings of Another Tone Tone Copy
593. st the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 127 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 18 MODULATION DELAY This effect adds modulation to the delayed sound producing an effect similar to a flanger When Feedback Mode is NORMAL Feedback Feedback Balance D When Feedback Mode is CROSS Lin Rin Balance D Delay L Delay Time Left Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the left delay sound is heard Delay R Delay Time Right Adjust the time from the direct sound until when the right delay sound is heard Fbk Feedback Level Adjust the proportion of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase Mode Feedback Mode Select the way in which delay sound is fed back into the effect NORMAL The left delay sound will be fed back into the left delay and the right delay sound into the right delay CROSS The left delay sound will be fed back into the right delay and the right delay sound into the left delay Rate Adjust the speed of the modulation Depth Adjust the depth of the modulation Phase Adjust the spatial spread of the sound HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be
594. status for each Part This is convenient when you need to check that the sound generator is responding correctly to messages from the keyboard or external MIDI controller For items other than Voices you can modify the values When you do so MIDI messages will be transmitted and they can be recorded by a sequencer or other device Mod Modulation Information Breath Breath Information Foot Foot Information Vol Volume Information Pan Pan Information Exp Expression Information Hold Hold 1 Information Bend Pitch Bend Information Aftertouch Aftertouch Information Voices Voice Information The number of voices used 197 Chapter 11 Chapter 11 Using the XV 88 as a GM Sound Module GM Mode Convenient Functions in GM Mode GM Utility In the GM mode you can initialize GM mode and transmit GM mode settings using the Utility functions Basic Procedure 1 Inthe GM mode press UTILITY so its indicator blinks The XV 88 will switch to Utility mode 2 Press 4 amp or W to select the UTIL 1 group HINT The functions of the UTIL 2 group can also be executed from GM mode The operation is the same as in other modes p 179 3 Use 4 or b to select the desired function the function name will blink and press ENTER The display for the desired function will appear HINT You can also access the desired function page by using the numeric keys or function buttons to specify the number
595. strumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 258 0211 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Rut 96 919 420 1 Nataniel Cox 739 4th Floor Santiago Centro CHILE TEL 02 688 9540 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II Edificio No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 262 0788 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXICO TEL 55 5668 6699 Roland Corporation PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 021 492 124 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C P 11 800 Montevideo URUGUAY TEL 02 924 2335 VENEZUELA Musicland Digital C A Av Francisco de Miranda Centro Parque de Cristal Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL 212 285 8586 AUSTRIA Roland Austria GES M B H Siemensstrasse 4 P O Box 74 A 6063 RUM AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BH GIUM HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 039 16 6200 FRANCE Roland France SA 4 Rue Paul Henri SPAAK Parc de l Esplanade F 77 462 St Thibault Lagny Cedex
596. t In other words this procedure allows you to move to a different group without having to turn on EDIT indicator and is a faster and more efficient way to get around Moving the Cursor underline When two or more items are shown in a single display page move the cursor underline to the item whose value you wish to set Press 4 to move the cursor to the left or b to move it to the right FART 1 L Fad limper U Fade KEY RANGE 8j A symbol appearing in the upper right of the display indicates that there are other items in this page that the screen has no room to show Press P to see these items and press 4 to return to the previous page PERFORM Source Humber ol FH COPY PERF RHM LSER 1 User Perform LEHTEF 1 gt PERFORM 47 sre FX COPY FALL Remote Control of External Sequencers When any PLAY page is displayed then by pressing the different CURSOR buttons while holding down SHIFT you can have remote start stop and other control functions of external sequencers connected to the XV 88 This is a useful and extremely convenient function to have in situations such as when playing ensemble using an external sequencer SHIFT NEXT SONG Selects the next song SHIFT W PREV SONG Selects the previous song SHIFT 4 RESET Returns to the beginning of the song SHIFT START STOP Starts and stops performance of the song rind When SHIFT is held down while
597. t Assign settings of the Patch Rhythm Set assigned to the Part will be used p 108 92 12 Output Assign p 113 Output Level p 113 Chorus Send Level p 113 Reverb Send Level p 113 Multi effects Output Assign p 116 Multi effects Dry Send Level p 116 Multi effects Chorus Send Level p 116 Multi effects Reverb Send Level p 116 Reverb Output Assign p 160 Reverb Level p 160 11 Chorus Output Assign p 158 12 Chorus Level p 158 13 Chorus Output Select p 158 O O MAIN M R e o The settings for a Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to a Part depends on which of the Parts 1 16 the Source parameter in each effect is set to p 114 p 156 p 159 OUTPUT B A MIX R L R L MONO BALANCED 4 3 2 1 INDIVIDUAL 112 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Selecting the Way the Direct Sound is Output Here set the way the direct sound is output and the amount of each effect to be applied The settings made here determine whether or not the signal passes through the Multi effects the jack used to output the sound and the type of output stereo or mono HINT The way the direct sound is output can also use the settings of a Patch Rhythm Set assigned to a Part 1 After confirming that you are in Performance mode
598. t of transposition p 48 5 MODE Section The buttons in this section select modes The button indicator of the selected mode will light blink p 24 PERFORM GM Pressed to get into Performance mode Hold down SHIFT while you press PERFORM to select GM mode gt p 34 p 192 PATCH PART Pressed to get into Patch mode By holding down PERFORM and pressing PATCH you can modify the settings of the Patch and Rhythm Set that is assigned to each part of the performance p 29 p 38 p 56 Front and Rear Panel 7svNTH 8PAD 9 ETHNIC VALUE GROUP USER CARD PRESET EXP 4BAss 5onRcH G6 BRASS 1 PIANO PREV SONG DEC INC F ORHYSSFX ENTER DIGIT HOLD REGISTRY 9 RHYTHM Selects Rhythm Set mode p 39 ZONE When the XV 88 is in Performance mode this switches it to the Zone mode p 57 SYSTEM Selects System mode p 168 UTILITY Selects Utility mode p 179 6 EFFECTS Section Used to switch on and off the onboard effects Multi effects Chorus Reverb When on the button indicator for the effect is lighted p 105 MULTI Turns Multi effects on off CHORUS Turns Chorus on off REVERB Turns Reverb on off Display Shows various information for the currently selected
599. t the fast speed FAST of the low frequency rotor Low Acd Low Frequency Acceleration Adjust the time it takes the low frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower values will require longer times Low Lvl Low Frequency Level Adjust the volume of the low frequency rotor Hi Slow High Frequency Slow Rate Adjust the slow speed SLOW of the high frequency rotor Hi Fast High Frequency Fast Rate Adjust the fast speed FAST of the high frequency rotor Hi Acd High Frequency Acceleration Adjust the time it takes the high frequency rotor to reach the newly selected speed when switching from fast to slow or slow to fast speed Lower values will require longer times Hi Lvl High Frequency Level Adjust the volume of the high frequency rotor Separation Adjust the spatial dispersion of the sound Speed Simultaneously switch the rotational speed of the low frequency rotor and high frequency rotor SLOW Slow down the rotation to the specified speed the Low Slow Hi Slow values FAST Speed up the rotation to the specified speed the Low Fast Hi Fast values For details refer to Using a Pedal Switch to Modify the Speed of the Rotary Effect p 199 122 Chapter 7 Adding Effects Level Output Level Adjust the output level 09 COMPRESSOR The Compressor flattens out high levels and boosts low levels smoothing out unevenness
600. t which distorts the sound being applied p 117 Ifthe sound is distorted for specific Patches or parts lower the volume level of those Patches or Parts p 70 p 53 fall sounds are distorted use the VOLUME slider to lower the volume level Pitch Is Incorrect Is the tuning of the XV 88 incorrect Check the Master parameter SYSTEM TUNE SYSTEM TUNE setting p 173 Has the pitch been changed by pedal operations or by Pitch Bend messages received from an external MIDI device Use the Panic function to reset the original values p 48 Ifyou are in Performance mode access the INFO display PERFORM INFO to check the settings of the Pitch Bend Message parameter Bnd and make the appropriate settings p 56 Have the Coarse Tune or Fine Tune parameters been set for specific Parts Check the Coarse parameter and Fine parameter PERFORM PART PITCH settings p 55 Effects Do Not Apply Are MULTI CHORUS and REVERB turned off Press each button getting the indicator to light p 105 Are the various effect settings correct e Ifthe send levels to each effect are at 0 effects are not applied Check each setting p 110 p 113 p 116 p 194 Even with send levels to each effect set at 0 effects are not applied if the Multi effects Dry Send Level p 116 the Chorus Level p 158 or the Reverb Level p 160 is set to 0 Check each setting f Output Assign is set
601. t will be applied Keysync Phase Sets the LFO phase when the LFO is reset LowGain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency range gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Adjusts the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W the flanger sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 43 FORMANT FILTER This adds a vowel character to the sound making it similar to a human voice L in gt L out J Pan L gt y Pan R R in gt R out Drive Turns Drive on off Specifies the depth of distortion The volume will change together with the degree of distortion Vowel Selects the vowel The left setting is the vowel 1 The right setting is the vowel 2 Rate Sets the frequency at which the two vowels will be switched MEMO Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Rate is Setas a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Depth Sets the effect depth Keysync KeySync
602. ta will not change All Notes Off Controller number 123 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7BH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 When All Notes Off is received all notes on the corresponding channel will be turned off However if Hold 1 or Sostenuto is ON the sound will be continued until these are turned off OMNI OFF Controller number 124 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7CH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 Thesame processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received OMNI ON Controller number 125 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7DH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 The same processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received OMNI ON will not be turned on MONO Controller number 126 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7EH mmH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 mm mono number 00H 10H 0 16 Thesame processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received In Performance mode the Mno Pol parameter PERFORM PART MONO POL will change POLY Controller number 127 Status 2nd byte 3rd byte BnH 7FH 00H n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 Thesame processing will be carried out as when All Notes Off is received In Performance mode the Mno Pol parameter PERFORM PART MONO POL will change i System Realtime Message Timing Clock Status F8H This message will be rec
603. table for the selected type of patch p 32 5 Press PERFORM or EXIT to return to the PERFORM PLAY page HINT By pressing RHYTHM in Step 4 you can substitute a Rhythm Set for the Patch assigned to the Part Using the Sliders to Modify the Sound in Realtime With the four sliders in the PALETTE section the Palette sliders you can change the sound qualities of the Patches assigned to the Parts and adjust the volume level of each Part Mb The sound character and volume changes created using the sliders can be transmitted to the external MIDI devices p 59 Changing Sound Characters Oo e s selecting a Single Performance the effect is applied to the single specified Part current Part When a Layer Performance is selected the effect is applied to all Zones with Local switches set to ON and their linked Parts Make sure the PERFORM PLAY page is displayed 2 Press FILTER ENV and its indicator lights 3 Move the sliders while you play the XV 88 s keyboard to vary the sound To modify the brightness move the CUTOFF slider To change resonance move the RESONANCE slider To change attack time move the ATTACK slider To change release time move the RELEASE slider Chapter 2 Playing Adjusting the Volume Balance Between Parts 1 Make sure the PERFORM PLAY page is displayed 2 Press LEVEL and its indicator lights 3 Press or P toselect the Part whose volume you want to change If y
604. tch appears in a sentence 1 Make sure the PERFORM PLAY page is displayed 2 While holding down PERFORM press PATCH Both button indicators will light This will call up the PLAY page of the Patch assigned to the currently selected Part PART PR A 001 128u0icePrha Fart 1 PLAY Lone 2 kbd C 4 3 Press 4 or P to select the Part to which the selected Patch is assigned 4 The following steps are the same as when you modify a Patch in Patch mode 5 When you finish making settings press EXIT to call up the Play page of the Patch assigned to the Part An asterisk will be displayed at the left of the Patch group This indicates the Patch settings have been modified o vx you select another Patch or Performance in the group with an asterisk the modified Patch settings will be lost To keep these modified settings perform the save operation p 164 6 Toreturn to the PERFORM PLAY page press PERFORM or EXIT Chapter 4 Zone Settings Pressing ZONE while in Performance mode switches you to Zone mode In Zone mode you can make settings affecting the way the sound module plays sounds in response to Performances played on the keyboard the way MIDI messages are sent the Arpeggiator and D Beam functions and more won You cannot switch to Zone mode from any mode other than Performance mode This section explains the procedures for making Zone settings and describes the functions of the diff
605. tch Depth 1 127 00 38 0000 000a Wave Tempo Sync 0 1 l 63 63 I I I OFF ON 01 06 Oaaa aaaa LFO2 TVF Depth 1 127 00 39 00aa aaaa Wave Pitch Keyfollow 44 84 l l 63 63 l 200 200 01 07 Oaaa aaaa LFO2 TVA Depth i 127 63 63 l 00 3A 000a aaaa Pitch Env Depth 52 76 01 08 Oaaa aaaa LFO2 Pan Depth Cb o 3239 l l wu 42 63 63 l 00 3B Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Velocity Sens Li 227 t l l l 63 p3 00 00 01 09 Total Size l 00 3C Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 1 Velocity Sens 1 127 l l l ES wvRES gt 00 3D 0aaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 4 Velocity Sens i 222 l l l HOF FES l 00 3E 000a aaaa Pitch Env Time Keyfollow 54 74 l l l 100 100 00 3F Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 1 0 127 00 40 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 2 0 127 00 41 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 3 0 7 127 4 00 42 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Time 4 0 127 00 43 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Level 0 1 127 1 l l l MES E 00 44 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Level 1 1 127 l l l 03 063 ul 00 45 Oaaa aaaa Pitch Env Level 2 1 127 I I I GSS HEF 1 286 MIDI Implementation O1 3 2 1 Rhythm Common 00 35 0000 aaaa I I 0000 bbbb I i I 0000 cccc Offset I I I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 10 12768 52768 I Address Descriptio
606. tch envelope level 1 2 3 4 63 63 T 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 2 200 190 180 170 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 3 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 236 Parameter List TVF Group p 87 Display Parameter Value TVF FILTER Type Filter type OFF LPF BPF HPF PKG LPF2 LPF3 T Cutoff Cutoff frequency 0 127 T Resonance Resonance 0 127 T Keyfollow Cutoff frequency keyfollow 200 200 1 T TVF VELOCITY V Cutoff Cutoff frequency velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V Curve Cutoff frequency velocity curve FIXED 1 7 T V Resonance Resonance velocity sensitivity 63 63 T TVF ENVELOPE Depth TVF envelope depth 63 63 T V Sens TVF envelope velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V Curve TVF envelope velocity curve FIXED 1 7 T Time KF TVF envelope time keyfollow 100 100 2 T V T1 TVF envelope time 1 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T V T4 TVF envelope time 4 velocity sensitivity 63 63 T LO TVF envelope level 0 0 127 T T1 T2 T3 T4 TVF envelope time 1 2 3 4 0 127 T L1 L2 L3 L4 TVF envelope level 1 2 3 4 0 127 T 1 200 190 180 170 160 150 140 130 120 110
607. te Est ee eee E Sua mmu 253 Rhythm Set List 258 Waveform List 263 Arpeggio Style List 268 About MID E T E A T 269 MIDI Implementation J J J J 270 Specifications u uu 298 Computer Cable Wiring Diagram s 299 index cuncti tin LA edente aaa 300 Main Features 128 Voice Polyphony The previous maximum number of 64 simultaneous voices has been expanded to 128 providing ample expression capabilities even with tones composed of a number of combined tones Compatible with the New SRX Series Wave Expansion Boards The XV 88 features two expansion slots for the new SRX Series Wave Expansion boards each of which provides the waveform capacity of four SR JV80 boards Of course since the XV 88 is also equipped with an additional two slots for previous generation SR JV80 Wave Expansion boards you can also install such boards that you now may be using in the XV 88 as well Thus with a Wave Expansion board installed in every slot you can get massive waveforms equaling even those obtainable with samplers all of which are ready to use as soon as you turn on the instrument with no loading
608. ted directly to the sound generator When you use the XV 88 by itself you will normally set the Local Switch to ON However when you use it with a computer you should set the Local Switch to OFF so that the performance data of the keyboard controller section will be disconnected from the internal sound generator section In this case the data sent over two paths i e the data sent directly from the keyboard controller section and the data sent from the keyboard controller section via the computer ends up being sent to the sound generator section simultaneously Thus for example even when you play a C key only once the note C cannot be sounded correctly as the sound is played by the sound generator section twice Sequencer Recording MIDI Thru On MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN Transmit Switch On Receive Switch On Sound Generator Section Local Switch Off Keyboard Controller Section Turn the Local Switch on off by the following parameters In Patch Rhythm Set Mode Local parameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI p 170 In Performance Mode Local parameter SYSTEM MIDI PERFORM MIDI p 169 Turn on the MIDI Thru Function of Your Sequencer Softw are In order for the musical data received by the computer from the XV 88 to be transmitted back to the XV 88 the MIDI Thru function of the sequencing program must be turned on When the MIDI Thru function of the seq
609. ter is set to ON Chapter 8 Saving Sounds Sa vi ng a G rou p of Tones to 5 When saving to a new memory card the data is saved to a M emory Ca r d File Number 01 Bank A Afterwards up to File Number 08 the next saved file is assigned automatically to the subsequent Bank B H The Performances Patches Rhythm Sets System and Favorite List settings in internal memory can be saved as a To overwrite a previously existing file select the file single file onto a memory card number of that file NEI Note The Banks A H assigned here correspond to the Card Data files contain an entire set of parameter settings for n n I Bon I Group Banks A H but in this case you can select the sound generator It is not possible to save individua P Performances Patches and Rhythm Sets directly rather Patches or Performances to a memory card I than having to use the Load operation to read files on In order to use a memory card you must first turn off memory cards into the XV 88 p 190 the power and then insert a memory card into the MEMORY CARD slot as follows HINT To change and delete assignments to the Banks A H use the CARD INFO page p 190 MEMORY CARD J amp lo 6 When necessary change the file name You can assign the file a name of up to eight characters For details on assigning names refer to Assigning a Name p 28 7 Press ENTER to execute t
610. ters are controlled p 115 42 KEYSYNC FLANGER p 140 D 43 FORMANT FILTER p 141 Explanations for each Multi effects Type are given on the 44 RING MODULATOR p 142 following pages 45 MULTI TAP DELAY p 143 01 STEREO EQ p 119 46 REVERSE DELAY p 144 02 OVERDRIVE p 119 47 SHUFFLE DELAY p 145 03 DISTORTION p 120 48 3D DELAY p 146 04 PHASER p 120 49 PITCH SHIFTER p 147 05 SPECTRUM p 121 50 LOFI COMPRESS p 147 06 ENHANCER p 121 51 LOFI NOISE p 148 07 AUTO WAH p 122 52 SPEAKER SIMULATOR p 148 lt 08 ROTARY p 122 53 OVERDRIVE 2 p 149 09 COMPRESSOR p 123 54 DISTORTION 2 p 149 H 10 LIMITER p 123 55 STEREO COMPRESSOR p 150 9 11 HEXA CHORUS p 124 56 STEREO LIMITER p 150 12 TREMOLO CHORUS p 124 57 GATE p 151 13 SPACE D p 125 58 SLICER p 151 14 STEREO CHORUS p 125 59 ISOLATOR p 152 15 STEREO FLANGER p 126 60 3D CHORUS p 152 16 STEP FLANGER p 126 61 3D FLANGER p 153 17 STEREO DELAY p 127 62 TREMOLO p 154 18 MODULATION DELAY p 128 63 AUTO PAN p 155 19 TRIPLE TAP DELAY p 129 20 QUADRUPLE TAP DELAY p 130 21 TIME CONTROL DELAY p 131 22 2VOICE PITCH SHIFTER p 131 23 FBK PITCH SHIFTER p 132 24 REVERB p 133 25 GATED REVERB p 133 26 OVERDRIVESCHORUS p 134 27 OVERDRIVE gt FLANGER p 134 28 OVERDRIVESDELAY p 135 29 DISTORTION CHORUS p 135 30 DISTORTION FLANGER
611. th no borders between the notes This allows you to simulate the hammering on and pulling off playing techniques of a guitarist Turn this parameter ON when you want to use the Legato feature and OFF when you don t When using the setting of the Patch assigned to each Part p 76 set this to PATCH Note For the Part to which the Rhythm Set is assigned this setting is ignored Portament Sw Tm Part Portamento Switch Time Portamento makes a smooth pitch transition from one note to the next note played Also when playing monophonically you can apply portamento to simulate the slide performance technique sometimes used on instruments such as violin You can determine whether the Portamento effect will be applied or not using Portamento switch Sw Turn this parameter ON when you want to apply Portamento and OFF when you don t When using the setting of the Patch assigned to each Part p 76 set this to PATCH The Portamento Time Tm setting adjusts the time over which the pitch will change Higher settings will cause the pitch change to the next note to take more time When using the setting of the Patch assigned to each Part p 76 set this to PATCH Note For the Part to which the Rhythm Set is assigned this setting is ignored 55 Chapter 3 Creating Performances Confirming MIDI Information for Each Part INFO INFO Part Information PART 1 Hod Breath Foot Voll Pan Exe IHF 1 B B B 168 B i
612. the Zones from 1 to 16 is linked in a one to one relationship with its numerical counterpart among Parts 1 to 16 In other words you can use Zone 1 when controlling Part 1 Zone 2 is when controlling Part 2 and so on We recommend that under normal circumstances you use the default factory settings Mb In this manual the expression the Zone and Part are linked refers to the condition whereby a Zone s MIDI transmit channel and a Part s MIDI receive channel are matched in this one to one relationship weh The explanations in this section describe how to play Performances using the factory Zone settings Chapter 2 Playing lt Layer Performance gt In a Layer Performance you can select multiple Zones and play those Zones and their linked Parts simultaneously Select Layer Performance if you want fat rich sounds of two or more Patches or want to play different Patches in a split keyboard s different sections Single Performance With a Single Performance you can play the currently selected Part current Part This means that you can use it to do things like playing just a single part in a song that uses a number of instruments Zone settings are ignored Also if another Part is set to the same MIDI Receive channel as the currently selected Part that Part is also played won The Single Performance and Layer Performance settings are selected with the Key Mode parameter ZONE COMMON ZONE COMMON The K
613. the original waveform the results will not be as you expect The XV 88 s internal waveforms fall into the following two groups One shot These waveforms contain sounds that have short decays A one shot waveform records the initial rise and fall of the sound Some of the XV 88 s one shot waveforms are sounds that are complete in themselves such as percussive instrument sounds The XV 88 also contains many other one shot waveforms that are elements of other sounds These include attack components such as piano hammer sounds and guitar fret noises Looped These waveforms include sounds with long decays as well as sustained sounds Loop waveforms repeatedly play back loop the portion of the waveform after the sound has reached a relatively steady state The XV 88 s looped waveforms also include components of other sounds such as piano string resonant vibrations and the hollow sounds of brass instruments The following diagram shows an example of sound electric organ that combines one shot and looped waveforms TVA ENV for looped Organ TVA ENV for one shot Key Resulting TVA ENV waveform sustain portion click waveform attack portion change Level if Tim Note off Note off Chapter 5 Creating Patches Cautions When Using a One shot Waveform It is not possible to use the envelope to modify a one shot waveform to create a decay that is longer than the original waveform or to turn it into a sustaining sound If you we
614. the sound that is output to the OUTPUT jacks The optimal 3D effect will be achieved if you select SPEAKER when using speakers or PHONES when using headphones Lo G Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi G High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the flanger sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the flanger sound will be output Lev Output Level Adjust the output level 61 3D FLANGER This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound The flanger sound will be positioned 90 degrees left and 90 degrees right Pre Dly Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until the flanger sound is heard Rate LFO Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the flanger sound Mb Rate parameter can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Rate is Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Depth LFO Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the flanger sound Fbk Feedback Adjust the proportion of the flanger
615. this unit data via the COMPUTER connector set the COMPUTER switch to Mac or PC depending on the computer or software you are using p 208 When the COMPUTER switch is set to MIDI the XV 88 will not transmit data from the COMPUTER connector In this case data will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector 216 Troubleshooting When Using Sequencing Software Operating the Sliders or Other Controls Does Not Affect the Sound For some sequencing programs System Exclusive messages are not transmitted by the Thru function If you are using such software and wish to record System Exclusive messages turn the XV 88 s Local Control switch ON by the following parameter In Patch Rhythm Set Mode Local parameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI p 170 In Performance Mode Local parameter SYSTEM MIDI PERFORM MIDI p 169 Local parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI p 60 Cannot Use Memory Cards Is the memory card SmartMedia formatted Youcannot use an unformatted memory card Perform the Format procedure p 189 Error Messages If there has been a mistake in operation or if the XV 88 is unable to continue processing as you directed an error message will appear in the display Take the appropriate action for the displayed error message Batters Low Situation The internal backup battery of the XV 88 a battery that maintains data in the user memory has run down Action Consult your dealer or a nearby Roland
616. those settings are shown in each of the Performance s CHO settings pages and the settings can be then be changed as well Changes to Patch or Rhythm Set Chorus parameter settings are lost when another Patch or Rhythm Set is selected To keep the modified settings save the Patch Rhythm Set settings p 164 Chapter 7 Adding Effects CHO PRM CHO Parameter PATCH Pre Dly kate Derth Fbk CHO PRM 1 1 8 A 56 2B B Sets the parameter for the Chorus selected by the Chorus type The parameters that can be set differ according to whether chorus or delay is used Note When the Type parameter in the CHO TYPE page is set to 00 OFF the CHO PRM page will not be displayed For Type CHORUS Pre Dly Chorus Pre Delay This specifies the delay between when the direct sound is heard and when chorusing begins Rate Chorus Rate This specifies the modulation frequency of the chorus effect Depth Chorus Depth This specifies the modulation depth of the chorus effect Fbk Chorus Feedback This specifies the amount of the chorus effect s output to be returned fed back to its input Higher settings create more complex chorusing Phase This specifies the spaciousness of the chorus effect Filter Type This specifies the type of filter to be used by the chorus effect OFF No filter is used LPF Frequencies higher than the selected cutoff frequency value are eliminated HPF Frequencies lower than the se
617. ting is linked with the Octave Range parameter In Patch Rhythm Set GM Mode Octave Range parameter SYSTEM ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO p 175 In Performance Mode Octave Range parameter ZONE ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO p 61 6 Tochange the tempo in which the arpeggio is played hold down ARPEGGIO to access the ARP SELECT display move the cursor to Tempo and change the setting ARF I Style Accent Oct Tema SELECT I 1716 zHz m 128 Mb This setting is linked with the Tempo parameter In Patch Rhythm Set GM Mode Tempo parameter SYSTEM ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO p 176 In Performance Mode Tempo parameter ZONE ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO p 63 7 Play a chord to produce an arpeggio 8 Tostop the arpeggio press ARPEGGIO extinguishing the indicator HINT If you hold down SHIFT when you press ARPEGGIO the ARP SELECT page will continue being displayed without you having to hold down ARPEGGIO To go back to the previous display press EXIT Chapter 2 Playing Playing an Arpeggio Over a Preset Keyboard Area As soon as you press ARPEGGIO to turn the Arpeggiator on the keyboard will be set to play arpeggios so conventional keyboard playing is no longer possible If you split the keyboard into two different areas you can use one area for normal playing and the other for playing arpeggios This setting for instance allows you to play arpeggios with the left hand and a melody with the right hand m Pr
618. tinguished If it is lit press EDIT In this case by holding down SHIFT you can check Function button indicators to see the ON OFF status of each Part s Receive switch When 1 8 9 16 indicator is out the function button indicators will indicate the status of Parts 1 8 When 1 8 9 16 indicator is lit the function button indicators will indicate the status of Parts 9 16 Lit is on and dark is off 2 Hold down SHIFT and press the function button to switch the Receive switch on off MEMO This setting is linked with the Rx Sw parameter PERFORM MIDI MIDI p 52 Assigning a Different Patch to a Part The Patch assigned to each Part can be stored as a Performance parameter 1 Make sure the PERFORM PLAY page is displayed 2 While holding down PERFORM press PATCH to call up the PLAY page PART PLAY of the Patch assigned to a specific Part PART PR A 001 1280icePrha PLAY tone 2 The upper right of the display will indicate the number of the currently selected part 3 Press or P to choose the Part to which the selected Patch is assigned 4 Use the same procedure as in Patch mode to select a Patch p 29 Mab This setting is linked with the Group and Number parameter PERFORM PART PATCH p 53 HINT Using the Patch Finder function you can rapidly find the desired Patch p 30 By using the Phrase Preview function you can audition patches by listening to a preset phrase sui
619. tive Sensing 171 Aft Aftertouch information Part wo 56 Aftertouch sensitivity sss 171 Aftertoucher operto EVE Lut 197 Aftertouch sensitivity 1 171 Alternate Alternate pan depth Rhythm Tone a 103 Alternate pan depth Tone 7 Alternate pan switch a Alternate pan depth Rhythm Tone u aa n u eaea tenente 103 Boni ana u asa a at sa E E aaa 91 Alternate pan switch u 99 Analog Feel u Analog feel depth neneeese s u ua 70 Arabian scales xh yu A ua UR uS 174 ARP SELECT A 41 ATpD SplIatOr em 41 ARPEGGIO 14 41 ARPEGGIQ uu tenti tnter eee ce dee erit n 44 System 174 VAS EHE EET 61 DNITda P 41 ARPEGGIO group SyStem c undae hte pe Oo tete IRA 174 LONG M 61 Arpeggio Hold 1er ee iate eren preesse 43 Arpeggio style Arpeggio style list ssssssssssssseeeeeneneneneneee 268 ATDeS8IOZone p 63 Assign C1 C4 slider assign eesis risie ei 172 D Beam assign System sss 45 176 D Beam assign Zone 45 63 Key assige phr tU e E tet den Gants 76 Pedal 1 2 assign Assign Type Assigning a name Patch Performance 51 Rhythm Set 96 Rhythm Tone tec tee eie e eate eene 98 Atk Attack time offset Part sse 54 Attack time offset Patch
620. to save is selected 2 Continue holding down SHIFT and the following display will appear PHTCH FR H 001 128v20icePna Register to Favorite List CENTER 3 Hold down SHIFT and press ENTER to execute the registration and the display will briefly indicate COMPLETED Here the data is registered to the lowest of the empty numbers to which no data is registered Note If there is no empty number to which data can be registered Favorite List Full appears in the display and the data cannot be registered 165 Chapter 8 Chapter 8 Saving Sounds Saving to an External MIDI Device You can save data by transmitting it to an external MIDI device MIDI sequencer etc Connect the XV 88 and external MIDI device as shown in the diagram MIDI INI ee t ODDAN o CjtitjcxxcU i r3 r MIDI OUT B Roland sss s r ERIS go o cum om XV BB usse XV 88 1 Press UTILITY getting its indicator to start blinking The UTIL 1 page will appear UTILI 2 1EMEITE COPY HINT If the UTIL 2 page appears press 4 amp to display the UTIL 1 page 2 Use or P to get 4 XFER to start blinking then press ENTER The TRANSFER TO MIDI page will appear TRAHSFER I Tare Block CEHTER 1 TO HIDI ALL USER IDI Data type Destination Source block HINT If th
621. to other than MFX the Multi effects sound will not be output p 108 p 109 p 113 f Output Assign is set to PATCH for each Part of the Performance the sound will be output according to the Output Assign settings of the Patch for each Tone which is assigned to those Parts p 113 This means that if Output Assign for the Patch each Tone is set to other than MFX the Multi effects sound will not be output p 109 Sounds Are Interrupted If you attempt to play more than 128 voices at once sounds will be interrupted p 23 Reduce the number of Tones that you are using p 32 p 81 Increase the Voice Reserve setting for Parts that must not drop out p 53 When You Play the Keyboard Notes Do Not Stop Is the pedal polarity of the Hold Pedal reversed Check the Polarity parameter SYSTEM CONTROL HOLD PEDAL setting p 172 Exclusive Messages Are Not Received Is the instrument set to receive Exclusive messages Set the Rx Sys Excl parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI to ON p 171 Does the Device ID number of the transmitting device match the Device ID number of the XV 88 Check the Device ID parameter SYSTEM MIDI SYSTEM MIDI p 171 If you wish to rewrite the User memory settings by System Exclusive messages turn Exclusive Protect off p 188 The XV 88 Does Not Transmit MIDI Data Is the rear panel COMPUTER switch set to the correct position If you wish to transmit
622. trix Control 4 Source 0 109 I 0000 bbbb I I I I OFF CC01 CC31 CC33 CC95 I 0000 ccce I I I PITCH BEND AFTERTOUCH SYS CTRL1 SYS CTRL4 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 7 12768 52768 I I I VELOCITY KEYFOLLOW TEMPO LFO1 LFO2 I I I 20000 20000 I I I PITCH ENV TVF ENV TVA ENV 4 00 2D 0000 aaaa I 00 47 00aa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Destination 1 0 33 I 0000 bbbb I I I I OFF I 0000 ccce I I PITCH CUTOFF RESONANCE LEVEL PAN DRY LEVEL I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 8 12768 52768 I I I CHORUS SEND REVERB SEND LFO1 PCH DEPTH I I I 20000 20000 I I I LFO2 PCH DEPTH LFO1 TVF DEPTH LFO2 TVF DEPTH L 00 31 0000 aaaa I I I I LFO1 TVA DEPTH LFO2 TVA DEPTH LFO1 PAN DEPTH I 0000 bbbb I I I I LFO2 PAN DEPTH LFO1 RATE LFO2 RATE I 0000 ccce I I I I PIT ENV A TIME PIT ENV D TIME PIT ENV R TIME I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 9 12768 52768 I I I TVF ENV A TIME TVF ENV D TIME TVF ENV R TIME I I I 20000 20000 I I I TVA ENV A TIME TVA ENV D TIME TVA ENV R TIME L 00 35 0000 aaaa I I I TMT FXM DEPTH MFX CTRL1 MFX CTRL4 I 0000 bbbb I I 00 48 Oaaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Sens 1 1 127 I 0000 ccce I I I I 63 63 I 0000 dddd MFX Parameter 10 12768 52768 I 00 49 OOaa aaaa Matrix Control 4 Destination 2 0 33 I I I 20000 20000 I I I OFF 4 00 39 0000 aaaa I I I PITCH CUTOFF
623. ts INDIV 2 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 3 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 3 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 4 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 4 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects TONE Output according to the settings for each Tone Rhythm Tone o e outputting in mono the Pan setting is disabled When the settings are such that signals are split and output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack and INDIVIDUAL 2 jack and no plug is inserted in the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack the sounds from INDIVIDUAL 1 and INDIVIDUAL 2 are mixed together then output from the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack This sound comprises the sounds from the INDIVIDUAL 1 and 2 jacks Mb If the Mix Parallel parameter SYSTEM SETUP SYSTEM SETUP is set to MIX all sounds are output from the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo p 169 HINT When setting the MEX set the output destination with the Output parameter PATCH EFFECTS PATCH MFX OUT RHYTHM EFFECTS RHYTHM MEX OUT for the sound after it has passed through the Multi effects p 116 When set to TONE the Output Assign parameter PATCH EFFECTS OUTTUT RHYTHM EFFECTS OUTPUT is set for each Tone or Rhythm Tone p 109 Chorus and Reverb are output in mono at all times Chapter 7 Adding Effects The output destination of the signal after passing The Setti ngs for Each Tone through the chorus is set with Output Assi
624. ts are created from a collection of multiple Rhythm Tones percussion instruments You can change the assignments of the Rhythm Tones for each key with Rhythm Set Edit 1 Press RHYTHM to access the RHYTHM PLAY page and select the Rhythm Set whose settings you wish to modify p 39 won You cannot edit the Rhythm Sets in the PR H GM2 group HINT If you want to create all your Rhythm Sets from the ground up rather than the Rhythm Sets that have already been prepared carry out the Initialize operation p 185 2 Press EDIT to make its indicator light 3 Use the function buttons to select a display group The indicator for the button of the selected display group begins blinking EDIT RH Since Rhythm Sets do not have an LFO it will not be possible to select the LFO group 4 Use 4 or toselect a display page 5 Ifyou have selected a parameter display that can be set independently for each key Rhythm Tone the key selected for editing will be shown in the upper left of the display To select a different key Rhythm Tone play the desired key on the keyboard Bend iE Envelore Mode SUSTRIH HINT If the EDIT indicator is turned off you can also use TONE SELECT 1 4 to select the displayed key TONE SELECT 1 move to an octave lower key TONE SELECT 2 move to the semitone below TONE SELECT 3 move to the semitone above TONE SELECT 4 move to an octave higher key
625. tted by the XV 88 Universal Non realtime System Exclusive Message Oldentity Reply Message Receiving Identity Request Message the XV 88 send this message Status Data byte Status FOH 7EH dev 06H 02H 41H 10H 01H F7H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 7EH D number Universal Non realtime Message dev Device ID use the same as the device ID of Roland 06H Sub ID 1 General Information 02H Sub ID 2 Identity Reply 41H D number Roland 10H 01H Device family code XV 3080 5080 88 00H 00H Device family number code XV 3080 88 01H 01H 00H 00H Software revision level F7H EOX End of Exclusive Data Transmission O Data set 1DT1 12H Status Data byte Status FOH 41H dev 00H 10H 12H aaH bbH F7H ccH ddH eeH ffH sum Byte Explanation FOH Exclusive status 41H ID number Roland dev Device ID dev 00H 1FH Initial value is 10H 00H Model ID 1 XV 88 10H Model ID 2 XV 88 12H Command ID DT1 aaH Address MSB upper byte of the starting address of the data to be sent bbH Address upper middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ccH Address lower middle byte of the starting address of the data to be sent ddH Address LSB lower byte of the starting address of the data to be sent eeH Data the actual data to be sent Multiple bytes of data are transmitted in order starting from the address ffH Data sum Checksum F7H EOX
626. tterns ECHO An echo like style SYNTH BASS HEAVY SLAP LIGHT SLAP WALK BASS Styles appropriate for bass playing RHYTHM GTR 1 5 Styles for rhythm guitar Styles 2 5 are effective when 3 4 notes are held 3 FINGER Three finger guitar style STRUM GTR UP STRUM GTR DOWN STRUM GTR UP amp DW Guitar chords strummed both up and down Effective when five or six notes are held PIANO BACKING CLAVI CHORD Styles for keyboard instrument backing WALTZ SWING WALTZ Styles in triple meter REGGAE A reggae type style Effective when three notes are held PERCUSSION A style suitable for percussive instrument HARP A style simulating harp playing SHAMISEN The playing style of a Shamisen BOUND BALL A style suggestive of a bouncing ball RANDOM A style in which the notes sound in random order BOSSA NOVA A style with bossanova rhythm guitar Hold 3 4 notes for best results You can increase the tempo and use this as a Samba SALSA Typical salsa style Hold 3 4 notes for best results MAMBO Typical mambo style Hold 3 4 notes for best results LATIN PERCUSSION A rhythm style with Latin percussion instruments such as Clave Cowbell Clap Bongo Conga Agogo etc SAMBA Typical samba style Use for rhythm patterns or bass lines TANGO Typical tango rhythm style Hold the root 3rd and 5th of a triad etc for best results HOUSE A style for house piano backing Hold 3 4 notes for best results LIMITLESS The s
627. tting of the COMPUTER switch will take effect when the power is turned on Before changing the setting of the COMPUTER switch you must first turn off the power on the XV 88 This setting determines the transmission speed baud rate between your computer and the MIDI sound generator the XV 88 and the setting used by the computer must match the setting on the XV 88 This setting determines the baud rate for the XV 88 When setting your computer it may be necessary to make settings in the software as well If you are using Windows settings may be different than the above depending on your driver settings In such cases carefully read the manual included with the driver and then make the necessary settings The PC baud rate is 38 4 kbit sec You cannot use the computer which the baud rate can be set to only 31 25 kbit sec 3 If you re using an Apple Macintosh computer connect the computer cable to the modem port or printer port on the rear of the computer If you re using a PC connect the computer cable to the serial port RS 232C connector on the rear of the computer I For the Computer cable refer to Computer Cable Wiring Diagrams p 299 and obtain an appropriate cable for your computer 208 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 4 Connect the other end of the Computer cable to the COMPUTER connector on the left side of the XV 88 Apple Macintosh series MIDI COMPUTER PEDAL CTL
628. ttings press EXIT to return to the previous PLAY page An asterisk will be displayed at the left of the Patch Rhythm Set Performance group This indicates that the Patch Rhythm Set Performance settings have been modified o vox you select another Patch Rhythm Set Performance in the group with an asterisk the modified Patch Rhythm Set Performance settings will be lost To keep these modified settings perform the save operation p 164 156 Functions of Parameters The functions of Chorus parameters are explained according to the display arrangement CHO TYPE PERFORM fTuaF Source CHO TYPE 81 CHORUS FERFORM Type Chorus Type Selects either Chorus or Delay OFF Neither Chorus or Delay is used CHORUS Chorus is used DELAY Delay is used Source Chorus Source Selects the Chorus parameter settings that will be used by the Performance If you wish to use the Performance settings select PERFORM If you wish to use the settings of the Patch Rhythm Set assigned to one of the Parts select the Part number Mb If you have selected the Part number here the Part number will be displayed in the upper left of the CHO parameter setting display of Performances E tre Source i TVPERG1 CHORUS PRRT 1 won This parameter is not available when a Patch or Rhythm Set is being selected When Patch or Rhythm Set Settings Are Selected When the Patch or Rhythm Set s Chorus settings are selected
629. twice 19 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 Classification of XV 88 Sound Types When using the XV 88 you will notice that a variety of different categories come into play when handling sounds What follows is a simple explanation of each sound category Tones In the XV 88 the Tone is the smallest class of sound However it is not possible to play a Tone by itself The Patch is the unit of sound which can be played and the Tones are the basic building blocks which make up the Patch Ie mw I t 1 Pitch TVF TVA Envelope Envelope Envelope iua audio signal control signal Tones consist of the following five components WG Wave Generator Specifies the PCM waveform wave that is the basis of the sound and determines how the pitch of the sound will change The XV 88 has 1 083 different waveforms p 263 All Patches built into the XV 88 consist of combinations of Tones which are created based on these waveforms von There are four wave generators for each Rhythm Tone percussion instrument sounds TVF Time Variant Filter Specifies how the frequency components of the sound will change TVA Time Variant Amplifier Specifies the volume changes and the sound s position in a stereo soundfield Envelope You use Envelope to initiate changes to occur to a sound over time There are separate envelopes for Pitch TVF filter and TVA volume For example if you wish to modify the
630. u can check the group number and name of the Patch or Rhythm Set assigned to that Part in the lower part of the display When linked to multiple Parts by pressing A or W you can move the and change the Part being checked Chapter 5 Creating Patches With the XV 88 you have total control over a wide variety of settings Each item that can be set is known as a parameter When you change the values of parameters you are doing what is referred to as Editing This chapter explains the procedures used in creating Patches and the functions of the Patch parameters How a Patch Is Organized The type of sound most commonly played on the XV 88 is called a Patch Each Patch can be configured by combining up to four Tones Pitch Envelope How a Tone Is Organized In the XV 88 the Tone is the smallest class of sound However it is not possible to play a Tone by itself The Patch is the unit of sound which can be played and the Tones are the basic building blocks which make up the Patch Pitch TVF TVA Envelope Envelope Envelope m audio signal control signal Tones consist of the following five components WG Wave Generator Specifies the PCM waveform wave that is the basis of the sound and determines how the pitch of the sound will change The XV 88 has 1 083 different waveforms p 263 All Patches built into the XV 88 consist of combinations of Tones which are created based on these waveforms TVF
631. u cannot use the Multi effects controller if the MFX Control Channel parameter PERFORM COMMON PERFORM MFX CH is set to OFF p 51 What is the Multi Effects Controller If you wanted to change the volume of Multi effects sounds the delay time of Delay and the like using an external MIDI device you would need to send System Exclusive messages MIDI messages designed exclusively for the XV 88 However System Exclusive messages tend to be complicated and the amount of data that needs to be transmitted can get quite large For that reason a number of the more typical of the XV 88 s Multi effects parameters have been designed so they accept the use of Control Change or other MIDI messages for the purpose of making changes in their values For example you can use the Pitch Bend lever to change the amount of distortion or use the keyboard s touch to change the delay time of Delay The parameters that can be changed are predetermined for each type of multi effect among the parameters described in Multi Effects Types p 117 these are indicated by a The function that allows you use MIDI messages to make these changes in realtime to the Multi effects parameters is called the Multi effects Controller Up to four Multi effects Controllers can be used in a single Patch Rhythm Set Performance When the Multi effects Controller is used you can select the amount of control Sens parameter applied the parameter selected
632. u expect set this parameter to REVERSE If you are using a Roland pedal that has no polarity switch set this parameter to STANDARD C1 C4 ASSIGN C1 C4 Slider Assign Ci Assign l Dutrut ASSIGH 9 HFTERTDLICH BOTH These parameters set the functions controlled by the C1 C4 sliders Assign C1 C4 Slider Assign Specifies the function controlled by each slider CC01 31 33 95 Controller numbers 1 31 33 95 I For more detailed information about Control Change messages please refer to MIDI Implementation p 270 PITCH BEND Pitch Bend AFTERTOUCH Aftertouch 172 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions C1 C4 Output C1 C4 Slider Output Selects the sound generator s the internal sound generator and or external sound generators connected to MIDI OUT connector to be controlled by each slider OFF Neither will be controlled INT Only the internal sound generator will be controlled MIDI Only external sound generators will be controlled BOTH Both the internal sound generator and external sound generators will be controlled SYS CTRL ASSIGN 1 2 System Control Assign 1 2 SVS CTRLI Control 1 Control 2 ASSIGH 1g8CrCB1 HODDLILRTIOH 7 BFTEFTDOLICH This function which departs from previously used methods and instead allows you to use MIDI messages to change Tone settings in realtime is called the Matrix Controller p 78 Similarly the function allowing you t
633. u press will be sounded two at a time from low to high and then back down from high to low DUAL RANDOM Notes you press will be sounded two at a time in random order TRIPLE UP Notes you press will sound three at a time from low to high TRIPLE DOWN Notes you press will sound three at a time from high to low TRIPLE UP amp DOWN Notes you press will sound three at a time from low to high and then back down from high to low TRIPLE RANDOM Notes you press will sound three at a time in random order NOTE ORDER Notes you press will be sounded in the order in which you pressed them By pressing the notes in the appropriate order you can produce melody lines Up to 128 notes will be remembered GLISSANDO Each chromatic step between the highest and lowest notes you press will sound in succession repeating upward and downward Press only the lowest and the highest notes CHORD All notes you press will sound simultaneously BASS CHORD 1 5 The lowest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will sound as a chord BASS UP 1 8 The lowest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will be arpeggiated BASS RND 1 3 The lowest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will sound in random order TOP UP 1 6 The highest of the notes you play will sound and the remaining notes will be arpeggiated BASS UP TOP The highest and the lowest of the notes you play will sound and the
634. uencing program is turned on MIDI messages received at MIDI IN will be re transmitted without change from MIDI OUT SEN For details on whether or not your sequencing program has a MIDI Thru function and how to set the MIDI Thru function refer to the owner s manual for your sequencing program won If your sequencing program does not have a MIDI Thru function set the XV 88 s Local Switch to ON For some sequencing programs System Exclusive messages are not transmitted by the Thru function If you are using such software and wish to record System Exclusive messages turn the XV 88 s Local Control setting ON 211 Chapter 12 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 How MIDI Messages Are When the COMPUTER Switch Is Set to Exchanged with a Computer MIDI Depending on the setting of the COMPUTER switch MIDI data flow will be different as follows MIDI Thru Function On When the COMPUTER Switch Is Set to Mac or PC MIDI Thru Function On Sound Generator Section Keyboard Controller Section Sound Generator Section Local Switch Off Keyboard Controller Section Local Switch Off 212 128 VOICE EXPANDABLE SYNTHESIZER 4x EXPANSION with 2x SRX Appendices 213 Troubleshooting If the this unit does not function in the way you expect first check the following points If this does not resolve the problem consult your dealer or a ne
635. ugh frequency components above the Cutoff frequency Cutoff parameter are cut the sensitivity of this filter is half that of the LPF This makes ita comparatively warmer low pass filter This filter is good for use with simulated instrument sounds such as the acoustic piano LPF3 Low Pass Filter 3 Although frequency components above the Cutoff frequency Cutoff parameter are cut the sensitivity of this filter changes according to the Cutoff frequency While this filter is also good for use with simulated acoustic instrument sounds the nuance it exhibits differs from that of the LPF2 even with the same TVF Envelope settings yon If you set LPF2 or LPF3 the setting for the Resonance parameter will be ignored Cutoff Cutoff Frequency x Selects the frequency at which the filter begins to have an effect on the waveform s frequency components With LPF LPF2 LPF3 selected for the Type parameter lower cutoff frequency settings reduce a Tone s upper harmonics for a more rounded warmer sound Higher settings make it sound brighter When the Type parameter is BPF the cutoff frequency setting determines the range of frequencies within the Tone that will be heard This can be useful when creating distinctive sounds When the Type parameter is HPF higher settings of the cutoff frequency decrease the level of the Tone s low frequencies preserving its brighter qualities With PKG selected the harmonics to be emphasized will vary de
636. uitar You can simulate a rhythm guitar by following the procedure below By using the Palette Slider it is also possible to apply a wah effect as you play 1 Selecta guitar Patch 2 Press ARPEGGIO to turn the Arpeggiator on 3 Set the Style parameter SYSTEM ARPEGGIO ARPEGGIO to one of RHYTHM GTR 2 5 gt Press FILTER ENV to make the indicator light g Move the CUTOFF slider or RESONANCE slider while you play a chord Playing an Arpeggio from an External MIDI Device The XV 88 can also produce arpeggios with incoming Note messages from an external MIDI device 1 Usea MIDI cable to connect the MIDI IN connector of the XV 88 to the MIDI OUT connector of the external MIDI device N Press PATCH to access the PATCH PLAY page w Press ARPEGGIO to turn the Arpeggiator on gt Press SYSTEM to make the indicator lit press the MIDI function button and then press 4 amp to access the PATCH MIDI page FATCH Fx Chl Tx Chl Local Remate MIDI 1 l Rx Chl OH OFF 5 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to Remote 6 Rotate the VALUE dial or press INC DEC to turn the setting ON 7 Play the external MIDI device Creating an Arpeggio Pattern There are a total of 9 parameters that can be set for the Arpeggiator but the most important is the Style parameter setting The arpeggio pattern is largely determined by this setting When you set the Style parameter the
637. us sound is heard ChoRate Chorus Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the chorus effect Cho Dpt Chorus Depth Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus effect Phase Tremolo Phase Adjust the spread of the tremolo effect TrmRate Tremolo Rate Adjust the modulation speed of the tremolo effect Trm Sep Tremolo Separation Adjust the spread of the tremolo effect Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the tremolo chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the tremolo chorus sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level Chapter 7 Adding Effects 13 SPACE D Space D is a multiple chorus that applies two phase modulation in stereo It gives no impression of modulation but produces a transparent chorus effect Balance D Balance D Pre Dly Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard Rate Adjust the rate of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Phase Adjust the spatial spread of the sound LowGain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be outp
638. usa Isis 71 PATCH TONE CPY 68 183 PATCH WRITE 181 Patch Rhythm Set group 53 Patch Rhythm Set number J uu 53 Patch Rhythm Set receive channel 170 Patch Rhythm Set transmit channel sees 170 PCH ENVELOPE Rhythm Tone u a sasana tentent nennen 100 Tories ient deiner d iiv C DERE LIS sa 86 Pedal 1 2 assign 172 Pedal 1 2 output 172 Pedal 1 2 polarity eee lette reet 172 Pedal Output oe eee E ec di ai eie Pedal polarity Pedal switch DP 2 DP 6 sss 199 203 PERFORM S u L S u au patu S asus 14 35 PERFORM FX COPY m PERFORM INIT ssseseeeeeeeenen nene tenerent PERFORM NAME CPY aaa iieii 182 PERFORM PART CPY 50 182 PERFORM PLAY L 281 tne tent eo estas 35 PERFORM WRITE nanaq aaa aa nnne usay nn 180 Performance How a Performance is organized a 21 49 Layer Performance 36 58 Performance group a 35 Performance list 15 252 Performance parameters 51 230 Performance settings saesae Eeka e iiinis 49 Selecting a Performance u u 35 Single Performance 37 59 Split Performance ssssssssssessseeeeneenen netten 36 Performance control channel 169 Performance mode eee esee E ete een aya 24 Applying effects in Perform
639. use B with an asterisk the modified Patch Rhythm Set TONE SELECT 1 4 to select the following setting E settings will be lost To keep these modified settings TONE SELECT 1 move to an octave lower key v perform the save operation p 164 TONE SELECT 2 move to the semitone below TONE SELECT TONE SELECT 4 move to an octave higher key 3 move to the semitone above 4 Press or P to move the cursor to the parameter you re going to modify Output Assign Output Assign Output Levelx Sets the direct sound s output method and volume for each Tone or Rhythm Tone MFX Output in stereo through Multi effects You can also apply Chorus or Reverb to the sound that passes through Multi effects OUTPUT A Output to the OUTPUT A MIX jacks in stereo without passing through Multi effects OUTPUT B Output to the OUTPUT B jacks in stereo without passing through Multi effects INDIV 1 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 1 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 2 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 2 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects 109 Chapter 7 Adding Effects INDIV 3 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 3 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects INDIV 4 Output to the INDIVIDUAL 4 jack in mono without passing through Multi effects The value on the right sets the volume of the Tone or Rhythm Tone When Multi effects are being applied this sets the amount of the effect that is appli
640. use the effect to be less HINT To edit the overall Patch while preserving the relative differences in the TVA Envelope Velocity Sensitivity values set for each Tone set the Velocity Sens parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH MODIFY p 72 However this setting is shared by the V Cutoff parameter PATCH TVF TVF VELOCITY p 89 Chapter 5 Creating Patches V Curve TVA Envelope Velocity Curve Selects one of the following seven curves to specify how keyboard dynamics will affect the TVA envelope Set this to FIXED when the amount of TVA Envelope applied is not to be changed according to the force with which the keys are pressed ZK BIAS t Bias Foint Direction BIAS 1 B 4 LOWER Bias causes the volume to be affected by the keyboard position This is useful for changing volume through keyboard position pitch when playing acoustic instruments LOWER UPPER Level Level 2 gt E Key U Key C1 Bias Point G9 CH Bias Point G9 LOWER amp UPPER ALL Level F Level _ gt A o zi l Key Key C 1 Bias Point G9 e Bias Point G9 MP mm Bias Bias Level Adjusts the angle of the volume change that will occur in the selected Bias Direction Higher values will result in more change Negative values will invert the change direction Point Bias Point Specifies the key relative to which the volume will
641. usic and then creating a new song with that Phrase used as the basic motif This is referred to as Break Beats WMT VEL RANG WMT Velocity Range A WAT1i L Fade Lower Urrer l Fade WEL RANGE BI 1l 1271 B Specifies the range of playing dynamics key velocity which will sound the waveform Make these settings when you want different waveforms to sound in response to notes played at different strengths Lower Velocity Range Lower Upper Velocity Range Upper Velocity Range sets the lower limit Lower and upper limit Upper for the velocity in each of the Waves comprising the Rhythm Tone When a key is played more softly than the lower limit or more strongly than the upper limit the sound will either not be heard at all or will be extremely weak Note If you attempt to set the Lower velocity limit above the Upper or the Upper below the Lower the other value will automatically be adjusted to the same setting LFade Velocity Fade Width Lower U Fade Velocity Fade Width Upper L Fade and U Fade set the range within which the volume gradually fades as the velocity approaches the limits of the Velocity Range as set by the Lower and Upper parameters Use this setting when for example you want to have adjacent waveforms in Split mode switched smoothly Velocity Crossfade The higher the values set the smoother the switch is between the Tones When you want the Tones to be switched instantly set these to 0
642. ust the delay time from the direct sound until the delay 4 sound is heard MEMO Delay 1 4 parameters can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Delay 1 4 are Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Feedback 1 4 Adjust the proportion of the delay 1 and 4 sound that is fed back into the effect Positive settings will return the signal to the input with the original phase while negative settings produce an inverted phase HF Damp 1 4 Adjust the frequency above which delayed sound Delay 1 4 fed back to the delay input will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS 144 Thr Threshold Level Specify the volume level at which the reverse delay will begin to apply Pan 1 2 3 Output Pan 1 2 3 Adjust the pan of delay sound Delay 1 3 A setting of L64 is far left 0 is center and 63R is far right Level 1 2 3 Adjust the output level of delay 1 2 and 3 LowGain Low Gain Adjust the low frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the high frequency gain amount of boost or cut Positive settings will emphasize boost the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance
643. ut and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 14 STEREO CHORUS This is a stereo chorus A filter is provided so that you can adjust the timbre of the chorus sound Balance D Rin Balance D Pre Dly Pre Delay Time Adjust the time delay from when the direct sound begins until the processed sound is heard Rate Adjust the rate of modulation Depth Adjust the depth of modulation Phase Adjust the spatial spread of the sound Filter Type Select the type of filter OFF a filter will not be used LPF cut the frequency range above the cutoff frequency HPF cut the frequency range below the cutoff frequency Cutoff Cutoff Frequency Adjust the basic frequency of the filter LowGain Low Gain Adjust the gain of the low frequency range Hi Gain High Gain Adjust the gain of the high frequency range Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the chorus sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the chorus sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 125 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 15 STEREO FLANGER This is a stereo flanger The LFO has the same phase for left and right It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing A filte
644. ute Gtr 2C 0215 E Sitar B 0016 Ac Piano2 fA 0066 D 50EPC 0116 RockOrg3 C L 0166 Muters 0216 E Sitar C 0017 Ac Piano2 fB 0067 Celesta 0117 RockOrg3 C R 0167 Pop Strat A 0217 Santur A 0018 Ac Piano2 fC 0068 MusicBox 0118 Dist Organ 0168 Pop Strat B 0218 Santur B 0019 Ac Pianoi A 0069 Music Box 2 0119 Rot Org Slw 0169 Pop Strat C 0219 Santur C 0020 Ac Piano1 B 0070 Clav 1A 0120 Rot Org Fst 0170 JC Strat A 0220 Dulcimer A 0021 Ac Piano1 C 0071 Clav 1B 0121 Pipe Organ 0171 JC Strat B 0221 Dulcimer B 0022 Piano Thump 0072 Clav1C 0122 Soft Nylon A 0172 JCStratC 0222 Dulcimer C 0023 Piano Up TH 0073 Clav 2A 0123 Soft Nylon B 0173 JCStrat A 0223 Shamisen A 0024 Piano Atk 0074 Clav 2B 0124 Soft Nylon C 0174 JC Strat B 0224 ShamisenB 0025 MKS 20P3A 0075 Clav 2C 0125 Nylon Gtr A 0175 JC Strat C 0225 Shamisen C 0026 MKS 20 P3 B 0076 Clav 3A 0126 Nylon Gtr B 0176 Clean Gtr A 0226 Koto A 0027 MKS 20 P3 C 0077 Clav 3B 0127 Nylon Gtr C 0177 Clean Gtr B 0227 Koto B 0028 SA Rhodes 1A 0078 Clav 3C 0128 Nylon Str 0178 Clean Gtr C 0228 Koto C 0029 SA Rhodes 1B 0079 Clav 4A 0129 6 StrGtr A 0179 Stratus A 0229 Taishokoto A 0030 SA Rhodes 1C 0080 Clav 4B 0130 6 StrGtr B 0180 Stratus B 0230 Taishokoto B 0031 SA Rhodes 2A 0081 Clav 4C 0131 6 Str Gtr C 0181 Stratus C 0231 Taishokoto C 0032 SA Rhodes 2B 0082 Clav Wave 0132 StlGtr mp A 0182 Scrape Gut 0232 Pick Bass A 0033 SA Rhodes 2C 0083 MIDI Clav 0133 StlGtr mp B 0183 Strat Sust 0233 Pick Bass
645. w the setting of Tone 4 p 73 85 Chapter 5 Creating Patches Modifying Pitch PITCH You can set the WG pitch of each Tone PITCH Coarse Fine FRandom Keyfollow FITCH 4 BI BI B 188 Coarse Coarse Tune x Adjusts the pitch of the Tone s sound up or down in semitone steps 4 octaves HINT The overall coarse tune of the Patch is set by the Coarse parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH OCT amp TUNE p 70 Fine Fine Tune x Adjusts the pitch of the Tone s sound up or down in 1 cent steps 50 cents EM One cent is 1 100th of a semitone H HINT The overall fine tune of the Patch is set by the Fine parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH OCT amp TUNE p 70 Random Random Pitch Depth Specifies the width of random pitch deviation that will occur each time a key is pressed If you do not want the pitch to change randomly set this to 0 The setting is adjustable in units of 1 cent 1 100th of a semitone Keyfollow Pitch Keyfollow Sets the amount of pitch change that will occur per octave on the keyboard For a conventional keyboard pitch change of 1 octave when keyboard position goes up 1 octave set this parameter to 100 For a 2 octave pitch changes when keyboard position goes up 1 octave set this parameter to 200 Negative values will lower pitch even as you go up the keyboard If you want the same pitch to sound regardless of what key is pressed set this parameter to 0 Ci O2 cs
646. way in which the sound attacks or decays over time you would adjust the TVA envelope LFO Low Frequency Oscillator Use the LFO to create cyclic changes modulation in a sound The XV 88 has two LFOs Either one or both can be applied to effect the WG pitch TVF filter and or TVA volume When an LFO is applied to the WG pitch a vibrato effect is produced When an LFO is applied to the TVF cutoff frequency a wah effect is produced When an LFO is applied to the TVA volume a tremolo effect is produced won LFO is not included in the Rhythm Tones percussion instrument sounds Patches Patches are the basic sound configurations that you play during a performance Each Patch can be configured by combining up to four Tones How the four Tones are combined is determined on the STRUCT page PATCH COMMON p 73 t Pitch TVF TVA Envelope Envelope Envelope Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 Rhythm Sets A Rhythm Set is a grouping of percussion instruments Rhythm Tones Since percussion instruments generally do not play melodies there is no need for a percussion instrument sound to be able to play a scale on the keyboard It is however more important that as many percussion instruments as possible be available to you at the same time Therefore each key note number of a Rhythm Set will produce a different percussion instrument Rhythm Set Rhythm Tone Percussion instrument sou
647. wer byte of parameter value 00H B3 64 7F MIDI ch 4 lower byte of RPN parameter number 7FH B3 65 7F MIDI ch 4 upper byte of RPN parameter number 7FH In other words the above messages specify a value of OC 00H for RPN parameter number 00 00H on MIDI channel 4 and then set the RPN parameter number to 7F 7FH RPN parameter number 00 00H is Pitch Bend Sensitivity and the MSB of the value indicates semitone units so a value of 0CH 12 sets the maximum pitch bend range to 12 semitones 1 octave On GS sound generators the LSB of Pitch Bend Sensitivity is ignored but the LSB should be transmitted anyway with a value of 0 so that operation will be correct on any device Once the parameter number has been specified for RPN or NRPN all Data Entry messages transmitted on that same channel will be valid so after the desired value has been transmitted it is a good idea to set the parameter number to 7F 7FH to prevent accidents This is the reason for the B3 64 7F B3 65 7F at the end It is not desirable for performance data such as Standard MIDI File data to contain many events with running status as given in lt Example 4 gt This is because if playback is halted during the song and then rewound or fast forwarded the sequencer may not be able to transmit the correct status and the sound generator will then misinterpret the data Take care to give each event its own status It is also necessary that the RPN or NRPN paramet
648. whether the internal sound generator is disconnected OFF from the keyboard controller section keyboard pitch bend modulation lever sliders D Beam controller pedal and so on or not disconnected ON Normally this is left ON but if you wish to use the XV 88 s keyboard and controllers to control only external sound generators set it to OFF Remote Remote Keyboard Switch Set this parameter ON when you want to use an external MIDI keyboard instead of the XV 88 s keyboard In this case the MIDI transmit channel of the external MIDI keyboard can be set to any channel Normally you will leave this parameter OFF HINT Set this parameter ON if you want performance using the Arpeggiator to be controlled by an external MIDI device p 44 RECEIVE MIDI RECEIUE f Program Change Bank Select MIDI 1 OW OH Select whether or not to receive MIDI messages to select Performances Patches or Rhythm Sets Program Change Receive Program Change Switch Specifies whether Program Change messages will be received ON or not OFF Bank Select Receive Bank Select Switch Specifies whether Bank Select messages will be received ON or not OFF 170 Chapter 9 Getting More Familiar with the XV 88 System Functions TRANSMIT MIDI TERHHSMIT gPraa am Bank Sel Active Sensing MIDI 1 OH OH OH Specify how MIDI messages will be transmitted Program Transmit Program Change Switch Specifies whether Program Change mess
649. witch System sse 169 170 Local switch Zone LEocal off i terne rc i Da iS a ten Yers reds LocalSwitch xe A RH eese sene tee dire den YE System LOCAL TX T Loop waveform astere eeii iiie eriei nennen Lower D Beam range lower System a 46 177 D Beam range lower Zone sese 46 64 Key range lower Part a 51 Key range lower Tone 73 Key range lower Zone 59 Velocity range lower Rhythm Wave 99 Velocity range lower Tone sse 72 M h4Er cg M 173 Master k y shift ta ee e ente Te ninth eni ee oda 173 Master Level o etsi ient ett ee Tet D NIU 168 Master tune m MATRIX CONTROL 1 4 uu 79 Matrix control destination sss 79 Matrix control sensitivity Matrix control source 1 4 Matrix control tone usa nete derer ere eee ama ua SN Matrix controller MATRIX CTRL SRC Memory card Preset memory System memory Temporary area User memory Wave expansion board Memory backup Memory card Copying files 1t em em eee ein pense besser esee Format deer te dedic ede ds i Gee dee once nite Loading a file into the XV 88 Ds Saving to a memory card sss MEMORY CARD slot sess MFX Control Channel MEX C TRES SS ay ti HR HEREIN MEX OU T zie eret inert en HEATER RENTA
650. wn the TONE SELECT 1 4 function button for one Tone and press the button s for the other Tone s you want to edit Adjusting the Volume of a Patch Level parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH LVL amp PAN Adjusting the Pan of a Patch Pan parameter PATCH COMMON PATCH LVL amp PAN Rhythm Set Mode Selecting the Rhythm Set Mode PLAY Page Selecting a Rhythm Set Press RHYTHM Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to choose a Rhythm Set Selecting a Rhythm Set Group USER Press USER CD A H Press CARD gt A H PR A F H Press PRESET AIF H XP A D Press EXP gt A D Selecting Rhythm Sets Using the Digit Hold Function 1 Press SHIFT numeric key 0 turn on the Digit Hold function 2 Use the numeric keys to specify the number of the one s place To turn off the Digit Hold function press SHIFT 0 once again Quick Reference of Procedures Modifying Rhythm Set Settings basic procedure Changing the Rhythm Set Assigned to a Performance Part Turn on the EDIT indicator Use the function buttons to select the display group poo uw mM OE Use 4 W toselect the desired setting page U se the keyboard to choose a Rhythm Tone percussion sound di Use 4 D to selecta Parameter 6 Use the VALUE dial INC DEC or the numeric keys to modify the value 1 Press PERFOR
651. xample if Voice Reserve is set to 10 for Part 16 Part 16 will always have 10 notes of sound producing capacity available to it even if a total of more than 128 notes total for all Parts are being requested When you make Voice Reserve settings you need to take into account the number of notes you want to play on each Part as well as the number of Tones used by the selected Patch p 53 MEMO It is not possible to make Voice Reserve settings that would cause the total of all Parts to be greater than 64 voices 23 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Overview of the XV 88 Basic Operations on the XV 88 Switching Modes The XV 88 contains a large number of functions In order to organize these functions for easy access they are grouped into the following modes The mode that is selected will affect the way in which the sound generator operates how data is shown in the display and how the function buttons work Use the Mode buttons to select the mode The indicator of the selected button will light blink and the display will change according to the selected mode MODE PERFORM PATCH RHYTHM 000 eee ooo 600 000 GM PART ZONE SYSTEM UTILITY ooo ooo ooo 000 200 ooo 000 ooo ooo Sound Generator Selecting Patch mode Performance mode Rhythm Set mode and GM mode will determine sound generator operation One mode always has to be selected Patch Mode In this mode you can play an in
652. xternal MIDI Devices Playing an External MIDI Sound Module from the XV 88 1l Setthe COMPUTER switch on the XV 88 s rear panel to MIDI 0 ex new setting of the COMPUTER switch will take effect when the power is turned on Before changing the setting of the COMPUTER switch you must first turn off the power on the XV 88 2 Usea MIDI cable to connect the MIDI OUT connector of the XV 88 to the MIDI IN connector of the external MIDI device MIDI IN MIDI OUT B Roland r t mm mE ma an e B RRA sess m O cease mee et xv ee XV 88 3 Setthe XV 88 s transmit channel to match the external MIDI sound module s receive channel The XV 88 s transmit channel is determined by the following parameters In Patch Rhythm Set Mode Tx Ch parameter SYSTEM MIDI PATCH MIDI p 170 In Performance Mode Channel parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI p 59 Set the Tx parameter ZONE MIDI MIDI to ON p 59 cS For instructions on how to set the receive channel of the external MIDI sound module refer to the owner s manual for your external MIDI sound module 203 Chapter 12 Chapter 12 Realizing the Potential of the XV 88 4 If you wish to play only the external MIDI sound module set the Local Switch to off The Local Switch is determined by the following parameters In Patch Rhythm Set Mode Local par
653. y Time 4 Adjust the time delay from the direct sound until when delay 4 sound is heard MEMO Delay 1 4 parameters can be set as a note value of a specified tempo In this case specify the value of the desired note When Delay 1 4 are Set as a Note Value As the specified tempo you may use either the Patch Tempo p 71 or the tempo clock of the XV 88 s system p 169 Level 1 Adjust the volume of delay 1 sound Level 2 Adjust the volume of delay 2 sound Level 3 Adjust the volume of delay 3 sound Level 4 Adjust the volume of delay 4 sound Fbk Feedback Level Adjust the proportion 76 of the delay sound that is fed back into the effect Negative settings will invert the phase HF Damp Adjust the frequency above which sound fed back to the effect will be cut If you do not want to cut the high frequencies of the feedback set this parameter to BYPASS Balance Effect Balance Adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the delay sound With a setting of D100 0W only the direct sound will be output and with a setting of D0 100W only the delay sound will be output Level Output Level Adjust the output level 130 Chapter 7 Adding Effects 21 TIME CONTROL DELA Y This effect allows you to use a specified controller the controller selected in Multi effects Control Source to control the delay time and pitch in realtime Multi effects Controller p 115 Lengthening the del
654. y card Banks A and B already contain 32 prepared Performances each for a total of 64 Performances p 252 1 Press PERFORM to call up the PERFORM PLAY page Performance number Performance group Performance number PERFORM PR H 01 Ses Teme late Fart 1 PLAY kbd C 4 2 Select a Performance group or Bank USER Press USER to make the indicator light CD A H Press CARD and then press A H to make the indicator light PR A B Press PRESET and then press A or B to make the indicator light 3 Select the Performance number Select by either rotating the VALUE dial or by pressing INC DEC HINT You can also select the Performance number by using the numeric keys In this case after specifying the number using the numeric keys press ENTER Also Using the Digit Hold function a Performance number can be selected simply by specifying the 1 s place number p 30 35 Chapter 2 Playing Playing Fatter and Richer Sounds by Combining Patches Layer In a Layer Performance the Zones whose Local switches are set to ON along with all linked Parts can be played Combining the Parts will produce thicker fatter sounds Part 1 Part 2 Pert15 Part 16 Rx ch 1 Rx ch 2 Rx ch 15 Rx ch 16 Local Switch On Zone 1 Tx ch 1 Zone 15 Tx ch 15 Zone 16 Tx ch 16 P Make sure the PERFORM PLAY page is displayed N Make sure that the upper right of the display indicates LAYER
655. y if either TEMP a CD A H or XP A D patch is selected as the copy source Patch The Compare function cannot be used with Patch Effect Copy if PERFORM is selected as the copy source The Patch auditioned using the Compare function may sound slightly different than when it normally Patch Name Copy is played You can copy the name of a Patch to the current Patch FATCH thumber HHME CRPYFUSER Sei User Patch 3 Copy source Patch group number name LEHTEF 1 183 Chapter 10 Chapter 10 Memory Settings Utility Mode Copying a Rhythm Set To copy the Rhythm Set settings press UTILITY in Rhythm Set mode and perform Copy operation Rhythm Tone Copy Individual Rhythm Tone percussion sound settings assigned to each key will be copied to each key in the current Rhythm Set RHYTHM Source Kkes CCOMPARE CEMTERI KEY EET e116 Rhythm 22 E 1 n ae source Rhythm Set name Copy source Rhythm m group number Copy source Key Copy destination Key HINT The copy source and copy destination Key parameters can also be set by pressing a key on the keyboard When the Copy operation is executed an symbol will be displayed in front of the copy destination key 3 For more detailed information and instructions for this procedure refer to Copying the Settings of Another Rhythm Tone Rhythm Tone Copy p 94 Rhythm Set Effects Copy You can copy the effect settings from any Performan
656. y mistakes transmitting RPN Null is recommended after setting parameters you need This device receives the following RPNs RPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB LSB Notes 00H 00H mmH IIH Pitch Bend Sensitivity mm 00H 18H 0 24 semitones ll ignored processed as 00H Up to 2 octave can be specified in semitone steps In Performance mode the BendRng parameter PERFORM PART PITCH will change 00H 01H mmH IIH Channel Fine Tuning mm ll 20 00H 40 00H 60 00H 4096 x 100 8192 0 4096 x 100 8192 cent In Performance mode the Fine parameter PERFORM PART PITCH will change 00H 02H mmH IIH Channel Coarse Tuning mm 10H 40H 70H 48 0 48 semitones Il ignored processed as 00H In Performance mode the Coarse parameter PERFORM PART PITCH will change 00H 05H mmH IH Modularion Depth Range mm 00 00H 06 00H 0 16384 x 600 16384 cent Not received in Performance mode or Patch mode 7FH 7FH ses RPN null RPN and NRPN will be set as unspecified Once this setting has been made subsequent Parameter values that were previously set will not change mm Il ignored Program Change Status 2nd byte CnH ppH n MIDI channel number 0H FH ch 1 16 pp Program number 00H 7FH prog 1 prog 128 Notreceived in Performance mode when the Program Change parameter PERFORM MIDI RxSWITCH is OFF Channel Pressure Status 2nd byte DnH vvH n MIDI channel number
657. ysync phase LowGain Low gain Hi Gain High gain Balance Balance Level Output level Value 0 0 100 ms 0 05 10 00 Hz note 0 127 98 98 0 180 degree OFF LPF HPF 200 8000 Hz 1 OFF ON 0 1 20 0 Hz note OFF ON 0 127 0 360 degree 15 15 dB 15 415 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 1 200 250 315 400 500 630 800 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3150 4000 5000 6300 8000 Hz 43 FORMANT FILTER p 141 Parameter Value Drive Drive OFF ON 0 127 Vowel Vowel 1 2 a e i o u Rate Rate 0 05 10 00 Hz note Depth Depth 0 127 Keysync Keysync switch OFF ON Threshold Keysync threshold 0 127 Manual Manual 0 100 LowGain Low gain 15 15 dB Hi Gain High gain 15 15 dB Pan Output pan L64 63R Level Output level 0 127 44 RING MODULATOR p 142 Parameter Freq Mod Mon Sens Pol LowGain Hi Gain Balance Level Frequency Modulator Modulator monitor Sensitivity Polarity Low gain High gain Effect balance Output level Value 0 127 OFF SRC A B OFF ON 0 127 UP DOWN 15 15 dB 15 15 dB D100 0W D0 100W 0 127 245 Appendices Parameter List 45 MULTI TAP DELAY p 143 Parameter Value Delay 1 Delay time 1 0 1800 ms note Delay 2 Delay time 2 0 1800 ms note Delay 3 Delay time 3 0 1800 ms note Delay 4 Delay time 4 0 1800 ms note Pan 1 Output pan 1 L64 63R Pan 2 Output pan 2 L64 63R Pan 3 Output pan 3 L64 63R Pan4 Output pan 4 L64 6
658. z PART 1 fHld Brd Hft S31 Su2 Su3 Sod Uo IMFO I 8 8 6l Bl bl B B The displays allow you to check various settings such as MIDI message reception status for each Part This is convenient when you need to check that the sound generator is responding correctly to messages from the keyboard or external MIDI controller Mod Modulation Information Breath Breath Information Foot Foot Information Vol Volume Information Pan Pan Information Exp Expression Information Hid Hold 1 Information Bnd Pitch Bend Information Aft Aftertouch Information Sy1 4 System Control 1 4 Information The MIDI message specified as the Control 1 4 parameter SYSTEM CONTROL SYS CTRL ASSIGN 1 2 Vo Voice Information The number of voices used When a value except Vo is changed in the INFO page a MIDI message for the changed value is sent to the internal sound generator and the external MIDI device over the MIDI channel set for that Part Changing the Settings of the Patch Rhythm Set Assigned to a Part When using Patches in Performance mode some settings such as effects settings will be affected by Performance settings If you wish to edit a Patch Rhythm Set while hearing how it will sound in the Performance use this procedure Here we explain how to change the setting of a Patch assigned to a Part The procedure for changing the settings of Rhythm Sets is the same Substitute Rhythm Set wherever Pa
659. z Kick 1 Side Stick Brush Swirl Brush Slap1 Brush Swirl Real Tom 6 Close HiHat2 Real Tom 6 Pedal HiHat2 Real Tom 4 Open HiHat2 Cym 1 Real Tom 1 Ride Cymbal ChinaCymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Crash Cym 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal ConcertBD Mt Side Stick Concert Snr Castanets Concert Snr Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Timpani Tambourine Splash Cym Cowbell Con Cymbal2 Vibraslap Concert Cym Slap ScratchPush ScratchPull Sticks SquareClick Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Bell G f Gt CutNoise String Slap FI KeyClick Laughing Screaming Punch Heart Beat Footsteps Footsteps Applause Creaking Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle Bongo High Bongo Lo Mute H Conga Conga Hi Opn Conga Lo Opn High Timbale Low Timbale Agogo Agogo Cabasa Maracas ShrtWhistle Scratch Wind Chimes Car Engine Car Stop Car Pass Car Crash Siren Train Jetplane Helicopter Starship LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell LongWhistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves Woodblock Woodblock Mute Cuica Open Cuica MuteTriangl OpenTriangl Shaker Jingle Bell Gun Shot Machine Gun Lasergun Explosion Dog HorseGallop Bird Rain Thunder Wi

Roland XV-88 Electronic Keyboard User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents